Technical Manual, Busbar Protection REB650 Version 2.2

Relion® 650 SERIES
Busbar protection REB650

Version 2.2 IEC
Technical manual
Document ID: 1MRK 505 389-UEN
Issued: June 2021
Revision: F
Product version: 2.2
© 2017 - 2021 Hitachi Power Grids. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission from
Hitachi Power Grids, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor used for any
unauthorized purpose.
The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used
or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(https://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic software written/developed by: Eric
Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) and Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Trademarks
ABB is a registered trademark of ABB Asea Brown Boveri Ltd. Manufactured by/for a Hitachi Power
Grids company. All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest Hitachi Power Grids representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or product
description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All persons
responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves that each
intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other
operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system
failure and/or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not
limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying
the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken
to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This document has been carefully checked by Hitachi Power Grids but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the
manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall Hitachi Power
Grids be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the
application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC
Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits
(Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by Hitachi Power
Grids in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the
product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is
designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.
1MRK 505 389-UEN Rev. F Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction..................................................................................................25
1.1 This manual.........................................................................................................................25
1.1.1 Presumptions for Technical Data.......................................................................................25
1.2 Intended audience...............................................................................................................25
1.3 Product documentation....................................................................................................... 26
1.3.1 Product documentation set................................................................................................26
1.3.2 Document revision history................................................................................................. 27
1.3.3 Related documents........................................................................................................... 27
1.4 Document symbols and conventions...................................................................................28
1.4.1 Symbols.............................................................................................................................28
1.4.2 Document conventions......................................................................................................29
1.5 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping............................................................................. 31
Section 2 Available functions...................................................................................... 35

2.1 Main protection functions.................................................................................................... 35
2.2 Back-up protection functions............................................................................................... 35
2.3 Control and monitoring functions.........................................................................................36
2.4 Communication................................................................................................................... 39
2.5 Basic IED functions............................................................................................................. 40
Section 3 Analog inputs...............................................................................................43

3.1 Introduction..........................................................................................................................43
3.2 Function block..................................................................................................................... 43
3.3 Signals.................................................................................................................................43
3.4 Settings............................................................................................................................... 44
3.5 Monitored data.................................................................................................................... 48
3.6 Operation principle.............................................................................................................. 49
3.7 Technical data..................................................................................................................... 50
Section 4 Binary input and output modules.............................................................. 51

4.1 Binary input......................................................................................................................... 51
4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter...............................................................................................51
4.1.2 Oscillation filter.................................................................................................................. 51
4.1.3 Settings............................................................................................................................. 51
4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules............................................................... 51
4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for binary input/output module...................................................... 52
Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI ......................................................53

5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour................................................................................................53
5.1.1 Identification...................................................................................................................... 53
5.1.2 Settings............................................................................................................................. 53
5.2 Local HMI signals................................................................................................................ 53
Busbar protection REB650 1

Technical manual
Table of contents 1MRK 505 389-UEN Rev. F
5.2.1 Identification...................................................................................................................... 53
5.2.2 Function block................................................................................................................... 53
5.2.3 Signals...............................................................................................................................53
5.3 Basic part for LED indication module.................................................................................. 54
5.3.1 Identification...................................................................................................................... 54
5.3.2 Function block................................................................................................................... 54
5.3.3 Signals...............................................................................................................................54
5.3.4 Settings............................................................................................................................. 55
5.4 LCD part for HMI function keys control module ..................................................................55
5.4.1 Identification...................................................................................................................... 55
5.4.2 Function block................................................................................................................... 56
5.4.3 Signals...............................................................................................................................56
5.4.4 Settings............................................................................................................................. 56
5.5 Operation principle.............................................................................................................. 57
5.5.1 Local HMI.......................................................................................................................... 57
5.5.1.1 Keypad......................................................................................................................... 58
5.5.1.2 Display......................................................................................................................... 60
5.5.1.3 LEDs............................................................................................................................ 62
5.5.2 LED configuration alternatives.......................................................................................... 63
5.5.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................ 63
5.5.2.2 Status LEDs................................................................................................................. 63
5.5.2.3 Indication LEDs............................................................................................................ 64
5.5.3 Function keys.................................................................................................................... 71
5.5.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................ 71
5.5.3.2 Operation principle ...................................................................................................... 71
5.5.3.3 Enabling and Disabling Authority on Function keys..................................................... 72
Section 6 Differential protection................................................................................. 73

6.1 High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF ...........................................73
6.1.1 Identification...................................................................................................................... 73
6.1.2 Functionality ..................................................................................................................... 73
6.1.3 Function block................................................................................................................... 73
6.1.4 Signals...............................................................................................................................73
6.1.5 Settings............................................................................................................................. 74
6.1.6 Monitored data.................................................................................................................. 74
6.1.7 Operation principle............................................................................................................ 74
6.1.7.1 Logic diagram...............................................................................................................76
6.1.8 Technical data................................................................................................................... 76
Section 7 Current protection....................................................................................... 77

7.1 Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC ....................................... 77
7.1.1 Function revision history....................................................................................................77
7.1.2 Identification...................................................................................................................... 77
7.1.3 Functionality ..................................................................................................................... 77
7.1.4 Function block................................................................................................................... 78
7.1.5 Signals...............................................................................................................................78
7.1.6 Settings............................................................................................................................. 80
2 Busbar protection REB650

Technical manual
7.1.7 Monitored data.................................................................................................................. 85

7.1.8 Operation principle............................................................................................................ 86
7.1.9 Technical data................................................................................................................... 91
7.2 Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC ..................................... 92
7.2.1 Function revision history....................................................................................................92
7.2.2 Identification...................................................................................................................... 92
7.2.3 Functionality ..................................................................................................................... 92
7.2.4 Function block................................................................................................................... 93
7.2.5 Signals...............................................................................................................................93
7.2.6 Settings............................................................................................................................. 94
7.2.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 100
7.2.8 Operation principle.......................................................................................................... 100
7.2.8.1 Operating quantity within the function........................................................................ 101
7.2.8.2 Internal polarizing.......................................................................................................101
7.2.8.3 External polarizing for earth-fault function..................................................................103
7.2.8.4 Directional detection for earth fault function ..............................................................103
7.2.8.5 Base quantities within the protection..........................................................................103
7.2.8.6 Internal earth-fault protection structure...................................................................... 104
7.2.8.7 Four residual overcurrent steps................................................................................. 104
7.2.8.8 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function...... 105
7.2.8.9 Second harmonic blocking element........................................................................... 107
7.2.8.10 Switch on to fault feature............................................................................................109
7.2.8.11 Phase selection element.............................................................................................111
7.2.9 Technical data..................................................................................................................112
7.3 Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC ......... 112
7.3.1 Function revision history..................................................................................................113
7.3.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 113
7.3.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 113
7.3.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 113
7.3.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................114
7.3.6 Settings............................................................................................................................114
7.3.7 Monitored data.................................................................................................................119
7.3.8 Operation principle ......................................................................................................... 119
7.3.8.1 Operating quantity within the function........................................................................ 119
7.3.8.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function.................................................................... 120
7.3.8.3 External polarizing for negative sequence function....................................................120
7.3.8.4 Internal negative sequence protection structure........................................................ 120
7.3.8.5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages..............................................................121
7.3.8.6 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison function...... 122
7.3.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 123
7.4 Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR ..............................................124
7.4.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 124
7.4.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 124
7.4.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 125
7.4.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................125
7.4.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 125

Technical manual
7.4.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 126

7.4.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 130
7.5 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF ................................................................................. 130
7.5.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 130
7.5.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 130
7.5.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 131
7.5.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................131
7.5.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 132
7.5.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 133
7.5.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 136
7.6 Pole discordance protection CCPDSC..............................................................................136
7.6.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 136
7.6.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 136
7.6.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 137
7.6.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................137
7.6.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 138
7.6.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 138
7.6.7.1 Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker ........................................................140
7.6.7.2 Unsymmetrical current detection................................................................................141
7.6.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 141
Section 8 Voltage protection..................................................................................... 143

8.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV ...................................................................143
8.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 143
8.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 143
8.1.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 143
8.1.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................144
8.1.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 145
8.1.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 147
8.1.7.1 Measurement principle...............................................................................................147
8.1.7.2 Time delay..................................................................................................................148
8.1.7.3 Blocking......................................................................................................................153
8.1.7.4 Design........................................................................................................................ 154
8.1.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 155
8.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV .....................................................................155
8.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 155
8.2.2 Functionality OV2PTOV ................................................................................................. 155
8.2.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 156
8.2.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................156
8.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 157
8.2.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 159

Technical manual

8.2.7.2 Time delay..................................................................................................................160
8.2.7.3 Blocking......................................................................................................................165
8.2.7.4 Design........................................................................................................................ 165
8.2.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 166
8.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV .................................................... 167
8.3.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 167
8.3.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 167
8.3.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 168
8.3.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................168
8.3.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 168
8.3.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 170
8.3.8.2 Time delay..................................................................................................................171
8.3.8.3 Blocking......................................................................................................................176
8.3.8.4 Design........................................................................................................................ 176
8.3.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 177
Section 9 Secondary system supervision................................................................179

9.1 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC...................................................................................179
9.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 179
9.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 179
9.1.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 179
9.1.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................180
9.1.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 180
9.1.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 181
9.1.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection...................................................................... 181
9.1.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection...................................................................183
9.1.7.3 Dead line detection.................................................................................................... 186
9.1.7.4 Main logic................................................................................................................... 187
9.1.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 190
Section 10 Control........................................................................................................ 191

10.1 Interlocking ....................................................................................................................... 191
10.1.1 Logical node for interlocking SCILO ...............................................................................191
10.1.1.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 191
10.1.1.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 191
10.1.1.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 191
10.1.1.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 191
10.1.1.5 Logic diagram.............................................................................................................192
10.2 Apparatus control.............................................................................................................. 192
10.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 192

Technical manual
10.2.3 Error handling..................................................................................................................194

10.2.4 Bay control QCBAY......................................................................................................... 197
10.2.4.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 197
10.2.4.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 197
10.2.4.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 197
10.2.4.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 198
10.2.4.5 Operation principle..................................................................................................... 198
10.2.5 Local/Remote switch LOCREM.......................................................................................199
10.2.5.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 200
10.2.5.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 200
10.2.5.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 201
10.2.6 Switch controller SCSWI................................................................................................. 202
10.2.6.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 202
10.2.6.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 203
10.2.6.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 203
10.2.6.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 205
10.2.7 Circuit breaker SXCBR....................................................................................................210
10.2.7.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 210
10.2.7.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 210
10.2.7.3 Signals........................................................................................................................211
10.2.7.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 212
10.2.8 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY ................................. 216
10.2.8.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 216
10.2.8.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 216
10.2.8.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 216
10.2.8.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 217
10.2.8.6 Position supervision................................................................................................... 218
10.2.8.7 Command response evaluation................................................................................. 218
10.3 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC...................219
10.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 219
10.3.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 219
10.3.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 220
10.3.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................220
10.3.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 221
10.3.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 222
10.3.7.1 Graphical display........................................................................................................222
10.4 Selector mini switch VSGAPC...........................................................................................223
10.4.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 223
10.4.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 223
10.4.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 224
10.4.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................224

Technical manual
10.4.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 224

10.5 Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC............................225
10.5.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 225
10.5.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 225
10.5.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 226
10.5.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................226
10.5.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 226
10.6 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC........................................................... 227
10.6.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 227
10.6.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 227
10.6.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 227
10.6.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................227
10.6.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 228
10.7 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS............................................. 229
10.7.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 229
10.7.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 229
10.7.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 229
10.7.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................230
10.7.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 231
10.8 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD....................................................................... 231
10.8.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 231
10.8.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 231
10.8.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 232
10.8.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................232
10.8.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 233
Section 11 Logic........................................................................................................... 235

11.1 Tripping logic SMPPTRC ..................................................................................................235
11.1.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 235
11.1.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 235
11.1.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 236
11.1.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................236
11.1.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 237
11.1.7.1 Logic diagram.............................................................................................................241
11.1.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 244
11.2 General start matrix block SMAGAPC.............................................................................. 245
11.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 245
11.2.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 245
11.2.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 245

Technical manual
11.2.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................245
11.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 246
11.3 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC.............................................................................................. 250
11.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 250
11.3.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 250
11.3.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 251
11.3.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................251
11.3.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 252
11.3.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 254
11.4 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH...................................................................................... 254
11.4.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 254
11.4.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 254
11.4.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 255
11.4.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................255
11.4.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 256
11.4.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 256
11.5 Logic for group warning WRNCALH..................................................................................256
11.5.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 256
11.5.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 256
11.5.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 257
11.5.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................257
11.5.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 258
11.5.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 258
11.6 Logic for group indication INDCALH................................................................................. 258
11.6.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 258
11.6.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 258
11.6.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 259
11.6.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................259
11.6.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 260
11.6.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 260
11.7 Basic configurable logic blocks......................................................................................... 260
11.7.1 AND function block AND................................................................................................. 261
11.7.1.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 261
11.7.1.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 261
11.7.1.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 262
11.7.2 Controllable gate function block GATE............................................................................262
11.7.2.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 262
11.7.2.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 262
11.7.2.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 262
11.7.2.4 Technical data............................................................................................................ 263
11.7.3 Inverter function block INV.............................................................................................. 263

Technical manual
11.7.3.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 263

11.7.3.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 263
11.7.3.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 263
11.7.4 Loop delay function block LLD........................................................................................ 263
11.7.4.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 263
11.7.4.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 264
11.7.4.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 264
11.7.5 OR function block............................................................................................................264
11.7.5.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 264
11.7.5.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 264
11.7.5.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 265
11.7.6 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER....................................................................... 265
11.7.6.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 265
11.7.6.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 265
11.7.6.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 265
11.7.6.4 Technical data............................................................................................................ 266
11.7.7 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY...................................................... 266
11.7.7.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 266
11.7.7.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 266
11.7.7.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 267
11.7.7.4 Technical data............................................................................................................ 267
11.7.8 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY....................................................... 267
11.7.8.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 267
11.7.8.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 267
11.7.8.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 268
11.7.8.4 Technical data............................................................................................................ 268
11.7.9 Settable timer function block TIMERSET........................................................................ 268
11.7.9.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 268
11.7.9.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 269
11.7.9.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 269
11.7.9.4 Technical data............................................................................................................ 269
11.7.10 Exclusive OR function block XOR................................................................................... 269
11.7.10.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 269
11.7.10.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 270
11.7.10.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 270
11.8 Extension logic package....................................................................................................270
11.9 Fixed signals FXDSIGN.................................................................................................... 270
11.9.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 270
11.9.2 Function block................................................................................................................. 270
11.9.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................271
11.9.4 Settings........................................................................................................................... 271
11.10 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I............................................................................. 271
11.10.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 271
11.10.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 271
11.10.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 272

Technical manual
11.10.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................272
11.10.5 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 273
11.10.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 273
11.10.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 274
11.11 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC............274
11.11.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 274
11.11.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 274
11.11.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 274
11.11.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................275
11.11.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 275
11.11.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 275
11.11.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 276
11.12 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16..............................................................................276
11.12.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 276
11.12.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 276
11.12.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 277
11.12.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................277
11.12.5 Setting parameters ......................................................................................................... 278
11.12.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 279
11.13 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation ITBGAPC.................... 279
11.13.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 279
11.13.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 279
11.13.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 279
11.13.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................280
11.13.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 280
11.13.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 281
11.14 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision TEIGAPC.......282
11.14.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 282
11.14.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 282
11.14.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 282
11.14.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................283
11.14.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 283
11.14.6.1 Operation accuracy.................................................................................................... 284
11.14.6.2 Memory storage......................................................................................................... 285
11.14.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 285
11.15 Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP.......................................................................... 285
11.15.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 285
11.15.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 285
11.15.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 285
11.15.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................286
11.15.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 286

Technical manual
11.15.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 286

11.16 Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP........................................................................... 287
11.16.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 287
11.16.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 287
11.16.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 287
11.16.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................287
11.16.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 288
11.16.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 289
11.17 Hold maximum and minimum of input HOLDMINMAX......................................................289
11.17.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 289
11.17.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 289
11.17.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 289
11.17.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................289
11.18 Converter for Integer to Real INT_REAL...........................................................................290
11.18.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 290
11.18.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 290
11.18.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 290
11.18.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................290
11.19 Definable constant for logic function CONST_INT............................................................ 290
11.19.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 290
11.19.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 291
11.19.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 291
11.19.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................291
11.19.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 291
11.20 Analog input selector for integer values INTSEL...............................................................291
11.20.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 291
11.20.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 291
11.20.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 292
11.20.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................292
11.21 Definable limiter LIMITER................................................................................................. 293
11.21.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 293
11.21.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 293
11.21.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 293
11.21.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................293
11.21.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 293
11.22 Absolute value ABS...........................................................................................................294
11.22.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 294
11.22.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 294
11.22.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 294
11.22.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................294
11.23 Polar to rectangular converter POL_REC......................................................................... 294
11.23.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 294
11.23.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 294
11.23.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 295

Technical manual
11.23.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................295
11.24 Radians to degree angle converter RAD_DEG.................................................................295
11.24.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 295
11.24.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 295
11.24.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 295
11.24.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................296
11.24.5 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 296
11.25 Definable constant for logic function CONST_REAL........................................................ 296
11.25.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 296
11.25.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 296
11.25.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 296
11.25.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................296
11.25.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................297
11.26 Analog input selector for real values REALSEL................................................................ 297
11.26.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 297
11.26.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 297
11.26.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 297
11.26.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................298
11.27 Store value for integer inputs STOREINT......................................................................... 298
11.27.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 298
11.27.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 298
11.27.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 299
11.27.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................299
11.28 Store value for real inputs STOREREAL...........................................................................299
11.28.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 299
11.28.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 299
11.28.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 299
11.28.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................300
11.29 Degree to radians angle converter DEG_RAD..................................................................300
11.29.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 300
11.29.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 300
11.29.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 300
11.29.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................300
11.29.5 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 301
Section 12 Monitoring.................................................................................................. 303

12.1 Measurements...................................................................................................................303
12.1.3 Identification.................................................................................................................... 303
12.1.4 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 304
12.1.5 Function block................................................................................................................. 305
12.1.6 Signals.............................................................................................................................306
12.1.7 Settings........................................................................................................................... 309
12.1.8 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 320

Technical manual
12.1.9.1 Measurement supervision.......................................................................................... 321

12.1.9.2 Measurements CVMMXN.......................................................................................... 325
12.1.9.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU....................................................................... 329
12.1.9.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXU.......... 330
12.1.9.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI................................ 330
12.1.10 Technical data................................................................................................................. 330
12.2 Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG........................................................................ 332
12.2.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 332
12.2.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 332
12.2.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 332
12.2.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................332
12.2.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 333
12.2.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 334
12.2.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 335
12.3 Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML ..................................................................... 336
12.3.2 Identification.................................................................................................................... 336
12.3.3 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 336
12.3.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 336
12.3.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................336
12.3.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 337
12.3.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 338
12.3.9 Technical data................................................................................................................. 339
12.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR...............................................................................................339
12.4.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 339
12.4.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 339
12.4.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 340
12.4.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................340
12.4.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 341
12.4.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 342
12.4.7.1 Circuit breaker contact travel time..............................................................................345
12.4.7.2 Circuit breaker status................................................................................................. 346
12.4.7.3 Remaining life of circuit breaker ................................................................................346
12.4.7.4 Accumulated energy ................................................................................................. 347
12.4.7.5 Circuit breaker operation cycles ................................................................................348
12.4.7.6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring.......................................................................... 349
12.4.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring .................................................................. 350
12.4.7.8 Circuit breaker gas pressure indication .....................................................................350
12.4.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 351
12.5 Event function EVENT.......................................................................................................351
12.5.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 351
12.5.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 351

Technical manual
12.5.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 352

12.5.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................352
12.5.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 353
12.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE.......................................................................................... 356
12.6.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 356
12.6.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 356
12.6.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 357
12.6.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................358
12.6.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 360
12.6.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 368
12.6.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 377
12.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP........................................................................ 377
12.7.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 377
12.7.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 377
12.7.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 378
12.7.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................378
12.7.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 379
12.8 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP...................................................................379
12.8.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 380
12.8.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 380
12.8.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 380
12.8.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................380
12.9 Limit counter L4UFCNT.....................................................................................................381
12.9.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 381
12.9.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 381
12.9.3.1 Design........................................................................................................................ 381
12.9.3.2 Reporting....................................................................................................................382
12.9.4 Function block................................................................................................................. 383
12.9.5 Signals.............................................................................................................................383
12.9.6 Settings........................................................................................................................... 383
12.9.7 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 384
12.9.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 384
12.10 Running hour-meter TEILGAPC .......................................................................................384
12.10.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 384
12.10.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 384
12.10.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 385
12.10.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................385
12.10.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 386
12.10.6.1 Operation accuracy.................................................................................................... 387
12.10.6.2 Memory storage......................................................................................................... 387

Technical manual
12.10.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 388
Section 13 Metering......................................................................................................389
13.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT............................................................................................ 389
13.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 389
13.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 389
13.1.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 389
13.1.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................389
13.1.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 390
13.1.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 390
13.1.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 392
13.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR................................... 392
13.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 392
13.2.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 392
13.2.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 393
13.2.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................393
13.2.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 394
13.2.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 395
13.2.8 Technical data................................................................................................................. 398
Section 14 Ethernet...................................................................................................... 399

14.1 Access point...................................................................................................................... 399
14.1.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................399
14.1.2 Settings........................................................................................................................... 399
14.2 Access point diagnostics................................................................................................... 401
14.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 401
14.2.2 Function block................................................................................................................. 401
14.2.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................401
14.2.4 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 402
14.3 Redundant communication................................................................................................402
14.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 402
14.3.2 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 402
14.4 Merging unit.......................................................................................................................404
14.4.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................404
14.4.2 Settings........................................................................................................................... 404
14.4.3 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 405
14.5 Routes............................................................................................................................... 410
14.5.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................410
14.5.2 Settings........................................................................................................................... 410
14.5.3 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 410
Section 15 Station communication............................................................................. 411

15.1 Communication protocols.................................................................................................. 411
15.2 Communication protocol diagnostics.................................................................................411

Technical manual
15.3 DNP3 protocol................................................................................................................... 412

15.4 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol............................................................................ 412
15.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 412
15.4.2 Communication interfaces and protocols ....................................................................... 413
15.4.3 Settings........................................................................................................................... 413
15.4.4 Technical data................................................................................................................. 413
15.4.5 Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC, SP16GAPC...... 414
15.4.5.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 414
15.4.5.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 414
15.4.5.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 414
15.4.5.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 415
15.4.5.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................... 415
15.4.5.6 Operation principle .................................................................................................... 416
15.4.6 Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC.................................... 416
15.4.6.1 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 416
15.4.6.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 416
15.4.6.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 417
15.4.6.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 417
15.4.6.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................... 418
15.4.7 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value GOOSEDPRCV....................... 418
15.4.7.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 418
15.4.7.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 418
15.4.7.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 418
15.4.7.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 419
15.4.7.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 419
15.4.8 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV............................. 420
15.4.8.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 420
15.4.8.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 420
15.4.8.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 420
15.4.8.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 421
15.4.8.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 421
15.4.9 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value GOOSEMVRCV.........................422
15.4.9.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 422
15.4.9.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 422
15.4.9.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 422
15.4.9.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 423
15.4.9.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 423
15.4.10 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value GOOSESPRCV......................... 424
15.4.10.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 424
15.4.10.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 424
15.4.10.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 424
15.4.10.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 425

Technical manual
15.4.10.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 425

15.4.11 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV...................426
15.4.11.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 426
15.4.11.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 427
15.4.11.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 427
15.4.11.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 429
15.4.12 GOOSE binary receive GOOSEBINRCV........................................................................ 431
15.4.12.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 431
15.4.12.2 Signals....................................................................................................................... 431
15.4.12.3 Settings...................................................................................................................... 433
15.4.13 GOOSE function block to receive a switching device GOOSEXLNRCV ........................434
15.4.13.1 Identification............................................................................................................... 434
15.4.13.2 Functionality .............................................................................................................. 434
15.4.13.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 434
15.4.13.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 434
15.4.13.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 436
15.5 IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol............................................................... 436
15.5.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................436
15.5.2 Function block................................................................................................................. 436
15.5.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................437
15.5.3.1 Output signals............................................................................................................ 437
15.5.4 Settings........................................................................................................................... 438
15.5.5 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 438
15.5.6.1 Conditional blocking................................................................................................... 445
15.5.6.2 IEC 61850 quality expander QUALEXP.....................................................................449
15.5.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 450
15.6 LON communication protocol............................................................................................ 450
15.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 450
15.6.2 Settings........................................................................................................................... 450
15.6.4 Technical data................................................................................................................. 467
15.7 SPA communication protocol............................................................................................ 467
15.7.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 467
15.7.2 Design............................................................................................................................. 467
15.7.3 Settings........................................................................................................................... 468
15.7.4.1 Communication ports................................................................................................. 473
15.7.5 Technical data................................................................................................................. 473
15.8 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol........................................................................ 474
15.8.1 Introduction .....................................................................................................................474
15.8.2 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS.................................................................474

Technical manual
15.8.2.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 474

15.8.2.2 Identification............................................................................................................... 474
15.8.2.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 474
15.8.2.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 475
15.8.2.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 475
15.8.3 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEASUSR........................ 475
15.8.3.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 475
15.8.3.2 Identification............................................................................................................... 476
15.8.3.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 476
15.8.3.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 476
15.8.3.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 476
15.8.4 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR........................................... 477
15.8.4.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 477
15.8.4.2 Identification............................................................................................................... 477
15.8.4.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 477
15.8.4.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 477
15.8.4.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 478
15.8.5 Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF.................................................478
15.8.5.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 478
15.8.5.2 Identification............................................................................................................... 478
15.8.5.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 478
15.8.5.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 478
15.8.5.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 478
15.8.6 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT..............................479
15.8.6.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 479
15.8.6.2 Identification............................................................................................................... 479
15.8.6.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 479
15.8.6.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 480
15.8.6.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 480
15.8.7 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED........................................................................ 481
15.8.7.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 481
15.8.7.2 Identification............................................................................................................... 481
15.8.7.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 481
15.8.7.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 481
15.8.7.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 481
15.8.8 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV................................................... 482
15.8.8.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 482
15.8.8.2 Identification............................................................................................................... 482
15.8.8.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 482
15.8.8.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 482
15.8.8.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 482
15.8.9 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRDEF............................... 483
15.8.9.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 483
15.8.9.2 Identification............................................................................................................... 483
15.8.9.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 483
15.8.9.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 483

Technical manual
15.8.9.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 484

15.8.10 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD...................................................... 485
15.8.10.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 485
15.8.10.2 Identification............................................................................................................... 485
15.8.10.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 485
15.8.10.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 486
15.8.10.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 486
15.8.11 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD........................................................ 486
15.8.11.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 486
15.8.11.2 Identification............................................................................................................... 486
15.8.11.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 486
15.8.11.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 487
15.8.11.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 487
15.8.12 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRCMD..........................487
15.8.12.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 487
15.8.12.2 Identification............................................................................................................... 487
15.8.12.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 487
15.8.12.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 488
15.8.12.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 488
15.8.13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD..................................488
15.8.13.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 488
15.8.13.2 Identification............................................................................................................... 489
15.8.13.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 489
15.8.13.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 489
15.8.13.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 489
15.8.14 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103 I103POSCMD................ 489
15.8.14.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 489
15.8.14.2 Identification............................................................................................................... 490
15.8.14.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 490
15.8.14.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 490
15.8.14.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 490
15.8.15 IED commands with position for IEC 60870-5-103 I103POSCMDV............................... 491
15.8.15.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 491
15.8.15.2 Identification............................................................................................................... 491
15.8.15.3 Function block............................................................................................................ 491
15.8.15.4 Signals....................................................................................................................... 491
15.8.15.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 491
15.8.16.1 General ..................................................................................................................... 492
15.8.16.2 Communication ports................................................................................................. 500
15.8.17 Technical data................................................................................................................. 500
15.9 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND..............................................................................501
15.9.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 501
15.9.2 Design............................................................................................................................. 501
15.9.2.1 General...................................................................................................................... 501
15.9.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 501

Technical manual
15.9.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................502
15.9.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 503
15.10 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG............................................................................ 504
15.10.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG............................................................................................. 504
15.10.2 Settings........................................................................................................................... 504
15.11 IEC61850SIM.................................................................................................................... 505
15.11.1 IEC61850 simulation mode............................................................................................. 505
15.11.1.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 505
15.11.1.2 Function block............................................................................................................ 505
15.11.1.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 506
15.11.1.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 506
15.11.1.5 Monitored Data...........................................................................................................506
Section 16 Security.......................................................................................................507
16.1 Authority check ATHCHCK................................................................................................507
16.1.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 507
16.1.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 507
16.1.3.1 Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED................................. 509
16.2 Authority management AUTHMAN....................................................................................511
16.2.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 511
16.2.2 AUTHMAN.......................................................................................................................511
16.2.3 Settings............................................................................................................................511
16.3 FTP access with password FTPACCS.............................................................................. 512
16.3.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 512
16.3.2 FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS....................................................................................512
16.3.3 Settings........................................................................................................................... 512
16.4 Authority status ATHSTAT................................................................................................. 512
16.4.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 512
16.4.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 512
16.4.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 513
16.4.4 Signals.............................................................................................................................513
16.4.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 513
16.5 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG......................................................... 513
16.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 513
16.5.2 Function block................................................................................................................. 513
16.5.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................514
16.5.4 Settings........................................................................................................................... 514
16.5.5.1 Internal signals........................................................................................................... 515
16.5.5.2 Supervision of analog inputs...................................................................................... 517
16.5.6 Technical data................................................................................................................. 517
16.6 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK...................................................................................... 517
16.6.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 518

Technical manual
16.6.2 Function block................................................................................................................. 518

16.6.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................518
16.7 Denial of service DOS....................................................................................................... 519
16.7.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 519
Section 17 Basic IED functions................................................................................... 521

17.1 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN...........................................................................521
17.1.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 521
17.1.2 Settings........................................................................................................................... 521
17.1.3 Description of SyncLostMode..........................................................................................525
17.1.4.1 General concepts....................................................................................................... 526
17.1.4.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation................................................................................528
17.1.4.3 Synchronization alternatives...................................................................................... 529
17.1.4.4 Process bus IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE synchronization................................................ 532
17.1.4.5 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) .................................................................................. 532
17.1.5 Technical data................................................................................................................. 533
17.2 Parameter setting groups.................................................................................................. 534
17.2.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 534
17.2.2 Function block................................................................................................................. 534
17.2.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................534
17.2.4 Settings........................................................................................................................... 535
17.3 Test mode functionality TESTMODE.................................................................................536
17.3.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 536
17.3.2 Function block................................................................................................................. 536
17.3.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................537
17.3.4 Settings........................................................................................................................... 537
17.4 IED identifiers TERMINALID............................................................................................. 538
17.4.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 538
17.4.2 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 538
17.5 Product information PRODINF.......................................................................................... 538
17.5.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 538
17.5.2 Settings .......................................................................................................................... 539
17.5.3 Factory defined settings.................................................................................................. 539
17.6 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI................................................................................. 540
17.6.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 540
17.6.2 Function block................................................................................................................. 540
17.6.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................540
17.7 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ............................................................................ 541
17.7.1 Functionality.................................................................................................................... 541
17.7.2 Function block................................................................................................................. 541

Technical manual
17.7.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................542
17.8 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI................................................................................ 542
17.8.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 542
17.8.2 Function block................................................................................................................. 542
17.8.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................543
17.8.4 Settings........................................................................................................................... 544
17.8.5.1 Frequency values.......................................................................................................546
17.8.6 SMAI incorrect calculated phase-earth........................................................................... 547
17.9 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM................................................................................. 548
17.9.1 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 548
17.9.2 Function block................................................................................................................. 548
17.9.3 Signals.............................................................................................................................548
17.9.4 Settings........................................................................................................................... 548
17.10 Primary system values PRIMVAL......................................................................................549
17.10.1 Identification.................................................................................................................... 549
17.10.2 Functionality ................................................................................................................... 549
17.10.3 Settings........................................................................................................................... 549
Section 18 IED hardware..............................................................................................551

18.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 551
18.1.1 Variants of case size with local HMI display....................................................................551
18.1.2 Case from the front and rear sides..................................................................................552
18.2 Hardware modules............................................................................................................ 552
18.2.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 552
18.2.2 Numeric module (NUM)...................................................................................................553
18.2.2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 553
18.2.2.2 Functionality............................................................................................................... 553
18.2.2.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 554
18.2.3 Power supply module (PSM)...........................................................................................555
18.2.3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 555
18.2.3.2 Design........................................................................................................................ 555
18.2.3.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 555
18.2.4 Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)...................................................................556
18.2.5 Transformer input module (TRM).................................................................................... 556
18.2.5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 556
18.2.5.2 Design........................................................................................................................ 556
18.2.5.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 557
18.2.6 Binary input module (BIM)...............................................................................................558
18.2.6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 558
18.2.6.2 Design........................................................................................................................ 558
18.2.6.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 561
18.2.6.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 561
18.2.6.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................... 561

Technical manual
18.2.6.6 Technical data............................................................................................................ 562

18.2.7 Binary output modules (BOM)......................................................................................... 563
18.2.7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 563
18.2.7.2 Design........................................................................................................................ 563
18.2.7.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 564
18.2.7.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 565
18.2.7.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................... 565
18.2.7.6 Technical data............................................................................................................ 569
18.2.8 Binary input/output module (IOM)................................................................................... 570
18.2.8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 570
18.2.8.2 Design........................................................................................................................ 570
18.2.8.3 Signals....................................................................................................................... 572
18.2.8.4 Settings...................................................................................................................... 572
18.2.8.5 Monitored data........................................................................................................... 573
18.2.8.6 Technical data............................................................................................................ 575
18.2.9 Serial and LON communication module (SLM) .............................................................. 577
18.2.9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 577
18.2.9.2 Design........................................................................................................................ 577
18.2.9.3 Technical data............................................................................................................ 578
18.2.10 Galvanic RS485 communication module........................................................................ 579
18.2.10.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 579
18.2.10.2 Design........................................................................................................................ 579
18.2.10.3 Serial optical and RS485 communication channel settings....................................... 580
18.2.10.4 Parameter list for optical and RS485 communication channel...................................581
18.2.10.5 Technical data............................................................................................................ 581
18.2.11 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B...................................................................582
18.2.11.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 582
18.2.11.2 Design........................................................................................................................ 582
18.2.11.3 Encoding.................................................................................................................... 582
18.2.11.4 TimeZoneAs1344....................................................................................................... 583
18.2.11.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 583
18.2.11.6 Technical data............................................................................................................ 583
18.3 Dimensions........................................................................................................................584
18.3.1 Case with protective cover.............................................................................................. 584
18.3.2 Case without protective cover......................................................................................... 587
18.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions.............................................................................................589
18.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions.........................................................................589
18.3.5 Wall mounting dimensions.............................................................................................. 590
18.3.6 External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection......................................591
18.4 Mounting alternatives........................................................................................................ 592
18.4.1 Flush mounting................................................................................................................592
18.4.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 592
18.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting......................................................................592
18.4.2 Wall mounting..................................................................................................................593
18.4.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 593
18.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting....................................................................... 593

Technical manual
18.4.2.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED........................................................................ 594

18.4.3 19” panel rack mounting..................................................................................................594
18.4.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 594
18.4.3.2 Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting...................................................... 595
18.4.4 Side-by-side 19” rack mounting.......................................................................................595
18.4.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 595
18.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting.................................................. 596
18.4.4.3 IED mounted with a RHGS6 case..............................................................................596
18.4.5 Side-by-side flush mounting............................................................................................597
18.4.5.1 Overview.................................................................................................................... 597
18.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting................................................. 598
18.5 Technical data................................................................................................................... 598
18.5.1 Enclosure........................................................................................................................ 598
18.5.2 Electrical safety............................................................................................................... 599
18.5.3 Connection system..........................................................................................................599
18.5.4 Influencing factors........................................................................................................... 599
18.5.5 Type tests according to standard.................................................................................... 600
Section 19 Labels......................................................................................................... 603

19.1 Labels on IED....................................................................................................................603
Section 20 Connection diagrams ............................................................................... 605
Section 21 Inverse time characteristics..................................................................... 607

21.1 Application.........................................................................................................................607
21.2 Principle of operation ........................................................................................................609
21.2.1 Mode of operation........................................................................................................... 609
21.3 Inverse characteristics ......................................................................................................613
Section 22 Glossary..................................................................................................... 641

Technical manual
1MRK 505 389-UEN Rev. F Section 1
Introduction
Section 1 Introduction
1.1 This manual GUID-AB423A30-13C2-46AF-B7FE-A73BB425EB5F v20
The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks, logic
diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per function. The
manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and
commissioning phase, and during normal service.
1.1.1 Presumptions for Technical Data GUID-1E949E38-E04D-4374-A086-912C25E9F93C v3
The technical data stated in this document are only valid under the following circumstances:
1. Main current transformers with 1 A or 2 A secondary rating are wired to the IED 1 A rated CT
inputs.
2. Main current transformer with 5 A secondary rating are wired to the IED 5 A rated CT inputs.
3. CT and VT ratios in the IED are set in accordance with the associated main instrument
transformers. Note that for functions which measure an analogue signal which do not have
corresponding primary quantity the 1:1 ratio shall be set for the used analogue inputs on the
IED. Example of such functions are: HZPDIF, ROTIPHIZ and STTIPHIZ.
4. Parameter IBase used by the tested function is set equal to the rated CT primary current.
5. Parameter UBase used by the tested function is set equal to the rated primary phase-to-phase
voltage.
6. Parameter SBase used by the tested function is set equal to:
• √3 × IBase × UBase
7. The rated secondary quantities have the following values:
• Rated secondary phase current Ir is either 1 A or 5 A depending on selected TRM.
• Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage Ur is within the range from 100 V to 120 V.
• Rated secondary power for three-phase system Sr = √3 × Ur × Ir
8. For operate and reset time testing, the default setting values of the function and BOM module
are used if not explicitly stated otherwise.
All reset times are measured using BOM output contacts if not explicitly stated otherwise. The
operate/reset times are determined by characteristics of the output module used.
9. During testing, signals with rated frequency have been injected if not explicitly stated otherwise.
1.2 Intended audience GUID-C9B8127F-5748-4BEA-9E4F-CC762FE28A3A v11
This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel, who use
technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal service.
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection equipment,
protection functions and the configured functional logic in the IEDs. The installation and
commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in handling electronic equipment.

Technical manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 389-UEN Rev. F
Introduction
1.3 Product documentation
1.3.1 Product documentation set GUID-3AA69EA6-F1D8-47C6-A8E6-562F29C67172 v16
Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase
Decommissioning
Commissioning
Maintenance
Engineering
Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual
Commissioning manual
Operation manual
Application manual
Technical manual
Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd
IEC07000220 V4 EN-US
Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the various tools
available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides instructions on how to set up a PCM600
project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also recommends a sequence for the
engineering of protection and control functions, as well as communication engineering for IEC 61850.
The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual provides
procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are organized in the chronological
order in which the IED should be installed.
The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The manual can
also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance during the testing
phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking of external circuitry and energizing the IED,
parameter setting and configuration as well as verifying settings by secondary injection. The manual
describes the process of testing an IED in a station which is not in service. The chapters are
organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be commissioned. The relevant
procedures may be followed also during the service and maintenance activities.
The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and setting of the
IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to view calculated and
measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.

Technical manual
Introduction
The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted per function.
The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function can be
used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating settings.
The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks, logic
diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per function. The
manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and
commissioning phase, and during normal service.
The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported by the IED.
The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific implementations.
The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to the IED. The
manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding communication protocol manual.
The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber security when
communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role based access control, and product
engineering for cyber security related events are described and sorted by function. The guideline can
be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning
phase, and during normal service.
1.3.2 Document revision history GUID-BD82A13A-6FA0-4E33-BDBF-23B5A0CF968F v3
Document Date Product revision History

revision
- 2017–05 2.2.0 First release for product version 2.2
A 2017-10 2.2.1 Ethernet ports with RJ45 connector added. enhancements/
updates made to GENPDIF, ZMFPDIS and ZMFCPDIS.
B 2018-03 2.2.1 Document enhancements and corrections
C 2019-05 2.2.1 PTP enhancements and corrections
D Document not released
E 2020-09 2.2.4 Added new functions ALGOS, ALSVS and IEC61850SIM.
F 2021-06 2.2.5 Function HOLDMINMAX, INT_REAL, CONST_INT, INTSEL,
LIMITER, ABS, POL_REC, RAD_DEG, CONST_REAL,
REALSEL, STOREINT, STOREREAL, DEG_RAD and RSTP
added. Updates/enhancements made to functions OC4PTOC,
EF4PTOC, DRPRDRE, NS4PTOC and SXCBR.
1.3.3 Related documents GUID-94E8A5CA-BE1B-45AF-81E7-5A41D34EE112 v8
Documents related to REB650 Document numbers

Application manual 1MRK 505 388-UEN
Commissioning manual 1MRK 505 390-UEN
Product guide 1MRK 505 391-BEN
Technical manual 1MRK 505 389-UEN
Type test certificate 1MRK 505 391-TEN
650 series manuals Document numbers

Operation manual 1MRK 500 128-UEN
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 420-UEN
Installation manual 1MRK 514 027-UEN
Communication protocol manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 413-UUS
Table continues on next page

Technical manual
Introduction
650 series manuals Document numbers

Communication protocol manual, IEC 60870-5-103 1MRK 511 416-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 1 1MRK 511 414-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2 1MRK 511 415-UEN
Communication protocol manual, LON 1MRK 511 417-UEN
Communication protocol manual, SPA 1MRK 511 418-UEN
Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 419-UUS
Accessories guide IEC: 1MRK 514 012-UEN
ANSI: 1MRK 514 012-UUS
Cyber security deployment guideline 1MRK 511 421-UEN
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN
Application guide, Communication set-up 1MRK 505 382-UEN
1.4 Document symbols and conventions
1.4.1 Symbols GUID-2945B229-DAB0-4F15-8A0E-B9CF0C2C7B15 v13
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
electrical shock.
The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in personal
injury.
The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or warning about the
temperature of product surfaces.
Class 1 Laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes and do not view
directly with optical instruments.
The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the concept
discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard which could result in
corruption of software or damage to equipment or property.
The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or how to
use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand that under
certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result in degraded process
performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important that the user fully complies with all
warning and cautionary notices.

Technical manual
Introduction
1.4.2 Document conventions GUID-96DFAB1A-98FE-4B26-8E90-F7CEB14B1AB6 v9
• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary also
contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push button icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
• the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the signal name may
be customized using the PCM600 software.
• the character * after an input signal name indicates that the signal must be connected to
another function block in the application configuration to achieve a valid application
configuration.
• Dimensions are provided both in inches and millimeters. If it is not specifically mentioned then
the dimension is in millimeters.
• Logic diagrams describe the signal logic of the function block and are bordered by dashed lines.
In a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as lines that touch the outer border
of the diagram. Input signals are always on the left-hand side and output signals are on the
right-hand side.
Input and output signals can be configured using PCM600. They can be connected to the inputs
and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs. Examples of input signals are
BLKTR, BLOCK, and VTSZ. Examples of output signals are TRIP, START, STL1, STL2, and
STL3.
• Frames with a shaded area on the right-hand side represent setting parameters. These
parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Their values are high (1) only when the
corresponding setting parameter is set to the symbolic value specified within the frame.
Example is the signal Timer tPP=On. Their logical values correspond automatically to the
selected setting value.
• Internal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately 2 mm from the frame
edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the same signal
name is used where the signal should continue, see figure 2 and figure 3. Example of the
internal signal is BLK.
• Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram will be
approximately 2 mm from the frame edge, see figure 3 and figure 4. Examples are
STNDL1N, STNDL2N, STNDL3N, STNDL1L2, STNDL2L3, and STNDL3L1.

Technical manual
Introduction
STZMPP
OR
STCND
AND STNDL1L2
L1L2
STNDL2L3
L2L3 AND
L3L1 AND STNDL3L1
AND STNDL1N
L1N
AND STNDL2N
L2N
STNDL3N
L3N AND
OR STPE
OR
VTSZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLOCFUNC BLK
99000557-2.vsd
IEC99000557-TIFF V3 EN-US
Figure 2: Logic diagram example with intermediate output signals
IEC00000488-TIFF V1 EN-US
Figure 3: Logic diagram example with intermediate input signals

Technical manual
Introduction
Timer tPP=On
STZMPP AND tPP
AND
t
BLOCFUNC
OR OR
tPE
t
AND
Timer tPE=On AND
STZMPE 15ms
BLKTR AND t
TRIP
BLK OR
STL1 AND TRL1
STL2 AND TRL2
STL3 AND TRL3
IEC09000887-3-en.vsdx
Figure 4: Logic diagram example with a parameter input
Illustrations are used as an example and might show other products than the one the
manual describes. The example that is illustrated is still valid.
1.5 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping GUID-C5133366-7260-4C47-A975-7DBAB3A33A96 v9
Function block names are used in ACT and PST to identify functions. Respective function block
names of Edition 1 logical nodes and Edition 2 logical nodes are shown in the table below.
Table 1: IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping
Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

- - ALGOS
- - ALSVS
AGSAL AGSAL AGSAL
SECLLN0
ALMCALH ALMCALH ALMCALH

ALTIM - ALTIM
ALTMS - ALTMS
ALTRK - ALTRK
BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIGAPC
CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC
CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF
CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU
CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI

Technical manual
Introduction

CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN
DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC
DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE
EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR
FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC
HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF
INDCALH INDCALH INDCALH
ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC
L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT
LD0LLN0 LLN0 LLN0
LOCREM
LOCREMCTRL
LPHD LPHD LPHD
MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC
NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR PH1PTOC
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH3PTOC
PH3PTOC PH3PTRC
PH3PTRC
OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 OV2PTOV
OV2PTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT
QCBAY QCBAY BAY/LLN0

RCHLCCH RCHLCCH RCHLCCH
ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV
ROV2PTOV
SCHLCCH SCHLCCH SCHLCCH
SCILO SCILO SCILO
SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI
SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC
SMAGAPC
SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC
SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC

Technical manual
Introduction

SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR
SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG
SSIML SSIML SSIML
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI
TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC
TEILGAPC TEILGGIO TEILGAPC
TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC
TRPTTR TRPTTR TRPTTR
UV2PTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC UV2PTUV
UV2PTUV
VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU
VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI
VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU
VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC
WRNCALH WRNCALH WRNCALH
XLNPROXY

Technical manual
34
Available functions
Section 2 Available functions

GUID-F5776DD1-BD04-4872-BB89-A0412B4B5CC3 v1
The following tables list all the functions available in the IED. Those functions that
are not exposed to the user or do not need to be configured are not described in this
manual.
2.1 Main protection functions GUID-66BAAD98-851D-4AAC-B386-B38B57718BD2 v17
Table 2: Example of quantities
2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)
C30 =1/2 CB application. For the pre-configured variants
IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Busbar

function name
REB650 (A03)
Differential protection
HZPDIF 87 High impedance differential protection, single phase 9
2.2 Back-up protection functions GUID-A8D0852F-807F-4442-8730-E44808E194F0 v17

function name
REB650 (A03)
Current protection
OC4PTOC 51_671) Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps 1
EF4PTOC 51N Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps 1

67N2)
NS4PTOC 46I2 Directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection, four steps 1
TRPTTR 49 Thermal overload protection, two time constants 1
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 1
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 1
Voltage protection

Technical manual
Available functions

function name
REB650 (A03)
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 1
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 1
ROV2PTOV 59N Residual overvoltage protection, two steps 2
1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage
2.3 Control and monitoring functions GUID-E3777F16-0B76-4157-A3BF-0B6B978863DE v21

function name
REB650 (A03)
Control
QCBAY Bay control 1
LOCREM Handling of LR-switch positions 1
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1
SXCBR Circuit breaker 3
SCILO Interlocking 3
SCSWI Switch controller 3
XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE 9
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation 15
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 30
DPGAPC Generic communication function for Double Point indication 16
SPC8GAPC Single point generic control function 8 signals 5
AUTOBITS Automation bits, command function for DNP3.0 3
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 inputs 8
I103CMD Function commands for 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103GENCMD Function commands generic for 50
IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for 50
IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMDV IED direct commands with position for 50
IEC 60870-5-503
I103IEDCMD IED commands for 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for 4
IEC 60870-5-103
Secondary system supervision
FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 1
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 6
SMAGAPC General start matrix block 6
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12

Technical manual
Available functions

function name
REB650 (A03)
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5
INDCALH Logic for group indication 5
AND, GATE, INV, Basic configurable logic blocks (see Table 3) 40–420
LLD, OR,
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, XOR
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1
B16I Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit 18
BTIGAPC Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16 bit 16
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 24
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with Logic Node representation 16
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision 12
INTCOMP Comparator for integer inputs 30
REALCOMP Comparator for real inputs 30
HOLDMINMAX Hold minimum and maximum of input 20
INT_REAL Converter integer to real 20
CONST_INT Definable constant for logic functions 10
INTSEL Analog input selector for integer values 5
LIMITER Definable limiter 20
ABS Absolute value 20
POL_REC Polar to rectangular converter 20
RAD_DEG Radians to degree angle converter 20
CONST_REAL Definable constant for logic functions 10
REALSEL Analog input selctor for real values 5
STOREINT Store value for integer inputs 10
STOREREAL Store value for real inputs 10
DEG_RAD Degree to radians angle converter 20

function name
REB650 (A03)
Monitoring
CVMMXN Power system measurement 6
CMMXU Current measurement 10
VMMXU Voltage measurement phase-phase 6
CMSQI Current sequence measurement 6
VMSQI Voltage sequence measurement 6
VNMMXU Voltage measurement phase-earth 6
AISVBAS General service value presentation of analog inputs 1
SSIMG 63 Insulation supervision for gas medium 21

Technical manual
Available functions

function name
REB650 (A03)
SSIML 71 Insulation supervision for liquid medium 3
SSCBR Circuit breaker condition monitoring 3
EVENT Event function 20
DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1
A1RADR-
A4RADR,
B1RBDR-
B22RBDR
SPGAPC Generic communication function for single point indication 64
SP16GAPC Generic communication function for single point indication, 16 inputs 16
MVGAPC Generic communication function for measured values 24
BINSTATREP Logical signal status report 3
RANGE_XP Measured values expander block 28
I103MEAS Measurands for 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for 3
IEC 60870-5-103
I103AR Function status auto-recloser for 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103EF Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103SUPERV Supervision status for 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRDEF Status for user defined signals for 20
IEC 60870-5-103
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit supervision 30
TEILGAPC Running hour meter 6
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation and demand handling 6
Table 3: Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks
Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances

AND 280
GATE 40
INV 420
LLD 40
OR 298
PULSETIMER 40
RSMEMORY 40

Technical manual
Available functions
Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances

SRMEMORY 40
TIMERSET 60
XOR 40
2.4 Communication GUID-5F144B53-B9A7-4173-80CF-CD4C84579CB5 v19

function name
REB650 (A03)
Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA communication protocol 1
ADE LON communciation protocol 1
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1
PROTOCOL Operation selection between SPA and IEC 60870-5-103 for SLM 1
RS485PROT Operation selection for RS485 1
RS485GEN RS485 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol 1
CHSERRS485 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 communication protocol 1
CH1TCP, CH2TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1
CH3TCP, CH4TCP
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication protocol 1
MSTSER DNP3.0 serial master 1
MST1TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1
MST2TCP,
MST3TCP,
MST4TCP
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication protocol 1
IEC 61850-8-1 IEC 61850 1
IEC 61850SIM IEC61850 simulation mode 1
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking 59
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double point value 64
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an integer value 32
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value 60
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a single point value 64
GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive a switching device 9
ALGOS Supervision of GOOSE subscription 100
MULTICMDRCV/ Multiple command and transmit 60/10
MULTICMDSND
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial communication 1
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485 1

Technical manual
Available functions

function name
REB650 (A03)
AGSAL Generic security application component 1
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1
LPHD Physical device information 1
PCMACCS IED configuration protocol 1
SECALARM Component for mapping security events on protocols such as DNP3 and IEC103 1
FSTACCSNA Field service tool access via SPA protocol over Ethernet communication 1
FSTACCS Field service tool access 1
IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus communication, 4 merging units 1-P31
ACTIVLOG Activity logging 1
ALTRK Service tracking 1
PRP IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy protocol 1-P23
HSR IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy 1-P24
RSTP Rapid spanning tree protocol 1-P25
AP_1-AP_4 AccessPoint_ABS1-AccessPoint_ABS4 1
AP_FRONT Access point front 1
PTP Precision time protocol 1
ROUTE_1- Route_ABS1-Route_ABS6 1
ROUTE_6
FRONTSTATUS Access point diagnostic for front Ethernet port 1
SCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for non-redundant Ethernet port 4
RCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for redundant Ethernet ports 2
DHCP DHCP configuration for front access point 1
QUALEXP IEC 61850 quality expander 32
2.5 Basic IED functions GUID-C8F0E5D2-E305-4184-9627-F6B5864216CA v15
Table 4: Basic IED functions
IEC 61850 or function Description

name
INTERRSIG
Self supervision with internal event list
SELFSUPEVLST
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
BININPUT, Time synchronization
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS, SNTP,
TIMEZONE
DSTBEGIN GPS time synchronization module
DSTENABLE Enables or disables the use of daylight saving time
DSTEND GPS time synchronization module

Technical manual
Available functions

name
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Active parameter setting group
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
TERMINALID IED identifiers
PRODINF Product information
SYSTEMTIME System time
LONGEN LON communication
RUNTIME IED Runtime component
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMAI1 - SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
SPACOMMMAP SPA communication mapping
SPATD Date and time via SPA protocol
BCSCONF Basic communication system
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
PRIMVAL Primary system values
SAFEFILECOPY Safe file copy function
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
CAMCONFIG Central account management configuration
CAMSTATUS Central account management status
TOOLINF Tools information
COMSTATUS Protocol diagnostic
Table 5: Local HMI functions

name
LHMICTRL Local HMI signals
LANGUAGE Local human machine language
SCREEN Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior
FNKEYTY1– Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600
FNKEYTY5
FNKEYMD1–
FNKEYMD5

Technical manual
Available functions

name
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI
OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys
GRP1_LED1– Basic part for CP HW LED indication module
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1–
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1–
GRP3_LED15

Technical manual
Analog inputs
Section 3 Analog inputs SEMOD55010-1 v3
3.1 Introduction SEMOD55003-5 v11
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct measurement
results and correct protection operations. For power measuring, all directional and differential
functions, the directions of the input currents must be defined in order to reflect the way the current
transformers are installed/connected in the field ( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring
and protection algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary
quantities as well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and voltage
transformers properly.
An AISVBAS reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This
analog channel's phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and remaining analog channel's
phase angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED, the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service
values reading.
The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary equipment, that are
sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a process bus, via the IEC 61850-9-2
LE protocol.
The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input module

(TRM) type.
3.2 Function block SEMOD116577-1 v5
The hardware channels appear in the signal matrix tool (SMT) and in ACT when a
TRM is included in the configuration with the hardware configuration tool. In the SMT
or the ACT, they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED and
used internally in the configuration.
3.3 Signals
PID-3923-OUTPUTSIGNALS v7
Table 6: TRM_7I_5U Output signals
Name Type Description

STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1

Technical manual
Analog inputs

CH8(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 8


3.4 Settings
SEMOD129840-4 v2
Dependent on ordered IED type.

Technical manual
Analog inputs
PID-4153-SETTINGS v8
Table 9: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PhaseAngleRef TRM40-Ch1 - Ch12 - - TRM40-Ch1 Reference channel
TRM41-Ch1 - Ch12 for phase angle
MU1-L1I - L4I presentation
MU1-L1U - L4U
MU2-L1I - L4I
MU2-L1U - L4U
MU3-L1I - L4I
MU3-L1U - L4U
MU4-L1I - L4I
MU4-L1U - L4U
MU5-L1I - L4I
MU5-L1U - L4U
MU6-L1I - L4I
MU6-L1U - L4U
MU7-L1I - L4I
MU7-L1U - L4U
MU8-L1I - L4I
MU8-L1U - L4U
MU9-L1I - L4I
MU9-L1U - L4U
MU10-L1I - L4I
MU10-L1U - L4U
MU11-L1I - L4I
MU11-L1U - L4U
MU12-L1I - L4I
MU12-L1U - L4U
GUID-72A8BEE0-2430-4C94-A1E0-9B6A0D149FE2 v2
All the visible parameter selections are not supported by the 650-series IED.
Table 10: TRM_7I_5U Non group settings (basic)

CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

Technical manual
Analog inputs

VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage


Technical manual
Analog inputs



Technical manual
Analog inputs

3.5 Monitored data

PID-6531-MONITOREDDATA v3
Table 13: AISVBAS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Status INTEGER 0=Ok - Service value status
1=Error
2=AngRefLow
3=Uncorrelated
Table 14: TRM_7I_5U Monitored data

STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module status
1=Error

1=Error

1=Error

Technical manual
Analog inputs
3.6 Operation principle SEMOD55028-5 v9
The direction of a measured current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are typically
star connected and can be connected with the star point towards the object or away from the object.
This information must be set in the IED.
Once the CT direction settings is correctly entered the internal IED convention of the directionality is
defined as follows:
• Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into the protected
object.
• Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out from the
protected object.
For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see Figure 5)
• Forward means the direction is into the object.

• Reverse means the direction is out from the object.
Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object
Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"
en05000456.vsd
Figure 5: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or ToObject
according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows towards the protected object,
and a Forward direction always looks towards the protected object.
The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs and VTs are,
therefore, basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated secondary and primary currents and
voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated ratios.
The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under IED Configuration /HW
Configuration /ADM in the Parameter Settings Tool or under Main menu /Configuration /Analog
modules in the HMI.

Technical manual
Analog inputs
3.7 Technical data SEMOD55412-1 v1
M16988-1 v11
Table 17: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz
Operating range fr ± 10%
Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1 or 5 A
Operating range (0-100) x Ir
Thermal withstand 100 × Ir for 1 s *)

30 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min
4 × Ir continuously
Dynamic withstand 250 × Ir one half wave
Burden < 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

< 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

Voltage inputs **)
Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V
Operating range 0 - 340 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s
420 V continuously
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
< 80 mVA at 220 V
**) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency
SEMOD53376-2 v6
Table 18: CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area

Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm 2 (AWG12)

Technical manual
Binary input and output modules
Section 4 Binary input and output modules

4.1 Binary input
4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter GUID-AE43976C-E966-484C-AF39-89B2B12F56DC v5
The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.
A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a millisecond when a binary
input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A new debounced binary input signal is
forwarded when the time counter reaches the set DebounceTime value and the debounced input
value is high or when the time counter reaches 0 and the debounced input value is low. The default
setting of DebounceTime is 1 ms.
The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which the counter does
not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down to 0 again.
4.1.2 Oscillation filter GUID-41B89E6F-50C3-44BF-9171-3CC82EB5CA15 v5
Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields from for
example nearby breakers. An oscillation filter is used to reduce the disturbance from the system
when a binary input starts oscillating.
An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state changes during 1 s. If the counter value is
greater than the set value OscBlock, the input signal is blocked. The input signal is ignored until the
oscillation counter value during 1 s is below the set value OscRelease.
4.1.3 Settings
GUID-07348953-4A72-444B-A31A-030ABEA8E0C4 v1
OscBlock must always be set to a value greater than OscRelease. If this is not done,
oscillation detection will not function correctly, and the resulting behaviour will be
undefined.
4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules

Table 19: BIM Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

Technical manual
Binary input and output modules
4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for binary input/output module

Table 20: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in operation
On (On) or not (Off)

Technical manual
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour
5.1.1 Identification
GUID-84392EFF-4D3F-4A67-A6ED-34C6E98574D6 v1
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Local HMI screen behaviour SCREEN - -
5.1.2 Settings
5.2 Local HMI signals
GUID-03AB7AEE-87D3-4F3C-B6B9-B1EB1B538E38 v1

Local HMI signals LHMICTRL - -
5.2.2 Function block GUID-A8AC51E9-5BD7-4A80-9576-4816F14DD08D v2
LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD
Figure 6: LHMICTRL function block
5.2.3 Signals
PID-3992-INPUTSIGNALS v6
Table 21: LHMICTRL Input signals
Name Type Default Description

CLRLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

Technical manual
Table 22: LHMICTRL Output signals

HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are cleared
LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active
5.3 Basic part for LED indication module
GUID-6E36C0BC-F284-4C88-A4A8-9535D3BE8B14 v2

Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN - -
Basic part for LED indication HW GRP1_LED1 - - -
module GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1 -
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1 -
GRP3_LED15
5.3.2 Function block GUID-BDB5797F-F27E-4FEE-9FDB-1C9E2F572BB6 v3
LEDGEN
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK
Figure 7: LEDGEN function block
GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
Figure 8: GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example. The 15 LEDs in each of the three groups have a
similar function block.
5.3.3 Signals
Table 23: LEDGEN Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs

Technical manual
Table 24: LEDGEN Output signals

NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input is set
ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged
Table 25: GRP1_LED1 Input signals

HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
5.3.4 Settings
Table 26: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)

On
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
tMax 0.1 - 100.0 s 0.1 1.0 Maximum time for the definition of a
disturbance
Table 27: GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

SequenceType Follow-S - - Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI
Follow-F alarm group 1
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_OFF Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is off
LabelRed 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is red
LabelYellow 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is yellow
LabelGreen 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is green
5.4 LCD part for HMI function keys control module GUID-EECAE7FA-7078-472C-A429-F7607DB884EB v2
GUID-E6611022-5EA3-420D-ADCD-9D1E7604EFEB v1

LCD part for HMI Function Keys FNKEYMD1 - - -
Control module FNKEYMD5

Technical manual
5.4.2 Function block

GUID-A803A728-5CFC-4606-98E4-793E873B99D4 v3
FNKEYMD1
ENABLE ^FKEYOUT1
^LEDCTL1
Figure 9: FNKEYMD1 function block

Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block for every function
key button.
5.4.3 Signals
Table 28: FNKEYMD1 Input signals

ENABLE BOOLEAN 1 Enable input for function key
LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key
Table 29: FNKEYMD1 Output signals

FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key
5.4.4 Settings
Table 30: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)

Mode Off - - Off Output operation mode
Toggle
Pulsed
PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled by
LCDFn1
LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state
ReqAuthority Off - - On User authorization needed for function
On key operation
Table 31: FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Type Off - - Off Function key type
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut - 0 Menu shortcut for function key

Technical manual
GUID-BCE87D54-C836-40EE-8DA7-779B767059AB v2
For setting ReqAuthority, when users are configured through local or central account
management, the default behavior of the function keys are to only operate if a user is
logged in, and the user have the required rights. This authentication check can be
configured to be bypassed per function key by changing the ReqAuthority from ON
to OFF. To be able to change this, the user changing it have to have the Security
advanced right.
MenuShortcut values are product dependent and created dynamically depending on the product
main menu.
5.5 Operation principle
5.5.1 Local HMI AMU0600442 v15
Figure 10: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements

Technical manual
• Keypad
• Display (LCD)
• LED indicators
• Communication port for PCM600
The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.
5.5.1.1 Keypad AMU0600428 v19
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views or menus. The
push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide help and switch
between local and remote control mode.
The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as menu
shortcut or control buttons.

Technical manual
24
1
23
2
18
3
19
4
6 20
21
7 22
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Figure 11: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-buttons and
RJ-45 communication port
1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 Key
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Not in use
18 Multipage
19 Menu
20 Clear
21 Help

Technical manual
22 Communication port
23 Programmable indication LEDs
24 IED status LEDs
5.5.1.2 Display GUID-55739D4F-1DA5-4112-B5C7-217AAF360EA5 v13
The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome liquid crystal display (LCD) with a resolution of 320 x
240 pixels. The character size can vary. The amount of characters and rows fitting the view depends
on the character size and the view that is shown.
The display view is divided into four basic areas.
Figure 12: Display layout
1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)
• The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too long to be shown, it
is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is indicated with three dots.
• The content area shows the menu content.
• The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in and the object
identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600.
• If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar appears on the right.
The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not fit in the display
horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.

Technical manual
Figure 13: Truncated path

The number after : (colon sign) at the end of the function instance, for example, 1 in SMAI1:1,
indicates the number of that function instance.
The function key button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function buttons.
Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback signal for the function
button control action. The LED is connected to the required signal with PCM600.
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN-US
Figure 14: Function button panel

The indication LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the indication LEDs. Three
indication LED pages are available.

Technical manual
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN-US
Figure 15: Indication LED panel

The function button and indication LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel is shown
by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the ESC button clears the
panel from the display. Both panels have a dynamic width that depends on the label string length.
5.5.1.3 LEDs AMU0600427 v15
The LHMI includes three status LEDs above the display: Ready, Start and Trip.
There are 15 programmable indication LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can indicate three
states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The texts related to each three-color LED are divided
into three panels.
There are 3 separate panels of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in one LED group
can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be indicated since there are three LED
groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority, with red being the highest and green the lowest priority.
For example, if on one panel there is an indication that requires the green LED to be lit, and on
another panel there is an indication that requires the red LED to be lit, the red LED takes priority and
is lit. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the
LHMI or PCM600.
Information panels for the indication LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage button. Pressing that
button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-acknowledged LED is indicated with a highlight.
Such lines can be selected by using the Up/Down arrow buttons. Pressing the Enter key shows
details about the selected LED. Pressing the ESC button exits from information pop-ups as well as
from the LED panel as such.
The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any panel is lit. If there are
un-acknowledged indication LEDs, then the Multipage LED blinks. To acknowledge LEDs, press the
Clear button to enter the Reset menu (refer to description of this menu for details).
There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons and . These LEDs can
indicate the status of two arbitrary binary signals by configuring the OPENCLOSE_LED function
block. For instance, OPENCLOSE_LED can be connected to a circuit breaker to indicate the breaker
open/close status on the LEDs.

Technical manual
Figure 16: OPENCLOSE_LED connected to SXCBR
5.5.2 LED configuration alternatives
5.5.2.1 Functionality GUID-1A03E0EF-C10F-4797-9D9F-5CCA86CA29EB v5
The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx (x=1-15) controls
and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of the
function blocks are configured with PCM600. The input signal for each LED is selected individually
using SMT or ACT. Each LED is controlled by the GRPn_LEDx (n=1-3) function block that controls
the color and the operating mode.
Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different sequences; two as
follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as a
protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other
two are intended to be used as signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment
functionality.
5.5.2.2 Status LEDs GUID-4822DF9C-E343-442B-B3F1-3FA8CD8DF234 v4
There are three status LEDs above the LCD in front of the IED: green, yellow and red.
The green LED has a fixed function that presents the healthy status of the IED. The yellow and red
LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a disturbance report is
triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The red LED can be used to indicate a
trip command.
Here is a typical configuration of the status LEDs:
• Green LED: unlit > no power; blinking > startup or abnormal situation (IED is not in service);
steady > IED is in service
• Yellow LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > IED is in Testmode (IED is not in normal
service); steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the yellow LED on has been
active
• Red LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > user performs a common write from PCM600;
steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the red LED on has been active
The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder function, DRPRDRE, by
connecting a start or trip signal from the actual function to a BxRBDR binary input function block
using the PCM600, and configuring the setting to Off, Start or Trip for that particular signal.

Technical manual
5.5.2.3 Indication LEDs

Operating modes GUID-B67F1ED3-900B-4D34-8EEB-A3005999CE50 v4
Collecting mode
• LEDs that are used in the collecting mode of operation are accumulated continuously until the
unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified
alarm system. When all three inputs (red, yellow and green) are connected to different sources
of events for the same function block, collecting mode shows the highest priority LED color that
was activated since the latest acknowledgment was made. If a number of different indications
were made since the latest acknowledgment, it is not possible to get a clear view of what
triggered the latest event without looking at the sequence of events list. A condition for getting
the sequence of events is that the signals have been engineered in the disturbance recorder.
Re-starting mode
• In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs and activates
only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for re-starting mode with
the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new
disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated input
signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed. In sequence 6, the restarting or reset
mode means that upon occurrence of any new event, all previous indications will be reset. This
facilitates that only the LED indications related to the latest event is shown.
Acknowledgment/reset GUID-E6727E8F-C28B-4295-AE21-BC5643363805 v3
• From local HMI

• The active LED indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common signal for all
the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive edge triggered, not level
triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is performed via the button and menus on the
LHMI.
• From function input

• The active LED indications can also be acknowledged/reset via an input, CLRLEDS, to
the function block LHMICTRL. This input can for example be configured to a binary input
operated from an external push button or a function button. The function is positive edge
triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is continuously pressed,
the acknowledgment/reset only affects indications active at the moment when the button is
first pressed.
• Automatic reset
• The automatic reset can only be performed for LED indications defined for re-starting
mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the automatic reset of
the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will be indicated with a steady
light.
Operating sequence GUID-DFCA880B-308C-4334-94DF-97C7765E8C13 v5

The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type, the LED follows the input
signal completely. For the Latched type, each LED latches to the corresponding input signal until it is
reset.
The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED separately. The
following 6 sequences are available:

Technical manual
• Sequence 1: Follow-S
• Sequence 2: Follow-F
• Sequence 3: LatchedAck-F-S
• Sequence 4: LatchedAck-S-F
• Sequence 5: LatchedColl-S
• Sequence 6: LatchedReset-S
For sequence 1 and 2, which are of the Follow type, the acknowledgment (Ack ) /reset function is not
applicable because the indication shown by the LED follows its input signal. Sequence 3 and 4,
which are of the Latched type with acknowledgement, are only working in collecting (Coll) mode.
Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode while Sequence 6 is working
according to Latched type and re-starting (Reset) mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names
have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flash.
At the activation of the input signal to any LED, the indication on the corresponding LED obtains a
color that corresponds to the activated input, and operates according to the selected sequence
diagrams shown below.
In the sequence diagrams the different statuses of the LEDs are shown using the following symbols:
= No indication = Steady light = Flash
G= Green Y= Yellow R= Red

IEC09000311.vsd
Figure 17: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams
Sequence 1 (Follow-S) SEMOD56072-39 v4

This sequence follows the corresponding input signals all the time with a steady light. It does not
react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal
LED
IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
Figure 18: Operating Sequence 1 (Follow-S)

GUID-107FE952-3B4C-4C01-831A-3147E652327C v4
If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to the same LED, the priority color it
shows is in accordance with the color described above. An example of the operation when two colors
are activated in parallel to the same LED is shown in figure19.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED G G R G
Figure 19: Operating sequence 1, two colors

Technical manual
Sequence 2 (Follow-F) SEMOD56072-47 v2

This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of showing
steady light.
Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S SEMOD56072-50 v2

This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is independent of the
other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the indication starts flashing. After
acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still
present after acknowledgment it gets a steady light.
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
Figure 20: Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S

GUID-CC607709-5344-4C88-AA97-6395FD335E55 v5
The sequence described below is valid only if the same function block is used for all
three colour LEDs.
When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the indication with higher
priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent of if the low priority indication appeared
before or after acknowledgment. In figure 21 it is shown the sequence when a signal of lower priority
becomes activated after acknowledgment has been performed on a higher priority signal. The low
priority signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high priority signal resets.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
R R G
LED
Acknow
Figure 21: Operating Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S), 2 colors involved

GUID-A652A49D-F016-472D-8D38-6D3E75DAB1DB v3
If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained. Acknowledgment of indications
with higher priority will acknowledge also low priority indications, which are not visible according to
figure 22.

Technical manual
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED G Y R R Y
Acknow.
Figure 22: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

GUID-071B9EB5-A1D2-49C5-9458-4D21B7E068BE v3
If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priority indication the
high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged according to figure 23.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED G G R R Y
Acknow.
Figure 23: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F) SEMOD56072-64 v1

This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have been
alternated.
Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S SEMOD56072-67 v4

This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of the input
signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that
indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset that is, immediately after the
positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is
performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.

Technical manual
Activating
signal
LED
Reset
Figure 24: Operating Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S

GUID-4D52D221-F54F-4966-95B1-6ED6C536CEC9 v3
That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with lower priority still is
active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according to figure25.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
R G
LED
Reset
Figure 25: Operating sequence 5, two colors
Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S SEMOD56072-75 v4

In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are automatically
reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs set to Sequence 6
LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still activated will not be affected by manual
reset, that is, immediately after the positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new
reading and storing of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely
independent in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences.
Timing diagram for sequence 6 SEMOD56072-86 v4

Figure 26 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

Technical manual
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
Figure 26: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance
Figure 27 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.
Disturbance Disturbance
tRestart tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
Figure 27: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

Figure 28 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has reset but
before tRestart has elapsed.

Technical manual
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
Figure 28: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same disturbance
but with reset of activating signal between
Figure 29 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
Figure 29: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

Technical manual
5.5.3 Function keys
5.5.3.1 Functionality GUID-BED38E9A-C90D-4B7F-AA20-42821C4F6A1C v3
Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the left of the LCD, that
can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each button has an indication LED that
can be configured in the application configuration.
When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate between default
nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control a binary signal.
5.5.3.2 Operation principle GUID-977C3829-B19B-457E-8A4D-45317226EF22 v3
Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled from the LHMI
function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the output status of the actual function
block will change. These binary outputs can in turn be used to control other function blocks, for
example, switch control blocks, binary I/O outputs etc.
FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and parameters that control
the behavior of the function block. These settings and parameters are normally set using the PST.
Operating sequence GUID-84CA7C61-4F83-4F86-A07F-BF9EC4E309BF v5

The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or PULSED.
Setting OFF
This mode always sets the outputs to a low value (0).
Input value
Output value
Figure 30: Sequence diagram for setting OFF

Setting TOGGLE
In this mode the output toggles each time the function key has been pressed for more than 500ms.
Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block executes. The function block
execution is marked with a dotted line below.
Input value
500ms 500ms 500ms
Output value
Figure 31: Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE

Setting PULSED

Technical manual
In this mode the output sets high (1) when the function key has been pressed for more than 500ms
and remains high according to set pulse time. After this time the output will go back to 0. The input
attribute is reset when the function block detects it being high and there is no output pulse.
Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since the edge was
applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the output is zero; else the trigger
edge is lost.
Input value
500ms 500ms 500ms 500ms
pulse time pulse time pulse time

Output value
Figure 32: Sequence diagram for setting PULSED
Input function GUID-8EA4AE21-7A74-403A-84AE-D5CEF9292A63 v2

All function keys work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain function button is
of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this function block becomes active, and will light
the yellow function button LED when high. This functionality is active even if the function block
operation setting is set to off. It has been implemented this way for safety reasons; the idea is that
the function key LEDs should always reflect the actual status of any primary equipment monitored by
these LEDs.
5.5.3.3 Enabling and Disabling Authority on Function keys GUID-27413370-00F4-477D-886F-30359C788B55 v1
When users are configured through local or central account management, the default behavior of the
function keys are to only operate if a user is logged in, and the user have the required rights. This
authentication check can be configured to be bypassed per function key by changing the
ReqAuthority from ON to OFF. To be able to change this, the user changing it have to have the
Security advanced right.
Authority can be disabled using parameter Authority. Each function key has the parameter Authority,
which can be enabled or disabled using LHMI or PCM 600. User must have Security Advanced rights
to configure the Authority parameter of the function key.
The possible values for the Authority parameter are as below:
• Enabled: Requires authentication

• Disabled: No user authentication
If there is no User Account Management or Central Account Management configured

in the IED then this parameter has no effect and the function key can be operated
without any authentication.

Technical manual
Section 6 Differential protection

6.1 High impedance differential protection, single phase
HZPDIF IP14239-1 v4
6.1.1 Identification M14813-1 v4
IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

Function description
High impedance differential protection,

HZPDIF Id 87
single phase
SYMBOL-CC V2 EN-US
6.1.2 Functionality M13071-3 v13
High impedance differential protection, single phase (HZPDIF) functions can be used when the
involved CT cores have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing characteristics. It utilizes an
external CT secondary current summation by wiring. Actually all CT secondary circuits which are
involved in the differential scheme are connected in parallel. External series resistor, and a voltage
dependent resistor which are both mounted externally to the IED, are also required.
The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IED accessories in the Product Guide.
HZPDIF can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars, reactors, motors, auto-transformers,

capacitor banks and so on. One such function block is used for a high-impedance restricted earth
fault protection. Three such function blocks are used to form three-phase, phase-segregated
differential protection.
6.1.3 Function block M13737-3 v3
HZPDIF
ISI* TRIP
BLOCK ALARM
BLKTR MEASVOLT
Figure 33: HZPDIF function block
6.1.4 Signals IP14244-1 v2
Table 32: HZPDIF Input signals

ISI GROUP - Single phase current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip

Technical manual
Table 33: HZPDIF Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
MEASVOLT REAL Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side
6.1.5 Settings IP14245-1 v2
Table 34: HZPDIF Group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
U>Alarm 5 - 500 V 1 10 Alarm voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to activate alarm
U>Trip 10 - 900 V 1 100 Operate voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
SeriesResistor 50 - 20000 Ohm 1 250 Value of series resistor in Ohms
6.1.6 Monitored data

Table 35: HZPDIF Monitored data

MEASVOLT REAL - kV Measured RMS voltage on CT
secondary side
6.1.7 Operation principle IP14242-1 v2
M13075-3 v11
High impedance protection system is a simple technique which requires that all CTs, used in the
protection scheme, have relatively high knee point voltage, similar magnetizing characteristic and the
same ratio. These CTs are installed in all ends of the protected object. In order to make a scheme all
CT secondary circuits belonging to one phase are connected in parallel. From the CT junction points
a measuring branch is connected. The measuring branch is a series connection of one variable
setting resistor (or series resistor) RS with high ohmic value and an over-current element. Thus, the
high impedance differential protection responds to the current flowing through the measuring branch.
However, this current is result of a differential voltage caused by this parallel CT connection across
the measuring branch. Non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil) is used in order to protect entire scheme
from high peak voltages which may appear during internal faults. Typical high impedance differential
scheme is shown in Figure 34. Note that only one phase is shown in this figure.

Technical manual
RS
3 U
I
1
I> (50) 5
2
GUID-5CEAF088-D92B-45E5-B98F-3083894A694C V1 EN-US
Figure 34: HZPDIF scheme

Where in the Figure:
1. shows one main CT secondary winding connected in parallel with all other CTs, from the same
phase, connected to this scheme.
2. shows the scheme earthing point.
It is of utmost importance to insure that only one earthing point exists in such
protection scheme.
3. shows the setting (stabilizing) resistor RS.
4. shows the over-current measuring element.
The series connection of stabilizing resistor and over-current element is

designated as measuring branch.
5. shows the non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil).
6. U is the voltage across the CT paralleling point (for example, across the measuring branch).
7. I is the current flowing through the measuring branch.
U and I are interrelated in accordance with the following formula U=RS × I.
Due to the parallel CT connections the high impedance differential relay can only measure one
current and that is the relay operating quantity. That means that there is no any stabilizing quantity
(that is, bias) in high-impedance differential protection schemes. Therefore in order to guaranty the
stability of the differential relay during external faults the operating quantity must not exceed the set
pickup value. Thus, for external faults, even with severe saturation of some of the current
transformers, the voltage across the measuring branch shall not rise above the relay set pickup
value. To achieve that a suitable value for setting resistor RS is selected in such a way that the
saturated CT secondary winding provides a much lower impedance path for the false differential
current than the measuring branch. In case of an external fault causing current transformer
saturation, the non-saturated current transformers drive most of the spill differential current through
the secondary winding of the saturated current transformer and not through the measuring brunch of
the relay. The voltage drop across the saturated current transformer secondary winding appears also
across the measuring brunch, however it will typically be relatively small. Therefore, the pick-up value
of the relay has to be set above this false operating voltage.
See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.

Technical manual
6.1.7.1 Logic diagram M13075-9 v5
The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance differential protection
function HZPDIF, see Figure 35.
The function utilizes the raw samples from the single phase current input connected to it. Thus the
twenty samples per fundamental power system cycle are available to the HZPDIF function. These
current samples are first multiplied with the set value for the used stabilizing resistor in order to get
voltage waveform across the measuring branch. The voltage waveform is then filtered in order to get
its RMS value. Note that used filtering is designed in such a way that it ensures complete removal of
the DC current component which may be present in the primary fault current. The voltage RMS value
is then compared with set Alarm and Trip thresholds. Note that the TRIP signal is intentionally
delayed on drop off for 30 ms within the function. The measured RMS voltage is available as a
service value from the function. The function has block and trip block inputs available as well.
Figure 35: Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF
6.1.8 Technical data IP14246-1 v1
M13081-1 v13
Table 36: HZPDIF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage (10-900) V ±1.0% of Ir
I=U/R
Reset ratio >95% -
Maximum continuous power See1) -
Operate time at 0 to 10 x Ud Min. = 5 ms

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 x Ud to 0 Min. = 75 ms
Max. = 95 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud -
1) The value U2Trip/ R should always be lower than Stabilizing resistor thermal rating to allow continuous activation
during testing. If this value is exceeded, testing should be done with a transient faults. Typical value for the thermal
rating of the resistor is 100W.

Technical manual
Current protection
Section 7 Current protection

7.1 Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps
OC4PTOC SEMOD129998-1 v8
7.1.1 Function revision history GUID-154CAE8E-8FD4-460C-852D-6E5C93545F0D v1
Document Product History

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.1 -
D 2.2.1 -
E 2.2.4 -
F 2.2.5 • The harmonic restraint function changed to freeze the definite and IDMT timers.
• The maximum value of the settings IMin1, IMin2, IMin3 and IMin4 has been
decreased to 1000.0 % of IBase.
M14885-1 v6

Directional phase overcurrent OC4PTOC 51_67
protection, four steps
TOC-REVA V2 EN-US
Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps (OC4PTOC) has an inverse or definite time delay
for each step.
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an optional user defined
time characteristic.
The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory. The function can be set
to be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.
A second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block each step
individually.

Technical manual
Current protection
OC4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TR1
BLOCK TR2
BLKTR TR3
BLKST1 TR4
BLKST2 TRL1
BLKST3 TRL2
BLKST4 TRL3
ENMULT1 TR1L1
ENMULT2 TR1L2
ENMULT3 TR1L3
ENMULT4 TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
TR3L1
TR3L2
TR3L3
TR4L1
TR4L2
TR4L3
START
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STL1
STL2
STL3
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
ST3L1
ST3L2
ST3L3
ST4L1
ST4L2
ST4L3
ST2NDHRM
DIRL1
DIRL2
DIRL3
STDI RCND
Figure 36: OC4PTOC function block
7.1.5 Signals
Table 37: OC4PTOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step1

Technical manual
Current protection

ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1
Table 38: OC4PTOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1

Technical manual
Current protection

ST2NDHRM BOOLEAN Second harmonic detected
DIRL1 INTEGER Direction for phase1
STDIRCND INTEGER Binary coded start and directional information
7.1.6 Settings
Table 39: OC4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

MeasType DFT - - DFT Selection between DFT and RMS
RMS measurement
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
Table 40: OC4PTOC Group settings (basic)

On
AngleRCA 40 - 65 Deg 1 55 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
AngleROA 40 - 89 Deg 1 80 Relay operation angle (ROA)
StartPhSel 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
3 out of 3
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse

Technical manual
Current protection

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 1
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I1> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 1000 Operating phase current level for step 1
in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Definite time delay / additional time delay
for IDMT characteristics of step 1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
IMin1 1 - 1000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in %
of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 1
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
in % of IBase
for step 2

Technical manual
Current protection

of IBase
for step 2
step 2
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
in % of IBase
for step 3
of IBase
for step 3
step 3
Forward
Reverse

Technical manual
Current protection

ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
in % of IBase
for step 4
of IBase
for step 4
step 4
Table 41: OC4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

IMinOpPhSel 1 - 100 %IB 1 7 Minimum current for phase selection in
% of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in %
of fundamental curr
I1>Max 5 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operating phase current
level for step 1 in % of IBase, if I1> is
greater than I1>Max then I1> is set to
I1>Max
I1>Min 5 - 2500 %IB 1 5 Minimum used operating phase current
less than I1>Min then I1> is set to
I1>Min
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1

Technical manual
Current protection

tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
HarmBlock1 Off - - Off Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
I2>Max
I2>Min
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
On restrain
I3>Max
I3>Min
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
curve for step 3

Technical manual
Current protection

On restrain
I4>Max
I4>Min
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
On restrain

Table 42: OC4PTOC Monitored data

DIRL1 INTEGER 0=No direction - Direction for phase1
1=Forward
2=Reverse
1=Forward
2=Reverse
1=Forward
2=Reverse

Technical manual
Current protection

IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
7.1.8 Operation principle M12883-3 v11
Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC is divided into four different sub-
functions. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3 and 4, an operation mode is set by DirModex: Off/
Non-directional/Forward/Reverse.
The protection design can be divided into four parts:
• The direction element

• The harmonic restraint blocking function
• The four step overcurrent function
• The mode selection
If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter DirModex shall be
left to default value, Non-directional.
4 step overcurrent
Direction dirPh1Flt element faultState
faultState
Element One element for each
dirPh2Flt step
I3P dirPh3Flt START
U3P
TRIP
Harmonic harmRestrBlock
Restraint
Element
enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
Figure 37: Functional overview of OC4PTOC

M12883-16 v13
A common setting for all steps, StartPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase currents to be
high to enable operation. These settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3.
Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the function OC4PTOC, it is
possible to select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. Either discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS) can be selected.
If the DFT option is selected, only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency component of each
phase current is derived. The influence of the DC current component and higher harmonic current
components are almost completely suppressed. If the RMS option is selected, then the true RMS

Technical manual
Current protection
value is used. The true RMS value includes the contribution from the current DC component as well
as from the higher current harmonic in addition to the fundamental frequency component.
In a comparator, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the set operation current value of the
function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>) for each phase current. If a phase current is larger than the set
operation current, outputs START, STx, STL1, STL2 and STL3 are activated without delay. Output
signals STL1, STL2 and STL3 are common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will
initiate the activation. The START signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall be
noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the operation of
directional part of OC4PTOC.
Service values for individually measured phase currents are available on the local HMI for OC4PTOC
function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in service operational checking of the function.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation to the
fundamental current is used.
The function can be directional. The direction of a fault is given as the current angle in relation to the
voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the directional function are dependent on the
fault type. The selection of the measured value (DFT or RMS) does not influence the operation of the
directional part of OC4PTOC. To enable directional measurement at close-in faults, causing a low
measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a
memory voltage (15%). The following combinations are used.
Phase-phase short circuit:
U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2 I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
EQUATION1449 V1 EN-US (Equation 1)
U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3 I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1 I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
Phase-earth short circuit:
U refL1 = U L1 I dirL1 = I L1
U refL 2 = U L 2 I dirL 2 = I L 2
U refL 3 = U L 3 I dirL 3 = I L 3
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 5% of the set
base voltage UBase. So the directional element can be used for all unsymmetrical faults including
close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same positive sequence
voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.
After 100 ms, the following occurs:

Technical manual
Current protection
• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (7% of the set terminal
rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the reverse
direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until the
positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and an angle
window ROADir.
Reverse
Uref
RCA
ROA
ROA Forward
Idir
en05000745.vsd
Figure 38: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

The default value of AngleRCA is –55°. The parameter AngleROA gives the angular distance from
AngleRCA to define the directional borders.
A minimum current for the directional phase start current signal can be set. IMinOpPhSel is the start
level for the directional evaluation of IL1, IL2 and IL3. The directional signals release the overcurrent
measurement in the respective phases if their current amplitudes are higher than the start level
(IMinOpPhSel) and the direction of the current is according to the set direction of the step.
If no blocking signals are active, the start signal will start the timer of the steps. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or an inverse time delay
characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time delay characteristics is available. It is also
possible to create a tailor made time characteristic.
The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse characteristics".

Technical manual
Current protection
HarmBlockx = Enabled
Freeze Timers
AND
2ndH_FreezeTimers_int
EMULTX
IMinx Characteristx=DefTime
X T b tx
F a>b
a t
TRx
AND AND
|IOP|
a OR
a>b
b
STx
IxMult AND
X T
F
Inverse
Ix>
AND
AND
Characteristx=Inverse
txmin
DirModex=Off t
OR STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse
AND
REVERSE_Int
IEC12000008‐2‐en.vsdx
Figure 39: Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC
I3P
DFWDLx
U3P DFWDLxx
DREVLx
Directional
Element
AngleRCA DREVLxx FORWARD_int
Directional
AngleROA Release REVERSE_int
Block
STLx
Greater
IMinOpPhSel Comparator
x‐ means three phases 1,2 and 3
xx – means phase to phase 12,23,31
Figure 40: OC4 directional release block diagram

Different types of reset time can be selected as described in section "Inverse characteristics".

Technical manual
Current protection
There is a possibility to activate a preset change (IxMult x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set operation current
via a binary input ENMULTx (enable multiplier). In some applications the operation value needs to be
changed, for example due to changed network switching state.
The operation current value Ix>, is limited to be between Ix>Max and Ix>Min. The default values of
the limits are the same as the setting limits for Ix>, and the limits can only be used for reducing the
allowed range of Ix>. This feature is used when remote setting of the operation current value is
allowed, making it possible to ensure that the operation value used is reasonable. If Ix> is set outside
Ix>Max and Ix>Min, the closest of the limits to Ix> is used by the function. If Ix>Max is smaller then
Ix>Min, the limits are swapped. The principle of the limitation is shown in Figure 41.
Ix>Max
MAX hi
u y
Ix>_used
Ix>
MIN lo
Ix>Min
Figure 41: Logic for limitation of used operation current value
The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the start and directional
evaluation and is derived from a binary coded signal as described in Table 43.
Table 43: Code description for STDIRCND output signal
STDIRCND Description
bit 0 (1) General start
bit 1 (2) Direction detected in forward
bit 2 (4) Direction detected in reverse
bit 3 (8) Start in phase L1
bit 4 (16) Forward direction detected in phase L1
bit 5 (32) Reverse direction detected in phase L1
All four steps in OC4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The binary input BLKSTx
(x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of the respective step.
The start signals from the function can be blocked by the binary input BLKST. The trip signals from
the function can be blocked by the binary input BLKTR.
GUID-E3980B2D-EEDA-4BF1-A07D-E7B721130554 v7
A harmonic restrain of the directional phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC can be
chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency
component in a phase current exceeds the preset level defined by the parameter 2ndHarmStab
setting, any of the four overcurrent stages can have their timers selectively frozen by the parameter
HarmBlockx setting. When the 2nd harmonic restraint feature is active, the OC4PTOC function
output signal ST2NDHRM will be set to the logical value one.

Technical manual
Current protection
BLOCK
a
a>b
0.07*IBase b
a
a>b
b
Extract second AND
IOP
harmonic current a
a>b
component b
Extract 2ndH_FreezeTimers_Int
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab
Figure 42: Second harmonic blocking
When enabled, the 2nd harmonic blocking function is used to freeze the Definite
and/or the Inverse Characteristics internal timers. When the function detects a 2nd
harmonic higher than the set threshold, the internal function timers are frozen but
START outputs continues to be active as long as the measured current is above the
set pickup level. Internal timers will again resume timing when harmonic content
becomes smaller than the set threshold and the measured current is higher than the
pickup value. If TRIP output is already active when harmonic blocking signal appears
the TRIP output will not be affected.
When DirModex is set to Forward/Reverse and Ix> is set at its minimum value, that
is, 5.0% of IBase, the operation from the respective overcurrent step takes place at
20.0% of IBase. This is done to avoid unintentional maloperations during unbalanced
loading conditions that might appear in power systems and the unbalanced loading
condition might lead to a neutral current in the range of 10.0% to 15.0% of IBase.
7.1.9 Technical data

M12342-1 v23
Table 44: OC4PTOC technical data

Operate current, step 1-4 ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio -
Minimum operate current, step 1-4 % of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Relay characteristic angle (RCA)

Relay operating angle (ROA) (40.0–89.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

step 1-4
Minimum operate time for inverse (0.000-60.000) s
curves , step 1-4
Inverse time characteristics, see curve types
table 571, table 572 and table 573
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 Min. = 15 ms -
to 2 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms

Technical manual
Current protection

Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Min. = 15 ms -
Iset to 0
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 Min. = 5 ms -
to 10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Iset to 0 Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Operate frequency, directional 38-83 Hz -
overcurrent
Operate frequency, non-directional 10-90 Hz -
overcurrent
7.2 Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps

EF4PTOC IP14509-1 v8
7.2.1 Function revision history GUID-0F9199B0-3F86-45E0-AFC2-747052A20AE1 v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.1 -
D 2.2.4 The phase selection logic is added to allow phase segregated trip. The new phase
selections outputs added to this release are PHSELL1, PHSELL2 and PHSELL3. The
setting EnPhaseSel is added to enable or disable phase selection. The maximum value
changed to 2000.0 % of IBase for IMin1, IMin2, IMin3 and IMin4 settings.
E 2.2.5 The harmonic restrain function changed to freeze the definite and IDMT timers.
M14881-1 v7

Directional residual overcurrent EF4PTOC 4(IN>)
51N_67N
protection, four steps
4
alt
4
TEF-REVA V2 EN-US
Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps (EF4PTOC) can be used as main protection for
phase-to-earth faults. It can also be used to provide a system back-up, for example, in the case of
the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit
failure.
EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step.

Technical manual
Current protection
All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user-defined
characteristic.
EF4PTOC can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each step.
IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or negative sequence.
A second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.
The residual current can be calculated by summing the three-phase currents or taking the input from
the neutral CT.
EF4PTOC also provides very fast and reliable faulty phase identification for phase selective tripping
and subsequent reclosing during earth fault.
EF4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
I3PDIR* TRIN1
I3PPOL* TRIN2
U3P* TRIN3
BLOCK TRIN4
BLKTR TRSOTF
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 STIN1
BLKST3 STIN2
BLKST4 STIN3
BLKPHSEL STIN4
ENMULT1 STSOTF
ENMULT2 STFW
ENMULT3 STRV
ENMULT4 PHSELL1
CBPOS PHSELL2
CLOSECB PHSELL3
OPENCB 2NDHARMD
Figure 43: EF4PTOC function block
7.2.5 Signals IP11453-1 v2
Table 45: EF4PTOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
I3PPOL GROUP - Group connection for polarizing current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)

Technical manual
Current protection

BLKPHSEL BOOLEAN 0 Block phase selection
CBPOS BOOLEAN 0 Breaker position
CLOSECB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker close command
OPENCB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker open command
Table 46: EF4PTOC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TRIN1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRSOTF BOOLEAN Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
STIN1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
STSOTF BOOLEAN Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
STFW BOOLEAN Start signal forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start signal reverse direction
PHSELL1 BOOLEAN Start of phase selection, phase L1
2NDHARMD BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block signal
Table 47: EF4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
SeqTypeIDir Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for directional
Neg seq current
SeqTypeIPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq current
SeqTypeUPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq voltage

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 48: EF4PTOC Group settings (basic)

On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA)
PolMethod Voltage - - Voltage Type of polarization
Current
Dual
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 1 Minimum voltage level for polarization in
% of UBase
IPolMin 2 - 100 %IB 1 5 Minimum current level for polarization in
% of IBase
RNPol 0.50 - 1000.00 Ohm 0.01 5.00 Real part of source impedance used for
current polarisation
XNPol 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 40.00 Imaginary part of source imp. used for
current polarisation
IN>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in %
of fundamental curr
BlkParTransf Off - - Off Enable blocking at energizing of parallel
On transformers
UseStartValue IN1> - - IN4> Current level blk at parallel transf (step1,
IN2> 2, 3 or 4)
IN3>
IN4>
SOTF Off - - Off SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/
SOTF Undertime/SOTF&Undertime)
UnderTime
SOTF&UnderTime
ActivationSOTF Open - - Open Select signal to activate SOTF: CB-
Closed Open/ -Closed/ -Close cmd
CloseCommand
StepForSOTF Step 2 - - Step 2 Select start from step 2 or 3 to start
Step 3 SOTF
HarmBlkSOTF Off - - Off Enable harmonic restrain function in
On SOTF
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay for SOTF
t4U 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Switch-onto-fault active time
ActUnderTime CB position - - CB position Select signal to activate under time (CB
CB command Pos / CB Command)
tUnderTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay for under time
EnPhaseSel Off - - Off Enable phase selection
On
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse

Technical manual
Current protection

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Residual current operate level for step 1
in % of IBase
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected
time characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 2000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum operate residual current for
step 1 in % of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 1
IN1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 1
HarmBlock1 Off - - On Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
in % of IBase

Technical manual
Current protection

time characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 2000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum operate residual current for
value for step 2
On restrain
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
in % of IBase
time characteristic
value for step 3
On restrain
Forward
Reverse

Technical manual
Current protection

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
in % of IBase
time characteristic
value for step 4
On restrain
Table 49: EF4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

IN1>Max 1 - 2500 %IB 1 2500 Maximum used operate residual current
level for step 1 in % of IBase, if IN1> is
greater than IN1>Max then IN1> is set to
IN1>Max
IN1>Min 1 - 2500 %IB 1 1 Minimum used operate residual current
less than IN1>Min then IN1> is set to
IN1>Min
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1

Technical manual
Current protection

tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
IN2>Max
IN2>Min
ANSI reset
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
IN3>Max
IN3>Min
ANSI reset
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
curve for step 3

Technical manual
Current protection

IN4>Max
IN4>Min
ANSI reset
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
curve for step 4

Table 50: EF4PTOC Monitored data

IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
IPol REAL - A Polarizing current level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle between voltage and
current
IPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing current angle
M13941-51 v8
This function has the following four analog inputs on its function block in the configuration tool:

Technical manual
Current protection
1. I3P, input used for the operating quantity. Supplies the zero-sequence magnitude measuring
functionality.
2. U3P, input used for the voltage polarizing quantity. Supplies either the zero or the negative
sequence voltage to the directional functionality
3. I3P and U3P also supply current and voltage samples for faulty phase selection functionality.
4. I3PPOL, input used for the current polarizing quantity. Provides polarizing current to the
directional functionality. This current is normally taken from the grounding of a power
transformer.
5. I3PDIR, input used for directional detection. Supplies either the zero or the negative sequence
current to the directional functionality.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the
configuration tool in PCM600.
7.2.8.1 Operating quantity within the function M13941-58 v10
The function always uses residual current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The residual current can be:
1. Directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the fourth
analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function input I3P). This
dedicated IED CT input can be, for example, connected to:
• Parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases (Holm-Green
connection).
• One single core balance current instrument transformer (cable CT).
• One single current instrument transformer located between power system star point and
earth (current transformer located in the star point of a star connected transformer
winding).
• One single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a protected object
(current transformer located between two star points of double star shunt capacitor bank).
2. Calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog input of the
pre-processing block, connected to EF4PTOC function Analog Input I3P, is not connected to a
dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such a case, the pre-processing block will
calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following
formula (will take 3I0 from SMAI AI3P and will be connected to I3PDIR and I3P inputs.
If the zero sequence current is selected,
Iop = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

where:
IL1, IL2, and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental
frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor magnitude is used within the
EF4PTOC protection to compare it with the set operation current value of the four steps (IN1>, IN2>,
IN3>, or IN4>).
If the residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional
mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate
the output signal STINx (x=step 1-4) for this step and a common START signal.
7.2.8.2 Internal polarizing M13941-82 v12
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction to the earth fault
(forward/reverse).

Technical manual
Current protection
The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.
Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected, the protection will use the residual voltage -3U0 as the polarizing
quantity U3P.
This voltage can be:
1. Directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the fourth
analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function input U3P). This
dedicated IED VT input shall be then connected to the open delta winding of a three-phase main
VT.
2. Calculated from three-phase voltage input within the IED (when the fourth analog input of the
pre-processing block, connected to EF4PTOC analog function input U3P, is NOT connected to a
dedicated VT input of the IED in PCM600). In such a case, the pre-processing block will
calculate -3U0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following
formula:
UPol = -3U 0 = -(UL1 + UL2 + UL3)

where:
UL1, UL2, and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
In order to use this, all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED
VT inputs.
The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived.
This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating directional current, in order to
determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse). In order to enable voltage polarizing the
magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter
UPolMin.
It shall be noted that residual voltage (-3U0) or negative sequence voltage (-3U2) is used to
determine the location of the earth fault. This ensures the required inversion of the polarizing voltage
within the earth-fault function.
Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected, the function will use an external residual current (3I0) as the
polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:
1. Directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to the fourth
analog input of the pre-processing block, connected to EF4PTOC function input I3PPOL). This
dedicated IED CT input is then typically connected to one single current transformer located
between power system star point and earth (current transformer located in the star point of a
star connected transformer winding).
• For some special line protection applications, this dedicated IED CT input can be
connected to a parallel connection of current transformers in all three phases (Holm-
Green connection).
2. Calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog input into the
pre-processing block, connected to EF4PTOC function analog input I3PPOL, is NOT connected
to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600). In such case, the pre-processing block will
calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following
formula:

Technical manual
Current protection
IPol = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

where:
IL1, IL2, and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the fundamental
frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This phasor is then multiplied with the pre-
set equivalent zero-sequence source impedance in order to calculate the equivalent polarizing
voltage UIPol in accordance with the following formula:
UIPol = Z 0s × IPol = (RNPol + j × XNPol) × IPol

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the
direction to the earth fault (forward/reverse).
In order to enable current polarizing, the magnitude of the polarizing current shall be bigger than a
minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.
Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected, the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage based and
current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
UTotPol=UPol  UIPol=UPol  Z 0s  IPol  UPol   RNPol  jXNPol   Ipol

IECEQUATION2408 V2 EN-US (Equation 13)
UPol and IPol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence component depending
upon the user selection.
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with the phasor of the
operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault (forward/reverse).
7.2.8.3 External polarizing for earth-fault function M13941-144 v6
The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting is selected,
it is possible via the function binary input BLKSTx to provide external directional control (that is,
torque control) by, for example, using one of the following functions if available in the IED:
1. Distance protection directional function.

2. Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose protection function.
7.2.8.4 Directional detection for earth fault function GUID-FC382DD3-E2C8-455E-8CD5-1DE1793DD178 v6
Zero sequence components will be used for detecting directionality for the earth fault function. In
some cases, zero sequence quantities might detect directionality incorrectly. In such a scenario,
negative sequence quantities will be used. The user can select either zero sequence components or
negative sequence components for detecting directionality with the parameter SeqTypeIPol. I3PDIR
input is always connected to the same source as I3P input.
7.2.8.5 Base quantities within the protection M13941-152 v6
The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED. Base current (IBase)
shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes. Base voltage
(UBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV.

Technical manual
Current protection
7.2.8.6 Internal earth-fault protection structure M13941-157 v5
The protection is internally divided into the following parts:
1. Four residual overcurrent steps.

2. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated directional
comparison step for communication based earth-fault protection schemes (permissive or
blocking).
3. Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking during
switching of parallel transformers.
4. Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of breaker problems
during breaker opening or closing sequence.
7.2.8.7 Four residual overcurrent steps M13941-166 v9
Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as the measuring quantity. Each
of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in facilities:
• Directional mode can be set to Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this parameter setting

the directional mode of the step is selected.
• Residual current start value.
• Type of operating characteristic (inverse or definite time). By this parameter setting it is possible
to select inverse or definite time delay for the earth-fault protection. Most of the standard IEC
and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves,
please refer to section "Inverse characteristics".
• Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset / ANSI Reset). By this parameter setting
it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step. For the complete list of available reset
curves, please refer to section "Inverse characteristics".
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite time delay,
minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and parameters to define user
programmable inverse curve are defined.
• Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (On/Off). By this parameter setting it is
possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic content in the residual current
exceeds the preset level.
• Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary signal. By this
parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup value when function binary
input ENMULTx has logical value 1.
• The operation current value INx>, is limited to be between INx>Max and INx>Min. The default
values of the limits are the same as the setting limits for INx>, and the limits can only be used for
reducing the allowed range of INx>. This feature is used when remote setting of the operation
current value is allowed, making it possible to ensure that the operation value used is
reasonable. If INx> is set outside INx>Max and INx>Min, the closest of the limits to INx> is used
by the function. If INx>Max is smaller then INx>Min, the limits are swapped. The principle of the
limitation is shown in Figure 44.
INx>Max
MAX hi
INx>_used
INx> u y
MIN lo
INx>Min
Figure 44: Logic for limitation of used operation current value
Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in Figure 45.

Technical manual
Current protection
HarmBlockx = Enabled
Freeze Timers
AND
2ndH_FreezeTimers_int
EMULTX
IMinx Characteristx=DefTime
X T b tx
F a>b
a t
TRINx
AND AND
|IOP|
a OR
a>b
b
STINx
INxMult AND
X T
F
Inverse
INx>
AND
AND
txmin
DirModex=Off t
OR STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Forward AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse
AND
REVERSE_Int
Figure 45: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x = step 1, 2, 3 or 4
The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output signals for respective
step, and STINx and TRINx, can be blocked from the binary input BLKSTx. The trip signals from the
function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
7.2.8.8 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function M13941-179 v11
At least one of the four residual overcurrent steps shall be set as directional in order
to enable execution of the directional supervision element and the integrated
directional comparison function.
The protection has an integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current Iop is always
used, the polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting polMethod. The polarizing
quantity will be selected by the function in one of the following three ways:
1. When polMethod = Voltage, UPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

2. When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
3. When polMethod = Dual, UPol + IPol · ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as shown in
Figure 46, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.

Technical manual
Current protection
Operating area
STRV
0.6 * IN>DIR
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for STRV 40% of
IN>DIR RCA +85 deg
RCA
65° Upol = -3U 0
-RCA +85 deg
RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
IN>DIR
STFW
I op = 3I0
Operating area
Characteristic
for STFW IEC11000243-1-en.ai
Figure 46: Operating characteristic for earth-fault directional element using the zero sequence
components
The relevant setting parameters for the directional supervision element are:
• The directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than 40%
of IN>Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in the set direction.
• The relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward and reverse
areas in the operating characteristic.
The directional comparison will set the output binary signals:
1. STFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger than setting
parameter IN>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in forward direction.
2. STRV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos(φ - AngleRCA) is bigger than 60% of
setting parameter IN>Dir and directional supervision element detects fault in reverse direction.
These signals shall be used for communication based earth-fault teleprotection communication
schemes (permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
step is shown in Figure 47:

Technical manual
Current protection
| IopDir |
a
a>b STRV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b STFW
IN>Dir b AND
FORWARD_Int
X
0.4
FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
polMethod=Voltage
OR
UPolMin
Characteristic
Directional
polMethod=Dual IPolMin
UPol T
I3PDIR
0.0 F
polMethod=Current
OR
UTotPol
IPol AND REVERSE_Int
T RVS
F
UIPol
RNPol STAGE1_DIR_Int
X T
Complex 0.0 STAGE2_DIR_Int
Number 0.0 F OR
XNPol STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND
Figure 47: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
step
7.2.8.9 Second harmonic blocking element M13941-200 v10
A harmonic restrain can be chosen for each step by a parameter setting HarmBlockx. If the ratio of
the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the residual
current exceeds the preset level (defined by parameter 2ndHarmStab), output signal 2NDHARMD is
set to logical value one and the harmonic restraining feature to the function block will be applicable.
Blocking from the 2nd harmonic element activates if all of three criteria are satisfied:
1. The fundamental frequency component of the current > 1% of IBase

2. The second harmonic component > 1% of IBase
3. The ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in
the residual current exceeds the preset level defined by the parameter 2ndHarmStab setting
In addition to the basic functionality explained above, the 2nd harmonic blocking can be set in such
way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be required to stabilize EF4PTOC
during switching of parallel transformers in the station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk
of sympathetic inrush current. If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer
is switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the switched-in transformer will cause partial
saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd
harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers is in phase opposition. The summation of the
two currents thus gives a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current is however
significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing,

Technical manual
Current protection
is a little delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore, we have high 2nd harmonic current
component initially. After a short period this current is however small and the normal 2nd harmonic
blocking resets. If the BlkParTransf function is activated, the 2nd harmonic restrain signal is latched
as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current level by
using setting UseStartValue.
This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-in feature is
activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
1. Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf = On.

2. Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70ms.
3. Residual current magnitude is higher than the set start value for one of the four residual
overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting UseStartValue it is possible to select which one of
the four start values that will be used (IN1> or IN2> or IN3> or IN4>).
Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated, the basic 2nd harmonic blocking signal is sealed-in
until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined by parameter setting UseStartValue
(see condition 3 above).
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in Figure 48.
BLOCK
a
a>b
0.07*IBase b
a
a>b
b
Extract second AND
IOP
harmonic current a
a>b
component b
Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab
q-1
0-70ms OR 2ndH_FreezeTimers_int
AND OR
0
BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
a
a>b
b
Use_PUValue
Pickup1>
Pickup2>
Pickup3>
Pickup4>
ANSI13000015-2-en.vsdx
ANSI13000015 V2 EN-US
Figure 48: Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers
feature

Technical manual
Current protection
When enabled, the 2nd harmonic blocking function is used to freeze the Definite
and/or the Inverse Characteristics internal timers. When the function detects a 2nd
harmonic higher than the set threshold, the internal function timers are frozen but
START outputs continues to be active as long as the measured current is above the
set pickup level. Internal timers will again resume timing when harmonic content
becomes smaller than the set threshold and the measured current is higher than the
pickup value. If TRIP output is already active when harmonic blocking signal appears
the TRIP output will not be affected.
7.2.8.10 Switch on to fault feature M13941-211 v5
Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are the switch on to fault logic (SOTF) and
the under-time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate SOTF, the under-time logic or
both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault, for example
during an autoreclosing sequence. The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such
situations. The time during which SOTF and under-time logics will be active after activation is defined
by the setting parameter t4U.
The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected by setting
parameter StepForSOTF. The setting parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB
position open change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual
current start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set delay
tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 200 ms).
The under-time logic acts as a circuit breaker pole-discordance protection, but it is only active
immediately after breaker switching. The under-time logic can only be used in solidly or low
impedance grounded systems.
The under-time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The under-time logic will normally
be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function. The under-time logic can also be
blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This enables high sensitivity even if power transformer
inrush currents can occur at breaker closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB
poles immediately after switching of the circuit breaker. The under-time logic is activated either from
change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command pulses. This
selection is done by setting parameter ActUnderTime. In case of a start from step 4 this logic will give
a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time (default 300
ms).

Technical manual
Current protection
SOTF
200 ms
Open
t
t4U
200 ms
Closed
t ActivationSOTF
Close command
tSOTF
AND t
AND
STIN2
StepForSOTF
STIN3
SOTF
BLOCK
OFF
SOTF
UNDERTIME
UnderTime TRIP
tUnderTime
SOTF or
AND
2nd Harmonic HarmResSOFT t UnderTime
OR
Open
Close OR
t4U
ActUnderTime
Close command AND
STIN4
Figure 49: Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and under-time features
M13941-3 v6
Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF4PTOC function is shown in Figure 50:
signal to communication scheme

Directional Check
Element
4 step over current

INPol Direction
operatingCurrent element
Element
3U0 One element for each
earthFaultDirection step
3I0
angleValid
I3PDIR
DirMode
enableDir
harmRestrBlock
3I0 Harmonic
Restraint 1
Element TRIP

start step 2, 3 and 4
Blocking at parallel
transformers
SwitchOnToFault
TRSOTF
CB
DirMode pos
or cmd
enableDir
Mode
Selection enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
Figure 50: Functional overview of EF4PTOC

Technical manual
Current protection
7.2.8.11 Phase selection element GUID-81F5DC32-C8AF-4EF4-BEF6-8335A9197617 v1
The phase selection element provides very fast and reliable faulty phase identification for phase
selective tripping and subsequent reclosing during earth faults. The operation of the phase selection
element is based on both voltage phasor comparison and current change criteria. This measuring
principle successfully distinguishes the faulty phase with minimum influence from load current or
other disturbances, such as power swing. The phase selection feature can be enabled by setting
EnPhaseSel.
The faulty phases are primarily identified by a delta current criteria. Per-phase and phase-to-phase
delta currents are calculated and compared with different criteria to determine if there is a single
phase or phase-to-phase to earth fault. In case the fault cannot be identified by the delta current
criteria, a voltage phasor based method will be applied by comparing the angle between the voltage
phasor and the zero sequence current. The voltage phasor based method is applicable for forward
direction single phase to ground faults. If a three phase disturbance has been identified (for example,
during power swing), the voltage based method will be temporarily disabled until the disturbance
disappears.
The operation of the phase selection element is controlled by the measured zero sequence current.
When the measured zero sequence current is above the operate level (60% of IN>Dir), phase
selection is released. Once the faulty phase is selected, the selected phase will be latched until the
zero sequence current drops below the operate level.
Outputs PHSELL1, PHSELL2, and PHSELL3 are used to indicate the selected faulty phases. The
outputs are released when general START from EF4 function is TRUE.
The phase selection element will be blocked by the external input BLKPHSEL or when the circuit
breaker position is open. The CBPOS input will be high when the circuit breaker is closed and it will
be low when the circuit breaker is open. The CBPOS input provides the CB position to phase
selection element.
I3P Phase selection by

delta current AND S Q
SR AND
R
3I0 a
a>b
0.6* IN>Dir
b PHSELLx
OR
CBPOS
tON = 20ms
Phase selection by
U3P voltage and zero
AND 1s AND
sequence current
phasor
No 3 Phase Disturbance
STFW
Figure 51: Simplified logic diagram for Phase selection

Technical manual
Current protection
M15223-1 v18
Table 51: EF4PTOC technical data

Operate current, step 1-4 (1-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase -

Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
(RCA)
Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, step (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

1-4 greater
Minimum operate time for inverse curves, (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
step 1-4 greater
Inverse time characteristics, see Table 571, 16 curve types See Table 571, Table 572 and
Table 572 and Table 573 Table 573
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir
Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Real part of source Z used for current (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

polarization
Imaginary part of source Z used for current (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -
polarization
*Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 2 Min. = 15 ms -
x Iset Max. = 30 ms
*Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset to Min. = 15 ms -

0 Max. = 30 ms
*Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 10 Min. = 5 ms -

x Iset Max. = 20 ms
*Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Iset Min. = 20 ms -

to 0 Max. = 35 ms

*Note: Operate time and reset time are only valid if harmonic blocking is turned off for a step.
7.3 Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC GUID-E8CF8AA2-AF54-4FD1-A379-3E55DCA2FA3A v1

Technical manual
Current protection
7.3.1 Function revision history GUID-FEAFB742-D0DA-4F9E-B4AC-84E568301282 v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.1 -
D 2.2.4 Maximum value changed to 2000.0 % of IBase for IMin1, IMin2, IMin3 and IMin4
settings.
E 2.2.5 -
GUID-E1720ADA-7F80-4F2C-82A1-EF2C9EF6A4B4 v1

Four step negative sequence NS4PTOC 46I2
overcurrent protection I2
4
alt
4
7.3.3 Functionality GUID-485E9D36-0032-4559-9204-101539A32F47 v6
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC) has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user defined
characteristic.
The directional function is voltage polarized.
NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.
NS4PTOC can be used as main protection for unsymmetrical fault; phase-phase short circuits,
phase-phase-earth short circuits and single phase earth faults.
NS4PTOC can also be used to provide a system backup for example, in the case of the primary
protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit failure.
7.3.4 Function block GUID-8EDB8B12-0D86-4F6B-A1FB-F5D0C72AA545 v3
NS4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
I3PDIR* TR1
U3P* TR2
BLOCK TR3
BLKTR TR4
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 ST1
BLKST3 ST2
BLKST4 ST3
ENMULT1 ST4
ENMULT2 STFW
ENMULT3 STRV
ENMULT4
Figure 52: NS4PTOC function block

Technical manual
Current protection
7.3.5 Signals
Table 52: NS4PTOC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
Table 53: NS4PTOC Output signals

TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
STFW BOOLEAN Forward directional start signal
STRV BOOLEAN Reverse directional start signal
7.3.6 Settings
Table 54: NS4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Technical manual
Current protection
Table 55: NS4PTOC Group settings (basic)

On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Minimum voltage level for polarization in
% of UBase
I2>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Negative sequence current op level for
time characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 2000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum current for step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 1
Forward
Reverse

Technical manual
Current protection

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
time characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 2000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum current for step 2
value for step 2
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
time characteristic

Technical manual
Current protection

value for step 3
Forward
Reverse
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
time characteristic
value for step 4
Table 56: NS4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

ANSI reset
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
curve for step 1

Technical manual
Current protection

time curve for step
ANSI reset
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse reset
ANSI reset
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
curve for step 3
ANSI reset
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
curve for step 4
curve for step 4

Technical manual
Current protection


Table 57: NS4PTOC Monitored data

IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle between voltage and
current
7.3.8 Operation principle GUID-8923EC0B-A5BA-431B-9699-EB67E2637560 v3
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function has the following three
“Analog Inputs” on its function block in the configuration tool:
1. I3P, input used for “Operating Quantity”.

2. U3P, input used for “Polarizing Quantity”.
3. I3PDIR, input used for "Directional finding"
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the
Configuration Tool within PCM600.
7.3.8.1 Operating quantity within the function GUID-8F0A5BDE-AC98-4188-9085-42A8DF00C476 v3
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function always uses negative
sequence current (I2) for its operating quantity. The negative sequence current is calculated from
three-phase current input within the IED. The pre-processing block calculates I2 from the first three
inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
1
I2 =
3
(
× IL1 + a × IL 2 + a × IL 3
2
)
where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
a is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1∠120 deg
a2 similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1∠240 deg
The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC protection to compare it with the set operation
current value of the four steps (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If the negative sequence current is larger than
the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator
for this step is set to true. This signal, without delay, activates the output signal STx (x=1 - 4) for this
step and a common START signal.

Technical manual
Current protection
7.3.8.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function GUID-B00FE98B-F269-4F1B-AC03-68250798851B v3
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the fault (Forward/
Reverse).
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function uses the voltage polarizing
method.
NS4PTOC uses the negative sequence voltage -U2 as polarizing quantity U3P. This voltage is
calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED. The pre-processing block calculates -U2
from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
1
UPol = -U 2 = - × (UL1 + a 2 × UL 2 + a × UL3 )
3
EQUATION2267 V2 EN-US
where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
To use this all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.
This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the
direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing
voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting UpolMin.
Note that –U2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the required inversion of the
polarizing voltage within the function.
7.3.8.3 External polarizing for negative sequence function GUID-21930E81-1B40-4BA4-B1D8-3B365327AEF6 v1
The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting is selected
it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x indicates the relevant step within the
protection) to provide external directional control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of
the following functions if available in the IED:
• Distance protection directional function

• Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose protection function
7.3.8.4 Internal negative sequence protection structure GUID-A6B9B3F1-A1FE-4653-A8AF-61FCCF19CE95 v1
The protection is internally divided into the following parts:
• Four negative sequence overcurrent steps

• Directional supervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based negative sequence protection schemes
(permissive or blocking)
Each part is described separately in the following sections.

Technical manual
Current protection
7.3.8.5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages GUID-D8ACB136-2BA6-4ADA-A096-5C38BD12DB72 v2
Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 (negative sequence current) as measuring
quantity. Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built-in facilities:
• Operating mode (Off/ Non-directional /Forward / Reverse). By this parameter setting the
operating mode of the stage is selected. Note that the directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is
not made within the overcurrent stage itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common
“Directional Supervision Element” described in the next paragraph.
• Negative sequence current pickup value.
• Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter setting it is
possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for negative sequence overcurrent function.
Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the complete list of
available inverse curves, refer to Chapter "Inverse characteristics"
• Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI reset).By this parameter setting it
is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For the complete list of available reset
curves, refer to Chapter "Inverse characteristics"
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite time delay,
minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and parameters to define user
programmable inverse curve are defined.
• Multiplier for scaling of the set negative sequence current pickup value by external binary signal.
By this parameter setting it is possible to increase negative sequence current pickup value when
function binary input ENMULTx has logical value 1.
Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in the following
figure:
BLKTR
Characteristx=DefTime AND
TRx
|IOP| AND
tx
a OR
a>b
ENMULTx b
STx
IxMult AND
X T
Ix> F
txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse
DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse
AND
REVERSE_Int
IEC09000683.vsd
Figure 53: Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4
NS4PTOC can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signals from
NS4PTOC for each stage can be blocked from the binary input BLKSTx. The trip signals from
NS4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

Technical manual
Current protection
7.3.8.6 Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function GUID-F54E21F7-7C99-41D6-BEC6-2D6EC6D2B2A3 v3
At least one of the four negative sequence overcurrent steps must be set as
directional in order to enable execution of the directional supervision element and
the integrated directional comparison function.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as shown in figure
54, to determine the direction of the fault.
Reverse
Area
AngleRCA Upol=-U2
Forward
Area
Iop = I2
Figure 54: Operating characteristic for fault directional element
Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:
• Directional element is internally enable to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than 40% of I>Dir
and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
• Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and reverse areas in
the operating characteristic.
Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, set NS4PTOC output
binary signals:
1. STFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward area, see fig 54
(Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting I>Dir)
2. STRV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse area, see fig 54.
(Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting I>Dir)

Technical manual
Current protection
These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection communication schemes
(permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
step is shown in figure 55:
|Iop|
a a>
STRV
b b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a a>
STFW
I>Dir b b FORWARD_Int
AND
X
0.4
FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
C h a r a c e ri s ti c
D i r e c ti o n a l
UPolMin
IPolMin
t
Iop
UPol
AND REVERSE_Int
RVS
STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND
IEC07000067-4.vsd
IEC07000067-4 V2 EN-US
Figure 55: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
step
7.3.9 Technical data GUID-10E9194D-3AE9-4D0F-867E-473E6F4BF443 v1
GUID-E83AD807-8FE0-4244-A50E-86B9AF92469E v7
Table 58: NS4PTOC technical data

Operate current, step 1 - 4 (1-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase -

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
step 1 - 4
Minimum operate time for inverse curves, (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
step 1 - 4

Technical manual
Current protection

Inverse time characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 571, table 572 and table
571, table 572 and table 573 573
Minimum operate current, step 1 - 4 (1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to Min. = 15 ms -

2 x Iset Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

to 0 Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to Min. = 5 ms -

10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Iset to 0 Max. = 35 ms

Transient overreach <10% at τ = 100 ms -
7.4 Thermal overload protection, two time constants

TRPTTR IP14513-1 v4
M14877-1 v2

Thermal overload protection, two time TRPTTR 49
constants
SYMBOL-A V1 EN-US
If a power transformer reaches very high temperatures the equipment might be damaged. The
insulation within the transformer will experience forced ageing. As a consequence of this the risk of
internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth faults will increase.
The thermal overload protection (TRPTTR) estimates the internal heat content of the transformer
(temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the transformer with
two time constants, which is based on current measurement.
Two warning levels are available. This enables actions in the power system to be done before
dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to increase to the trip value, the
protection initiates a trip of the protected transformer.
The estimated time to trip before operation is presented.

Technical manual
Current protection
TRPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
COOLING ALARM1
ENMULT ALARM2
RESET LOCKOUT
WARNING
Figure 56: TRPTTR function block
7.4.4 Signals
Table 59: TRPTTR Input signals

SIGNAL
COOLING BOOLEAN 0 Cooling input Off / On. Changes Ib setting and time constant
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable Multiplier for currentReference setting
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function
Table 60: TRPTTR Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip Signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal
ALARM1 BOOLEAN First level alarm signal
ALARM2 BOOLEAN Second level alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal
WARNING BOOLEAN Warning signal: Trip within set warning time
7.4.5 Settings
Table 61: TRPTTR Group settings (basic)

On
IRef 10.0 - 1000.0 % 1.0 100.0 Reference current in %
IRefMult 0.01 - 10.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplication Factor for reference
current
IBase1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base current,IBase1 without Cooling
input in % of IBase
IBase2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base Current,IBase2, with Cooling input
ON in % of IBase
Tau1 0.10 - 500.00 Min 0.01 60.00 Time constant without cooling input in
min, with IBase1

Technical manual
Current protection

Tau2 0.10 - 500.00 Min 0.01 60.00 Time constant with cooling input in min,
with IBase2
IHighTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current Sett, in % of IBase1 for rescaling
TC1 by TC1-IHIGH
Tau1High 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is >
IHIGH-TC1
ILowTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase1 for rescaling
TC1 by TC1-ILOW
Tau1Low 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is <
ILOW-TC1
IHighTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling
TC2 by TC2-IHIGH
Tau2High 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is
>IHIGH-TC2
ILowTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling
TC2 by TC2-ILOW
Tau2Low 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is <
ILOW-TC2
ITrip 50.0 - 250.0 %IBx 1.0 110.0 Steady state operate current level in %
of IBasex
Alarm1 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 80.0 First alarm level in % of heat content trip
value
Alarm2 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 90.0 Second alarm level in % of heat content
trip value
ResLo 10.0 - 95.0 %Itr 1.0 60.0 Lockout reset level in % of heat content
trip value
ThetaInit 0.0 - 95.0 % 1.0 50.0 Initial Heat content, in % of heat content
trip value
Warning 1.0 - 500.0 Min 0.1 30.0 Time setting, below which warning would
be set (in min)
tPulse 0.01 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Length of the pulse for trip signal (in
sec).
Table 62: TRPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Table 63: TRPTTR Monitored data

HEATCONT REAL - % Percentage of the heat content of the
transformer
I-MEASUR REAL - % Current measured by the function in % of
the rated current
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in min)

Technical manual
Current protection

TRESLO INTEGER - - Estimated time to reset of the function (in
min)
TTRIPCAL INTEGER 0=Not Active - Calculated time status to trip: not active/
1=Long Time long time/active
2=Active
TRESCAL INTEGER 0=Not Active - Calculated time status to reset: not
1=Long Time active/long time/active
2=Active
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the true RMS
value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the protection function.
From the largest of the three phase currents a relative final temperature (heat content) is calculated
according to the expression:
2
æ I ö
Q final =ç ÷÷
ç I ref
è ø
where:
I is the largest phase current
Iref is a given reference current
If this calculated relative temperature is larger than the relative temperature level corresponding to
the set operate (trip) current, then the start output signal START will be activated.
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:
If Q final > Q n
æ Dt
ö
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) × ç1 - e t ÷
-
è ø
If Q final < Qn
Dt
Qn = Q final - ( Q final - Qn -1 ) × e
-
t
where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature

Technical manual
Current protection
Q n-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step
Q final is the calculated final (steady state) temperature with the actual current
Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual and final temperature
t is the thermal time constant of the protected circuit given in minutes. There are different time
constants depending on the cooling used. Please refer to manufacturer's manuals for details
The calculated transformer relative temperature can be monitored and it is exported from the function
as a real figure HEATCONT.
When the transformer temperature reaches any of the set alarm levels Alarm1 or Alarm2 the
corresponding output signal ALARM1 or ALARM2 is activated. When the temperature of the object
reaches the set trip level which corresponds to continuous current equal to ITrip the output signal
TRIP is activated.
There is also a calculation of the time to operation with the present current. This calculation is only
performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation temperature:
æQ - Qoperate ö
toperate = -t × ln ç final
ç Q final - Q n ÷÷
è ø
The calculated time to trip can be monitored and it is exported from the function as an integer output
TTRIP.
After a trip there can be a lockout to inhibit reconnecting the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal
LOCKOUT is activated when the temperature of the object is above the set lockout release
temperature setting ResLo.
The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.
æQ - Qlockout _ release ö
tlockout _ release = -t × ln ç final ÷÷
ç Q final - Q n
è ø
In the above equation, the final temperature is calculated according to equation 15. The calculated
component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure,
TRESLO.
When the current is so high that it has given a start signal START, the estimated time to trip is
continuously calculated and given as analogue output TTRIP. If this calculated time get less than the
setting time Warning, set in minutes, the output WARNING is activated.
In case of trip a pulse with a set duration tPulse is activated.

Technical manual
Current protection
Final Temp START

> TripTemp
RESET HEATCONT
Calculation
of heat
content
I3P
Calculation
ENMULT of final
temperature
ALARM1
Actual Temp >
Alarm1,Alarm2
ALARM2
Temp
Current base used

TRIP
Actual Temp
> TripTemp
S LOCKOUT
Management of R
COOLING setting
parameters: Tau,
Actual Temp
IBase Tau used
< Recl
Temp
TTRIP
Calculation
of time to
WARNING
trip
Calculation
of time to TRESCAL
reset of
lockout
Figure 57: Functional overview of TRPTTR

Technical manual
Current protection
M13266-2 v9
Table 64: TRPTTR technical data

Base current 1 and 2 (30–250)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Operate time: Time constant τ = (0.10–500.00) ±5.0% or ±200 ms whichever is greater

minutes
∑ I 2 , I p2 ⌡
t < σ √ ln  2 
 I , ITrip 2 
 
I = actual measured current

Ip = load current before overload
occurs
ITrip = steady state operate
current level in % of IBasex
Alarm level 1 and 2 (50–99)% of heat content ±2.0% of heat content trip
operate value
Operate current (50–250)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Reset level temperature (10–95)% of heat content trip ±2.0% of heat content trip
7.5 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF IP14514-1 v6
7.5.1 Function revision history GUID-3A043295-3AE3-437E-BBE9-D7FD6F349892 v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 I>BlkCBPos setting functionality correction.
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.1 -
D 2.2.4 -
E 2.2.5 -
M14878-1 v5

Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF
SYMBOL-U V1 EN-US
A current based check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve high
security against inadvertent operation.

Technical manual
Current protection
CCRBRF
I3P* TRBU
BLOCK TRBU2
START TRRET
STL1 TRRETL1
STL2 TRRETL2
STL3 TRRETL3
CBCLDL1 CBALARM
CBCLDL2 STALARM
CBCLDL3
CBFLT
Figure 58: CCRBRF function block
7.5.5 Signals
Table 65: CCRBRF Input signals

I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
START BOOLEAN 0 Three phase start for breaker failure protection function
STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal for phase L1
CBCLDL1 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1
CBFLT BOOLEAN 0 CB faulty, unable to trip. Backup trip instantaneously
Table 66: CCRBRF Output signals

TRBU BOOLEAN Backup trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2 BOOLEAN Second backup trip by breaker failure protection function
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRETL1 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L1
CBALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for faulty circuit breaker
STALARM BOOLEAN External start signal timed out, when by setting StartMode the
external start signal is followed (i.e. when is NOT Latched)

Technical manual
Current protection
7.5.6 Settings
Table 67: CCRBRF Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
Table 68: CCRBRF Group settings (basic)

On
FunctionMode Current - - Current Selection of measurement principle:
CB Pos Current / CB Position / Current or CB
Current or CB Pos Position
StartMode LatchedStart - - LatchedStart Select how t1 and t2 timers are run: By
FollowStart external start signals which is internally
FollowStart&Mode latched / Follow the external start signal
only / Follow external start signal and
selected FunctionMode
tStartTimeout 0.5 - 600.0 s 0.1 1.0 Time delay after which the external start
signal will be ignored, when by setting
StartMode the external start signal is
followed (i.e. when is NOT Latched)
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 - - 1 out of 3 Select backup trip mode when t2 timer
1 out of 3 expires and current measurement is
1 out of 4 used: 2 elements operate out of three
phases and neutral / 1 element operates
out of three phases / 1 element operates
out of three phases and neutral
RetripMode Off - - Off Select retrip mode when t1 timer expires:
UseFunctionMode Off / use FunctionMode to check /
Always always without any check
IPh> 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate phase current level in % of
IBase
IN> 2 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of retrip
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of backup trip
t2MPh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of backup trip at multi-phase
start. It can be used to speed up backup
trip command for multi-phase faults on
OHLs
tPulse 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Minimum trip pulse duration
Table 69: CCRBRF Group settings (advanced)

I>BlkCBPos 5 - 200 %IB 1 20 I> in % of IBase to block operation based
on CB Position when
FunctionMode=Current or CB Pos
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.030 Additional time delay which is added to
t2. It can be used as a second backup
trip
tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay for alarm when faulty circuit
breaker indicated

Technical manual
Current protection

Table 70: CCRBRF Monitored data

IL1 REAL - A Measured current in phase L1
IN REAL - A Measured residual current
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF is initiated from the protection trip command, either from
protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.
To this function the three-phase current input and/or change to: the breaker normally open auxiliary
contact (i.e. "52a" or "closed") shall be connected. On OHL feeders where single pole auto-reclosing
is used, auxiliary contact from each CB pole shall be connected separately
The input START signal (i.e. initiate signal) can be phase selective or common (for all three phases).
Phase selective start signals enable single pole retrip functionality. This means that a second attempt
to open the same breaker can be done phase-selective. The retrip attempt is made after a set time
delay t1. For transmission lines, single pole trip and auto-reclosing is often used. The retrip function
can be phase selective if it is initiated from the phase selective line protection.
The retrip function can be done with or without current check. With this current check, the retrip is
only performed if thecurrent through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate current level.
The retrip function can be performed with or without CB position check according to table 71.
Table 71: Dependencies between parameters RetripMode and FunctionMode
RetripMode FunctionMode Description

Retrip Off N/A the retrip function is not activated
CB Pos Check Current retrip is done if phase current is
larger than the operate level after
retrip time has elapsed
Contact retrip is done when auxiliary contact
position indicates that breaker is still
closed after retrip time has elapsed
Current&Contact both methods according to above
are used but taken into account also
I>BlkCont
No CBPos Check Current retrip is done without check of
current level
Contact retrip is done without check of
auxiliary contact position
Current&Contact retrip is done without check of
current level or auxiliary contact
position
The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will start the backup
trip timer. The function detects the successful breaker opening, either by detection of low current
through RMS evaluation and a special adapted current algorithm or by open contact indication. The
special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening, that is, fast resetting of

Technical manual
Current protection
the current measurement. If the current and/or contact detection has not detected breaker opening
before the backup timer has run its time a backup trip is initiated.
Further the following possibilities are available:
•
• The minimum length of the retrip pulse, the backup trip pulse and the second backup trip pulse
are settable. This pulse duration is defined by a parameter setting tPulse. The retrip pulse, the
backup trip pulse and the second backup trip pulse will however sustain as long as there is an
indication of closed breaker.
• If the current detection is used it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3 where it is
sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4 where it is sufficient to
detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high residual current and 2 out of 4 where at
least two currents (phase current and/or residual current) shall be high for breaker failure
detection.
• The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the setting of phase
current detection.
• It is possible to have different backup time delays for single-phase faults and for multi-phase
faults.
• It is possible to have this option activated for small load currents only.
• It is possible to have instantaneous backup trip function if a signal is high if the circuit breaker is
incapable to clear faults, for example, at low gas pressure.
30 ms
START
STL1 OR BFP Started L1
150 ms
AND S
SR Q t
R
BLOCK
OR Time out L1
Reset L1 AND
Retrip Time Out L1
Backup Time Out L1
IEC09000976-3-en-us.vsd
Figure 59: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF starting logic
IP>
a
a>b
b
FunctionMode Current
OR AND Reset L1
OR
1 Contact Time out L1

Current and Contact OR
AND
Current High L1
IL1
BFP Started L1 AND CB Closed L1
OR
a AND AND
a>b OR AND
I>BlkCont b
CBCLDL1 Contact Closed L1

AND
Figure 60: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF , CB position evaluation

Technical manual
Current protection
t1 TRRETL3
BFP Started L1 From other
t Retrip Time Out L1
phases TRRETL2 OR
TRRET
tPulse
RetripMode No CBPos Check AND
OR TRRETL1
OR
1 30ms
OR
CB Pos Check
AND
CB Closed L1
CBFLT
Figure 61: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function
BUTripMode
1 out of 3
2 out of 4
OR
1 1 out of 4 AND
Current high L1
BFP Started L1
AND
IN
a
a>b
IN> b
Contact Closed L1
OR
OR
Current High L2
From other AND Backup Time Out L1
Current High L3
phases
Current High L1
CBFLT
AND
t2
30ms Backup Trip L1
BFP Started L1 t AND
OR
t2MPh
AND t
AND
OR OR
tPulse
From other Backup Trip L2 OR TRBU
OR
phases Backup Trip L3
BFP Started L2 AND
From other
phases BFP Started L3 OR tPulse
t3
OR
TRBU2
S Q
SR
t
AND R
IEC09000979-5-en-us.vsd
Figure 62: Simplified logic scheme of the backup trip logic function
When the function Start mode is set to LatchedStart and the function mode is set CB Pos, Re-trip,
and Backup trip will internally operate and latch. To reset these two signals the breaker position has
to indicate that the CB is open.
To avoid continuous lockout of Re-trip and Back up trip signals, the signals are rested internally
under the following conditions:
1. When the function blocking input is activated breaker position input (CBCLDLxx) will internally
be forced to zero in all phases (that is simulating that CB is open), which will reset Re-
trip(TRRET) and back up trip (TRBU) output signals.
2. If TRBU is active for 10 seconds, then the activated breaker position input (CBCLDLxx) will
internally be forced to zero which will reset both RETRIP and TRBU.
3. When using FunctionMode=Current/CB pos, the same behavior is applicable only when the CB
pos part is active; that is, when the measured current is below the set value I>BlkCBPos.

Technical manual
Current protection
M12353-1 v15
Table 72: CCRBRF technical data

Operate phase current (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -

Operate residual current (2-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Phase current level for blocking of contact (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
function ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time for current detection 10 ms typically -
Reset time for current detection 10 ms maximum * -
Time delay for retrip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for backup trip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for backup trip at multi-phase start at (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is
0 to 2 x Iset greater
Additional time delay for a second backup trip at (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is
0 to 2 x Iset greater
Time delay for alarm for faulty circuit breaker (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
Minimum trip pulse duration (0.010-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±5 ms whichever is greater
* Valid for product version 2.2.3 or later
7.6 Pole discordance protection CCPDSC IP14516-1 v5
M14888-1 v4

Pole discordance protection CCPDSC 52PD
PD
SYMBOL-S V1 EN-US
An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal stress on
rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence
current functions.
Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation persists the
surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation.

Technical manual
Current protection
The Pole discordance protection function (CCPDSC) operates based on information from auxiliary
contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase
currents when required.
CCPDSC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKDBYAR
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
POLE2CL
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL
Figure 63: CCPDSC function block
7.6.4 Signals
Table 73: CCPDSC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLKDBYAR BOOLEAN 0 Block of function at CB single phase auto re-closing cycle
CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Close order to CB
OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Open order to CB
EXTPDIND BOOLEAN 0 Pole discordance signal from CB logic
POLE1OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole one opened indication from CB
POLE1CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole one closed indication from CB
POLE2OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole two opened indication from CB
POLE2CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole two closed indication from CB
POLE3OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole three opened indication from CB
POLE3CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole three closed indication from CB
Table 74: CCPDSC Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal to CB
START BOOLEAN Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay

Technical manual
Current protection
7.6.5 Settings
Table 75: CCPDSC Group settings (basic)

On
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay between trip condition and
trip signal
ContSel Off - - Off Contact function selection
PD signal from CB
Pole pos aux cont.
CurrSel Off - - Off Current function selection
CB oper monitor
Continuous
monitor
CurrUnsymLevel 0 - 100 % 1 80 Unsym magn of lowest phase current
compared to the highest.
CurrRelLevel 0 - 100 %IB 1 10 Current magnitude for release of the
function in % of IBase
Table 76: CCPDSC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Table 77: CCPDSC Monitored data

IMin REAL - A Lowest phase current
IMax REAL - A Highest phase current
7.6.7 Operation principle

M13273-3 v6
The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact based function is
used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker so that
a pole discordance is indicated, see figure 64.
circuit breaker
Pole discordance signal from circuit breaker
en05000287.vsd
Figure 64: Pole discordance external detection logic

Technical manual
Current protection
This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this signal will start a
timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.
There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase contact open and
phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED, see figure 65.
C.B.
poleOneClosed from C.B.
poleTwoClosed from C.B.
poleThreeClosed from C.B.
+
poleOneOpened from C.B.
poleTwoOpened from C.B.
poleThreeOpened from C.B.
en05000288.vsd
Figure 65: Pole discordance signals for internal logic

In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole discordance the
trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay.
Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current measurement. The
sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the
fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is
derived. The smallest and the largest phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is
lower than the setting CurrUnsymLevel times the largest phase current the settable trip timer (tTrip) is
started. The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP signal is a pulse 150 ms long.
The current based pole discordance function can be set to be active either continuously or only
directly in connection to breaker open or close command.
The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing function, so that
the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences with a single pole open if single pole
autoreclosing is used.
M13946-3 v7
The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based Pole discordance protection function
CCPDSC is shown in figure 66.

Technical manual
Current protection
BLOCK
OR
BLKDBYAR
PolPosAuxCont
AND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
Discordance
POLE2CL
detection
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL t 150 ms
t TRIP
AND
OR
PD Signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND
CLOSECMD t+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD
AND
Unsymmetry current
detection
en05000747.vsd
Figure 66: Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function CCPDSC - contact and
current based
CCPDSC is blocked if:
• The IED is in TEST mode and CCPDSC has been blocked from the local HMI
• The input signal BLOCK is high
• The input signal BLKDBYAR is high
The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance protection. It can be
connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block command from external devices or
can be software connected to other internal functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block
command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.
The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single phase autoreclosing
cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal 1PT1 on SMBRRECfunction block. If the
autoreclosing function is an external device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input
in the IED and this binary input is connected to a signalization “1phase autoreclosing in progress”
from the external autoreclosing device.
If the pole discordance protection is enabled, then two different criteria can generate a trip signal
TRIP:
• Pole discordance signaling from the circuit breaker.

• Unsymmetrical current detection.
7.6.7.1 Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker M13946-18 v4
If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close the pole discordance status,
then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole discordance signal derived from the
circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact for each phase connected in parallel, and in series
with one NC contact for each phase connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval tTrip
(0-60 s), a 150 ms trip pulse command TRIP is generated by the Polediscordance function.

Technical manual
Current protection
7.6.7.2 Unsymmetrical current detection M13946-21 v4
Unsymmetrical current indicated if:
• any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the three phases.
• the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevel of IBase.
If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal signal INPS is
turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time delay tTrip if the detection
occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a command to open trip or close and
if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during
unsymmetrical load conditions.
The pole discordance protection is informed that a trip or close command has been given to the
circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command information) and OPENCMD
(for opening command information). These inputs can be connected to terminal binary inputs if the
information are generated from the field (that is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push
buttons) or may be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (that is close
command from a control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

M13279-1 v10
Table 78: CCPDSC technical data

Operate current (0–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Independent time delay between trip (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 30 ms whichever is

condition and trip signal greater

Technical manual
142
Voltage protection
Section 8 Voltage protection

8.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV IP14544-1 v3
M16876-1 v7

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27
3U<
V2 EN-US
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions. The two-step
undervoltage protection function (UV2PTUV) can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for
system restoration at power outages or as a long-time delayed back-up to the primary protection.
UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
It has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to the system service voltage.
UV2PTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
Figure 67: UV2PTUV function block

Technical manual
Voltage protection
8.1.4 Signals
Table 79: UV2PTUV Input signals

U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
Table 80: UV2PTUV Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip

Technical manual
Voltage protection
8.1.5 Settings
Table 81: UV2PTUV Group settings (basic)

On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
for step 1
for step 1
IntBlkSel1 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1
Block of trip
Block all
IntBlkStVal1 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in %
of UBase, step 1
tBlkUV1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level)
blocking for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step
1
On
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
3 out of 3
U2< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 2
for step 2
for step 2
IntBlkSel2 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2
Block of trip
Block all

Technical manual
Voltage protection

IntBlkStVal2 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in %
of UBase, step 2
tBlkUV2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level)
blocking for step 2
2
Table 82: UV2PTUV Group settings (advanced)

tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
Time curve step 2
Linearly decreased
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

Technical manual
Voltage protection
Table 83: UV2PTUV Non group settings (basic)

ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh RMS
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
Value groups

Table 84: UV2PTUV Monitored data

UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) is used to detect low power system voltage. If one,
two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding START signal is
generated. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the
START outputs: the measured voltages 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 have to be lower than the
corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.
UV2PTUV has two voltage-measuring steps with separate time delays. If the voltage remains below
the set value for the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted
trip due to the disconnection of the related high-voltage equipment, a voltage-controlled blocking of
the function is available: if the voltage is lower than the set blocking level, the function is blocked and
no START or TRIP signal is generated. The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for each
step and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.
8.1.7.1 Measurement principle M15326-6 v7
Depending on the value of the ConnType parameter, UV2PTUV can be set to measure phase-to-
earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase fundamental value, phase-to-earth true RMS value or
phase-to-phase true RMS value, and compares it against the set values, U1< and U2<. The voltage-
related settings are made in percentage of the base voltage which is set in kV phase-to-phase
voltage. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage under:
UBase(kV )
U (%) ·
3
and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:
U < (%) × UBase(kV)


Technical manual
Voltage protection
When the phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected, the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root of three.
8.1.7.2 Time delay M15326-10 v13
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay (IDMT).
For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• customer programmable inverse curve
The type A curve is described as:
k
t=
æ Un < -U ö
ç ÷
è Un < ø
where:
Un< Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage
The type B curve is described as:
k × 480
t= 2.0
+ 0.055
æ Un < - U ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è Un < ø
The customer programmable curve can be created as:
é ù
ê ú
ê k×A ú
t=ê pú
+D
ê æ Un < - U ö ú
êçB × -C÷ ú
ëè Un < ø û
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be
an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this
phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un< down to Un< · (1.0 – CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be:
Un< · (1.0 – CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so
that:
CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100

Technical manual
Voltage protection
The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of the different
inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics".
Voltage
UL1
UL2
UL3
IDMT Voltage
Time
Figure 68: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the user set time
delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some
special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition,
with respect to the measured voltage, ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a
user-defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 pickup
for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. After leaving the hysteresis area, the
start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the
hysteresis area. For the undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend
on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the
timer: the timer is reset instantaneously, the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 69 and figure 70.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage Measured
START Voltage
HystAbs1
TRIP
U1<
Time
START
TRIP
Time
Integrator Frozen Timer
Time
Linearly
Instantaneous
decreased IEC05000010-5-en.vsdx
Figure 69: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
START
START
HystAbs1 Measured Voltage
TRIP
U1<
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Time
Instantaneous Linearly decreased
IEC05000011-en-4.vsdx
Figure 70: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different
reset types
Definite timer delay
When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 71. Detailed
information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 72 and figure 73
respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed
stage is ensured.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
ST1
U t1
a tReset1
TR1
t
a<b t
U1< R
b
AND
Figure 71: Logic diagram for step 1, DT operation
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
Figure 72: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
Figure 73: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 operation

Technical manual
Voltage protection
8.1.7.3 Blocking M15326-20 v9
It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV partially or completely, by binary
input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the trip output of
step 1, or both the trip and the START outputs of step 1, are blocked. The characteristic of the
blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking can also be set to Off resulting in
no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2.
In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get very low. The
event will START both the under voltage function and the blocking function, as seen in figure 74. The
delay of the blocking function must be set less than the time delay of under voltage function.
U Disconnection
Normal voltage
U1<
U2<
tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
Figure 74: Blocking function

Technical manual
Voltage protection
8.1.7.4 Design M15326-35 v10
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral voltages or the
three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals
are used. The voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the lowest voltage is used for
the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step undervoltage
protection UV2PTUV is schematically shown in Figure 75.
UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 < U1< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode1 ST1L2
UL2 Comparator Phase 2
1 out of 3
UL2 < U1< 2 out of 3 ST1L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 Start t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 < U1< IntBlkStVal1 &
OR ST1
Trip
Output
START Logic TR1L1
Step 1 TR1L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3
TR1
OR
Comparator ST2L1
UL1 < U2< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode2 ST2L2
Comparator Phase 2
UL2 < U2< 1 out of 3
2 out of 3 Start t2 ST2L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t2Reset
Comparator IntBlkStVal2 &
UL3 < U2< Trip ST2
Output OR
Logic
START TR2L1
Step 2
TR2L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3
TR2
OR
START
OR
TRIP
OR
Figure 75: Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

Technical manual
Voltage protection
M13290-1 v16
Table 85: UV2PTUV technical data

Operate voltage, low and high step (1.0–100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Internal blocking level, step 1 and step 2 (1–50)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Inverse time characteristics for step 1 - See table 580

and step 2, see table 580
Definite time delay, step 1 at 1.2 x Uset to (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is greater
0
Definite time delay, step 2 at 1.2 x Uset to (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is greater
0
Minimum operate time, inverse (0.000–60.000) s ±0.5% or ±40ms whichever is greater
characteristics
Operate time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0 -
8.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV IP14545-1 v3
M17002-1 v8
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59
3U>
SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN V2 EN-US
8.2.2 Functionality OV2PTOV M13798-3 v17
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as sudden power
loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.
Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) function can be used to detect open line ends, normally
then combined with a directional reactive over-power function to supervise the system voltage. When
triggered, the function will cause an alarm, switch in reactors, or switch out capacitor banks.
OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
OV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
Figure 76: OV2PTOV function block
8.2.4 Signals
Table 86: OV2PTOV Input signals

U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase voltage input
SIGNAL
Table 87: OV2PTOV Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip

Technical manual
Voltage protection

8.2.5 Settings
Table 88: OV2PTOV Group settings (basic)

On
On
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
3 out of 3
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 1
for step 1
for step 1
1
On
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
3 out of 3
U2> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 2
for step 2
for step 2
2

Technical manual
Voltage protection
Table 89: OV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Time curve step 1
Linearly decreased
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
Time curve step 2
Linearly decreased
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
IDMT curve, step 2
Table 90: OV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh RMS
Value groups

Technical manual
Voltage protection

Table 91: OV2PTOV Monitored data

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV is used to detect high power system voltage. OV2PTOV
has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or three-phase voltages increase above the set
value, a corresponding START signal is issued. OV2PTOV can be set to START/TRIP, based on 1
out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage
remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the
corresponding trip signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps, and can be either definite time
or inverse time delayed.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage UBase, which is set
in kV, phase-to-phase.
OV2PTOV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase fundamental

value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The choice of measuring is done by
the parameter ConnType.
The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltage.
OV2PTOV will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the set base voltage
UBase. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage over:
U > (%) × UBase( kV )

3
and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:
U > (%) × UBase(kV)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function automatically

introduces division of the base value by the square root of three.
All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> for Step 1
and U2> for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate
the START outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher
than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis is included.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
8.2.7.2 Time delay M15330-10 v12
For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C
k
t=
æ U - Un > ö
ç ÷
è Un > ø
where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage
k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 U n  
The type C curve is described as:
k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U n > ø
The customer programmable curve is defined by the below equation, where A, B, C, D, k and p are
settings:
k×A
t= p
+D
æ U -Un > ö
çB× -C÷
è Un > ø
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be
an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this
phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up to Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be:
Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so
that:

Technical manual
Voltage protection
CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration,
see figure 77. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse
characteristics".
Voltage
IDMT Voltage
UL1
UL2
UL3
Time
Figure 77: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Operation of the trip signal requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set
time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by
selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the START
condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and
tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after that the defined reset
time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition
must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
The hysteresis value for each step is settable HystAbsn (where n means either 1 or 2 respectively) to
allow a high and accurate reset of the function. For OV2PTOV the IDMT reset time is constant and
does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three
ways to reset the timer: either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during
the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP
U1>
HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t
Instantaneous Time
Figure 78: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
START TRIP
START HystAbs1
U1>
Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased
Figure 79: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different
reset types
Definite time delay
When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure 80. Detailed
respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s (where n means either 1 or 2 respectively),
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
ST1
U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay
Figure 80: Logic diagram for step 1, definite time delay, DT operation
U1>
START
TRIP
tReset1
t1
Figure 81: Example for step 1, Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset
U1>
START
TRIP
tReset1
t1
Figure 82: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

Technical manual
Voltage protection
8.2.7.3 Blocking M15330-20 v8
It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV partially or completely, by binary
input signals where:

8.2.7.4 Design M15330-34 v8
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth voltages or the
three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS filters of input voltage signals
are used. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the highest voltage is
used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of
3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step overvoltage
protection (OV2PTOV) is schematically described in figure 83.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 > U1> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST1L2
UL2 Comparator OpMode1 Phase 2
UL2 > U1> 1 out of 3
Start ST1L3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 > U1> & ST1
OR
Trip
START Output TR1L1
Logic
Time integrator Step 1 TR1L2

TRIP
MaxVoltSelect tIreset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3
OR TR1
Comparator ST2L1
UL1 > U2> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST2L2
Comparator OpMode2 Phase 2
UL2 > U2> 1 out of 3
Start ST2L3
2 out of 3
Phase 3 t2
3 out of 3
Comparator t2Reset
UL3 > U2> & ST2
OR
Trip
START Output TR2L1
Logic
Time integrator Step 2 TR2L2

MaxVoltSelect tIreset2 TRIP
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3
TR2
OR
START
OR
TRIP
OR
IEC05000013-WMF V2 EN-US
Figure 83: Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV
M13304-1 v15
Table 92: OV2PTOV technical data

Operate voltage, step 1 and 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Inverse time characteristics for steps 1 - See table 579

and 2, see table 579
Definite time delay, low step (step 1) at 0 (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
to 1.2 x Uset

Technical manual
Voltage protection

Definite time delay, high step (step 2) at 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
to 1.2 x Uset
Minimum operate time, Inverse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater

characteristics
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -
8.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV IP14546-1 v4
8.3.1 Function revision history GUID-22110E0B-DEFB-461F-A437-4D221DB88799 v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.1 -
D 2.2.1 PTP Enhancement
E 2.2.4 -
SEMOD54295-2 v6

Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
2(U0>)
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during earth faults.
Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV) function calculates the residual voltage from
the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from a single voltage input transformer fed
from an open delta or neutral point voltage transformer.
A reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earth faults.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
ROV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR2
BLKST1 START
BLKTR2 ST1
BLKST2 ST2
Figure 84: ROV2PTOV function block
8.3.5 Signals
Table 93: ROV2PTOV Input signals

U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
Table 94: ROV2PTOV Output signals

TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
8.3.6 Settings
Table 95: ROV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Technical manual
Voltage protection
Table 96: ROV2PTOV Group settings (basic)

On
On
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),
step 1 in % of UBase
for step 1
for step 1
1
On
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U2> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 45.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),
step 2 in % of UBase
for step 2
for step 2
2
Table 97: ROV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Time curve step 1
Linearly decreased
curve for step 1
curve for step 1

Technical manual
Voltage protection

curve for step 1
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2
Linearly decreased
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
curve for step 2
IDMT curve, step 2

Table 98: ROV2PTOV Monitored data

ULevel REAL - kV Magnitude of measured voltage
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is used to detect a high residual voltage. The
residual voltage can be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power
transformer or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings are connected
in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the three phase-to-earth voltages, and calculate
the corresponding residual voltage internally in the IED. ROV2PTOV has two steps with separate
time delays. If the residual voltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to
the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time
delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage-related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV, phase-
phase. The set UBase value is divided by sqrt(3) before the set value is calculated.
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values, U1> and U2>.
To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a settable hysteresis has been included.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
8.3.8.2 Time delay M15331-10 v11
For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
• inverse curve A
• inverse curve B
• inverse curve C
k
t=
æ U - Un > ö
ç ÷
è Un > ø
where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage
k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 Un  
The type C curve is described as:
k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U > ø
The customer programmable curve can be created as:
k×A
t= p
+D
æ U -Un > ö
çB× -C÷
è Un > ø
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero, the time delay will be infinite. There will be
an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this
phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up to Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be:
Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so
that:

Technical manual
Voltage protection
CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics".
TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set
time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and by some
special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (IDMT).
If the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is
not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and
tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after the
defined reset time has elapsed.
Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled
again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Also, notice that
for the overvoltage function, IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage
fluctuations during the drop-off period.
There are three ways to reset the timer: the timer is reset instantaneously, the timer value is frozen
during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 85 and
figure 86.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP
U1>
HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t
Instantaneous Time
Figure 85: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

Technical manual
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
START TRIP
START HystAbs1
U1>
Measured
Voltage
Time
START t
TRIP
Time
Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased
Figure 86: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
Definite time delay
When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure 87. Detailed
respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed
stage is ensured.

Technical manual
Voltage protection
ST1
U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay
Figure 87: Logic diagram for step 1, Definite time delay, DT operation
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
Figure 88: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset
U1<
ST1
TR1
tReset1
t1
Figure 89: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

Technical manual
Voltage protection
8.3.8.3 Blocking M15331-18 v7
It is possible to block two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV partially or completely by
binary input signals where:

BLKST2: blocks all start and trip inputs related to step 2
8.3.8.4 Design M15331-32 v7
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive Fourier filters
filter the input voltage signal for the rated frequency. The residual voltage is compared to the set
value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic integration. The design of the function is
schematically described in figure 90.
UN Comparator Phase 1 ST1

UN > U1>
Start TR1
START t1
tReset1
&
Trip
Time integrator Output
tIReset1 TRIP
Logic
ResetTypeCrv1
Step 1
ST2
Comparator Phase 1
UN > U2> TR2
Start
t2
START tReset2
& START
Trip OR
Time integrator Output
TRIP Logic
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TRIP
Step 2 OR
Figure 90: Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

Technical manual
Voltage protection

M13317-2 v16
Table 99: ROV2PTOV technical data

Operate voltage, (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
(0.0–50.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Inverse time characteristics for low and - See table 579

high step, see table
Definite time delay low step (step 1) at 0 (0.00–6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is
to 1.2 x Uset greater
Definite time delay high step (step 2) at 0 (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is

to 1.2 x Uset greater
(0.000-60.000) s
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x U set -

Technical manual
178
Section 9 Secondary system supervision

9.1 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC IP14556-1 v3
M14869-1 v4

Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC - -
9.1.2 Functionality SEMOD113820-4 v13
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (FUFSPVC) is to block voltage measuring functions
at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and the IED in order to avoid
inadvertent operations that otherwise might occur.
The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection methods, negative
sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional delta voltage and delta current
detection.
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse failure
supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice is more associated
with voltage transformer switching during station operations.
FUFSPVC
I3P* BLKZ
U3P* BLKU
BLOCK 3PH
CBCLOSED DLD1PH
MCBOP DLD3PH
DISCPOS STDI
BLKTRIP STDIL1
STDIL2
STDIL3
STDU
STDUL1
STDUL2
STDUL3
Figure 91: FUFSPVC function block

Technical manual
9.1.4 Signals
Table 100: FUFSPVC Input signals

I3P GROUP - Current connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
CBCLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Active when circuit breaker is closed
MCBOP BOOLEAN 0 Active when external MCB opens protected voltage circuit
DISCPOS BOOLEAN 0 Active when line disconnector is open
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operation of function when active
Table 101: FUFSPVC Output signals

BLKZ BOOLEAN Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKU BOOLEAN General start of function
3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase start of function
DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases
STDI BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in current
STDIL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L1
STDU BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in voltage
STDUL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L1
9.1.5 Settings
Table 102: FUFSPVC Group settings (basic)

On
OpMode Off - - UZsIZs Operating mode selection
UNsINs
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR
UNsINs
UZsIZs AND
UNsINs
OptimZsNs
3U0> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of residual overvoltage
element in % of UBase

Technical manual

3I0< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of residual undercurrent
element in % of IBase
3U2> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of neg seq overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I2< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of neg seq undercurrent
element in % of IBase
OpDUDI Off - - Off Operation of change based function
On Off/On
DU> 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level of change in phase voltage
in % of UBase
DI< 1 - 100 %IB 1 15 Operate level of change in phase current
in % of IBase
UPh> 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of phase voltage in % of
UBase
IPh> 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of phase current in % of
IBase
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealln< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of seal-in phase voltage in
% of UBase
IDLD< 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Operate level for open phase current
detection in % of IBase
UDLD< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level for open phase voltage
detection in % of UBase
Table 103: FUFSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Value groups

Table 104: FUFSPVC Monitored data

3I0 REAL - A Magnitude of zero sequence current
3I2 REAL - A Magnitude of negative sequence current
3U0 REAL - kV Magnitude of zero sequence voltage
3U2 REAL - kV Magnitude of negative sequence voltage
9.1.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection M13677-3 v5
The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and voltages in all
three phases and calculates, see figure 92:
• the zero-sequence voltage 3U0

• the zero-sequence current 3I0
• the negative sequence current 3I2
• the negative sequence voltage 3U2

Technical manual
The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0> and 3I0<, 3U2> and 3I2<.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero-sequence voltage
is higher than the set value 3U0> and the measured zero-sequence current is below the set value
3I0<.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative sequence
voltage is higher than the set value 3U2> and the measured negative sequence current is below the
set value 3I2<.
A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence current will
prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the two line ends.
Sequence Detection
3I0< CurrZeroSeq
IL1
Zero 3I0
sequence
filter 100 ms CurrNegSeq
a
IL2 a>b t
b
Negative 3I2
sequence
IL3 filter FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
100 ms
a
a>b t
3I2
VoltZeroSeq
UL1
Zero
sequence a 3U0
a>b
b
filter
UL2 VoltNegSeq
Negative
sequence a 3U2
a>b
UL3 filter b
3U2>
Figure 92: Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part

The calculated values 3U0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3U2 are available as service values on local HMI and
monitoring tool in PCM600.
Input and output signals M13677-19 v6

The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and DLD3PH from dead
line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions occur:
• The input BLOCK is activated

• The input BLKTRIP is activated and the internal signal FuseFailStarted is not present
• The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off
• The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been blocked from the
HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)
The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision function.
It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block command from external
devices or can be software connected to other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a
block command from internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs
and internal function outputs.
The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output from any of the protection functions
included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the operation of the fuse failure is blocked;
a fixed drop-out timer prolongs the block for 100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against

Technical manual
unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for
which the fuse failure might operate.
The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is activated. The dead
line detection signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.
The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C. auxiliary
contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets
the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is
open independent of the setting of OpMode selector. The additional drop-out timer of 150 ms
prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent
function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the output signal BLKU in order
to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The impedance protection
function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that
can cause malfunction of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is connected
to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is disconnected from the system
and the block signal BLKU is generated.
The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions (undervoltage
protection, energizing check and so on) except for the impedance protection.
The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection function.
9.1.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection M13685-3 v8
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 93. The calculation of the changes of
currents and voltages is based on a sample analysis algorithm. The calculated delta quantities are
compared with their respective set values DI< and DU>. The algorithm detects a fuse failure if a
sufficient change in voltage without a sufficient change in current is detected in each phase
separately. The following quantities are calculated in all three phases:
• The change in voltage DU

• The change in current DI
The internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal is activated if the following conditions are fulfilled:
• The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above UPh> for more than 1.5 cycles (i.e.
30 ms in a 50 Hz system)
• The magnitudes of DU in three phases are higher than the corresponding setting DU>
• The magnitudes of DI in three phases are below the setting DI<
• The magnitude of voltages drop in all three phases
• The zero sequence voltage is smaller than 3U0>
In addition to the above conditions, at least one of the following conditions shall be fulfilled in order to
activate the internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal:
• The magnitude of the phase currents in three phases are higher than the setting IPh>
• The circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = True)
The first criterion means that detection of failure in three phases together with high current for the
three phases will set the output. The measured phase current is used to reduce the risk of false fuse
failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused
by fuse failure) may be followed by current change lower than the setting DI<, and therefore a false
fuse failure might occur.
The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled at the same time as circuit
breaker is closed. If CBCLOSED input is connected to FALSE , then only the first criterion can enable
the delta function. If the DUDI detections of three phases set the internal signal FuseFailDetDUDI at

Technical manual
the level high, then the signal FuseFailDetDUDI will remain high as long as the voltages of three
phases are lower then the setting Uph>.
In addition to fuse failure detection, two internal signals DeltaU and DeltaI are also generated by the
delta current and delta voltage DUDI detection algorithm. The internal signals DelatU and DeltaI are
activated when a sudden change of voltage, or respectively current, is detected. The detection of the
sudden change is based on a sample analysis algorithm. In particular DelatU is activated if at least
three consecutive voltage samples are higher then the setting DU>. In a similar way DelatI is
activated if at least three consecutive current samples are higher then the setting DI<. When DeltaU
or DeltaI are active, the output signals STDUL1, STDUL2, STDUL3 and respectively STDIL1,
STDIL2, STDIL3, based on a sudden change of voltage or current detection, are activated with a 20
ms time off delay. The common start output signals STDU or STDI are activated with a 60 ms time off
delay, if any sudden change of voltage or current is detected.
The delta function (except the sudden change of voltage and current detection) is
deactivated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to Off.

Technical manual
DUDI Detection
DUDI detection Phase 1
DeltaIL1
IL1
IL2
IL3 DI detection based on sample analysis OR
DI<
UL1
DU detection based on sample analysis

AND
DU>
1.5 cycle 20 ms DeltaUL1
a
a>b t t
UPh> b
IL1 DeltaIL2
IL2 DUDI detection Phase 2
DeltaUL2
IL3
UL2 Same logic as for phase 1
IL1 DeltaIL3
DUDI detection Phase 3
IL2
DeltaUL3
IL3
UL3 Same logic as for phase 1
UL1
a
ab
IPh> b AND
OR AND
CBCLOSED AND OR
UL2
a
ab
b AND
OR AND
AND OR
UL3
a
ab
b AND
OR AND
AND OR FuseFailDetDUDI
AND
Figure 93: Simplified logic diagram for the DU/DI detection part

Technical manual
intBlock
STDI
AND
20 ms
DeltaIL1 STDIL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaIL2
t STDIL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaIL3
t
STDIL3
AND
STDU
AND
20 ms
DeltaUL1 STDUL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaUL2
t STDUL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaUL3
t
STDUL3
AND
Figure 94: Internal signals DeltaU or DeltaI and the corresponding output signals
9.1.7.3 Dead line detection M13679-44 v4
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 95. A dead phase condition is indicated if
both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their respective setting values UDLD< and
IDLD<. If at least one phase is considered to be dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal
DeadLineDet1Ph is activated. If all three phases are considered to be dead the output DLD3PH is
activated

Technical manual
Dead Line Detection

IL1
a
a<b AllCurrLow
b
AND
IL2
a
a<b
b
IL3
a
a<b
b
IDLD<
DeadLineDet1Ph
UL1
a AND
a<b
b OR DLD1PH
AND
UL2
a AND
a<b
b
AND DLD3PH
UL3 AND
a AND
a<b
b
UDLD<
intBlock
Figure 95: Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part
9.1.7.4 Main logic GUID-D474A49E-D3A8-438C-B7E4-E527FEC2F335 v6
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 96. The fuse failure supervision function
(FUFSPVC) can be switched on or off by the setting parameter Operation to On or Off.
For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode selector, OpMode,
has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating modes for the negative and zero
sequence based algorithms. The different operation modes are:
• Off. The negative and zero sequence function is switched off.

• UNsINs. Negative sequence is selected.
• UZsIZs. Zero sequence is selected.
• UZsIZs OR UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in parallel (OR-
condition for operation).
• UZsIZs AND UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in series (AND-
condition for operation).
• OptimZsNs. Optimum of negative and zero sequence current (the function that has the highest
magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be activated).
The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to On. When selected it
operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.
As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq, FuseFailDetNegSeq

or FuseFailDetDUDI, and the specific functionality is released, the function will activate the output
signal BLKU. The output signal BLKZ will be activated as well if the internal dead phase detection,
DeadLineDet1Ph, is not activated at the same time. The output BLKU can be used for blocking
voltage related measuring functions (under voltage protection, energizing check, and so on). The
output BLKZ shall be used to block the impedance protection functions.
If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting parameter SealIn is set
to On it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase voltages is below the set value USealIn<. This
will keep the BLKU and BLKZ signals activated as long as any phase voltage is below the set value
USealIn<. If all three phase voltages drop below the set value USealIn< and the setting parameter

Technical manual
SealIn is set to On the output signal 3PH will also be activated. The signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ
will now be active as long as any phase voltage is below the set value USealIn<.
If SealIn is set to On the fuse failure condition lasting more then 5 seconds is stored in the non-
volatile memory in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary power interruption or re-start due
to configuration change) it uses the stored value in its non-volatile memory and re-establishes the
conditions that were present before the shut down. All phase voltages must be restored above
USealIn< before fuse failure is de-activated and resets the signals BLKU, BLKZ and 3PH.
The output signal BLKU will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the setting
USealIn< for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence voltage has been above the set
value 3U0> and 3U2> for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents are below the setting IDLD<
(criteria for open phase detection) and the circuit breaker is closed (input CBCLOSED is activated).
If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP
signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block all the voltage related functions when
the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpMode or OpDUDI. An additional drop-out timer of
150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage
dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit
breaker.
The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the output signal BLKU in order
to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The impedance protection
function does not have to be affected since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction
of the distance protection.

Technical manual
Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST
TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes
BLOCK intBlock
OR
BLKTRIP 20 ms 100 ms
AND t t
FusefailStarted
All UL < USealIn<

OR
AND
3PH
AND
SealIn = On AND
AND
Any UL < UsealIn<
FuseFailDetDUDI
AND 5s
OpDUDI = On
OR t
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
AND
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
UNsINs OR
UZsIZs OR
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
OpMode
UZsIZs AND UNsINs
OptimZsNs
OR
CurrZeroSeq
a AND
CurrNegSeq a>b
b
AND
DeadLineDet1Ph 200 ms
AND BLKZ
t OR AND
150 ms
MCBOP t
AND BLKU
60 s
t OR OR
All UL > UsealIn<
AND
VoltZeroSeq 5s
VoltNegSeq OR t
AllCurrLow
CBCLOSED
DISCPOS IEC10000033-2-en.vsd
Figure 96: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main logic

Technical manual

M16069-1 v13
Table 105: FUFSPVC technical data

Operate voltage, zero sequence ±0.5% of Ur
Operate current, zero sequence ±0.5% of Ir
Operate voltage, negative sequence ±0.5% of Ur
Operate current, negative sequence ±0.5% of Ir
Operate voltage change level ±10.0% of Ur
Operate current change level ±10.0% of Ir
Operate phase voltage ±0.5% of Ur
Operate phase current ±0.5% of Ir
Operate phase dead line voltage ±0.5% of Ur
Operate phase dead line current

Operate time, start, 1 ph, at 1 x Ur to 0 Min. = 10 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start, 1 ph, at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms

Technical manual
Control
Section 10 Control
10.1 Interlocking IP15572-1 v2
10.1.1 Logical node for interlocking SCILO IP14138-1 v2
10.1.1.1 Identification
GUID-3EC5D7F1-FDA0-4F0E-9391-08D357689E0C v3

Logical node for interlocking SCILO - 3
10.1.1.2 Functionality M15048-3 v7
The Logical node for interlocking SCILO function is used to enable a switching operation if the
interlocking conditions permit. SCILO function itself does not provide any interlocking functionality.
The interlocking conditions are generated in separate function blocks containing the interlocking
logic.
10.1.1.3 Function block M15049-3 v6
SCILO
POSOPEN EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN
Figure 97: SCILO function block
10.1.1.4 Signals
Table 106: SCILO Input signals

POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN BOOLEAN 0 Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN BOOLEAN 0 Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled
Table 107: SCILO Output signals

EN_OPEN BOOLEAN Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is enabled
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is enabled

Technical manual
Control
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the interlocking
conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end position for example, open,
then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN
and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if
they are enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit
breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable signals come from the interlocking logic. The
outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching
device is needed.
POSOPEN SCILO
POSCLOSE =1 1
EN_OPEN
&
>1
&
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN & EN_CLOSE
>1
&
en04000525.vsd
Figure 98: SCILO function logic diagram
10.2 Apparatus control IP14560-1 v3
The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit breakers,
disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after evaluation of
conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator place selection and
external or internal blockings.
The apparatus control function apparatuses is used for control and supervision of circuit breakers,
disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after evaluation of
conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator place selection and
external or internal blockings.
Apparatus control features:
• Select-Execute principle to give high reliability

• Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation
• Selection and supervision of operator place
• Command supervision
• Block/deblock of operation
• Block/deblock of updating of position indications
• Substitution of position and quality indications
• Overriding of interlocking functions
• Overriding of synchrocheck
• Operation counter
• Suppression of mid position
Two types of command models can be used:
• Direct with normal security

• SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security

Technical manual
Control
In normal security, the command is processed and the resulting position is not supervised. However
with enhanced security, the command is processed and the resulting position is supervised.
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is not
supervised. Enhanced security means that the command is evaluated with an additional supervision
of the status value of the control object. The command sequence with enhanced security is always
terminated by a CommandTermination service primitive and an AddCause telling if the command was
successful or if something went wrong.
Control operation can be performed from the local HMI with authority control if so defined.
The switch controller SCSWI initializes and supervises all functions to properly select and operate
switching primary apparatuses. Each of the 10 switch controllers SCSWI may handle and operate on
one three-phase apparatus.
Each of the 3 circuit breaker controllers SXCBR provides the actual position status and pass the
commands to the primary circuit breaker and supervises the switching operation and positions.
Each of the 9 circuit switch controllers SXSWI provides the actual position status and pass the
commands to the primary disconnectors and earthing switches and supervises the switching
operation and positions.
A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor bank. The
different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the apparatus control functions
directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic sequences.
Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation Automation
system, the object-oriented approach with a function block that handles the interaction and status of
each process object ensures consistency in the process information used by higher-level control
functions.
Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised by one
function block (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals used for the control of a
breaker or a disconnector are almost the same, the same function block type is used to handle these
two types of apparatuses.
The SCSWI function block is connected to an SXCBR function block (for circuit breakers). The
physical process in the switchyard is connected to these two function blocks via binary inputs and
outputs.
Three types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and supervision within the
bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a control function reflecting the switchyard
configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard configuration. These types are:
• Bay control QCBAY

• Switch controller SCSWI
• Circuit breaker SXCBR
The functions Local Remote (LOCREM) and Local Remote Control (LOCREMCTRL), to handle the
local/remote switch, also belong to the apparatus control function.
The principles of operation, function blocks, input and output signals and setting parameters for all
these functions are described below.

Technical manual
Control
10.2.3 Error handling GUID-6C31D291-74E8-46A3-8FC2-D3959C2458A5 v9
Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be set with a
value. Table 108 describes the cause values given on local HMI. The translation to AddCause
values specified in IEC 61850-8-1 is shown in Table 109. For IEC 61850-8-1 edition 2 only
addcauses defined in the standard are used, for edition 1 also a number of vendor specific causes
are used. The values are available in the command response to commands from IE C61850-8-1
clients. An output L_CAUSE on the function block for Switch controller (SCSWI) and Circuit breaker
(SXCBR) indicates the value of the cause during the latest command if the function specific
command evaluation has been started. The causes that are not always reflected on the output
L_CAUSE, with description of the typical reason are listed in table 110.
Table 108: Values for "cause" signal
Cause Name Description Supported

number
0 None Control action successfully executed X
1 Not-supported Given for Cancel request with Direct Control in Ready state X
2 Blocked-by-switching- Not successful since one of the downstream Loc switches like X
hierarchy in CSWI has the value TRUE
3 Select-failed Cancelled due to an unsuccessful selection (select service) X
4 Invalid-position Control action is aborted due to invalid switch position (Pos in X
XCBR)
5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position (Pos in XCBR) X
6 Parameter-change-in- Control action is blocked due to running parameter change X
execution
7 Step-limit Control action is blocked, because tap changer has reached the X
limit (EndPosR or EndPosL in YLTC)
8 Blocked-by-Mode Control action is blocked, because the LN (CSWI or XCBR) is in X
a mode (Mod) which doesn’t allow any switching
9 Blocked-by-process Control action is blocked due to some external event at process X
level that prevents a successful operation, for example blocking
indication (EEHealth in XCBR)
10 Blocked-by-interlocking Control action is blocked due to interlocking of switching X
devices (in CILO attribute EnaOpn.stVal=”FALSE” or
EnaCls.stVal=”FALSE”
11 Blocked-by- Control action with synchrocheck is aborted due to exceed of X
synchrocheck time limit and missing synchronism condition
12 Command-already-in- Control, select or cancel service is rejected, because control X
execution action is already running
13 Blocked-by-health Control action is blocked due to some internal event that X
prevents a successful operation (Health)
14 1-of-n-control Control action is blocked because another control action in a X
domain (for example, substation) is already running (in any
XCBR of that domain, the DPC.stSeld=”TRUE”)
15 Abortion-by-cancel Control action is aborted due to cancel service X
16 Time-limit-over Control action is terminated due to exceed of some time limit X
17 Abortion-by-trip Control action is aborted due to a trip (PTRC with X
ACT.general=”TRUE”)
18 Object-not-selected Control action is rejected, because control object was not X
selected
19 Object-already-selected Select action is not executed because the addressed object is X
already selected

Technical manual
Control
Cause Name Description Supported

number
20 No-access-authority Control action is blocked due to lack of access authority
21 Ended-with-overshoot Control action executed but the end position has overshoot
22 Abortion-due-to- Control action is aborted due to deviation between the
deviation command value and the measured value
23 Abortion-by- Control action is aborted due to the loss of connection with the
communication-loss client that issued the control
24 Blocked-by-command Control action is blocked due to the data attribute CmdBlk.stVal X
is TRUE
26 Inconsistent- The parameters between successive control services are not X
parameters consistent, for example the ctlNum of Select and Operate
service are different
27 Locked-by-other-client Another client has already reserved the object X
-22 Wrong-Ctl-model Command from client uses wrong control model X
-23 Blocked-by-command Blocked by command X
-24 Blocked-for-open-cmd Blocked for Open command X
-25 Blocked-for-close-cmd Blocked for Close Command X
-30 Long-operation-time Operation time too long X
-31 Switch-not-start-moving Switch did not start moving X
-32 Persistent- Switch stopped in intermediate state X
intermediate-state
-33 Switch-returned-to-init- Switch returned to the initial position X
pos
-34 Switch-in-bad-state Switch is in a bad position state X
-35 Not-expected-final- Switch did not reach the expected final position X
position
Table 109: Translation of cause values for IEC 61850 edition 2 and edition 1
Internal Cause AddCause in IEC 61850-8-1 Name

Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
0 25 0 None
1 1 1 Not-supported
2 2 2 Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
3 3 3 Select-failed
4 4 4 Invalid-position
5 5 5 Position-reached
6 6 6 Parameter-change-in-execution
7 7 7 Step-limit
8 8 8 Blocked-by-Mode
9 9 9 Blocked-by-process
10 10 10 Blocked-by-interlocking
11 11 11 Blocked-by-synchrocheck
12 12 12 Command-already-in-execution
13 13 13 Blocked-by-health
14 14 14 1-of-n-control

Technical manual
Control
Internal Cause AddCause in IEC 61850-8-1 Name

Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
15 15 1 Abortion-by-cancel
16 16 16 Time-limit-over
17 17 17 Abortion-by-trip
18 18 18 Object-not-selected
19 19 3 Object-already-selected
20 20 3 No-access-authority
24 24 -23 Blocked-by-command
26 26 6 Inconsistent-parameters
27 27 12 Locked-by-other-client
-22 0 -22 Wrong-Ctl-model
-23 24 -23 Blocked-by-command
-24 9 -24 Blocked-for-open-cmd
-25 9 -25 Blocked-for-close-cmd
-30 16 -30 Long-operation-time
-31 16 -31 Switch-not-start-moving
-32 4 -32 Persistent-intermediate-state
-33 22 -33 Switch-returned-to-init-pos
-34 4 -34 Switch-in-bad-state
-35 22 -35 Not-expected-final-position
Table 110: Cause values not reflected on the output L_CAUSE
Cause number Cause description Conditions

3 Select-failed Canceled due to an unsuccessful selection (select
service)
8 Blocked-by-Mode Control action is blocked because the LN (CSWI)
is in a mode (Mod) which doesn’t allow any
switching or does not match the mode of the
command.
12 Command-already-in-execution Control, select or cancel service is rejected
because control action is already running.
13 Blocked-by-health Control action is blocked due to some internal
event that prevents a successful operation
(Health).
16 Time-limit-over Control action is terminated due to exceed of
some time limit.
18 Object-not-selected Control action is rejected because control object
was not selected.
19 Object-already-selected Select action is not executed because the
addressed object is already selected.
20 No-access-authority Control action is blocked due to lack of access
authority.
26 Inconsistent-parameters The parameters between successive control
services are not consistent, for example the
ctlNum of Select and Operate service are
different.
27 Locked-by-other-client Another client has already reserved the object.

Technical manual
Control
10.2.4 Bay control QCBAY IP15597-1 v2
The Bay control (QCBAY) function is used together with Local remote and local remote control
functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY also provides blocking
functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay.
QCBAY
LR_OFF PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID LOC
BL_UPD STA
BL_CMD REM
Figure 99: QCBAY function block
10.2.4.3 Signals
Table 111: QCBAY Input signals

LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position
LR_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command
Table 112: QCBAY Output signals

PSTO INTEGER Value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN Function is blocked for commands
LOC BOOLEAN Local operation allowed
STA BOOLEAN Station operation allowed
REM BOOLEAN Remote operation allowed

Technical manual
Control
10.2.4.4 Settings
Table 113: QCBAY Non group settings (basic)

AllPSTOValid Priority - - Priority Override Priority of originators,
No priority commands from both local, station and
remote are allowed
RemoteIncStation No - - No Both Station and Remote control are
Yes allowed but not Local when local remote
switch is in remote
10.2.4.5 Operation principle

M13446-4 v8
The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and blocking
conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch control functions and voltage control
functions. The functionality of the Bay control (QCBAY) function is mainly described by the LLN0
node in the IEC 61850-8-1 edition 2 standard, applied to one bay. In IEC 61850 edition 1 the
functionality is not described by the LLN0 node or any other node, therefore the Bay control function
is represented as a vendor specific node in edition 1.
Local panel switch M13446-7 v8

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch connected to
this function can have three positions (remote/local/off). The positions are here defined so that
remote means that operation is allowed from station and/or remote level and local means that
operation is allowed from the IED level. The local/remote switch is also on the control/protection IED
itself, which means that the position of the switch and its validity information are connected internally,
not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted separately from the IED the signals are connected to
the function via I/O boards.
When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to select this) is in Off
position, all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If the position for the local/remote
switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to
operate.
To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the function blocks
LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to QCBAY.
Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) M13446-16 v11

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source To Operate,
PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch position according to
Table 114. In addition, there are two settings and one command that affect the value of the PSTO
signal.
When the external switch is in Off position, or invalid position, the output always shows the actual
state of the switch (0 for Off and 3 for Invalid). In these cases, it is not possible to control anything,
and the setting AllPSTOValid has no effect on the PSTO output.
If the setting AllPSTOValid is set to No Priority and the LR-switch position is in Local or Remote
state, the PSTO output is set to 5 (all), that is, it is permitted to operate from local, station and remote
level without any priority.
The LocSta command value is forced to FALSE if AllPSTOValid is set to No priority.
If the setting RemoteIncStation is set to Yes and the LR-switch position is in Remote state, the PSTO
output is set to 2 (Station or Remote), that is, it is permitted to operate from both station and remote
level without any priority.

Technical manual
Control
If the LR-switch position is in Remote state, and AllPSTOValid is set to Priority and RemoteIncStation
is set to No, the switching between station and remote level control is done through the command
LocSta. The command is accessible only through the IEC 61850 Edition 2 protocol.
Table 114: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel AllPSTOVali RemoteInc LocSta.CtlVa PSTO LED Possible

switch d Station l (command) value indications on locations that
positions (setting) (setting) LHMI shall be able
to operate
0 = Off - - - 0 Remote and Not possible
Local Off to operate
1 = Local Priority - - 1 Remote Off, Local Panel
Local On
1 = Local No priority - - 5 Remote and Local, Station
Local On or Remote
level without
any priority
2 = Remote Priority No TRUE 6 Remote On, Station level
Local Off
2 = Remote Priority No FALSE 7 Remote On, Remote level
Local Off
2 = Remote Priority Yes - 2 Remote On, Station or
Local Off Remote level
2 = Remote No priority - - 5 Remote and Local, Station
Local On or Remote
level without
any priority
3 = Faulty - - - 3 Remote and Not possible
Local to operate
Flashing
Blockings M13446-50 v6
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the possibility for
the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within a complete bay.
The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:
• Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related to apparatus
positions for all configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all configured functions
within the bay.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The password will
be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in the IED, otherwise the
default authority level can handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined
with the IED Users tool in PCM600.
10.2.5 Local/Remote switch LOCREM IP16319-1 v3
M17086-3 v11
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are connected via the function
blocks local remote (LOCREM) and local remote control (LOCREMCTRL) to the Bay control
(QCBAY) function block. The parameter ControlMode in function block LOCREM is set to choose if
the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch connected via
binary inputs.

Technical manual
Control
LOCREM
CTRLOFF OFF
LOCCTRL LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL VALID
Figure 100: LOCREM function block
LOCREMCTRL
^PSTO1 HMICTR1
^PSTO2 HMICTR2
^PSTO3 HMICTR3
^PSTO4 HMICTR4
^PSTO5 HMICTR5
^PSTO6 HMICTR6
^PSTO7 HMICTR7
^PSTO8 HMICTR8
^PSTO9 HMICTR9
^PSTO10 HMICTR10
^PSTO11 HMICTR11
^PSTO12 HMICTR12
Figure 101: LOCREMCTRL function block
10.2.5.2 Signals
Table 115: LOCREM Input signals

CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control
LHMICTRL INTEGER 0 LHMI control
Table 116: LOCREM Output signals

OFF BOOLEAN Control is disabled
LOCAL BOOLEAN Local control is activated
REMOTE BOOLEAN Remote control is activated
VALID BOOLEAN Outputs are valid
Table 117: LOCREMCTRL Input signals

PSTO1 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 1

Technical manual
Control

Table 118: LOCREMCTRL Output signals

HMICTR1 INTEGER Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
10.2.5.3 Settings
Table 119: LOCREM Non group settings (basic)

ControlMode Internal LR-switch - - Internal LR-switch Control mode for internal/external LR-
External LR-switch switch
10.2.5.4 Operation principle M17087-3 v9
The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the local/remote switch.
The connections are seen in Figure 102, where the inputs on function block LOCREM are connected
to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When the local HMI is used, the inputs are not used.
The switching between external and local HMI source is done through the parameter ControlMode.
The outputs from the LOCREM function block control the output PSTO (Permitted Source To
Operate) on Bay control (QCBAY).

Technical manual
Control
LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM
LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM
LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO 10 HMICTR 10
PSTO 11 HMICTR 11
PSTO 12 HMICTR 12
Figure 102: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two bays and two
screen pages
If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be different for the
included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the local/remote switch can be different
depending on which single line diagram screen page that is presented on the local HMI. The function
block Local remote control (LOCREMCTRL) controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/
remote position to applicable bay and screen page.
The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The password will be
requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined in the IED. Otherwise the
default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords
are defined with the IED Users tool in PCM600.
10.2.6 Switch controller SCSWI IP15603-1 v2
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly select and operate
switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle and operate on one multi-phase
device or up to three one-phase devices.

Technical manual
Control
SCSWI
BLOCK EXE_OP
PSTO EXE_CL
L_SEL SEL_OP
L_OPEN SEL_CL
L_CLOSE SELECTED
AU_OPEN RES_RQ
AU_CLOSE START_SY
BL_CMD CANC_SY
RES_GRT POSITION
RES_EXT OPENP OS
SY_INPRO CLOSEPOS
SYNC_OK POLEDISC
EN_OPEN CMD_BLK
EN_CLOSE L_CAUSE
XPOSL1* POS_INTR
XPOSL2* XEXINF
XPOSL3*
Figure 103: SCSWI function block
10.2.6.3 Signals
Table 120: SCSWI Input signals

PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection
L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local automation function
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local automation function
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT BOOLEAN 0 Positive acknowledge that all reservations are made
RES_EXT BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 0 Closing is permitted at set to true by the synchrocheck
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation
XPOSL1 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

Technical manual
Control
Table 121: SCSWI Output signals

EXE_OP BOOLEAN Execute command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Execute command for close direction
SEL_OP BOOLEAN Selected for open command
SEL_CL BOOLEAN Selected for close command
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
RES_RQ BOOLEAN Request signal to the reservation function
START_SY BOOLEAN Starts the external synchronizing function
CANC_SY BOOLEAN Cancels the external synchronizing function, started through
START_SY
POSITION INTEGER Position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position indication
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Closed position indication
POLEDISC BOOLEAN The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after a set time
CMD_BLK BOOLEAN Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
POS_INTR BOOLEAN Stopped in intermediate position
XEXINF GROUP SIGNAL Execution information to XCBR, XSWI & XLNPROXY
GUID-7DABB496-EABE-48A4-8078-7ED5D6D4FE14 v3
AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are used to issue automated commands. They work
without regard to how the operator place selector, PSTO, is set. In order to have
effect on the outputs EXE_OP and EXE_CL, the corresponding enable input,
EN_OPEN respectively EN_CLOSE must be set, and that no interlocking is active.
L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are used for local command sequence connected to
binary inputs. In order to have effect, the operator place selector, PSTO, must be set
to local or to remote with no priority. If the control model used is Select before
operate, Also the corresponding enable input must be set, and no interlocking is
active. The L_SEL input must be set before L_OPEN or L_CLOSE is operated, if the
control model is Select before operate.
If one multi-phase XCBR or two single-phase XCBR is used for a two- or three-
phase system, two or more of the inputs XPOSL1, XPOSL2 and XPOSL3 are
connected to the same source.

Technical manual
Control
10.2.6.4 Settings
Table 122: SCSWI Non group settings (basic)

CtlModel Dir Norm - - SBO Enh Specifies control model type
SBO Enh
PosDependent Always permitted - - Always permitted Permission to operate depending on the
Not perm 00/11 position
Not perm cPos
Not perm cPos/
00/11
tSelect 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time between select and
execute signals
tResResponse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Allowed time from reservation request to
reservation granted
tSynchrocheck 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil
close conditions
tSynchronizing 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 0.00 Supervision time to get the signal
synchronizing in progress
tExecutionFB 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time from command execution
to termination
tPoleDiscord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Allowed time to have discrepancy
between the poles
SuppressMidPos Off - - On Mid-position is suppressed during time
On tIntermediate; tIntermediate is set on
each connected XCBR/XSWI function
individually
InterlockChk Sel & Op phase - - Sel & Op phase Selection if interlock check should be
Op phase done in select phase

M13484-4 v4
The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select - execute sequence,
that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation are fulfilled. The involved functions for
these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation, blockings and synchrocheck.
Control handling M13484-6 v8

.
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with normal security"
and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The parameter CtlModel defines which
one of the two control models is used. The control model "direct with normal security" does not
require a select whereas, the "SBO with enhanced security" command model requires a select
before execution. The command sequence for a command with control mode SBO with enhanced
security is shown in figure 104, with control mode direct with normal security is shown in figure 105.

Technical manual
Control
Reservation
Client SCSWI SXCBR
logic
select
SEL_CL = TRUE
RES_RQ = TRUE
tReservation
Response
tSelect
RES_GRT = TRUE
SELECTED = TRUE
selectAck/AddCause = 0
requestedPosition = 10
opRcvd = TRUE
EXE_CL
opOK = TRUE, tOpOk

operateAck/AddCause = 0
operateAck/AddCause = 0
tExecutionFB
POSITION = 00, timeStamp

cmdTermination/AddCause = 0

cmdTermination/AddCause = 0
SELECTED = FALSE
SEL_CL = FALSE
RES_RQ = FALSE
RES_GRT = FALSE
IEC16000083=1=en=Original.vsdx
Figure 104: Example of command sequence for a successful close command when the control
model SBO with enhanced security is used
Reservation SwitchCtrl Switch

client
core core core
requestedPosition = 10
opRcvd = TRUE
RES_RQ
tReservation
Response
RES_GRT = TRUE
EXE_CL
opOK = TRUE, tOpOk
operateAck/AddCause = 0 operateAck/AddCause = 0
POSITION = 00, timeStamp POSITION = 00, timeStamp

cmdTermination/
POSITION = 10, timeStamp AddCause = 0
RES_RQ = FALSE
RES_GRT = FALSE
Figure 105: Example of command sequence for a successful close command when the control
model direct with normal security is used
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is not
supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in three steps, the
selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each step ends up with a pulsed
signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in
one of the steps in the command sequence, the sequence is terminated. The last error (L_CAUSE)
can be read from the function block and used for example at commissioning.
Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter PosDependent
is set to Not perm 00/11 or Not perm cPos/00/11, and the position is in intermediate state or in bad

Technical manual
Control
state, the command is rejected with the cause Invalid-position. If the parameter is set to Not perm
cPos or Not perm cPos/00/11 and the command is to move to the current position, the command is
rejected with the cause Position-reached. If the parameter is set to Always permitted the execution
command is sent independent of the position value.
Evaluation of position M13484-14 v5

The position output from the switch (SXCBR) is connected to the switch controller SCSWI. The
XPOSL1, XPOSL2 and XPOSL3 input signals receive the position, time stamps and quality attributes
of the position which is used for further evaluation.
In the case when there are two or more one-phase switches connected to the switch control function,
the switch control will "merge" the position of the switches to the resulting multi-phase position. In the
case when the position differ between the one-phase switches, following principles will be applied:
All switches in open position: switch control position = open

All switches in closed position: switch control position = closed
At least one switch in open position and the switch control position = intermediate
other(s) in closed position:
Any switch in intermediate position: switch control position = intermediate
Any switch in bad state: switch control position = bad state
The time stamp of the output multi-phase position from switch control will have the time stamp of the
last changed phase when it reaches the end position. When it goes to intermediate position or bad
state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase.
In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change position at any
time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discordance and is supervised by this function. In
case of a pole discordance situation, that is, the positions of the one-phase switches are not equal for
a time longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.
In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values from the switch
module circuit breaker (SXCBR). At error the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.
Blocking principles M13484-37 v5

The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY) and via the IEC
61850 communication from the operator place.
The different blocking possibilities are:
• Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of position.

• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is active, but
no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and
configuration data is visible.
The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this function, that is, no
blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other functions. The above blocking outputs
are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Dependence on operator place GUID-AB327F15-AF44-4ACC-8FA5-2A52AE4AE090 v5

For the commands from a communication protocol, such as IEC 61850-8-1, and through the inputs
L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE, the operator place is evaluated, and only the commands from
actual operator place are accepted, see Table 114. Commands through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN
and L_CLOSE are always from the local operator place. For commands through the inputs
AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE, the operator place is only evaluated so that it is not set to Off or is
invalid.

Technical manual
Control
Interaction with synchrocheck and synchronizing functions M13484-47 v5

The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and the synchronizing
function (SESRSYN). It is assumed that the synchrocheck function is continuously in operation and
gives the result to SCSWI. The result from the synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close
execution. If the operator performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the
synchrocheck state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function,
SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function Circuit breaker (SXCBR).
When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, SCSWI will send a start
signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the closing command to SXCBR
when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see Figure 106. If no synchronizing function is
included, the timer for supervision of the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means
no start of the synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-by-synchrocheck" in
the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in Figure 110.
SCSWI SXCBR
EXE_CL
OR CLOSE
SYNC_OK
START_SY
CANC_SY
SY_INPRO
SESRSYN
CLOSECB
Synchro Synchronizing
check function
Figure 106: Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (synchrocheck and

synchronizing function) and SXCBR function
Time diagrams M13484-51 v8

The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time supervision
conditions. These timers are explained here.
The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute command
signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the selection of the
object to operate.
select
execute command
tSelect
timer t1 t1>tSelect, then long-
operation-time in 'cause'
is set
en05000092.vsd
Figure 107: tSelect

Technical manual
Control
The Long-operation-time cause (-30) is only given on the output L_CAUSE. It is not
sent on protocols since the selection has already received a positive response, and
no operation has been issued. If an operation is issued after the time out, the
negative response is Object-not-selected.
The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the reservation, that
is, the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation granted from all bays involved
in the reservation function.
select
reservation request RES_RQ
reservation granted RES_GRT

t1>tResResponse, then 1-
tResResponse
of-n-control in 'cause' is
timer t1
set
Figure 108: tResResponse

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the command
termination, see Figure 109.
execute command
position L1 open
close
position L2 open
close
position L3 open
close
cmd termination L1
cmd termination L2
cmd termination L3
cmd termination *
position open
close
t1>tExecutionFB, then
tExecutionFB timer long-operation-time in
t1 'cause' is set
* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample . APCtExecutionFB=IEC0

5000094=2=en=Original
.vsd
Figure 109: tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the execute
command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the time the execute
command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not start. The start signal for the
synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck conditions are not fulfilled.

Technical manual
Control
The parameter tSynchronizing is used to define the maximum allowed time between the start signal
for synchronizing and the confirmation that synchronizing is in progress.
execute command
SYNC_OK
tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY
SY_INPRO
tSynchronizing t2>tSynchronizing, then

t2 blocked-by-synchrocheck in
'cause' is set
en05000095.vsd
Figure 110: tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing
10.2.7 Circuit breaker SXCBR IP15614-1 v3
The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform
the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form of circuit
breakers via binary output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.
SXCBR
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE SUBSTED
BL_OPEN OP_BLKD
BL_CLOSE CL_BLKD
BL_UPD UPD_BLKD
POSOP EN POSITION
POSCLOSE OPENP OS
CBOPCAP CLOSEPOS
TR_OPEN TR_POS
TR_CLOSE CNT_VAL
RS_CNT L_CAUSE
EEH_WARN EEHEALTH
EEH_ALM CBOPCAP
XIN
Figure 111: SXCBR function block

Technical manual
Control
10.2.7.3 Signals
Table 123: SXCBR Input signals

LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
CBOPCAP INTEGER 3 Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = CO, 4 = OCO, 5
= COCO, 6+ = More
TR_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN GROUP - Execution information from CSWI
SIGNAL
Table 124: SXCBR Output signals

XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for XCBR and XSWI
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
SUBSTED BOOLEAN Indication that the position is substituted
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
TR_POS INTEGER Truck position indication
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or alarm, 2=Warning,
3=Alarm
CBOPCAP INTEGER Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = CO, 4 = OCO, 5
= COCO, 6+ = More

Technical manual
Control
10.2.7.4 Settings
Table 125: SXCBR Non group settings (basic)

tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count
value)

M13487-4 v9
The circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is used by other functions such as, for example, switch
controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client residing in another IED
or the operator place. The SXCBR function executes commands, evaluates block conditions and
evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be
allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function
indicates an appropriate "cause" value, see Table 108.
SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value can be read
remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from local HMI, a binary input or remotely from
the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point Generic Control 8 signals
(SPC8GAPC) for example. The health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored
according to IEC 61850-8-1. The operation counter functionality and the external equipment health
supervision are independent sub-functions of the circuit breaker function.
Local/Remote switch M13487-7 v4

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/remote switch position
from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means that change of
position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command
from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of
position) are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of
the local/remote switch is described in Figure 112.
Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR
From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
Figure 112: Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles M13487-12 v7

SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals is that they
will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch controller, protection functions and
autoreclosure.

Technical manual
Control
The blocking possibilities are:
• Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for the open command. Note that
this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate command.
• Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for the close command. Note that
this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate command.
• Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values. Other
signals related to the position will be reset.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is active, but no
outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional and
configuration data is visible.
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Substitution M13487-22 v5
The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position and quality of the switch. The
typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that the real process
value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR will then use the manually entered value instead of the
value for positions determined by the process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position indication

and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution is enabled, the other
signals related to the position follow the substituted position. The substituted values
are stored in a non-volatile memory. If the function is blocked or blocked for update
when the substitution is released, the position value is kept the same as the last
substitution value, but the quality is changed to "questionable, old data", indicating
that the value is old and not reliable.
When the position of the SXCBR is substituted, its IEC 61850-8-1 data object is
marked as “substituted", in addition to the substituted quality, but the position quality
of the connected SCSWI is not dependent on the substitution indication in the
quality, so it does not show that it is derived from a substituted value.
Time diagrams M13487-28 v6

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate. tStartMove
supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate
defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position. Figure 113 explains these two timers
during the execute phase.

Technical manual
Control
EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove
if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
Figure 113: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the minimum length of the execute output pulses to be
sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command can have
different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse. Figure 114 shows the principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse
parameter will have effect on both execute output pulses. However, as long as the OPEN or CLOSE
inputs are active, the corresponding execute output will remain active if the operation is allowed, thus
overriding AdaptivePulse parameter.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
Figure 114: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive and the activating input is not still active, it is not possible for the
pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when the activating input is reset and either of the following
happens:

Technical manual
Control
• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set
to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch not start moving, that is tStartMove has elapsed for normal
commands, or tIntermediate has elapsed starting from intermediate position, and the position
indications are valid.
If either of the position inputs are invalid or unconnected, the combined position is considered as
invalid. Then the execute output pulse resets at earliest when time tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has
elapsed.
If the breaker reaches the final position before the execution pulse time has elapsed,
and AdaptivePulse is not true, then the function waits for the end of the execution
pulse before indicating the activating function that the command is complete.
If the activating input remains active when the breaker has reached its final position
and the execution pulse time has elapsed, then the function waits for the reset of the
activating input before indicating that the command is complete.
There is one exception to the first item above: if the primary device is in open position and an open
command is executed or if the primary device is in closed position and a close command is executed.
In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true,
the execute output pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false, the execution output remains active until the
pulse duration timer has elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS=1) when a
command is executed, the execute output pulse resets at earliest when timer
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown in
Figure 115 .
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE
tOpenPulse
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
Figure 115: Open command when valid open position is indicated

Technical manual
Control
10.2.8 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY
10.2.8.1 Functionality GUID-11F9CA1C-8E20-489B-822B-34DACC59553A v1
The proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE (XLNPROXY) gives an internal
representation of the position status and control response for a switch modelled in a breaker IED.
This representation is identical to that of an SXCBR function.
10.2.8.2 Function block GUID-408513CD-A87E-45E8-8E44-24E153947F02 v1
XLNPROXY
BEH* XPOS
BEH_VALID* SELECTED
LOC* OP_BLKD
LOC_VALID* CL_BLKD
BLKOPN* OPENPOS
BLKOPN_V* CLOSEPOS
BLKCLS* CNT_VAL
BLKCLS_V* L_CAUSE
POSVAL* EEHEALTH
POSVAL_V* OPCAP
OPCNT*
OP_CNT_V*
BLK
BLK_VAL
STSELD
STSELD_V
OPRCVD
OPRCVD_V
OPOK
OPOK_VAL
EEHEALTH
EEH_VAL
OPCAP
OPCAP_V
COMMVALID
XIN
Figure 116: XLNPROXY function block
10.2.8.3 Signals
Table 126: XLNPROXY Input signals

BEH INTEGER -1 Behaviour
BEH_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BEH input
LOC BOOLEAN 0 Local control behaviour
LOC_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on LOC input
BLKOPN BOOLEAN 0 Block opening
BLKOPN_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BLKOPN input
BLKCLS BOOLEAN 0 Block closing
BLKCLS_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BLKCLS input
POSVAL INTEGER 0 Switch position, Pos.stVal
POSVAL_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on POSVAL input
OPCNT INTEGER -1 Operation counter
OPCNT_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPCNT input

Technical manual
Control

BLK BOOLEAN 0 Dynamic blocking of function described by the LN
BLK_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on BLK input
STSELD BOOLEAN 0 The controllable data is in the status "selected”
STSELD_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on STSELD input
OPRCVD BOOLEAN 0 Operate command for a controllable data object received
OPRCVD_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPRCVD input
OPOK BOOLEAN 0 Operate command for a controllable data object accepted
OPOK_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPOK input
EEHEALTH INTEGER -1 External equipment health
EEHEALTH_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on EEHEALTH input
OPCAP INTEGER -1 Operating capability
OPCAP_VLD BOOLEAN 0 Valid data on OPCAP input
COMMVALID BOOLEAN 0 Communication valid
XIN GROUP - Execution information from CSWI
SIGNAL
Table 127: XLNPROXY Output signals

XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close commands
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or alarm, 2=Warning,
3=Alarm
OPCAP INTEGER Switch / breaker operating capability
10.2.8.4 Settings
Table 128: XLNPROXY Non group settings (basic)

SwitchType Circuit Breaker - - Circuit Breaker 0 = CB, 1 = Load Break, 2 =
Load Break Disconnector, 3 = Earthing Switch, 4 =
Disconnector High Speed Earthing Switch
Earthing Switch
HS Earth Switch
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate position
GUID-A4CCC681-D4D8-4534-905D-1D8AD40E923B v1
The default values of the inputs BEH, OPCNT, EEHEALTH and OPCAP are set to -1
to denote that they are not connected.

Technical manual
Control
10.2.8.5 Operation principle GUID-D2679E0E-ABB5-46F0-AD9C-F6E8E8099534 v1
The proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE (XLNPROXY) is intended to be used when
the switch (XCBR) is modelled and controlled in a breaker IED or similar unit on the process bus.
XLNPROXY packages the signals from the GOOSE receive function, normally GOOSEXLNRCV, into
the same format as used from SXCBR to SCSWI. It makes a similar evaluation of the command
response as SXCBR when a command is issued from the connected SCSWI.
10.2.8.6 Position supervision GUID-95C72346-A577-4F0A-8584-8E1593B9B947 v1
XLNPROXY has two outputs for position indication: OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS. Position is a
double point indication and the OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are binary outputs intended to be used
for condition logics to protection and control functions
Normally, the position outputs, OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS, follow the value of the input POSVAL.
However, if the POSVAL_V input is FALSE, the communication is lost (COMMVALID = FALSE), or
the quality of the position received is bad, the OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are both set to FALSE.
10.2.8.7 Command response evaluation GUID-A2CDC1AE-A6F5-478B-B6E5-3442C54212D8 v2
The command evaluation is triggered through the group input XIN that is connected to the SCSWI
function controlling the switch.
If an operation is initiated by the SCSWI, the XLNPROXY function checks if the switch is blocked for
the operation direction and that the position moves to the desired position within the two time limits
tStartMove and tIntermediate. The default values for tStartMove and tIntermediate are for a breaker.
The typical values for a disconnector are:
• tStartMove = 3s
• tIntermediate = 15s
In most cases, tStartMove and tIntermediate can be set to the same values as in the
source XCBR function. However, if the time limits are set very close to the actual
movement times of the apparatus, compensation may be needed for the
communication delays and differences in cycle time of the XLNPROXY function and
the source function. The compensation should be in the range of 0 - 5ms.
When the switch has started moving, it issues a response to the SCSWI function that the operation
has started. If it does not start moving within tStartMove, the command is deemed as failed, and a
cause is raised on the L_CAUSE output and sent to the SCSWI. The different causes it can identify
are listed in order of priority in table 1. The detection of the different ways of blocking is done while
waiting for movement of the switch, but the cause is not given until the tStartMove has elapsed.
Table 129: Possible cause values from XLNPROXY
IEC61850 IEC61850 Cause Description Conditions

ED1 ED2
8 8 Blocked-by-Mode The BEH input is 5.
2 2 Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy The LOC input indicates that only local commands are
allowed for the breaker IED function.
-24 9 Blocked-for-open-cmd The BLKOPN is active indicating that the switch is
blocked for open commands.
-25 9 Blocked-for-close-cmd The BLKCLS is active indicating that the switch is
blocked for close commands.

Technical manual
Control
IEC61850 IEC61850 Cause Description Conditions

ED1 ED2
9 9 Blocked-by-process If the Blk input is connected and active indicating that the
switch is dynamically blocked. Or if the OPCAP input is
connected, it indicates that the operation capability of the
switch is not enough to perform the command.
5 5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position.
-33 16 Switch-not-start-moving Switch did not start moving within tStartMove.
-34 4 Persistent-intermediate-state The switch stopped in intermediate state for longer than
tIntermediate.
-35 22 Switch-returned-to-init-pos Switch returned to the initial position.
-32 4 Switch-in-bad-state Switch is in a bad position.
-33 22 Not-expected-final-position Switch did not reach the expected final position.
The L_CAUSE output keeps its output value until a new command sequence has been started.
If the quality of the position or the communication becomes bad, the command evaluation replaces
the uncertain position value with intermediate position. Thus, as long as the quality is bad, all
commands will result in the cause Persistant-intermediate-state, -32.
If the switch in the merging unit has the behaviour set to Test or Test blocked, when the IED has the
behaviour On or Blocked, all data from the switch is regarded as invalid. Thus, any command will fail
with the cause PersistantiIntermediate-state, -32, and if selection is used for the switch, all attempts
to select the connected SCSWI will fail with the cause Select-failed, 3, from the SCSWI.
It is possible to speed up the command response for when the command has been started by the
switch in the breaker IED by connecting the inputs OPOK and OPOK_VAL. Then the blocking check
is only done until OPOK is activated and confirmation of that the command has been started is given
to the SCSWI function.
If the inputs STSELD and STSELD_V are connected, the switch in the breaker IED is assumed to
use selection. Then the SCSWI will wait for a selected indication, STSELD input of XLNPROXY,
before accepting selection, this information is transferred to the SCSWI function from the
XLNPROXY through the group connection XPOS. If STSELD is not activated within tSelect of the
SCSWI function, the selection is deemed failed and it gives a negative selection acknowledgement to
the command issuer with the cause Select-failed. Further, if the communication is lost, or the data
received is deemed invalid, the selection will also fail with cause Select-failed from the SCSWI.
10.3 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGAPC SEMOD114936-1 v5
SEMOD167845-2 v3

Logic rotating switch for function SLGAPC - -
selection and LHMI presentation
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC) (or the selector
switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch functionality compared to the one

Technical manual
Control
provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities,
in order to have different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however
sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase portfolio. The
selector switch function eliminates all these problems.
10.3.3 Function block SEMOD114954-4 v6
SLGAPC
BLOCK ^P01
PSTO ^P02
UP ^P03
DOWN ^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN
Figure 117: SLGAPC function block
10.3.4 Signals
Table 130: SLGAPC Input signals

UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command
Table 131: SLGAPC Output signals

P01 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 1

Technical manual
Control

SWPOSN INTEGER Switch position (integer)
10.3.5 Settings
Table 132: SLGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
NrPos 2 - 32 - 1 32 Number of positions in the switch
OutType Pulsed - - Steady Output type, steady or pulse
Steady
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate pulse duration, in [s]
tDelay 0.000 - 60000.000 s 0.010 0.000 Time delay on the output, in [s]
StopAtExtremes Disabled - - Disabled Stop when min or max position is
Enabled reached

Technical manual
Control

Table 133: SLGAPC Monitored data

SWPOSN INTEGER - - Switch position (integer)

SEMOD114931-4 v8
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC) function has two
operating inputs – UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the UP input, the function will
activate the output next to the present activated output, in ascending order (for example if the present
activated output is P03 and one activates the UP input then the output P04 will be activated). When a
signal is received on the DOWN input, the function will activate the output next to the present
activated output, in descending order (for example if the present activated output is P03 and one
activates the DOWN input then the output P02 will be activated). Depending on the output settings
the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, the output will be active till the
time it receives next operation of UP/DOWN inputs. Also, depending on the settings one can have a
time delay between activation of the UP or DOWN input signals and the output activation.
Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application Configuration Tool, there
are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired position directly (without activating the
intermediate positions), either locally or remotely, using a “select before execute” dialog. One can
block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be
kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is specified through
the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block
can be connected. SLGAPC function block has also an integer value output, that generates the
actual position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user. These
names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names instead of a number.
10.3.7.1 Graphical display SEMOD114931-35 v4
There are two possibilities for SLGAPC
• if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual position names, as
defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
• if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but only the first
three letters of the name will be used.
In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when building the
Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control, the following sequence of
commands will ensure:

Technical manual
Control
From the graphical display:
Control
Control Sing le Line Diagram
Measurements Comma nds
Events
Disturb ance r eco rds
Settings
Diagno stics
Test
Chang e to the "Switche s" pag e Reset
of the SLD by left-righ t arrows. Authori zation
Sele ct switch by up-down Lan guage
arro ws
../Control/SLD/Switch
O I ../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control SMBRREC control

WFM Sele ct switch. Pre ss the
WFM
I or O key. A dialo g b ox
Pilo t se tup app ears.
Pilo t se tup
OFF OFF
Damage control
P: Disc N: Disc Fe
DAL
The pos will not b e mod ified
(outputs will not b e activa ted) unt il OK Cancel
you press the Enter button for O.K.
../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilo t se tup
OFF
Damage control
DFW
Figure 118: Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the single line diagram on local HMI.
10.4 Selector mini switch VSGAPC SEMOD158754-1 v3
SEMOD167850-2 v4

Selector mini switch VSGAPC - 43
The Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function block is a multipurpose function used for a variety of
applications, as a general purpose switch.

Technical manual
Control
VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu, from a symbol on the single line diagram (SLD) on the
local HMI or from Binary inputs.
VSGAPC
BLOCK BLOCKED
PSTO POSITION
IPOS1 POS1
IPOS2 POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21
Figure 119: VSGAPC function block
10.4.4 Signals
Table 134: VSGAPC Input signals

IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input
Table 135: VSGAPC Output signals

BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is blocked
POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer
POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1
10.4.5 Settings
Table 136: VSGAPC Non group settings (basic)

On
CtlModel Dir Norm - - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model
SBO Enh according to IEC 61850
Mode Steady - - Pulsed Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 600.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute
signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght

Technical manual
Control
10.4.6 Operation principle SEMOD158762-4 v7
Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can be used for double purpose, in the same way as switch
controller (SCSWI) functions are used:
• for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the IPOS1 and
IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1 and POS2 outputs, or to
IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
• for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in the
configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command from the local
HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command from the local
HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
It is important for indication in the SLD that a symbol is associated with a controllable
object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed on the screen. A symbol is created
and configured in GDE tool in PCM600.
The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of operators place,
operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote). An INTONE connection from Fixed
signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow operation from local HMI.
As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit representation, where a
combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the desired result.
The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the name of the string
that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.
IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value

0 0 PosUndefined P00
1 0 Position1 P01
0 1 Position2 P10
1 1 PosBadState P11
10.5 Generic communication function for Double Point

indication DPGAPC SEMOD55384-1 v4
GUID-E16EA78F-6DF9-4B37-A92D-5C09827E2297 v3

Generic communication function for DPGAPC - -
Double Point indication
Generic communication function for Double Point indication (DPGAPC) function block is used to
send double point position indications to other systems, equipment or functions in the substation
through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It is especially intended to be used in the
interlocking station-wide logics.

Technical manual
Control
Figure 120: DPGAPC function block
10.5.4 Signals SEMOD55883-1 v2
Table 137: DPGAPC Input signals

OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication
Table 138: DPGAPC Output signals

POSITION INTEGER Double point indication
10.5.5 Settings ABBD8E283863 v4
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
When receiving the input signals, DPGAPC sends the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the systems,
equipment or functions that requests and thus subscribes on these signals. To be able to get the
signals into other systems, equipment or functions, one must use other tools, described in the
Engineering manual, and define which function block in which systems, equipment or functions
should receive this information.
More specifically, DPGAPC function reports a combined double point position indication output
POSITION, by evaluating the value and the timestamp attributes of the inputs OPEN and CLOSE,
together with the logical input signal VALID.
When the input signal VALID is active, the values of the OPEN and CLOSE inputs determine the two-
bit integer value of the output POSITION. The timestamp of the output POSITION will have the latest
updated timestamp of the inputs OPEN and CLOSE.
When the input signal VALID is inactive, DPGAPC function forces the position to intermediated state.
When the value of the input signal VALID changes, the timestamp of the output POSITION will be
updated as the time when DPGAPC function detects the change.
Refer to Table 139 for the description of the input-output relationship in terms of the value and the
quality attributes.

Technical manual
Control
Table 139: Description of the input-output relationship
POSITION
VALID OPEN CLOSE
Value Description
0 - - 0 Intermediate
1 0 0 0 Intermediate
1 1 0 1 Open
1 0 1 2 Closed
1 1 1 3 Bad State
10.6 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC SEMOD176448-1 v3
SEMOD176456-2 v3

Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC - -
The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) function block is a collection of 8 single point
commands that can be used for direct commands for example reset of LEDs or putting IED in
"ChangeLock" state from remote. In this way, simple commands can be sent directly to the IED
outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be
achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks. The commands can
be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time.
SPC8GAPC
BLOCK ÔUT1
PSTO ÔUT2
ÔUT3
ÔUT4
ÔUT5
ÔUT6
ÔUT7
ÔUT8
Figure 121: SPC8GAPC function block
10.6.4 Signals
Table 140: SPC8GAPC Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the function operation

Technical manual
Control
Table 141: SPC8GAPC Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
10.6.5 Settings
Table 142: SPC8GAPC Non group settings (basic)

On
PulseMode1 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 1
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 1
Latched output 2
Latched output 3
Latched output 4
Latched output 5
Latched output 6
Latched output 7
Latched output 8
The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of the eight outputs is
activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected. The settings Latchedx and
tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if the signal will be pulsed (and how long the

Technical manual
Control
pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the function – in case a command is
sent, no output will be activated.
PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions. Although,
PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator places, only REMOTE
operator place is used in SPC8GAPC function.
10.7 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS SEMOD158589-1 v3
GUID-C3BB63F5-F0E7-4B00-AF0F-917ECF87B016 v4

AutomationBits, command function for
AUTOBITS - -
DNP3
The Automation bits function (AUTOBITS) is used to configure the DNP3 protocol command
handling. Each of the 3 AUTOBITS available has 32 individual outputs available, each can be
mapped as a binary output point in DNP3.
AUTOBITS
BLOCK ^CMDBIT1
PSTO ^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32
Figure 122: AUTOBITS function block

Technical manual
Control
10.7.4 Signals
Table 143: AUTOBITS Input signals

Table 144: AUTOBITS Output signals

CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1

Technical manual
Control
10.7.5 Settings
Table 145: AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)

On
AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as a
Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP3. This object contains
parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS output point,
send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining
parameters will be regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5
would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.
There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the same way the
setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that, upon activation of the BLOCK input, all 32
CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts like an overriding, the function still receives data
from the DNP3 master. Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the
DNP3 master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the operator place.
The command can be written to the block while in “Remote”. If PSTO is in “Local” then no change is
applied to the outputs.
10.8 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD SEMOD119849-1 v2
GUID-2217CCC2-5581-407F-A4BC-266CD6808984 v1

Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD - -
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from the local HMI.
The command function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage
apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.

Technical manual
Control
SINGLECMD
BLOCK ÔUT1
ÔUT2
ÔUT3
ÔUT4
ÔUT5
ÔUT6
ÔUT7
ÔUT8
ÔUT9
ÔUT10
ÔUT11
ÔUT12
ÔUT13
ÔUT14
ÔUT15
ÔUT16
Figure 123: SINGLECMD function block
10.8.4 Signals
Table 146: SINGLECMD Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block single command function
Table 147: SINGLECMD Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Single command output 1

Technical manual
Control
10.8.5 Settings
Table 148: SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)

Steady
Pulsed
Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) function has 16 binary output signals. The outputs can
be individually controlled from a substation automation system or from the local HMI. Each output
signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters in PCM600.
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration setting is done via the
local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole function block. The length of the output pulses
are 100 ms. In steady mode, SINGLECMD function has a memory to remember the output values at
power interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the
outputs.
The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in functions or via the
configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.

Technical manual
234
Logic
Section 11 Logic
11.1 Tripping logic SMPPTRC IP14576-1 v4
11.1.1 Function revision history GUID-ADA72CE6-B6ED-48B3-A897-A7B42ECDEBB4 v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 STN (Start neutral) output added. IEC 61850 mapping is made for the added output.
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.1 -
D 2.2.4 Added TRINN (Trip neutral) input and TRN (trip neutral) outputs. TRINALL (Trip all
phases) input is changed from TRIN. IEC 61850 mapping is made for the added output.
The block logic is corrected for the lockout functionality.
E 2.2.5 -
SEMOD56226-2 v7

Tripping logic SMPPTRC 94
1 -> 0
A function block for protection tripping and general start indication is always provided as a basic
function for each circuit breaker. It provides a settable pulse prolongation time to ensure a trip pulse
of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation with autoreclosing
functions.
The trip function block includes a settable latch function for the trip signal and circuit breaker lockout.
The trip function can collect start and directional signals from different application functions. The
aggregated start and directional signals are mapped to the IEC 61850 logical node data model.

Technical manual
Logic
SMPPTRC
BLOCK TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRL1
TRINALL TRL2
TRINL1 TRL3
TRINL2 TRN
TRINL3 TR1P
TRINN TR2P
PSL1 TR3P
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL3 START
1PTRZ STL1
1PTREF STL2
P3PTR STL3
SETLKOUT STN
RSTLKOUT FW
STDIR REV
Figure 124: SMPPTRC function block
11.1.5 Signals
Table 149: SMPPTRC Input signals

BLKLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)
TRINALL BOOLEAN 0 Trip all phases
TRINL1 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase L1
TRINN BOOLEAN 0 Trip neutral, trips all phases
PSL1 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1
1PTRZ BOOLEAN 0 Input for phase selective carrier aided trip
1PTREF BOOLEAN 0 Input for phase selective earth fault trip
P3PTR BOOLEAN 0 Prepare all tripping to be three-phase
SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function
STDIR INTEGER 0 General start direction input
Table 150: SMPPTRC Output signals


Technical manual
Logic

TRN BOOLEAN Trip signal from neutral
TR1P BOOLEAN Trip single-pole
TR2P BOOLEAN Trip two-pole
TR3P BOOLEAN Trip three-pole
CLLKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)
STN BOOLEAN Start signal from neutral
FW BOOLEAN General forward signal
REV BOOLEAN General reverse signal
11.1.6 Settings
Table 151: SMPPTRC Group settings (basic)

On
Program 3 phase - - 1ph/3ph Three ph; single or three ph; single, two
1ph/3ph or three ph trip
1ph/2ph/3ph
tTripMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Minimum duration of trip output signal
tWaitForPHS 0.020 - 0.500 s 0.001 0.050 Secure 3-pole trip when phase selection
failed
Table 152: SMPPTRC Group settings (advanced)

TripLockout Off - - Off Latch TRIP output when SETLKOUT
On input is activated
AutoLock Off - - Off Activate CLLKOUT output when TRIP
On output is activated
tEvolvingFault 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Secure 3-pole tripping at evolving faults
There is a single input (TRINALL) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions
within the IED or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs' binary inputs are
routed. It has a three-phase trip output (TRIP) to connect to one or more of the IEDs' binary outputs,
as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.

Technical manual
Logic
Simplified logic where setting

Program = 3 phase
BLOCK
BLKLKOUT Final Tripping Circuits
BLOCK
3 phase
BLKLKOUT TRIP TRIP
BLOCK TRIPALL TRIPALL TRL1 TRL1
TRINALL TRINALL TRIPL1 TRL2 TRL2
TRINL1 TRINL1 TRIPL2 TRL3 TRL3
TRINL2 TRINL2 TRIPL3 TRN TRN
TRINL3 TRINL3 TRIPN TR1P
1PTRZ 1PTRZ SETLKOUT TR2P
1PTREF 1PTREF RSTLKOUT TR3P TR3P
CLLKOUT CLLKOUT
TRINN
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

BLOCK Program = 1ph/3ph
BLOCK
TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRIP
1ph/3ph TRIPALL TRL1
TRL1
Phase Segregated TRIPL1 TRL2
TRL2
BLOCK TRIPL1
TRINALL TRL3
TRINALL L1TRIP L1TRIP TRIPL2 TRIPL2 TRL3
TRINL1 TRN
TRINL1 L2TRIP L2TRIP TRIPL3 TRIPL3 TRN
TRINL2 TR1P
TRINL2 L3TRIP L3TRIP TRIPN TR1P
TRINL3 SETLKOUT TR2P
TRINL3 P3PTR
PSL1 TR3P
PSL1 RSTLKOUT TR3P
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL3
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTRZ
1PTREF
1PTREF
P3PTR
TRINN
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

BLOCK Program = 1ph/2ph/3ph

BLOCK
TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRIP
1ph/2ph/3ph TRIPALL TRL1 TRL1
Phase Segregated TRIPL1 TRL2 TRL2
BLOCK TRIPL1
TRINALL L1TRIP TRL3
TRINALL L1TRIP TRIPL2 TRIPL2 TRL3
TRINL1 L2TRIP TRN
TRINL1 L2TRIP TRIPL3 TRIPL3 TRN
TRINL2 L3TRIP TR1P
TRINL2 L3TRIP TRIPN TR1P
TRINL3 SETLKOUT TR2P TR2P
TRINL3 P3PTR
PSL1 TR3P
PSL1 RSTLKOUT TR3P
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL3
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTRZ
1PTREF
1PTREF
P3PTR
TRINN
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT
Figure 125: Simplified logic diagrams with different program modes

SMPPTRC function has separate inputs (TRINL1, TRINL2, TRINL3) which are used for single-phase
and two-phase tripping from the functions which offer phase segregated trip outputs.
The input TRINN can be activated from functions which provide data for trip in the neutral.
The inputs 1PTRZ and 1PTREF enable single- phase and two-phase tripping for those functions
which do not have their own phase selection capability (that is, which have just a single trip output).
An example of such a protection function is the residual overcurrent protection. The SMPPTRC
function has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping (1PTRZ used for carrier-aided
tripping commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for earth fault tripping (1PTREF
used for tripping from a residual overcurrent protection). External phase selection for these two trip
signals shall be provided via inputs PSL1, PSL2, and PSL3.

Technical manual
Logic
A timer tWaitForPHS, secures a three-phase trip command for these two trip signals in the absence
of the external phase selection signals.
The SMPPTRC function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 (besides the three-phase trip
output TRIP), one per phase, to connect to one or more of the IEDs’ binary outputs, as well as to
other functions within the IED requiring these signals. These three output signals shall be used as
trip signals for individual circuit breaker poles. These signals are important for cooperation with the
autorecloser SMBRREC function.
The outputs TRN and TRIP are activated when the input TRINN is activated.
The SMPPTRC function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation for evolving faults as
well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A binary input P3PTR is provided which will force all
tripping to be three-phase. This input is required in order to cooperate with the SMBRREC function.
In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC function block is used for each circuit breaker.
The lockout function

The SMPPTRC function block is provided with possibilities to initiate lockout. The lockout can be set
to only activate the circuit breaker lockout output CLLKOUT or to both initiate the circuit breaker
lockout output and to maintain the trip signal outputs TRIP, TRL1, TRL2, TRL3, and TR3P (latched).
If external conditions are required to initiate a circuit breaker lockout, it can be achieved by activating
input SETLKOUT. The settingAutoLock = Off means that the internal three-phase trip will not activate
lockout so only initiation of the input SETLKOUT will result in lockout. This is normally the case for
overhead line protection where most faults are transient. Unsuccessful autoreclosing and back-up
zone tripping can in such cases be connected to initiate lockout by activating the input SETLKOUT.
If CLLKOUT is set by an external trip signal from another protection function, that is by activating
SETLKOUT input, or internally by a three-phase trip, that is with the setting AutoLock = On and the
setting TripLockout = On, then also all trip outputs are set latched.
The lockout can manually be reset after checking the primary fault by activating the reset lockout
input RSTLKOUT.
The BLKLKOUT input blocks the circuit breaker lockout output CLLKOUT.
The following three sequences in the following table shows the interaction between the inputs
BLOCK, BLKLKOUT, SETLKOUT, RSTLKOUT and the output CLLKOUT.
Table 153: Lockout related signal interactions
Inputs Output
BLOCK BLKLKOUT SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT CLLKOUT
Active - - - False
Active - Active - False
- - - - False
- - Active - True
Active - - - True
Active - - Activated True
- - - - True
- Active - - False

Technical manual
Logic
Inputs Output
BLOCK BLKLKOUT SETLKOUT RSTLKOUT CLLKOUT
- Active Active - False
- - - - True
- - - Activated False
Directional data
Merged directional data from application functions can be provided to the trip function (SMPPTRC)
via the start matrix function (SMAGAPC) connected to the STDIR input.
The directional input signal STDIR is a coded integer signal which contains 15 individual Boolean
signals, see Figure 130:
STDIRX=[b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7, b8, b9, b10, b11, b12, b13, b14]
b0= START (start)
b1= FW (forward)
b2= REV (reverse)
b3= STL1 (start L1)
b4= FWL1 (forward L1)
b5= REVL1 (reverse L1)
b6= STL2 (start L2)
b9= STL3 (start L3)
b12= STN (start N)
b13= FWN (forward N)
b14= REVN (reverse N)
The indications for general start START and phase-wise starts STL1, STL2 and STL3, and neutral
STN and general directional forward FW and reverse REV are all available as outputs on the trip
function.
All start and directional outputs are mapped to the IEC 61850 logical node data model of the trip
function. The time stamping is updated each time an operate or start signal is changed:
• The common DIR output (general) is mapped as:
dirGeneral
0 unknown
1 forward
2 backward (reverse)
3 both
• The phase wise directional outputs (DIRL1, DIRL2, DIRL3, and DIRN) are mapped as:

Technical manual
Logic
dirPhsA, dirPhsB, dirPhsC, dirNeut

0 unknown
1 forward
2 backward (reverse)
tTripMin
BLOCK TRIPALL
OR
AND t
TRINL1
TRINL2
TRINL3
TRINALL OR
1PTREF
1PTRZ
Figure 126: Three-phase front logic — simplified logic diagram

Technical manual
Logic
TRINALL
TRINL1 L1TRIP
OR
PSL1
AND
TRINL2
L2TRIP
OR
PSL2
AND
TRINL3
L3TRIP
OR
PSL3
AND
-LOOP
OR OR
OR
AND AND
OR
tWaitForPHS
-LOOP
t
OR
1PTREF AND
AND
1PTRZ OR
Figure 127: Phase segregated front logic
tTripMin
BLOCK
OR TR
L1TRIP AND t OR
tEvolvingFault
t AND
L2TRIP
L3TRIP
OR
P3PTR
IEC170
Figure 128: Simplified additional logic per phase, Program = 1ph/3ph or 1ph/2ph/3ph

Technical manual
Logic
TRIPL1
OR TRL1
OR
TRIPL2
OR TRL2
OR
TRIPL3
OR TRL3
OR
TRIPN TRN
OR OR TRIP
OR
TRIPALL
OR -LOOP
OR
-LOOP AND
AND TR3P
OR
AND OR
AND
10 ms To ensure that the
fault is single phase TR1P
AND t
OR To ensure that the

5 ms
fault is two phase TR2P
t
OR
AND
AND OR AND
OR
-LOOP
AND
TripLockout
AND AND
AutoLock -LOOP
SETLKOUT OR
OR AND CLLKOUT
AND AND
RSTLKOUT
AND
AND
BLOCK
BLKLKOUT
Figure 129: Final tripping circuits

Technical manual
Logic
Directional logic
IntToBits
STDIR START START
in b0
FW STL1
b1
REV STL2
b2
STL1 STL3
b3
FWL1 STN
b4
REVL1
b5
STL2
b6
FWL2 FW
b7
REVL2 BitsToInt
b8 dirGeneral (61850 Standard)
STL3
b9 0 = unknown
FWL3 b0 out
b10 DIR 1 = forward
REVL3 b1 2 = backward (reverse)
b11
STN 3 = both
b12
FWN REV
b13
REVN
b14
b15
BitsToInt dirPhsA (61850 Standard)

0 = unknown
AND b0 out DIRL1
b0 = START 1 = forward
b1 2 = backward (reverse)
b1 = FW
b2 = REV
b3 = STL1 XOR
b4 = FWL1
b5 = REVL1
b6 = STL2 AND
b7 = FWL2
b8 = REVL2
b9 = STL3 BitsToInt dirPhsB (61850 Standard)
b10 = FWL3
0 = unknown
b11 = REVL3 AND b0 out DIRL2
1 = forward
b12 = STN b1 2 = backward (reverse)
b13 = FWN
b14 = REVN
b15 = N/A XOR
AND
BitsToInt dirPhsC (61850 Standard)

0 = unknown
AND b0 out DIRL3
1 = forward
XOR
AND
BitsToInt dirNeut (61850 Standard)

0 = unknown
AND b0 out DIRN
1 = forward
XOR
AND
Figure 130: The directional logic

M12380-1 v15
Table 154: SMPPTRC technical data

Trip action, Program 3 phase, 1ph/2ph, 1ph/2ph/3ph -
Minimum trip pulse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
length ,tTripMin
3-pole trip delay, tWaitForPHS (0.020-0.500) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Evolving fault delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
, tEvolvingFault

Technical manual
Logic
11.2 General start matrix block SMAGAPC
11.2.1 Identification GUID-C6D3DE50-03D2-4F27-82FF-623E81D019F4 v1
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

Generat start matrix block SMAGAPC - -
11.2.2 Functionality GUID-BA516165-96DE-4CD9-979B-29457C7653C0 v3
The Start Matrix (SMAGAPC) merges start and directional output signals from different application
functions and creates a common start and directional output signal (STDIR) to be connected to the
Trip function, see Figure 131.
The purpose of this functionality is to provide general start and directional information for the IEC
61850 trip logic data model SMPPTRC.
11.2.3 Function block GUID-99B1DF71-F7C4-4954-8688-BC709C3C2A16 v1
SMAGAPC
BLOCK STDIR
STDIR1
STDIR2
STDIR3
STDIR4
STDIR5
STDIR6
STDIR7
STDIR8
STDIR9
STDIR10
STDIR11
STDIR12
STDIR13
STDIR14
STDIR15
STDIR16
Figure 131: SMAGAPC function block
11.2.4 Signals
Table 155: SMAGAPC Input signals

STDIR1 INTEGER 0 Start direction input 1

Technical manual
Logic

Table 156: SMAGAPC Output signals

STDIR INTEGER Common start direction output
11.2.5 Settings
Table 157: SMAGAPC Group settings (basic)

On
11.2.6 Operation principle GUID-02403756-5715-4D6B-9308-540D72979BD0 v3
Start matrix
The Start Matrix function requires that a protection function delivers the directional output signals in a
fixed order to Start Matrix.
A directional input signal STDIRX of the Start Matrix is of type word. Each input contains 14
individual Boolean signals, which are positioned as, see Figure 133.
b0= START (start)
b1= FW (forward)
b2= REV (reverse)
b3= STL1 (startL1)
b4= FWL1 (forwardL1)
b5= REVL1 (reverseL1)
b6= STL2 (startL2)
b9= STL3 (startL3)

Technical manual
Logic
b12= STN (startN)

b13= FWN (forwardN)
b14= REVN (reverseN)
The StartMatrix function contains two function: the START criteria and the DIRECTION criteria, see
Figure 132.
The START criteria is to ensure that a forward and reverse signal shall come together with a start
signal to pass through the block. This is done individually for each protection function connected to
the StartMatrix via the STDIRX inputs, see Figure 133.
All STDIROUT signals are then connected via an OR gate, see Figure 132.
The DIRECTION criteria allow either forward or reverse (phase-wise forward FWLx or forward
neutral FWN or phase-wise reverse REVLx or reverse neutral REVN) to pass through to the general
STDIR output. If both forward and reverse are active phase-wise (e.g. REVLx=FWLx = True) or at
neutral (e.g. FWN = REVN = True) at the same time, none will be shown, see Figure 134.
SMAGAPC
(StartMatrix)
START Criteria
STDIR1
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR2
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR3
STDIRX STDIROUT
DIRECTION Criteria
STDIR
≥1 STDIRIN STDIR
START Criteria
STDIR4
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR5
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR6
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR7
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR8
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR9
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR10
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR11
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR12
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR13
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR14
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR15
STDIRX STDIROUT
START Criteria
STDIR16
STDIRX STDIROUT
Figure 132: The StartMatrix function

Technical manual
Logic
START Criteria
START (in)
STL1 (in)
STL2 (in) ≥1 START (out)
STL3 (in)
IntToBits STN (in) BitsToint
STDIRX STDIROUT
in b0 START (in) STL1 (out) START (out) b0 out
b1 FW (in) STL2 (out) FW (out) b1
b2 REV (in) STL3 (out) REV (out) b2
b3 STL1 (in) STN (out) STL1 (out) b3
b4 FWL1 (in) FWL1 (out) b4
b5 REVL1 (in) REVL1 (out) b5
&
b6 STL2 (in) FW (in) STL2 (out) b6
≥1 FW (out)
b9 STL3 (in) STL3 (out) b9
b11 REVL3 (in) & REVL3 (out) b11
REV (in)
b12 STN (in) STN (out) b12
b13 FWN (in) ≥1 REV (out) FWN (out) b13
b14 REVN (in) REVN (out) b14
b15 N/A FALSE b15
& FWL1 (out)

FWL1 (in)
& REVL1 (out)

REVL1 (in)
& FWL2 (out)

FWL2 (in)
& REVL2 (out)

REVL2 (in)
& FWL3 (out)

FWL3 (in)
& REVL3 (out)

REVL3 (in)
& FWN (out)

FWN (in)
& REVN (out)

REVN (in)
Figure 133: The START Criteria function
DIRECTION Criteria
START (in) START (out)

IntToBits STL1 (in) STL1 (out) BitsToint
STDIRIN STL2 (in) STL2 (out) STDIR
in b0 START (in) START (out) b0 out
STL3 (in) STL3 (out)
b1 FW (in) FW (out) b1
STN (in) STN (out)
b2 REV (in) REV (out) b2
FW (in)
≥1 FW (out)
REV (in)
≥1 REV (out)
b12 STN (in) STN (out) b12
b13 FWN (in) FWN (out) b13
b14 REVN (in) REVN (out) b14
b15 N/A FALSE b15
& FWL1 (out)
FWL1 (in)
=1
REVL1 (in)
& REVL1 (out)
& FWL2 (out)
FWL2 (in)
=1
REVL2 (in)
& REVL2 (out)
& FWL3 (out)
FWL3 (in)
=1
REVL3 (in)
& REVL3 (out)
& FWN (out)
FWN (in)
=1
REVN (in)
& REVN (out)
Figure 134: The DIRECTION Criteria function
STARTCOMB
To make it possible to provide the directional information from a protection function, a STARTCOMB
block is used in between the application function and the Start Matrix function.
The STARTCOMB function has one block input and 14 Boolean inputs that convert the 14 Boolean
inputs into a WORD output STDIR, see Figure 135.

Technical manual
Logic
b0= START (start)
b1= FW (forward)
b2= REV (reverse)
b3= STL1 (startL1)
b6= STL2 (startL2)
b9= STL3 (startL3)
b12= STN (startN)
b13= FWN (forwardN)
b14= REVN (reverseN)
STARTCOMB
BLOCK STDI R
START
FW
REV
STL1
FWL1
REVL1
STL2
FWL2
REVL2
STL3
FWL3
REVL3
STN
FWN
REVN
Figure 135: STARTCOMB
Protection functions
Some protection functions are provided with start and directional outputs, for example:
• Protection 1: General START, FW and REV

• Protection 2: Phase-wise STLx, FWLx and REVLx (where x = 1, 2 and 3)
• Protection 3: STN, FWN and REVN
• Protection 4: STDIR
Connection example
In Figure 136 below is an example how to connect start and directional signals from protection
functions via STARTCOMB and SMAGAPC to SMPPTRC.

Technical manual
Logic
SMAGAPC
STARTCOMB BLOCK STDIR
PROTECTION 1 BLOCK STDIR STDIR1
START START STDIR2
FW FW STDIR3
REV REV STDIR4
STL1 STDIR5
FWL1 STDIR6 SMPPTRC
REVL1 STDIR7 BLOCK TRIP
STL2 STDIR8 BLKLKOUT TRL1
FWL2 STDIR9 TRIN TRL2
REVL2 STDIR10 TRINL1 TRL3
STL3 STDIR11 TRINL2 TR1P
FWL3 STDIR12 TRINL3 TR2P
REVL3 STDIR13 PSL1 TR3P
STN STDIR14 PSL2 CLLKOUT
FWN STDIR15 PSL3 START
REVN STDIR16 1PTRZ STL1
1PTREF STL2
P3PTR STL3
STARTCOMB SETLKOUT STN
BLOCK STDIR RSTLKOUT FW
START STDIR REV
FW
PROTECTION 2 REV
STL1 STL1
FWL1 FWL1
REVL1 REVL1
STL2 STL2
FWL2 FWL2
REVL2 REVL2
STL3 STL3
FWL3 FWL3
REVL3 REVL3
STN
FWN
REVN
STARTCOMB
BLOCK STDIR
START
FW
REV
STL1
FWL1
REVL1
STL2
FWL2
REVL2
STL3
PROTECTION 4
FWL3
-
PROTECTION 3 REVL3
STDIR
STN STN
-
FWN FWN
-
REVN REVN
Figure 136: Connection example of protection functions using STARTCOMB, SMAGAPC to

SMPPTRC
11.3 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC IP15121-1 v4
SEMOD167882-2 v3

Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC - -
The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be connected to physical
tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable pulse or steady output.

Technical manual
Logic
TMAGAPC
BLOCK OUTPUT1
BLK1 OUTPUT2
BLK2 OUTPUT3
BLK3
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
Figure 137: TMAGAPC function block
11.3.4 Signals
Table 158: TMAGAPC Input signals

BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 1
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1

Technical manual
Logic

Table 159: TMAGAPC Output signals

OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 1 to 32
11.3.5 Settings
Table 160: TMAGAPC Group settings (basic)

On
PulseTime 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output off delay time

Technical manual
Logic

ModeOutput1 Steady - - Steady Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput2 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput3 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output signals. The
function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide grouping of connected input
signals to the three output signals from the function block.
Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:
1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the first output
signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 the
second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 the third output
signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.
By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime, OnDelay and

OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The OnDelay is always active and will
delay the input to output transition by the set time. The ModeOutput for respective output decides
whether the output shall be steady with an drop-off delay as set by OffDelay or if it shall give a pulse
with duration set by PulseTime. Note that for pulsed operation and that the inputs are connected in
an OR-function, a new pulse will only be given on the output if all related inputs are reset and then
one is activated again. For steady operation the OffDelay will start when all related inputs have reset.
Detailed logical diagram is shown in figure 138

Technical manual
Logic
PulseTime
t
&
ModeOutput1=Pulsed
INPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
INPUT 16
PulseTime
t
&
ModeOutput2=Pulsed
INPUT 17
OUTPUT 2
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
INPUT 32
PulseTime
t
&
ModeOutput3=Pulsed
OUTPUT 3
Ondelay Offdelay
&
³1
³1 t t
Figure 138: Trip matrix internal logic

Output signals from TMAGAPC are typically connected to other logic blocks or directly to output
contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker(s) the pulse time shall be set
to at least 0.150 seconds in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the
circuit breaker trip coils.

GUID-3AB1EE95-51BF-4CC4-99BD-F4ECDAACB75A v3
Table 161: Number of TMAGAPC instances
Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TMAGAPC 6 6 -
11.4 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH GUID-64EA392C-950F-486C-8D96-6E7736B592BF v1
11.4.1 Identification GUID-64EA392C-950F-486C-8D96-6E7736B592BF v1

Logic for group alarm ALMCALH - -
11.4.2 Functionality GUID-16E60E27-F7A8-416D-8648-8174AAC49BB5 v4
The group alarm logic function (ALMCALH) is used to route several alarm signals to a common
indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

Technical manual
Logic
11.4.3 Function block GUID-EA192656-71DD-4D44-A1D5-96B1B4937971 v1
ALMCALH
BLOCK ALARM
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
11.4.4 Signals
Table 162: ALMCALH Input signals

Table 163: ALMCALH Output signals

ALARM BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

Technical manual
Logic
11.4.5 Settings
Table 164: ALMCALH Group settings (basic)

On
11.4.6 Operation principle GUID-0405BB7B-7EF7-4546-92CD-F703AA0DD9F4 v2
The logic for group alarm ALMCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and one ALARM output
signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to provide grouping of
connected input signals to the output ALARM signal from the function block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the ALARM output
signal will get logical value 1.
The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady signal.
Input 1
200 ms
ALARM
³1 t
Input 16
Figure 139: Group alarm logic

GUID-A05AF26F-DC98-4E62-B96B-E75D19F20767 v2
Table 165: Number of ALMCALH instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ALMCALH - - 5
11.5 Logic for group warning WRNCALH
11.5.1 Identification GUID-3EBD3D5B-F506-4557-88D7-DFC0BD21C690 v4

Logic for group warning WRNCALH - -
11.5.2 Functionality GUID-F7D9A012-3AD4-4D86-BE97-DF2A99BE5383 v4
The group warning logic function (WRNCALH) is used to route several warning signals to a common
indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

Technical manual
Logic
11.5.3 Function block GUID-C909E4FB-3F7A-47F7-8988-36B159E2C7B2 v1
WRNCALH
BLOCK WARNING
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
11.5.4 Signals
Table 166: WRNCALH Input signals

Table 167: WRNCALH Output signals

WARNING BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

Technical manual
Logic
11.5.5 Settings
Table 168: WRNCALH Group settings (basic)

On
11.5.6 Operation principle GUID-71C65C20-7B6C-499F-BFCD-E418AA55F7EC v2
The logic for group warning WRNCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1 WARNING
output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to provide grouping of
connected input signals to the output WARNING signal from the function block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the WARNING output
signal will get logical value 1.
INPUT1
200 ms
WARNING
³1 t
INPUT16

GUID-70B7357D-F467-4CF5-9F73-641A82D334F5 v2
Table 169: Number of WRNCALH instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
WRNCALH - - 5
11.6 Logic for group indication INDCALH
11.6.1 Identification GUID-3B5D4371-420D-4249-B6A4-5A168920D635 v4

Logic for group indication INDCALH - -
11.6.2 Functionality GUID-D8D1A4EE-A87F-46C6-8529-277FC1ADA9B0 v4
The group indication logic function (INDCALH) is used to route several indication signals to a
common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

Technical manual
Logic
11.6.3 Function block GUID-9D89E183-449A-4016-AB83-E57C8DDBA843 v1
INDCALH
BLOCK IND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
11.6.4 Signals
Table 170: INDCALH Input signals

Table 171: INDCALH Output signals

IND BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

Technical manual
Logic
11.6.5 Settings
Table 172: INDCALH Group settings (basic)

On
11.6.6 Operation principle GUID-72B1B4E8-BC6C-4AF7-8B41-058241B944F8 v2
The logic for group indication INDCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1 IND output
signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to provide grouping of
connected input signals to the output IND signal from the function block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the IND output signal
will get logical value 1.
INPUT1
200 ms
IND
³1 t
INPUT16

GUID-EAA43288-01A5-49CF-BF5B-9ABF6DC27D85 v2
Table 173: Number of INDCALH instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCALH - 5 -
11.7 Basic configurable logic blocks M11396-4 v20
The basic configurable logic blocks do not propagate the time stamp and quality of signals. The list
below shows a summary of the function blocks and their features.
The logic blocks are available as a part of an extension logic package. The list below is a summary of
the function blocks and their features.
• AND function block. The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. The AND function block has up to four inputs and two outputs.
• GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass from the input to
the output.
• INVERTER function block that inverts the input signal to the output.
• LLD function block. Loop delay used to delay the output signal one execution cycle.

Technical manual
Logic
• OR function block. The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. The OR function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.
• PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of
operation of outputs, settable pulse time.
• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if,
after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power
interruption. RESET input has priority.
• SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two inputs
respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if
the block's output should reset or return to the state it was, after a power interruption. The SET
input has priority if both SET and RESET inputs are operated simultaneously.
• TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input signal. The
timer has a settable time delay and must be On for the input signal to activate the output with
the appropriate time delay.
• XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean variables. XOR has two inputs
and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal OUT is 1 if the input signals
are different and 0 if they are the same.
11.7.1 AND function block AND IP11013-1 v2
M11453-3 v4
The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The AND
function block has up to four inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.
11.7.1.1 Function block

M11452-3 v2
AND
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
Figure 140: AND function block
11.7.1.2 Signals
Table 174: AND Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1

Technical manual
Logic
Table 175: AND Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal
11.7.1.3 Technical data

GUID-D1179280-1D99-4A66-91AC-B7343DBA9F23 v3
Table 176: Number of AND instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
AND 60 60 160
11.7.2 Controllable gate function block GATE IP11021-1 v2
M11489-3 v2
The Controllable gate function block (GATE) is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass
from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.

M11490-3 v2
GATE
INPUT OUT
Figure 141: GATE function block
11.7.2.2 Signals
Table 177: GATE Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to gate
Table 178: GATE Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from gate
11.7.2.3 Settings
Table 179: GATE Group settings (basic)

On

Technical manual
Logic

GUID-45DF373F-DC39-4E1B-B45B-6B454E8E0E50 v3
Table 180: Number of GATE instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
GATE 10 10 20
11.7.3 Inverter function block INV IP11011-1 v2

M11445-3 v1
INV
INPUT OUT
Figure 142: INV function block
11.7.3.2 Signals
Table 181: INV Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input
Table 182: INV Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output

GUID-0EC4192A-EF03-47C0-AEC1-09B68B411A98 v3
Table 183: Number of INV instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INV 90 90 240
11.7.4 Loop delay function block LLD GUID-05D959B5-A55B-437C-8E8F-831A4A357E24 v2
GUID-64B24094-010D-4B8F-8B7B-DDD49499AAE5 v3
The Logic loop delay function block (LLD) function is used to delay the output signal one execution
cycle, that is, the cycle time of the function blocks used.

GUID-EE44CFDF-C8F7-4870-BD1C-98D9CD91FD97 v4
LLD
INPUT OUT
IEC15000144.vsd
Figure 143: LLD function block

Technical manual
Logic
11.7.4.2 Signals
Table 184: LLD Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal
Table 185: LLD Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output signal delayed one execution cycle

GUID-B2E6F510-8766-4381-9618-CE02ED71FFB6 v2
Table 186: Number of LLD instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
LLD 10 10 20
11.7.5 OR function block IP11012-1 v3
M11449-3 v2
The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The OR
function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.

M11448-3 v1
OR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
Figure 144: OR function block
11.7.5.2 Signals
Table 187: OR Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to OR gate

Technical manual
Logic
Table 188: OR Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from OR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from OR gate

GUID-35A795D7-A6BD-4669-A023-43C497DBFB01 v4
Table 189: Number of OR instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
OR 78 60 160
11.7.6 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER IP11016-1 v2
M11466-3 v3
The pulse (PULSETIMER) function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting the
operation time of outputs. The PULSETIMER has a settable length. When the input is 1, the output
will be 1 for the time set by the time delay parameter t. Then it returns to 0.

M11465-3 v4
PULSETIMER
INPUT OUT
Figure 145: PULSETIMER function block
11.7.6.2 Signals
Table 190: PULSETIMER Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to pulse timer
Table 191: PULSETIMER Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from pulse timer
11.7.6.3 Settings
Table 192: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)

t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Time delay of function

Technical manual
Logic

GUID-E05E5FB1-23E7-4816-84F2-1FBFFDFF2B43 v2
Table 193: Number of PULSETIMER instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
11.7.7 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY GUID-9C93669F-078B-49EA-85B8-C4BB6A434734 v1
GUID-4C804DEA-3C83-4C20-82C6-BAD03BD48242 v5
The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset or
set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY function block has two outputs, where
one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or
returns to the state it had before the power interruption. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has
higher priority over SET input.
Table 194: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT

0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1

GUID-50D5A4C0-59BF-44DE-86AC-47640ACD35A7 v3
RSMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT
Figure 146: RSMEMORY function block
11.7.7.2 Signals
Table 195: RSMEMORY Input signals

SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset
Table 196: RSMEMORY Output signals


Technical manual
Logic
11.7.7.3 Settings
Table 197: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

GUID-BE6FD540-E96E-4F15-B2A2-12FFAE6C51DB v2
Table 198: Number of RSMEMORY instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORY 10 10 20
11.7.8 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY IP11020-1 v2
M11485-3 v4
The Set-reset with memory function block (SRMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or
reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY function block has two outputs,
where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or
returns to the state it had before the power interruption. The input SET has priority.
Table 199: Truth table for SRMEMORY function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT

0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0

M11484-3 v2
SRMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT
Figure 147: SRMEMORY function block
11.7.8.2 Signals
Table 200: SRMEMORY Input signals

SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Technical manual
Logic
Table 201: SRMEMORY Output signals

11.7.8.3 Settings
Table 202: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

GUID-7A0F4327-CA83-4FB0-AB28-7C5F17AE6354 v2
Table 203: Number of SRMEMORY instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORY 10 10 20
11.7.9 Settable timer function block TIMERSET IP11022-1 v2
M11494-3 v3
The Settable timer function block (TIMERSET) timer has two outputs for the delay of the input signal
at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an Operation setting On
and Off that controls the operation of the timer.
Input
tdelay
On
Off
tdelay
t
Figure 148: TIMERSET status diagram

M11495-3 v3
TIMERSET
INPUT ON
OFF
Figure 149: TIMERSET function block

Technical manual
Logic
11.7.9.2 Signals
Table 204: TIMERSET Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer
Table 205: TIMERSET Output signals

ON BOOLEAN Output from timer, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output from timer, drop-out delayed
11.7.9.3 Settings
Table 206: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)

On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

GUID-C6C98FE0-F559-45EE-B853-464516775417 v3
Table 207: Number of TIMERSET instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSET 15 15 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms
11.7.10 Exclusive OR function block XOR IP11018-1 v2
M11477-3 v4
The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal
OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same.
Table 208: Truth table for XOR function block
INPUT1 INPUT2 OUT NOUT

0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 1

M11476-3 v1
XOR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
Figure 150: XOR function block

Technical manual
Logic
11.7.10.2 Signals
Table 209: XOR Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to XOR gate
Table 210: XOR Output signals

OUT BOOLEAN Output from XOR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from XOR gate

GUID-0B07F78C-10BD-4070-AFF0-6EE36454AA03 v2
Table 211: Number of XOR instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XOR 10 10 20
11.8 Extension logic package IP11362-1 v2
When extra configurable logic blocks are required, an additional package can be ordered.
GUID-19810098-1820-4765-8F0B-7D585FFC0C78 v8
11.9 Fixed signals FXDSIGN
The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) has nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in the
configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other function blocks to a certain level/
value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer, floating point, string types of signals are
available.
One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs.
FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF
Figure 151: FXDSIGN function block

Technical manual
Logic
11.9.3 Signals
Table 212: FXDSIGN Output signals

OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off
11.9.4 Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600).
There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
• OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value

• ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
• INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
• INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
• INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
• REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value
• STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value
• ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
• GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value
11.10 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I SEMOD175715-1 v1
SEMOD175721-2 v2

Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -
Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16 boolean (logical) signals
into an integer.

Technical manual
Logic
B16I
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
Figure 152: B16I function block
11.10.4 Signals
Table 213: B16I Input signals

IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
Table 214: B16I Output signals

OUT INTEGER Output value

Technical manual
Logic

Table 215: B16I Monitored data

OUT INTEGER - - Output value
The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary
inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16, to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below
from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values
on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the
inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are activated, that is =
Boolean 1, it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. The B16I function is
designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze
the output at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1≤x≤16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on the
function block B16I
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are active
that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an integer by the
B16I function block.

Technical manual
Logic

GUID-65A2876A-F779-41C4-ACD7-7662D1E7F1F2 v4
Table 216: Number of B16I instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
B16I 6 4 8
11.11 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node

representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC SEMOD175753-1 v4
SEMOD175757-2 v5

Boolean to integer conversion with BTIGAPC - -
logical node representation, 16 bit
Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16 bit (BTIGAPC) is used to
transform a set of 16 boolean (logical) signals into an integer. The block input will freeze the output at
the last value.
BTIGAPC
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
Figure 153: BTIGAPC function block

Technical manual
Logic
11.11.4 Signals
Table 217: BTIGAPC Input signals

Table 218: BTIGAPC Output signals

OUT INTEGER Output value

Table 219: BTIGAPC Monitored data

OUT INTEGER - - Output value
The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function (BTIGAPC) will transfer
a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx, where 1≤x≤16, to an integer. Each INx represents a
value according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1
where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as
a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx
(where 1≤x≤16) are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on
the output OUT. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.

Technical manual
Logic
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1≤x≤16.
function block BTIGAPC.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are active
that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an integer by the
BTIGAPC function block.

GUID-3820F464-D296-4CAD-8491-F3F997359D79 v2
Table 220: Number of BTIGAPC instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
BTIGAPC 4 4 8
11.12 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16
SEMOD167941-2 v2

Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 - -
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used to transform an integer into a set of 16
boolean (logical) signals.

Technical manual
Logic
IB16
BLOCK OUT1
INP OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
Figure 154: IB16 function block
11.12.4 Signals
Table 221: IB16 Input signals

INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input
Table 222: IB16 Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1

Technical manual
Logic
11.12.5 Setting parameters ABBD8E242451 v4
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600)
With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the remaining OUTx = 0
for (5≤x≤16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance with the
table IB16_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value =1, OUT2 has a
value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The sum of these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2
+ 4 + 8 = 15.
This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16 will be
equal to the integer value on the input INP.
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) will transfer an integer with a value between 0
to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of activated outputs OUTx where 1≤x≤16. The
sum of the values of all OUTx will then be equal to the integer on input INP. The values of the
different OUTx are according to the table below. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.
When all OUTx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535
is connected to input INP. The IB16 function is designed for receiving the integer input locally. If the
BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1≤x≤16.
function block IB16.
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when activated Value when

deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0

Technical manual
Logic
The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (where x = 1 to 16) are
active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be converted by the IB16 function
block.

GUID-B45901F4-B163-4696-8220-7F8CAC84D793 v3
Table 223: Number of IB16 instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
IB16 12 4 8
11.13 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation ITBGAPC SEMOD158419-1 v3
SEMOD167944-2 v4

Integer to boolean 16 conversion with ITBGAPC - -
logic node representation
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function (ITBGAPC) is used to
transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by the function to 16 boolean
(logic) output signals.
ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values over IEC 61850 when the R/L (Remote/Local)
push button on the front HMI indicates that the control mode for the operator is in position R (Remote
i.e. the LED adjacent to R is lit), and the corresponding signal is connected to the input PSTO
ITBGAPC function block. The input BLOCK will freeze the output at the last received value and
blocks new integer values to be received and converted to binary coded outputs.
ITBGAPC
BLOCK OUT1
PSTO OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
Figure 155: ITBGAPC function block

Technical manual
Logic
11.13.4 Signals
Table 224: ITBGAPC Input signals

Table 225: ITBGAPC Output signals

11.13.5 Settings
GUID-F573CA16-4821-4203-970A-F7D01AF5E63B v1
This function does not have any setting parameters.
An example is used to explain the principle of operation: With integer 15 sent to and received by the
ITBGAPC function on the IEC 61850 the OUTx changes from 0 to 1 on each of the OUT1; OUT2
OUT3 and OUT4. All other OUTx (5≤x≤16) remains 0. The boolean interpretation of this is
represented by the assigned values of each of the outputs OUT1 = 1; and OUT2 = 2; and OUT3= 4;
and OUT4 = 8. The sum of these OUTx (1≤x≤4) is equal to the integer 15 received via the IEC 61850
network. The remaining OUTx = 0 for (5≤x≤16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance with the
Table 226. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
The value of each OUTx for 1≤x≤16 (1≤x≤16) follows the general formulae: OUTx = 2x-1 The sum of
the values of all activated OUTx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16 will be equal to the integer value received over
IEC 61850 to the ITBGAPC_1 function block.
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function (ITBGAPC) will transfer
an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated via IEC 61850 and connected to the

Technical manual
Logic
ITBGAPC function block to a combination of activated outputs OUTx where 1≤x≤16. The values
represented by the different OUTx are according to Table 226. When an OUTx is not activated, its
value is 0.
The ITBGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station computer - for
example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last
value.
Table 226: Outputs and their values when activated
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when activated Value when

deactivated
The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (1≤x≤16) are active equals
65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted to boolean by the ITBGAPC function block.
The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer number that is
communicated to the ITBGAPC can only be written to the block while the PSTO is in position
“Remote”. If PSTO is in position ”Off” or ”Local”, then no changes are applied to the outputs.

GUID-A339BBA3-8FD0-429D-BB49-809EAC4D53B0 v2
Table 227: Number of ITBGAPC instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ITBGAPC 4 4 8

Technical manual
Logic
11.14 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGAPC
11.14.1 Identification GUID-1913E066-37D1-4689-9178-5B3C8B029815 v3
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identification identification number
Elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC - -
11.14.2 Functionality GUID-390D7433-0C1C-48B4-9A90-71AA148C3C35 v3
Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the elapsed time when a
given binary signal has been high, see also Figure 156.
BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Integration ACCTIME
with Retain
q-1
a
OVERFLOW
AND
a>b
999 999 s b
a
WARNING
AND
a>b
tWarning b
a
ALARM
AND
a>b
tAlarm b
q-1 = unit delay IEC13000290-2-en.vsd
Figure 156: TEIGAPC logics

The main features of TEIGAPC
• Applicable to long time integration up to 999 999.9 seconds

• Supervision of overflow
• Possibility to define a warning and an alarm with the resolution of 10 milliseconds
• Retain the integration value
• Possibilities for blocking and reset of the total integrated time
• Report of the integrated time
11.14.3 Function block GUID-6D50A060-7751-405B-AEC1-FAE942EBDA64 v2
TEIGAPC
BLOCK WARNING
IN ALARM
RESET OVERFLOW
ACCTIME
Figure 157: TEIGAPC function block

Technical manual
Logic
11.14.4 Signals
Table 228: TEIGAPC Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the integration and block the other outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the elapsed time, when
its value is high
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset the integration time
Table 229: TEIGAPC Output signals

WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the warning limit
ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the alarm limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the overflow limit
ACCTIME REAL Integrated elapsed time in seconds
11.14.5 Settings
Table 230: TEIGAPC Group settings (basic)

On
tWarning 1.00 - 999999.00 s 0.01 600.00 Time limit for warning supervision
tAlarm 1.00 - 999999.00 s 0.01 1200.00 Time limit for alarm supervision
11.14.6 Operation principle GUID-04CC8365-DCDE-4DC7-BEF0-6EF8382305DD v3
The elapsed time integrator (TEIGAPC) provides
• time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high
• blocking and reset of the total integrated time
• supervision of limit transgression and overflow, the overflow limit is fixed to 999999.9 seconds
• retaining of the integrated value
Figure 158 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block “Time Integration“ covers the
logics for the first two items listed above while the block “Transgression Supervision Plus
Retain“ contains the logics for the last two.

Technical manual
Logic
Loop Delay
tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM
BLOCK
RESET ACCTIME
Time Integration
IN
Loop Delay
Figure 158: TEIGAPC Simplified logic

TEIGAPC main functionalities
• integration of the elapsed time when IN has been high

• applicable to long time integration (≤999 999.9 seconds)
• output ACCTIME presents integrated value in seconds
• integrated value is retained in nonvolatile memory
• any retained value with a warning/alarm/overflow is used as initiation value for the
integration following by a restart
• RESET: Reset of the integration value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset
• unconditionally on the input IN value
• reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero
• BLOCK: Freeze the integration and block/reset the other outputs
• unconditionally on the signal value
• BLOCK request overrides RESET request
• Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
• overflow if output ACCTIME >999999.9 seconds
• alarm if ACCTIME > tAlarm
• warning if ACCTIME > tWarning
The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow, tAlarm and
tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.
tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is, there is no check if
tAlarm > tWarning.
tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms, depending on the level of
the defined values for the parameters.
The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds. The outputs freeze if an overflow
occurs.
11.14.6.1 Operation accuracy GUID-E0772193-9F6E-43DA-B642-2923565E5D4C v3
The accuracy of TEIGAPC depends on essentially three factors

Technical manual
Logic
• function cycle time

• the pulse length
• the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs
In principle, a shorter function cycle time, longer integrated time length or more pulses may lead to
reduced accuracy.
11.14.6.2 Memory storage GUID-6FDD6590-30F9-4CC1-AC9D-945544AB8688 v3
The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non-volatile memory.

GUID-B258726E-1129-47C9-94F9-BE634A2085FA v4
Table 231: TEIGAPC Technical data
Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy

Elapsed time integration 3 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever
is greater
8 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever
is greater
100 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever
is greater
Table 232: Number of TEIGAPC instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TEIGAPC 4 4 4
11.15 Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP
11.15.1 Identification GUID-5992B0F2-FC1B-4838-9BAB-2D2542BB264D v1

Comparison of integer values INTCOMP Int<=>
11.15.2 Functionality GUID-A93564FA-0017-4939-A9C1-095DA0FD9832 v1
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of integer values in the system relative to each
other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used for monitoring, supervision,
interlocking and other logics.
11.15.3 Function block GUID-EB28F45B-B1D0-452F-98B4-F96D7FA34069 v1
INTCOMP
INPUT INEQUAL
REF INHIGH
INLOW

Technical manual
Logic
11.15.4 Signals
Table 233: INTCOMP Input signals

INPUT INTEGER 0 Input value to be compared with reference value
REF INTEGER 0 Reference value to be compared with input value
Table 234: INTCOMP Output signals

INEQUAL BOOLEAN Input value is equal to the reference value
INHIGH BOOLEAN Input value is higher than the reference value
INLOW BOOLEAN Input value is lower than the reference value
11.15.5 Settings
Table 235: INTCOMP Group settings (basic)

EnaAbs Signed - - Signed Selection for absolute or signed
Absolute comparison
RefSource Set Value - - Set Value Selection for reference value either input
Input REF or setting
SetValue -2000000000 - - 1 100 Set value for reference
2000000000

Table 236: INTCOMP Monitored data

INEQUAL BOOLEAN - - Input value is equal to the reference
value
INHIGH BOOLEAN - - Input value is higher than the reference
value
INLOW BOOLEAN - - Input value is lower than the reference
value
11.15.7 Operation principle GUID-E9C1B863-ACA7-45C0-91F1-A51FE38755FE v3
The comparison can be done in two ways,
• Between 2 inputs, INPUT and REF

• Between INPUT and the value set by the user SetValue.
The selection of reference value for comparison is done through setting RefSource. If RefSource is
selected as "Input REF" then the reference value for comparison is taken from second input signal
(REF). If RefSource is selected as "Set Value" then the reference value for comparison is taken from
setting (SetValue).
The comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed values, which is governed by
on the setting EnaAbs. If EnaAbs is selected as "Absolute" then both input and reference values are

Technical manual
Logic
converted into absolute values and comparison is done. If EnaAbs is selected as "Signed" then the
comparison is done without any conversion.
The function has three binary outputs representing the result of the comparison:
• If the input is above the reference value then INHIGH is set HIGH
• If the input is below the reference value then INLOW is set HIGH
• If the input is equal to reference value then INEQUAL is set HIGH
11.16 Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP
11.16.1 Identification GUID-0D68E846-5A15-4C2C-91A2-F81A74034E81 v1

Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP Real<=>
11.16.2 Functionality GUID-E17A88D7-D095-4F36-9CD5-64EBFD2A1DEA v1
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of real value signals in the system relative to
each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used for monitoring,
supervision, interlocking and other logics.
11.16.3 Function block GUID-8752DF2A-D131-4461-80C6-C52F9980D228 v1
REALCOMP
INPUT INEQUAL
REF INHIGH
INLOW
11.16.4 Signals
Table 237: REALCOMP Input signals

INPUT REAL 0.000 Input value to be compared with reference value
REF REAL 0.000 Reference value to be compared with input value
Table 238: REALCOMP Output signals

INEQUAL BOOLEAN Input value is equal to the reference value
INHIGH BOOLEAN Input value is higher than the reference value
INLOW BOOLEAN Input value is lower than the reference value

Technical manual
Logic
11.16.5 Settings
11.16.6 Operation principle GUID-3FA699A8-D076-4E5E-BCB8-C6B7907573D1 v3
The comparison can be done in two ways,
1. Between 2 inputs, INPUT and REF

2. Between INPUT and the SetValue setting
The selection of reference value for comparison is done through setting RefSource. If RefSource is
selected as "Input REF" then the reference value for comparison is taken from second input signal
(REF). If RefSource is selected as "Set Value" then the reference value for comparison is taken from
setting (SetValue).
Generally the inputs to the function are in units, but when the comparison is to be done with respect
to set level, then the user can scale the reference value in steps of 1000, as per the setting RefPrefix.
Internally the function handles the reference value for comparator as SetValue*RefPrefix.
Additionally the comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed values, which is
determined by the setting EnaAbs. If EnaAbs is selected as "Absolute" then both input and reference
values are converted into absolute values and then comparison is done. If EnaAbs is selected as
"Signed" then the comparison is done without absolute conversion.
This function has two settings EqualBandHigh and EqualBandLow to provide margins from reference
value for equal to condition. When the INPUT value is within high and low band around the reference
value, output INEQUAL will get set.
In order to avoid oscillations at boundary conditions of equal band low limit and high limit, hysteresis
has been provided. If the INPUT is above the equal high level margin including hysteresis, then
INHIGH will set. Similarly if the INPUT is below the equal low level margin including hysteresis, then
INLOW will set.
INEQUAL Reset / INHIGH Set INEQUAL Set / INHIGH Reset
EqualBandHigh
Internal
Equal Band REF or SetValue Hysteresis for
equal band
EqualBandLow
INEQUAL Reset / INLOW Set INEQUAL Set / INLOW Reset

Figure 159: Operation principle of REALCOMP
When EnaAbs is set as absolute comparison and SetValue is set less than 0.1% of
the set unit then INLOW output will never pick up. During the above mentioned
condition, due to marginal value for avoiding oscillations of function outputs, the
INLOW output will never set.

Technical manual
Logic

GUID-62792FCB-B436-4034-9A08-C9FF918FF547 v1
REALCOMP function can compare the values from milli value level to giga value level and the
maximum expectable accuracy level from the function is 10 µ.
GUID-3FDD7677-1D86-42AD-A545-B66081C49B47 v4
Table 239: Number of REALCOMP instances

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
REALCOMP 10 10 10
11.17 Hold maximum and minimum of input HOLDMINMAX GUID-18E05AF9-05D1-49C0-BD89-9BCB4F168907 v1
11.17.1 Identification GUID-18E05AF9-05D1-49C0-BD89-9BCB4F168907 v1

Hold maximum and minimum of input HOLDMINMAX - -
11.17.2 Functionality GUID-7DA0AA9A-CCEA-4467-B67E-45B9C1DC145A v1
Hold minimum and maximum of input (HOLDMINMAX) function will acquire, compare and hold the
minimum and maximum values of INPUT as soon as the START input goes to 1, the outputs are
updated as long as the START is 1. After START goes to 0, the last updated value is stored. The
outputs are reset when the RESET is 1.
11.17.3 Function block GUID-8CA6CD4E-1080-4849-B146-25C19DEDFA66 v1
HOLDMAXMIN
HOLDMINMAX
INPUT MAX
START MIN
RESET
Figure 160: HOLDMINMAX function block
11.17.4 Signals
GUID-5B941634-5868-427A-80F8-9CA5740D3039 v1
Table 240: HOLDMINMAX Input signals

INPUT REAL 0 Input
START BOOLEAN 0 Start
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset

Technical manual
Logic
Table 241: HOLDMINMAX Output signals

MAX REAL Maximum value
MIN REAL Minimum value
11.18 Converter for Integer to Real INT_REAL GUID-B9C23419-0B94-4D72-B88D-4FB7C8C6E388 v1
11.18.1 Identification GUID-B9C23419-0B94-4D72-B88D-4FB7C8C6E388 v1

Converter for Integer to Real INT_REAL - -
11.18.2 Functionality GUID-B5E646B7-07AC-448E-B75E-773452157369 v1
The converter integer to real (INT_REAL) function can be used to convert integer to real values.
11.18.3 Function block GUID-B4606AFC-9B6D-4452-9DD2-6258CBE7A571 v1
INT_REAL
INT_REAL
INT REAL
Figure 161: INT_REAL function block
11.18.4 Signals
Table 242: INT_REAL Input signals

INT INTEGER 0 Integer input
Table 243: INT_REAL Output signals

REAL REAL Real output
11.19 Definable constant for logic function CONST_INT GUID-67FDADEA-EF3B-4759-8FD2-6BDE6C757C22 v1
11.19.1 Identification GUID-67FDADEA-EF3B-4759-8FD2-6BDE6C757C22 v1

Definable constant for logic function CONST_INT - -

Technical manual
Logic
11.19.2 Functionality GUID-4EF2869F-48F1-4B7B-B99B-FEAAC9431A9B v1
The definable constant for logic function CONST_INT can be used to provide a constant output in an
integer format based on the set value in PST.
11.19.3 Function block GUID-BAADB2EE-4C9F-40EA-BE40-F14490E1C3D2 v1
CONST_INT
CONST_INT
OUT
Figure 162: CONST_INT function block
11.19.4 Signals
Table 244: CONST_INT Output signals

OUT INTEGER Output
11.19.5 Settings
Table 245: CONST_INT Non group settings (basic)

Constant -999999 - 999999 - 1 0.1 Constant value
11.20 Analog input selector for integer values INTSEL GUID-1B14ACDB-43FD-4B87-B714-B661A5B90C75 v1
11.20.1 Identification GUID-1B14ACDB-43FD-4B87-B714-B661A5B90C75 v1

Analog input selector for integer values INTSEL - -
11.20.2 Functionality GUID-567B1181-BDE7-497B-8020-FDB798F0FCB5 v1
Analog input selector for integer values (INTSEL) selects one out of eight possible integer inputs.
Each input (INPUTx) has its dedicated select input (SELx). The function provides the output for the
value of the selected input, and its respective select number (INSEL).
If more than one input is selected, the output will be the lowest in order INPUT value. If inputs are not
selected, the select value number shall be 0.

Technical manual
Logic
11.20.3 Function block GUID-94FEDCA6-DABD-4D20-A6F3-A95DED7C3777 v1
INTSEL
INTSEL
INPUT1 VALUE
INPUT2 INSEL
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
SEL1
SEL2
SEL3
SEL4
SEL5
SEL6
SEL7
SEL8
Figure 163: INTSEL function block
11.20.4 Signals
Table 246: INTSEL Input signals

INPUT1 INTEGER 0 Input 1
SEL1 BOOLEAN 0 Selector 1
Table 247: INTSEL Output signals

VALUE INTEGER Value
INSEL INTEGER Selector

Technical manual
Logic
11.21 Definable limiter LIMITER GUID-8C44B106-7C1F-452F-B8C5-0C7B889C08F2 v1
11.21.1 Identification GUID-8C44B106-7C1F-452F-B8C5-0C7B889C08F2 v1

Definable limiter LIMITER - -
11.21.2 Functionality GUID-BD0E0AB5-03AD-469E-AE25-D92BD9555FC5 v1
The definable limiter (LIMITER) function can be used to limit the output values within the minimum
and maximum limits set in the PST. If the input is outside the set range then the value OUTLIMIT is
set to 1 to indicate the output value is limited.
11.21.3 Function block GUID-A64AFC93-0840-4828-949A-84180D485B81 v1
LIMITER
LIMITER
IN OUT
OUTLIMIT
Figure 164: LIMITER function block
11.21.4 Signals
Table 248: LIMITER Input signals

IN REAL 0 Input value
Table 249: LIMITER Output signals

OUT REAL Output value
OUTLIMIT BOOLEAN Input is out of limit
11.21.5 Settings
Table 250: LIMITER Non group settings (basic)

MinLim -999999.9 - - 0.1 -1.0 Minimum limit
999999.9
MaxLim -999999.9 - - 0.1 1.0 Maximum limit
999999.9

Technical manual
Logic
11.22 Absolute value ABS GUID-D0CC5BFF-4F4F-41A9-9C5F-615496D010B0 v1
11.22.1 Identification GUID-D0CC5BFF-4F4F-41A9-9C5F-615496D010B0 v1

Absolute value ABS - -
11.22.2 Functionality GUID-A5BF20EF-F04B-4546-B6D0-C1343A56ED72 v1
The absolute value (ABS) function gives the absolute value of the input.
11.22.3 Function block GUID-17CD947C-B18A-429C-BDE8-763065C1CD6F v1
ABS
ABS
IN OUT
Figure 165: ABS function block
11.22.4 Signals
Table 251: ABS Input signals

IN REAL 0 Input
Table 252: ABS Output signals

OUT REAL Output
11.23 Polar to rectangular converter POL_REC GUID-EFB73717-DE3D-4C41-801A-82A8A30821E6 v1
11.23.1 Identification GUID-EFB73717-DE3D-4C41-801A-82A8A30821E6 v1

Polar to rectangular converter POL_REC - -
11.23.2 Functionality GUID-C2265D29-5169-4E04-B706-15B8A42F1D3E v1
The polar to rectangular converter (POL_REC) function gives the possibility to convert an input
values in polar form to a rectangular form.

Technical manual
Logic
11.23.3 Function block GUID-BD520B52-92ED-4690-A6E8-0DA821FDB6DB v1
Figure 166: POL_REC function block
11.23.4 Signals
Table 253: POL_REC Input signals

MAG REAL 0 Magnitude
ANGLE REAL 0 Angle in radians
Table 254: POL_REC Output signals

REAL REAL Real component
IMAG REAL imaginary component
11.24 Radians to degree angle converter RAD_DEG GUID-85E9D856-B4BB-4875-9042-46AA6F398955 v1
11.24.1 Identification GUID-85E9D856-B4BB-4875-9042-46AA6F398955 v1

Radians to degree angle converter RAD_DEG - -
11.24.2 Functionality GUID-40A32941-6633-4ABE-B123-9CCAAACC093A v1
The radians to degree angle converter (RAD_DEG) function gives the possibility to convert an input
value from radian angles to degree angles.
11.24.3 Function block GUID-5FA30AD4-77B9-4CD1-801C-3406A1892394 v1
RAD_DEG
RAD_DEG
RAD DEG
Figure 167: RAD_DEG function block

Technical manual
Logic
11.24.4 Signals
Table 255: RAD_DEG Input signals

RAD REAL 0 Angle in radians
Table 256: RAD_DEG Output signals

DEG REAL Angle in degree

Table 257: RAD_DEG Monitored data

DEG REAL - deg Angle in degree
11.25 Definable constant for logic function CONST_REAL GUID-98C89599-1535-44A5-9773-D755D9362DA0 v1
11.25.1 Identification GUID-98C89599-1535-44A5-9773-D755D9362DA0 v1

Definable constant for logic function CONST_REAL - -
11.25.2 Functionality GUID-3B03B1AD-54AF-4FC7-9472-4295D920BA4A v1
The definable constant for logic function (CONST_REAL) can be used to provide a constant output in
an real format based on the set value in PST.
11.25.3 Function block GUID-9E9A4FA6-498F-4D8F-AA47-47D49AE840A8 v1
CONST_REAL
CONST_REAL
OUT
GUID-6A878306-1E98-469E-9E4F-1B0C46381ADE V1 EN-US
Figure 168: CONST_REAL function block
11.25.4 Signals
Table 258: CONST_REAL Output signals

OUT REAL Output

Technical manual
Logic
11.25.5 Signals
Table 259: CONST_REAL Non group settings (basic)

Constant -999999.9 - - 0.1 1.0 Constant value
999999.9
11.26 Analog input selector for real values REALSEL GUID-FF9DD985-AF26-48B1-80F9-8A7C70189A77 v1
11.26.1 Identification GUID-FF9DD985-AF26-48B1-80F9-8A7C70189A77 v1

Analog input selector for real values REALSEL - -
11.26.2 Functionality GUID-CDE0D96C-B328-4B10-A88C-1648D1E9A521 v1
Analog input selector for real values (REALSEL) function selects one out of eight possible real
inputs. Each input (INPUTx) has its dedicated select input (SELx).
The function provides the output for the value of the selected input and its respective select number
(INSEL). If more than one input is selected, the output will be the lowest in order INPUT value. If
inputs are not selected, the select value number shall be 0.
11.26.3 Function block GUID-C8C6B16A-FDDE-4315-A07F-7D5AB8C969B9 v1
REALSEL
REALSEL
INPUT1 VALUE
INPUT2 INSEL
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
SEL1
SEL2
SEL3
SEL4
SEL5
SEL6
SEL7
SEL8
Figure 169: REALSEL function block

Technical manual
Logic
11.26.4 Signals
Table 260: REALSEL Input signals

INPUT1 REAL 0 Input 1
Table 261: REALSEL Output signals

VALUE REAL Value
INSEL INTEGER Selector
11.27 Store value for integer inputs STOREINT GUID-7DF1E9B4-C065-4905-99AF-EDAAB2AF4F80 v1
11.27.1 Identification GUID-7DF1E9B4-C065-4905-99AF-EDAAB2AF4F80 v1

Store value for integer inputs STOREINT - -
11.27.2 Functionality GUID-48902D3D-BE8B-4159-B8A2-A596912BAE76 v1
The store value for integer inputs (STOREINT) function can be used to store the integer value upon
the trigger, the minimum trigger duration for it to be stored is 100ms. The stored value is reset to 0
when the RESET input is set to 1.

Technical manual
Logic
11.27.3 Function block GUID-314823EB-C9E0-498D-958E-0FA32DE941BF v1
GUID-4AF5186E-2BF2-4D6D-AEAC-D1854A0D04EB V1 EN-US
Figure 170: STOREINT function block
11.27.4 Signals
Table 262: STOREINT Input signals

INPUT INTEGER 0 Input
TRIGGER BOOLEAN 0 Trigger, if high for more than 100 ms the input value is stored
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset stored value
Table 263: STOREINT Output signals

STOREDVAL INTEGER Stored value
11.28 Store value for real inputs STOREREAL GUID-B44812FC-7808-4AF5-A8C3-140A9365A72A v1
11.28.1 Identification GUID-B44812FC-7808-4AF5-A8C3-140A9365A72A v1

Store value for real inputs STOREREAL - -
11.28.2 Functionality GUID-A3DF152A-7BAA-4BBE-BBB8-12F513C92317 v1
The store value for real inputs (STOREREAL) function can be used to store the real value upon the
trigger, the minimum trigger duration for it to be stored is 100ms. The stored value is reset to 0 when
the RESET input is set to 1.
11.28.3 Function block GUID-4AF2FAEA-97E0-40C3-9503-6AED8066E8BB v1
STOREREAL
STOREREAL
IN STOREDVAL
TRIGGER
RESET
Figure 171: STOREREAL function block

Technical manual
Logic
11.28.4 Signals
Table 264: STOREREAL Input signals

IN REAL 0 Input
TRIGGER BOOLEAN 0 Trigger, if high for more than 100 ms the input value is stored
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset stored value
Table 265: STOREREAL Output signals

STOREDVAL REAL Stored value
11.29 Degree to radians angle converter DEG_RAD GUID-D6D9BCBF-799F-465E-8AB7-480DB0124081 v1
11.29.1 Identification GUID-D6D9BCBF-799F-465E-8AB7-480DB0124081 v1

Degree to radians angle converter DEG_RAD - -
11.29.2 Functionality GUID-51608C56-7ED9-4FAD-A5BF-5EA4991F83D2 v1
The degree to radians angle converter (DEG_RAD) function gives the possibility to convert an input
value from degree angles to radian angles.
11.29.3 Function block GUID-933FD746-C986-4774-A4C3-B8C19357DF09 v1
DEGTORAD
DEG_RAD
DEG RAD
Figure 172: DEG_RAD function block
11.29.4 Signals
Table 266: DEG_RAD Input signals

DEG REAL 0 Angle in degree
Table 267: DEG_RAD Output signals

RAD REAL Angle in radians

Technical manual
Logic

Table 268: DEG_RAD Monitored data

RAD REAL - deg Angle in radians

Technical manual
302
Monitoring
Section 12 Monitoring
12.1 Measurements IP14593-1 v4
12.1.1 Function revision history GUID-D462FD8B-5BC4-40A4-93C7-6CCC4F77FBC3 v1
12.1.2 Function revision history GUID-8EAA18E2-28AF-498A-889A-24AB7518ADDA v1

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.1 -
C 2.2.1 -
D 2.2.1 PTP Enhancement
E 2.2.4 -
SEMOD56123-2 v8

Power system measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f
SYMBOL-RR V1 EN-US
Phase current measurement CMMXU -
SYMBOL-SS V1 EN-US
Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US
Current sequence component CMSQI -

measurement
I1, I2, I0
SYMBOL-VV V1 EN-US
Voltage sequence component VMSQI -

measurement
U1, U2, U0
SYMBOL-TT V1 EN-US
Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US

Technical manual
Monitoring
Measurement functions are used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting to the
local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for example, via IEC 61850. The
possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power, reactive power, currents,
voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient production, transmission and distribution of
electrical energy. It provides to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of
the power system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and
control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers (CTs and
VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value from the IED with other
independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified.
Finally, it can be used to verify proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent
protection function.
The available measured values from an IED are depending on the actual hardware
(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit, low limit, high
limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, that is, the measured value
below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise in the inputs.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when change in
measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the last time value
updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based on periodic reporting.
Main menu /Measurement /Monitoring /Service values /CVMMXN
The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:
• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

• PF: power factor
• U: phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
• I: phase current amplitude
• F: power system frequency
,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical quantities:
• I: phase currents (amplitude and angle) (CMMXU)

• U: voltages (phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) (VMMXU,
VNMMXU)
The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental frequency
phasors (DFT values) of the measured current and voltage signals. The measured power quantities
are available either, as instantaneously calculated quantities or, averaged values over a period of
time (low pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5 presentation. This
is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and at
100% of rated voltage.
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware, (TRM) and
the logic configuration made in PCM600.
The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:
• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, amplitude and angle)

• U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, amplitude and angle).

Technical manual
Monitoring
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic
configuration made in PCM600.
CVMMXN
I3P* S
U3P* S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE
Figure 173: CVMMXN function block
CMMXU
I3P* IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL
Figure 174: CMMXU function block
VMMXU
U3P* UL12
UL12RANG
UL12ANGL
UL23
UL23RANG
UL23ANGL
UL31
UL31RANG
UL31ANGL
Figure 175: VMMXU function block
CMSQI
I3P* 3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL
Figure 176: CMSQI function block

Technical manual
Monitoring
VMSQI
U3P* 3U0
3U0RANG
3U0ANGL
U1
U1RANG
U1ANGL
U2
U2RANG
U2ANGL
Figure 177: VMSQI function block
VNMMXU
U3P* UL1
UL1RANG
UL1ANGL
UL2
UL2RANG
UL2ANGL
UL3
UL3RANG
UL3ANGL
Figure 178: VNMMXU function block
12.1.6 Signals
Table 269: CVMMXN Input signals

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
Table 270: CVMMXN Output signals

S REAL Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent Power range
P_INST REAL Active Power
P REAL Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER Active Power range
Q_INST REAL Reactive Power
Q REAL Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive Power range
PF REAL Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER Power Factor range
ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage
U REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE INTEGER Calculated voltage range

Technical manual
Monitoring

I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range
F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range
Table 271: CMMXU Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 272: CMMXU Output signals

IL1 REAL IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL1RANG INTEGER IL1 Amplitude range
IL1ANGL REAL IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 273: VMMXU Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 274: VMMXU Output signals

UL12 REAL UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL12RANG INTEGER UL12 Amplitude range
UL12ANGL REAL UL12 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 275: CMSQI Input signals

SIGNAL

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 276: CMSQI Output signals

3I0 REAL 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG INTEGER 3I0 Amplitude range
3I0ANGL REAL 3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I1 REAL I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I1RANG INTEGER I1 Amplitude range
I1ANGL REAL I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I2 REAL I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I2RANG INTEGER I2 Amplitude range
I2ANGL REAL I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 277: VMSQI Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 278: VMSQI Output signals

3U0 REAL 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3U0RANG INTEGER 3U0 Amplitude range
3U0ANGL REAL 3U0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U1 REAL U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U1RANG INTEGER U1 Amplitude range
U1ANGL REAL U1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U2 REAL U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U2RANG INTEGER U2 Amplitude range
U2ANGL REAL U2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 279: VNMMXU Input signals

SIGNAL
Table 280: VNMMXU Output signals


Technical manual
Monitoring

12.1.7 Settings SEMOD130322-4 v7
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are depending on the
actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
These six functions are not handled as a group, so parameter settings are only available in the first
setting group.
The following terms are used in the Unit and Description columns:
• UBase (UB): Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage setting. It
can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage supervised object.
• IBase (IB): Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting. It can
be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the supervised object.
• SBase (SB): Base setting for power values in MVA.
Table 281: CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

SLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
SMax 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
SRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
PMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
PMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
PRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
QMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
QMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
QRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
PFMin -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value
PFMax -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Maximum value

Technical manual
Monitoring

PFRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
UMin 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UMax 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
URepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
IMin 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 5.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
FrMin 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
FrMax 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value
FrRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
On
Value groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - L1, L2, L3 Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
PowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 - 0.001 1.000 Amplitude factor to scale power
calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle compensation for phase shift
between measured I & U
k 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, U and I

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 282: CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

SDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
of range, Int Db: In 0,001%s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
SHiHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
PDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
PZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
PHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
PHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
PLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
PLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
QDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
QZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
QHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
QHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
QLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
QLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
PFDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 100 500 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
PFHiHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.800 High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -0.800 Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
UDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
UZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
UHiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
ULowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
ULowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase

Technical manual
Monitoring

ULimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
IDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
IZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
IHiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
ILowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
FrDbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 10 100 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
FrHiHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 65.000 High High limit (physical value)
FrHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 63.000 High limit (physical value)
FrLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 47.000 Low limit (physical value)
FrLowLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
UGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of UBase
IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of IBase
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
5% of Ur
30% of Ur
100% of Ur
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
5% of Ir
30% of Ir
100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir
Table 283: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

IL1DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
IL1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase

Technical manual
Monitoring

IL1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
Value groups
IL1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
IL1AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
Table 284: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

IL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
IL1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
5% of Ir
30% of Ir
IL1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IL1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
100% of Ir

Technical manual
Monitoring

IL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
0,001% of range
for all limits
0,001% of range
for all limits
Table 285: VMMXU Non group settings (basic)

UL12DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
On
UL12ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
UL12Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL12Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL12RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
Value groups
UL12AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
0,001% of range
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min

Technical manual
Monitoring

0,001% of range
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
Table 286: VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

UL12HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL12HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL12LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL12LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
100% of Ur
UL12LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
for all limits
for all limits
Table 287: CMSQI Non group settings (basic)

3I0DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
3I0Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
3I0Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase

Technical manual
Monitoring

3I0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
Value groups
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
On
I1DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
I1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
I2DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
I2Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I2Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
I2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
Table 288: CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

3I0HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
3I0HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase

Technical manual
Monitoring

I1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
I2HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I2HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I2LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I2LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
Table 289: VMSQI Non group settings (basic)

3U0DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
3U0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
3U0Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
3U0Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
Value groups
3U0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
3U0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
3U0AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
On
U1DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
U1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
U1Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U1Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
U1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
U1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
U1AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
U2DbRepInt 1 - 100000 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
U2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Magnitude zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
U2Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U2Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase

Technical manual
Monitoring

U2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
U2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range, common
for all limits
U2AngDbRepInt 1 - 100000 s 1 10 Cyclic report interval (s)
UAmpPreComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage
at 5% of Ur
at 30% of Ur
at 100% of Ur
Table 290: VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

3U0HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
3U0HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U1HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U1HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
U1LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U1LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U2HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U2HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
U2LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U2LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
Table 291: VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)

On
0,001% of range
Value groups
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min

Technical manual
Monitoring

for all limits
0,001% of range
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
for all limits
0,001% of range
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
for all limits
Table 292: VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

100% of Ur

Technical manual
Monitoring

Table 293: CVMMXN Monitored data

S REAL - MVA Apparent Power magnitude of deadband
value
P REAL - MW Active Power magnitude of deadband
value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive Power magnitude of deadband
value
PF REAL - - Power Factor magnitude of deadband
value
U REAL - kV Calculated voltage magnitude of
deadband value
I REAL - A Calculated current magnitude of
deadband value
F REAL - Hz System frequency magnitude of
deadband value
Table 294: CMMXU Monitored data

IL1 REAL - A IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
IL1ANGL REAL - deg IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
value
value
Table 295: VMMXU Monitored data

UL12 REAL - kV UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
UL12ANGL REAL - deg UL12 Angle, magnitude of reported
value
value
value
value
value

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 296: CMSQI Monitored data

3I0 REAL - A 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
3I0ANGL REAL - deg 3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I1 REAL - A I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
I1ANGL REAL - deg I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I2 REAL - A I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
I2ANGL REAL - deg I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 297: VMSQI Monitored data

3U0 REAL - kV 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
3U0ANGL REAL - deg 3U0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U1 REAL - kV U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
U1ANGL REAL - deg U1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U2 REAL - kV U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported
value
U2ANGL REAL - deg U2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 298: VNMMXU Monitored data

value
UL1ANGL REAL - deg UL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
value
value
12.1.9.1 Measurement supervision SEMOD54417-130 v4
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further process
information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks. The number of
processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
• Locally by means of the local HMI

• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
• Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report function

Technical manual
Monitoring
Phase angle reference SEMOD54417-303 v5

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General setting
parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference.
Zero point clamping SEMOD54417-137 v4

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise in the input
signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general setting (XZeroDb where X equals S,
P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this measurement
supervision zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the
measurement values within CVMMXN.
Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-140 v5

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in the function block by means of
four defined operating thresholds, see figure 179. The monitoring has two different modes of
operating:
• Overfunction, when the measured quantity exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or High-high limit
(XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured quantity decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim) or Low-
low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 179.
Y = Magnitude of the Measured Quantity
X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0 t
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
Figure 179: Presentation of operating limits

Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output
signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit exceeded,
2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit).
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 179.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the operating
and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring channel separately. The
hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.
Actual value of the measured quantity SEMOD54417-150 v5

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The measurement is
continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting of the value to the higher levels
depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic reporting modes are available:

Technical manual
Monitoring
• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

• Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)
• Amplitude Deadband and 5s cyclic
• Amplitude Deadband and 30s cyclic
• Amplitude Deadband and 1min cyclic
• Dynamic Amplitude Deadband
• Dynamic Amplitude Deadband and 5s cyclic
Cyclic reporting SEMOD54417-158 v3

The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting (XRepTyp). The
measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or integral dead-band reporting.
In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when measured value
passes any of the defined threshold limits.
Y
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4
Y1 Y5
t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)
t
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Value 5
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt IEC05000500-2-en.vsdx
Figure 180: Periodic reporting
Amplitude dead-band supervision SEMOD54417-163 v6

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is larger than
the ±ΔY pre-defined limits that are set by user (XDbRepInt), then the measuring channel reports the
new value to a higher level. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 181
shows an example with the amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is
not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each
other.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Value Reported
Y

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Y
Y
Y2 Y
Y
Y
Y
Y1
Figure 181: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set around it. The new
value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by the ±ΔY set limits.
Integral dead-band reporting SEMOD54417-167 v4

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit
(XDbRepInt), figure 182, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band supervision is
shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a
time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 182 serves as a basic value for further measurement. A
difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is multiplied by
the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integral values are added until
the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base
for the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).
The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with small variations
that can last for relatively long periods.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
Value
(1st) Value
A Reported Y5
Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported
t
Figure 182: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision
12.1.9.2 Measurements CVMMXN SEMOD54417-172 v3
Mode of operation SEMOD54417-174 v7

The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input
in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and calculate above mentioned
quantities in nine different ways depending on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end
user can freely select by a parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall
be used within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:
Set value Formula used for complex, Formula used for voltage Comment
for three-phase power calculation and current magnitude
parameter calculation
“Mode”
1 L1, L2, L3 Used when three phase-to-
* * *
S = U L1 × I L1 + U L 2 × I L 2 + U L 3 × I L 3 U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3 earth voltages are available
EQUATION1385 V1 EN-US (Equation 41) I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3

2 Arone Used when two phase-to-
S = U L1 L 2 × I L*1 - U L 2 L 3 × I L* 3 U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2 phase voltages are available
(Equation 43)
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2
3 PosSeq Used when only symmetrical
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq
*
U = 3 × U PosSeq three phase power shall be
measured
(Equation 45)
I = I PosSeq

Technical manual
Monitoring
Set value Formula used for complex, Formula used for voltage Comment
for three-phase power calculation and current magnitude
parameter calculation
“Mode”
4 L1L2 Used when only UL1L2
S = U L1 L 2 × ( I L*1 - I L* 2 ) U = U L1 L 2 phase-to-phase voltage is
available
(Equation 47)
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2

S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L* 2 - I L* 3 ) U = U L2 L3 phase-to-phase voltage is
available
(Equation 49)
I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2

S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L* 3 - I L*1 ) U = U L 3 L1 phase-to-phase voltage is
available
(Equation 51)
I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2

7 L1 Used when only UL1 phase-
S = 3 × U L1 × I L*1 U = 3 × U L1 to-earth voltage is available
(Equation 53)
I = I L1

S = 3 × U L 2 × I L* 2 U = 3 × U L2 to-earth voltage is available
(Equation 55)
I = IL2

S = 3 × U L 3 × I L* 3 U = 3 × U L3 to-earth voltage is available
(Equation 57)
I = I L3

* means complex conjugated value
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the measurement function
calculates the three-phase power accurately. In other operating modes that is, from 3 to 9 it
calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully symmetrical. Once
the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with
the following formulas:
P = Re( S )
Q = Im( S )
S = S = P2 + Q2

Technical manual
Monitoring
PF = cosj = P
S
Additionally to the power factor value, the two binary output signals from the function are provided
which indicates the angular relationship between the current and voltage phasors. Binary output
signal ILAG is set TRUE when current phasor is lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal
ILEAD is set TRUE when current phasor is leading the voltage phasor.
Each analogue output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is
an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
Calibration of analog inputs SEMOD54417-293 v5

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to get 0.5 class
measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of
rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in
between, see example in figure 183.
Figure 183: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase signal, in the group signals will be used as reference. The
amplitude and angle compensation will be used for other related input signals.
Low pass filtering SEMOD54417-233 v4

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to introduce
the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I and power factor. This will
make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is
performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

Technical manual
Monitoring
X = k × X Old + (1 - k ) × X Calculated
where:
X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle
XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle
k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is immediately given
out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k is set to value bigger than 0,
the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be determined separately for every application.
Some typical value for k =0.14.
Zero point clamping SEMOD54417-250 v5

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not present, it is
possible for the end user to set the amplitudeIGenZeroDb level for current and voltage measurement
UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current or voltage measurement is forced to zero
automatically the measured values for power (P, Q and S) and power factor are forced to zero as
well. Since the measurement supervision functionality, included in CVMMXN, is using these values
the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero point
clamping within measurement supervision, see section "Measurement supervision").
Compensation facility SEMOD54417-253 v5

In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete measurement chain
(CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is possible to perform on site
calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by setting the complex constant which is
then internally used within the function to multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This
constant is set as amplitude (setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle (setting
parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are
done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (complex constant has default
value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (for example, around rated power) can
be done at site. However, to perform this calibration it is necessary to have an external power meter
with high accuracy class available.
Directionality SEMOD54417-256 v7
If CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and reactive power will
be always measured towards the protected object. This is shown in the following figure 184.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Busbar
IED
P Q
Protected
Object
IEC09000038-1-EN V1 EN-US
Figure 184: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the
busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values when they flow from the
protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of the power
transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have actually opposite
directional convention for active and reactive power measurements. This can be easily achieved by
setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive
power will have positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
Frequency SEMOD54417-261 v2
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained from the pre-
processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output.
12.1.9.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU SEMOD54417-264 v7
The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-phase current input
in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can be calibrated to get
better then 0.5 class measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs and IEC 61850. This is
achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. The
compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see figure 183.
Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitude output has a
corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in
the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

Technical manual
Monitoring
12.1.9.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU, VNMMXU SEMOD54417-268 v6
The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool to be
operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations,
see above.
The voltages (phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on the
outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ULxy_RANG). The
supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
12.1.9.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI SEMOD54417-299 v6
The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or voltage (VMSQI)
input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other than X_RANG, are calculated within
the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate the signals. Input signals are obtained from
the pre-processing block and transferred to corresponding output.
Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs (voltage and
current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement
supervision".

M12386-1 v17
Table 299: Power system measurement CVMMXN technical data

Frequency (0.8-1.2) x fr ±5.0 mHz for U at 0.2 × Ur ≤ U < 0.5 × Ur
±3.0 mHz for U at 0.5 × Ur ≤ U < 1.0 × Ur
±2.0 mHz for U at U ≥ Ur
Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.3% of U at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Current (0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.8% of I at 0.1 x Ir 0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of P

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ > 0.7
Reactive power, Q (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr
(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of Q

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ < 0.7
Apparent power, S (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr
(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S >0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of S

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
Power factor, cos (φ) (10 to 300) V <0.02

(0.1-4.0) x Ir
(100 to 220) V <0.01

(0.5-2.0) x Ir

Technical manual
Monitoring
GUID-5E04B3F9-E1B7-4974-9C0B-DE9CD4A2408F v6
Table 300: CMMXU technical data

Current at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir
±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir
Phase angle at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V
GUID-9B8A7FA5-9C98-4CBD-A162-7112869CF030 v5
Table 302: CMSQI technical data

Current positive sequence, I1 (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir
Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir
Current zero sequence, 3I0 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Current negative sequence, I2 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Phase angle (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir 50 V
Voltage zero sequence, 3U0 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage negative sequence, U2 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V
±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
GUID-ED634B6D-9918-464F-B6A4-51B78129B819 v6
Table 304: VNMMXU technical data

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Technical manual
Monitoring
12.2 Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG GUID-358AD8F8-AE06-4AEA-9969-46E5299D5B4B v4
12.2.1 Function revision history GUID-7F31EFA5-F8D8-4D8D-85DA-3418F70ABE94 v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.2 -
C 2.2.1 -
D 2.2.4 Binary quality inputs SENLVLQ and SENTEMPQ have been added for pressure and
temperature sensor signals in order to control alarm and lockout signals. Whenever there
is no sensor, the quality of the binary input will be low. If sensor quality is low, then
lockout and alarm signals will get reset.
E 2.2.5 -
GUID-AD96C26E-C3E5-4B21-9ED6-12E540954AC3 v5

Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG - 63
12.2.3 Functionality GUID-0692CD0D-F33E-4370-AC91-B216CAAAFC28 v8
Insulation supervision for gas medium (SSIMG) is used for monitoring the circuit breaker condition.
Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker can be used as input to the
function. In addition, the function can be used with an analog value of gas pressure and temperature
of the insulation medium and binary inputs. The SSIMG function generates alarms based on the
received information.
12.2.4 Function block

GUID-94B75A6D-973D-4F1F-8643-F2128AD31CC4 v4
SSIMG
BLOCK LOCKOU T
BLKALM PRESLO
SENPRES TEMPLO
SENTEMP ALARM
SENPRESQ PRESALM
SENTEMP Q TEMPALM
SENPRESALM PRESSURE
SENPRESLO TEMP
SETP LO
SETTLO
RESETLO
Figure 185: SSIMG function block
12.2.5 Signals
GUID-89749F71-CAEB-4A57-A1F0-148CCF68E97E v3

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 305: SSIMG Input signals

BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
SENPRES REAL 0.0 Pressure input from transformer
SENTEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from transformer
SENPRESQ BOOLEAN 0 Quality status of pressure
SENTEMPQ BOOLEAN 0 Quality status of temperature sensor signals
SENPRESALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm signal
SENPRESLO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout signal
SETPLO BOOLEAN 0 Set pressure lockout
SETTLO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESETLO BOOLEAN 0 Reset pressure and temperature lockout
Table 306: SSIMG Output signals

LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level or temperature above lockout level
PRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
TEMPLO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level
ALARM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level or temperature above alarm level
PRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
TEMPALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
PRESSURE REAL Pressure service value
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
12.2.6 Settings
Table 307: SSIMG Group settings (basic)

On
PresAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for pressure
PresLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Pressure lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tPressureAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure alarm
tPressureLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure lockout
indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetPresAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure alarm

Technical manual
Monitoring

tResetPresLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout

Table 308: SSIMG Monitored data

PRESSURE REAL - - Pressure service value
TEMP REAL - deg Temperature of the insulation medium
12.2.8 Operation principle GUID-359458EA-FFAA-4A44-A8E8-9469CA069C80 v9
Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used to monitor the gas pressure in the circuit breaker and
temperature of the medium. The gas pressure is monitored to detect low pressure. Binary inputs of
gas density SENPRESALM, SENPRESLO, and gas pressure signal SENPRES are considered to
initiate the gas pressure alarm PRESALM and the gas pressure lockout PRESLO.
If any gas pressure sensor measurement is available and connected to the function input, then gas
pressure sensor quality input also considered for pressure alarm and lockout detections.
Gas pressure alarm PRESALM is activated when any of the following condition occurs,
• If binary signal from CB SENPRESALM is high.

• If gas pressure SENPRES goes below the setting PresAlmLimit and quality input SENPRESQ is
high.
Gas pressure lockout PRESLO is activated when any of the following condition occurs,
• If binary signal from CB SENPRESLO is high or binary input SETPLO is high.

• If gas pressure SENPRES goes below the setting PresLOLimit and quality input SENPRESQ is
high.
Thus, the function can be used without any sensor inputs and allowing alarm and lockout outputs
based on binary inputs.
To avoid false alarms due to a sudden change in gas pressure, two time delays tPressureAlarm or
tPressureLO are included. If the pressure goes below the settings for more than these time delays,
the corresponding alarm PRESALM or lockout PRESLO will be initiated. The SETPLO binary input is
used for setting the gas pressure lockout PRESLO. The PRESLO output retains the last value until it
is reset by using the binary input RESETLO. The binary input BLKALM can be used to block the
alarms, and the BLOCK input can be used to block both alarm and the lockout indications.
Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature SENTEMP. The signal is
monitored to detect high temperature. If any gas temperature sensor measurement is available and
connected to the function input, then gas temperature sensor quality input also considered for
temperature alarm and lockout detections.
Temperature alarm TEMPALM is activated if temperature SENTEMP goes above the setting
TempAlarmLimit and quality input SENTEMPQ is high.
Temperature lockout TEMPLO is activated when any of the following condition occurs,
• If binary input SETTLO is high.

• If temperature SENTEMP goes above the setting TempLOLimit and quality input SENTEMPQ is
high.

Technical manual
Monitoring
To avoid false alarms due to a sudden change in temperature, two time delays tTempAlarm or
tTempLockOut are included. If the temperature goes below the settings for more than these time
delays, the corresponding alarm TEMPALM or lockout TEMPLO will be initiated. The SETTLO binary
input is used for setting the gas pressure lockout TEMPLO. The TEMPLO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESETLO. The binary input BLKALM can be used to
block the alarms, and the BLOCK input can be used to block both alarm and the lockout indications.
The output ALARM goes high if the pressure alarm condition or the temperature alarm condition
exists. The output ALARM can be blocked by activating BLOCK or BLKALM inputs.
The output LOCKOUT goes high if the pressure lockout condition or the temperature lockout
condition exists and it gets reset by activating binary input RESETLO. The output LOCKOUT can be
blocked by activating BLOCK input.

GUID-F034B396-6600-49EF-B0A5-8ED96766A6A0 v10
Table 309: SSIMG Technical data

Pressure alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value or 0.2 whichever
is greater
Pressure lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value or 0.2 whichever
is greater
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value or 1 whichever is
greater
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value or 1 whichever is
greater
Time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for pressure lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is
greater

Technical manual
Monitoring
12.3 Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML GUID-37669E94-4830-4C96-8A67-09600F847F23 v4
12.3.1 Function revision history GUID-751C8C78-891D-423B-825A-0774D0B6C658 v2

revision revision
A 2.2.1 -
B 2.2.2 -
C 2.2.1 -
D 2.2.4 Binary quality inputs SENLVLQ and SENTEMPQ have been added for pressure and
temperature sensor signals in order to control alarm and lockout signals. Whenever there
is no sensor, the quality of the binary input will be low. If sensor quality is low, then
lockout and alarm signals will get reset.
E 2.2.5 -
GUID-4CE96EF6-42C6-4F2E-A190-D288ABF766F6 v4

Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML - 71
12.3.3 Functionality GUID-3B1A665F-60A5-4343-85F4-AD9C066CBE8D v8
Insulation supervision for liquid medium (SSIML) is used for monitoring the oil insulated device
condition. For example, transformers, shunt reactors, and so on. Binary information based on the
liquid level in the circuit breaker can be used as input to the function. In addition, the function can be
used with an analog value of liquid level and temperature of the insulation medium and binary inputs.
The function generates alarms based on the received information.
12.3.4 Function block GUID-AC82A86C-495D-4CBD-9BF9-3CC760591AA9 v3
SSIML
BLOCK LOCKOU T
BLKALM LVLLO
SENLEVEL TEMPLO
SENTEMP ALARM
SENLVLQ LVLALM
SENTEMP Q TEMPALM
SENLVLALM LEVEL
SENLVLLO TEMP
SETLLO
SETTLO
RESETLO
Figure 186: SSIML function block
12.3.5 Signals
GUID-0C378BB3-2104-417F-94B5-16EFC55151FE v3

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 310: SSIML Input signals

SENLEVEL REAL 0.0 Level input from transformer
SENTEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from transformer
SENLVLQ BOOLEAN 0 Quality status of pressure
SENTEMPQ BOOLEAN 0 Quality status of temperature sensor signals
SENLVLALM BOOLEAN 0 Level alarm signal
SENLVLLO BOOLEAN 0 Level lockout signal
SETLLO BOOLEAN 0 Set level lockout
SETTLO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESETLO BOOLEAN 0 Reset level and temperature lockout
Table 311: SSIML Output signals

LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Level below lockout level or temperature above lockout level
LVLLO BOOLEAN Level below lockout level
TEMPLO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level
ALARM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level or temperature above alarm level
LVLALM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level
TEMPALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
LEVEL REAL Level service value
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
12.3.6 Settings
Table 312: SSIML Group settings (basic)

On
LevelAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for level
LevelLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Level lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tLevelAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level alarm
tLevelLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetLevelAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level alarm

Technical manual
Monitoring

tResetLevelLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout

Table 313: SSIML Monitored data

LEVEL REAL - - Level service value
TEMP REAL - deg Temperature of the insulation medium
12.3.8 Operation principle GUID-F4340B59-90D0-4EA7-9FD8-F21D425C884A v9
Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used to monitor the oil level and temperature of oil in the oil
insulated devices. The liquid level is monitored to detect low liquid level. Binary inputs of oil level
SENLVLALM, SENLVLLO, and gas pressure signal SENLEVEL are considered to initiate the liquid
level alarm LVLALM and the liquid level alarm lockout LVLLO.
If any liquid level sensor measurement is available and connected to the function input, then liquid
level sensor quality input also considered for level alarm and lockout detections.
Liquid level alarm LVLALM is activated when any of the following condition occurs,
• If binary signal from CB SENLVLALM is high.

• If liquid level SENLEVEL goes below the setting LevelAlmLimit and quality input SENLEVELQ is
high.
Liquid level lockout LVLLO is activated when any of the following condition occurs,
• If binary signal from CB SENLVLLO is high or SETLLO input is high.

• If liquid level SENLEVEL goes below the setting LevelLOLimit and quality input SENLEVELQ is
high.
Thus, the function can be used without any sensor inputs and allowing alarm and lockout outputs
based on binary inputs.
To avoid false alarm due to the sudden change in the oil level, two time delays tLevelAlarm or
tLevelLockOut are included. If the pressure goes below the settings for more than these time delays,
the corresponding alarm LVLALM or lockout LVLLO will be initiated. The SETLLO binary input is
used for setting the liquid level lockout LVLLO. The LVLLO output retains the last value until it is reset
by using the binary input RESETLO. The binary input BLKALM can be used to block the alarms, and
the BLOCK input can be used to block both alarm and the lockout indications.
Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The signal is monitored
to detect high temperature. If any oil temperature sensor measurement is available and connected to
the function input, then oil temperature sensor quality input also considered for temperature alarm
and lockout detections.
Temperature alarm TEMPALM is activated if temperature SENTEMP goes above the setting
TempAlarmLimit and quality input SENTEMPQ is high.
Temperature lockout TEMPLO is activated when any of the following condition occurs,
• If binary input SETTLO is high.

• If temperature SENTEMP goes above the setting TempLOLimit and quality input SENTEMPQ is
high.

Technical manual
Monitoring
To avoid false alarm due to the sudden change in the temperature, two time delays tTempAlarm or
tTempLockOut are included. If the temperature goes below the settings for more than these time
delays, the corresponding alarm TEMPALM or lockout TEMPLO will be initiated. The SETTLO binary
input is used for setting the gas pressure lockout TEMPLO. The TEMPLO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESETLO. The binary input BLKALM can be used to
block the alarms, and the BLOCK input can be used to block both alarm and the lockout indications.
The output ALARM goes high if the pressure alarm condition or the temperature alarm condition
exists. The output ALARM can be blocked by activating BLOCK or BLKALM inputs.
The output LOCKOUT goes high if the pressure lockout condition or the temperature lockout
condition exists and it gets reset by activating binary input RESETLO. The output LOCKOUT can be
blocked by activating BLOCK input.

GUID-83B0F607-D898-403A-94FD-7FE8D45C73FF v9
Table 314: SSIML Technical data

Oil alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value or 0.2 whichever
is greater
Oil lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value or 0.2 whichever
is greater
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value or 1 whichever is
greater
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value or 1 whichever is
greater
Time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for oil lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is
greater
12.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR
12.4.1 Identification GUID-0FC081B2-0BC8-4EB8-9529-B941E51F18EE v7

Breaker monitoring SSCBR - -
12.4.2 Functionality GUID-E1FD74C3-B9B6-4E11-AA1B-7E7F822FB4DD v14
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function (SSCBR) is used to monitor different parameters of
the breaker condition. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of operations reaches a

Technical manual
Monitoring
predefined value. For a proper functioning of the circuit breaker, it is essential to monitor the circuit
breaker operation, spring charge indication or breaker wear, travel time, number of operation cycles
and estimate the accumulated energy during arcing periods. Each SCCBR function instance is made
to be used with a 1-pole, 1-phase breaker.
12.4.3 Function block GUID-B002ED61-5092-4E9E-AEB6-E4A4310BDAF2 v11
SSCBR
I3P* OPENPOS
BLOCK CLOSEPOS
BLKALM INVDPOS
TRIND TRCMD
POSOPEN TRVTOPAL
POSCLOSE TRVTCLAL
PRESALM OPERALM
PRESLO OPERLO
SPRCHRST CBLIFEAL
SPRCHRD MONALM
RSTCBWR IPOWALPH
RSTTRVT IPOWLOPH
RSTIPOW SPCHALM
RSTSPCHT GPRESALM
GPRESLO
Figure 187: SSCBR function block
12.4.4 Signals
Table 315: SSCBR Input signals

SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarm and lockout indication
TRIND BOOLEAN 0 Trip command from trip circuit
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
PRESALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm indication from CB
PRESLO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout indication from CB
SPRCHRST BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charging started indication signal
SPRCHRD BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charged indication signal
RSTCBWR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB remaining life and operation counter
RSTTRVT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB closing and opening travel times
RSTIPOW BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated I^CurrExponent
RSTSPCHT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB spring charging time

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 316: SSCBR Output signals

OPENPOS BOOLEAN CB is in open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN CB is in closed position
INVDPOS BOOLEAN CB is in Invalid Position
TRCMD BOOLEAN Open command issued to CB
TRVTOPAL BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRVTCLAL BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value
OPERALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
OPERLO BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
CBLIFEAL BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB reduced to Life alarm level
MONALM BOOLEAN CB 'not operated for long time' alarm
IPOWALPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open travel time exceeds
alarm limit
IPOWLOPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open travel time exceeds
lockout limit
SPCHALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value
GPRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
GPRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
12.4.5 Settings
Table 317: SSCBR Non group settings (basic)

On
Value groups
PhSel Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Phase selection
Phase L2
Phase L3
RatedOperCurr 100.00 - 5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the breaker
OperNoRated 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Number of operations possible at rated
current
RatedFltCurr 500.00 - 99999.99 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
OperNoFault 1 - 10000 - 1 1000 Number of operations possible at rated
fault current
tTrOpenAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for open travel time
tTrCloseAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for close travel time
OperAlmLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 200 Alarm level for number of operations
OperLOLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 300 Lockout level for number of operations
AccSelCal Aux Contact - - Trip Signal Accumulated energy calculation
Trip Signal selection
CurrExponent 0.50 - 3.00 - 0.01 2.00 Current exponent value used for energy
calculation

Technical manual
Monitoring

AccStopCurr 5.00 - 100.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 RMS current level below which energy
accumulation stops
AlmAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Alarm level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB open
travel time
LOAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Lockout level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB open
travel time
SpChAlmTime 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 1.00 Alarm level for spring charging time
InitCBRemLife 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Initial value for remaining life estimates
InactiveAlDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 2000 Alarm level for inactive days counter
Table 318: SSCBR Non group settings (advanced)

OpenTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for open travel time
CloseTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for close travel time
DirCoef -3.00 - -0.50 - 0.01 -1.50 Directional coefficient for CB life
calculation
CBLifeAlmLevel 1 - 99999 - 1 5000 Alarm level for CB remaining life
ContTrCorr -0.010 - 0.010 s 0.001 0.005 Correction for time difference in auxiliary
and main contacts open time
OperTimeDelay 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay between change of status of
trip output and start of main contact
separation
tDGasPresAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm
tDGasPresLO 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout
InitCounterVal 0 - 9999 - 1 0 Initial value for number of operations
InitAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 9999.99 - 0.01 0.00 Initial value for accum I^CurrExponent
integr over CB open travel time value
InitInactDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 0 Initial value for inactive days
InactiveAlHrs 0 - 23 Hour 1 0 Alarm time for inactive days counter in
hours

Table 319: SSCBR Monitored data

TTRVOP REAL - ms Travel time of the CB during opening
operation
TTRVCL REAL - ms Travel time of the CB during closing
operation
NOOPER INTEGER - - Number of CB operation cycle
CBLIFEPH INTEGER - - CB Remaining life of respective phase
INADAYS INTEGER - - The number of days CB has been
inactive
IPOWPH REAL - - Accumulated I^CurrExponent integrated
over CB open travel time
SPCHT REAL - s The charging time of the CB spring

Technical manual
Monitoring
12.4.7 Operation principle GUID-3902D69C-1858-40DD-AD63-C33C381697BA v13
The breaker monitoring function includes metering and monitoring subfunctions. The subfunctions
can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are On
and Off.
The operation of the subfunctions is described by the module diagram as shown in figure 188. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in subsequent sections.

Technical manual
Monitoring
I3P-ILRMSPH
POSCLOSE TTRVOP
POSOPEN CB Contact Travel TTRVCL
BLOCK Time TRVTOPAL
BLKALM TRVTCLAL
RSTTRVT
OPENPOS
CB Status CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS
CBLIFEAL
Remaining Life of CB
CBLIFEPH
RSTCBWR
TRCMD
Accumulated IPOWALPH
energy
I3P-IL IPOWLOPH
TRIND
IPOWPH
RSTIPOW
CB Operation OPERALM
Cycles NOOPER
CB Operation MONALM
Monitoring INADAYS
SPCHALM
SPRCHRST CB Spring Charge SPCHT
SPRCHRD Monitoring
RSTSPCHT
CB Gas Pressure GPRESALM

PRESALM Indication GPRESLO
PRESLO
Figure 188: Functional module diagram of breaker monitoring

Technical manual
Monitoring
12.4.7.1 Circuit breaker contact travel time GUID-3AF0EE8D-AA8E-4F83-9916-61B5D0D6B05B v13
The circuit breaker contact travel time sub function calculates the breaker contact travel time for
opening and closing operations. The operation of the breaker contact travel time measurement is
described in figure189.
POSCLOSE TTRVOP
Contact travel
POSOPEN time TTRVCL
calculation
RSTTRVT
TRVTOPAL
Alarm limit
BLOCK check TRVTCLAL
BLKALM
Figure 189: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker contact travel time
Contact travel time calculation

The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between the state of change of
auxiliary contacts. The opening travel time is measured between the opening of the POSCLOSE and
closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contacts. Similarly, the closing travel time is measured between
the opening of the POSOPEN and closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts. A compensation
factor has been added to consider the time difference between auxiliary contact operation and the
actual physical opening of the breaker main contact.
Main Contact
1
0
POSCLOSE
POSOPEN
1
t1 tOpen t2 t3 tClose t4
tTravelOpen = tOpen + t1 + t2 tTravelClose = tClose + t3 + t4

Figure 190: Travel time calculation

There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the opening of the
POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time difference t2 between the time when the
POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is completely open. Therefore, a correction
factor needs to be added to get the actual opening time. This factor is added with the OpenTimeCorr
(t1+t2) setting. The closing time is calculated by adding the value set with the CloseTimeCorr (t3+t4)
setting to the measured closing time.
The last measured opening travel time (TTRVOP) and the closing travel time (TTRVCL) are given as
service values.
The values can be reset using the Clear menu on the LHMI or by activation the input RSTCBWR.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Alarm limit check

When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set in the tTrOpenAlm setting, the
TRVTOPAL output is activated. Similarly, when the measured closing travel time is longer than the
value set in the tTrCloseAlm setting, the TRVTCLAL output is activated.
It is also possible to block the TRVTCLAL and TRVTOPAL alarm signals by activating the BLKALM
input.
12.4.7.2 Circuit breaker status GUID-390A1250-B258-4023-9A7D-0D7E19E13A6C v12
The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that is, whether the
breaker is in the open, closed or error position. The operation is described in figure 191.
Phase current
I3P-ILRMSPH
check
OPENPOS
Contact
POSCLOSE position CLOSEPOS
indicator
POSOPEN INVDPOS
Figure 191: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status
Phase current check

The module compares the phase current I3P-ILRMSPH to the AccStopCurr setting. If the current in
the selected phase exceeds the set level, it is reported to the contact position indicator module as
closed circuit breaker.
Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open when the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low, the POSOPEN
input is high and the phase current is less than the setting AccStopCurr value. The circuit breaker is
closed when the POSOPEN input is low and the POSCLOSE input is high. The breaker is in the error
state if both auxiliary contacts have the same value or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low
and the POSOPEN input is high but the current is above the setting AccStopCurr.
The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS, CLOSEPOS and INVDPOS
for open, closed and error position respectively.
12.4.7.3 Remaining life of circuit breaker GUID-C347406A-2B6F-42BD-B70B-51489AB51EAE v13
The Remaining life of circuit breaker subfunction is used to give an indication on the wear and tear of
the circuit breaker. Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit breaker reduces due to
wear. The breaker wear depends on the interrupted current. The remaining life of the breaker is
estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve provided by the manufacturer. The remaining life is
decreased by at least one when the circuit breaker is opened. The operation of the remaining life of
circuit breaker subfunction is described in figure 192.

Technical manual
Monitoring
I3P-ILRMSPH
CB remaining CBLIFEPH
POSCLOSE life estimation
RSTCBWR
Alarm limit
BLOCK CBLIFEAL
Check
BLKALM
Figure 192: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker
Circuit breaker remaining life estimation

If the interrupted current is less than the rated operating current set using the RatedOperCurr setting,
the remaining operations of the breaker are reduced by one operation. If the interrupted current is
more than the rated fault current set using the RatedFltCurr setting, the remaining operations of the
circuit breaker are reduced by the set OperNoRated divided by the set OperNoFault value. If the
tripping current is between these two values, the remaining life of the circuit breaker is calculated
based on the maintenance curve equation given by the manufacturer. The OperNoRated parameter
sets the number of operations the breaker can perform at the rated current. The OperNoFault
parameter sets the number of operations the breaker can perform at the rated fault current.
Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of a circuit breaker phase drops below the CBLifeAlmLevel setting, the life
alarm CBLIFEAL is activated.
It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary input BLKALM.
The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the
InitCBRemLife parameter. The value can be reset using the Clear menu from LHMI or by activating
the input RSTCBWR.
12.4.7.4 Accumulated energy GUID-0163FF0F-6E18-4CDC-87AA-578304E0872E v12
The Accumulated energy subfunction calculates the accumulated energy (Iyt) based on current
samples, where the setting CurrExponent (y) ranges from 0.5 to 3.0. The operation is described in
figure 193.
The TRCMD output is enabled when either of the trip indications from the trip coil circuit TRIND is
high or the breaker status is OPENPOS.
I3P-IL
TRCMD
I3P-ILRMSPH Accumulated
POSCLOSE energy
calculation IPOWPH
TRIND
LRSTIPOW
IPOWALPH
Alarm limit
BLOCK Check IPOWLOPH
BLKALM
Figure 193: Functional module diagram for estimating accumulated energy

Technical manual
Monitoring
Accumulated energy calculation

Accumulated energy can be calculated either with TRIND or POSCLOSE by selecting the AccSelCal
parameter value accordingly.
The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE or TRIND input events. It ends when the RMS
current is lower than the AccStopCurr setting.
The ContTrCorr setting is used to determine the accumulated energy in relation to the time the main
contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation of energy starts after the auxiliary contact has
opened and the delay equal to the value of the ContTrCorr setting has passed. When the setting is
negative, the calculation starts in advance by the correction time in relation to when the auxiliary
contact opened.
Main Contact Main Contact

close close
open open
POSCLOSE 1 POSCLOSE 1
0 0
Energy Energy
Accumulation Accumulation
starts starts
ContTrCorr ContTrCorr
(Negative) (Positive)
Figure 194: Significance of correction factor setting

Accumulated energy can also be calculated by using the change of state of the trip output. TRIND is
used to get the instance of the trip output and the time delay between the trip initiation and the
opening of the main contact is introduced by the setting OperTimeDelay.
The accumulated energy output IPOWPH is provided as a service value. The value can be reset by
enabling RSTIPOW through LHMI or by activating the input RSTIPOW.
Alarm limit check

The IPOWALPH alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the set value
AlmAccCurrPwr.
IPOWLOPH is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the limit of the LOAccCurrPwr
setting.
The IPOWALPH and IPOWLOPH outputs can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.
12.4.7.5 Circuit breaker operation cycles GUID-D3481D26-2E42-455E-8DB2-91538421F3B1 v10
The circuit breaker operation cycles subfunction counts the number of closing-opening sequences of
the breaker. The operation counter value is updated after each closing-opening sequence. The
operation is described in figure195.

Technical manual
Monitoring
POSCLOSE
Operation
POSOPEN NOOPER
counter
RSTCBWR
OPERALM
Alarm limit
BLOCK
Check
OPERLO
BLKALM
Figure 195: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation cycles
Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state of change of the auxiliary
contact inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.
The number of operations NOOPER is given as a service value. The old circuit breaker operation
counter value can be used by adding the value to the InitCounterVal parameter and can be reset by
Clear CB wear in the Clear menu on the LHMI or activating the input RSTCBWR.
Alarm limit check

OPERALM is generated when the number of operations exceeds the set value of the OperAlmLevel
threshold setting.
If the number of operations increases and exceeds the limit value set with the OperLOLevel setting,
the OPERLO output is activated.
The binary outputs OPERALM and OPERALO are deactivated when the BLKALM input is activated.
12.4.7.6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring GUID-6DAE4C6B-BD66-49CD-817D-08E4EBF47DE0 v9
The circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction indicates the inactive days of the circuit breaker
and gives an alarm when the number of days exceed the set level. The operation of the circuit
breaker operation monitoring is shown in figure 196.
POSCLOSE
Inactive timer INADAYS
POSOPEN
Alarm limit MONALM

BLOCK
Check
BLKALM
Figure 196: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation monitoring
Inactive timer
The Inactive timer module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained in the
same open or closed state. The value is calculated by monitoring the states of the POSOPEN and
POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.
The number of inactive days INADAYS is available as a service value. The initial number of inactive
days is set using the InitInactDays parameter.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Alarm limit check

MONALM is initiated when the number of inactive days and hours exceed the limit value defined by
the InactiveAlDays and InactivAlHrs setting. The alarm signal MONALM can be blocked by activating
the binary input BLKALM.
12.4.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring GUID-F850A940-7890-4C37-8B31-6C7D5B30E582 v12
The circuit breaker spring charge monitoring subfunction calculates the spring charging time. The
operation is described in figure 197.
SPRCHRST
Spring charging
SPRCHRD time SPCHT
measurement
RSTSPCHT
Alarm limit
BLOCK SPCHALM
Check
BLKALM
Figure 197: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charge indication
Spring charging time measurement

Spring charging time calculation will be initiated as soon as the circuit breaker is closed and charging
motor starts (NO contact of the device is connected to SPRCHRST) to store the energy in the close
spring. An indicator provided in the circuit breaker is displayed when the spring is completely
charged. This status is taken through NO contact and then connected to SPRCHRD.
The binary input SPRCHRST indicates the start of circuit breaker spring charging time. SPRCHRD
indicates that the circuit breaker spring is charged. The spring charging time is calculated from the
difference of these two signal timings. Spring charging indication is described in figure 197.
The last measured spring charging time SPCHT is provided as a service value. The spring charging
time SPCHT can be reset on the LHMI or by activating the input RSTSPCHT.
Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the SpChAlmTime setting,
the subfunction generates the SPCHALM alarm.
It is possible to block the SPCHALM alarm signal by activating the BLKALM binary input.
12.4.7.8 Circuit breaker gas pressure indication GUID-9D070D52-B499-4D45-9195-60181819184E v10
The circuit breaker gas pressure indication subfunction monitors the gas pressure inside the arc
chamber. The operation is described in figure 198.
PRESALM
tDGasPresAlm
BLOCK AND t GPRESALM
BLKALM
tDGasPresLO
PRESLO AND t GPRESLO
Figure 198: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure indication

Technical manual
Monitoring
When the PRESALM binary input is activated, the GPRESALM output is activated after a time delay
set with the tDGasPresAlm setting. The GPRESALM alarm can be blocked by activating the
BLKALM input.
If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRESLO binary input goes high, activating the
lockout alarm GPRESLO after a time delay set with the tDGasPresLO setting. The GPRESLO alarm
can be blocked by activating the BLKALM input.
The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the BLOCK input
deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals from the function can be blocked
by activating the binary input BLKALM.

GUID-B6799420-D726-460E-B02F-C7D4F1937432 v9
Table 320: SSCBR Technical data

Alarm level for open and close travel time (0 – 200) ms ±3 ms
Alarm level for number of operations (0 – 9999) -
Independent time delay for spring charging (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
time alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas pressure (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas pressure (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is
lockout greater
CB Contact Travel Time, opening and ±3 ms
closing
Remaining Life of CB ±2 operations
Accumulated Energy ±1.0% or ±0.5 whichever is greater
12.5 Event function EVENT SEMOD120002-1 v2
SEMOD167950-2 v2

Event function EVENT -
S00946 V1 EN-US
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, time-tagged events
can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. These events are created from
any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event function (EVENT). The EVENT function
block is used for LON and SPA communication.
Analog, integer and double indication values are also transferred through the EVENT function.

Technical manual
Monitoring
EVENT
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
Figure 199: EVENT function block
12.5.4 Signals IP11335-1 v2
Table 321: EVENT Input signals

INPUT1 GROUP 0 Input 1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

Technical manual
Monitoring

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
12.5.5 Settings IP11336-1 v2
Table 322: EVENT Non group settings (basic)

SPAChannelMask Off - - Off SPA channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
LONChannelMask Off - - Off LON channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
EventMask1 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 1
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

Technical manual
Monitoring

OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 1

Technical manual
Monitoring

The main purpose of the Event function (EVENT) is to generate events when the state or value of
any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state transition, for which event
generation is enabled.
Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given a name from the
Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create single events, but are also
intended for double indication events. For double indications, only the first eight inputs, 1–8, must be
used. Inputs 9–16 can be used for other types of events in the same EVENT block.
The EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.
Events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and binary input
channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input
channels are time-tagged directly on the input module. Time-tagging of the events that are originated
from internal logical signals have a resolution corresponding to the execution cycle-time of the source
application. Time-tagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a resolution
of 1 ms.
The outputs from the EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events and alarms by the
station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each input is intended to be used by
the station level.
All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If
new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and
an overflow alarm appears.
Events are produced according to set event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both
the LON and SPA communication. An EventMask can be set individually for each input channel.
These settings are available:
• NoEvents
• OnSet
• OnReset
• OnChange
• AutoDetect
It is possible to define which part of the EVENT function generates the events. This can be
performed individually for communication types SPAChannelMask and LONChannelMask. For each
communication type these settings are available:
• Off
• Channel 1-8
• Channel 9-16
• Channel 1-16
For LON communication, events are normally sent to station level at change. It is also possible to set
a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input channel.

Technical manual
Monitoring
To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate the EVENT
function or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is implemented. If an input
creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted quota then further events from the
channel will be blocked. This block will be removed when the input calms down and the accumulated
quota reach 66% of the maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel is 45
events per second.
12.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE IP14584-1 v2
M16055-1 v9
Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification device number
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -
Disturbance report A1RADR - A4RADR - -
Disturbance report B1RBDR - B22RBDR - -
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system
together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the disturbance report functionality.
Disturbance report (DRPRDRE), always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all selected
analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a maximum of 40 analog and
352 binary signals.
The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:
• Event list
• Indications
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder
• Disturbance recorder
• Settings information
The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration, starting
conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.
A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR function blocks,

which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected signals from start of pre-fault time to
the end of post-fault time will be included in the recording. Disturbance record will have visible
settings from all function instances that are configured in the application configuration tool.
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard COMTRADE format. In the
COMTRADE1999 format it is saved as a header file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file
DAT. In the COMTRADE2013 format, it is saved as CFF single file format. The same applies to all
events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local HMI is used to get information about
the recordings. The disturbance report files can be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using
the disturbance handling tool.

Technical manual
Monitoring
12.6.3 Function block IP806-1 v1
M12510-3 v3
DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED
Figure 200: DRPRDRE function block

SEMOD54837-4 v4
A1RADR
^GRP INPUT1
^GRP INPUT2
^GRP INPUT3
^GRP INPUT4
^GRP INPUT5
^GRP INPUT6
^GRP INPUT7
^GRP INPUT8
^GRP INPUT9
^GRP INPUT10
Figure 201: A1RADR function block example for A1RADR-A3RADR

SEMOD54843-4 v3
A4RADR
ÎNPUT31
ÎNPUT32
ÎNPUT33
ÎNPUT34
ÎNPUT35
ÎNPUT36
ÎNPUT37
ÎNPUT38
ÎNPUT39
ÎNPUT40
Figure 202: A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs

SEMOD54845-4 v6
B1RBDR
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
Figure 203: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR - B22RBDR

Technical manual
Monitoring
12.6.4 Signals
Table 323: DRPRDRE Output signals

DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used
GUID-48019111-7303-40FE-A292-65FDFB6AE686 v2
MEMUSED is indicated based on the percentage of number of recordings to total

number of recordings (200 records). When the number of recordings reaches the
maximum limit, the oldest record will be deleted.
Table 324: A1RADR Input signals

GRPINPUT1 GROUP - Group signal for input 1
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
GUID-D025D5D9-A0F3-4A00-891A-63AD5F609A77
v6
Table 325: A4RADR Input signals

INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31

Technical manual
Monitoring

Table 326: B1RBDR Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1
GUID-D3A8067F-80F8-4174-BD2D-4C43F4B99020 v3
B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same input signal specifications as B1RBDR but with
different numbering:
• B2RBDR: INPUT17 to INPUT32 (binary channels 17 to 32)


Technical manual
Monitoring
12.6.5 Settings
Table 327: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)

On
COMTRADEFormat 1999(Int16) - - 2013(Float32) COMTRADEFormat
2013(Int16)
2013(Float32)
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 9.90 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig Off - - Off Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)
On
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest Off - - Off Operation mode during test mode
On
SetInfoInDRep Disable - - Enable Enable Disturbance report settings
Enable functionality
Table 328: A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Operation01 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 329: A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 1
UnderTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 1 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 1
in % of signal
OverTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 1 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1 in
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 3 in
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal

Technical manual
Monitoring

in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
% of signal
in % of signal
OverTrigLe10 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 10
in % of signal
GUID-E05EEC82-CB90-4E73-B9C9-4C16FD95FCBF v1
A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings (basic) as A1RADR but with
different numbering:
• A2RADR: Operation11 to Operation20

A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings (advanced) as A1RADR but with
different numbering (examples given in brackets):

Technical manual
Monitoring
• A2RADR: 11 to 20 (NomValue11, nominal value for analog channel 11)

Table 330: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

TrigDR01 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED01 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On

Technical manual
Monitoring

Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
On
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 1
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)

Technical manual
Monitoring

(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
InfNo10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
10 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
(IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
12 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
13 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
14 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)

Technical manual
Monitoring

15 (IEC -60870-5-103)
-60870-5-103)
16 (IEC -60870-5-103)
Table 331: B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 1
IndicationMa01 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 1
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show

Technical manual
Monitoring

Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
GUID-8702C5B9-05A3-4E61-8952-C66483FFDFE2 v4
B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same Non group settings (basic) as B1RBDR but with
• B2RBDR: 17 to 32 (SetLED17, set LED on HMI for binary channel 17)

B2RBDR to B22RBDR functions have the same Non group settings (advanced) as B1RBDR but with
• B2RBDR: 17 to 32 (IndicationMa17, indication mask for binary channel 17)


Technical manual
Monitoring


Table 332: DRPRDRE Monitored data

MemoryUsed INTEGER - % Memory usage (0-100%)
UnTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for analog channel 1
activated
OvTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog channel 1
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated

Technical manual
Monitoring

activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated

Technical manual
Monitoring

activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated

Technical manual
Monitoring

activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
activated
FaultNumber INTEGER - - Disturbance fault number

M12155-6 v14
Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the operator,
analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the system.
The functions included in the disturbance report are:
• Event list (EL)

• Indications (IND)
• Event recorder (ER)
• Trip value recorder (TVR)
• Disturbance recorder (DR)
• Settings information
Figure 204 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and function blocks.
Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER) and Indications (IND) use information from the binary input
function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder (TVR) use analog information from the analog input
function blocks (AxRADR). Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from both AxRADR
and BxRBDR.

Technical manual
Monitoring
AxRADR Disturbance Report
DRPRDRE
Analog signals
Trip value rec
BxRBDR Disturbance
recorder
Binary signals
Event list
Event recorder
Indications
Figure 204: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each with the data
coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function is working continuously,
independent of disturbance triggering, recording time, and so on. Settings information function
contains all the visible settings, parameter information of components configured in ACT, runtime
status and IEC61850 behavior that is added to the disturbance record header file. These settings
information is recorded in XML format and then grouped for each function instance in the HDR file.
The function, setting names and Enum values are same as in the HMI and can be translated to the
selected HMI language. All setting values are updated along with the units. If the setting values are
related to the global base value, then the setting value is scaled and updated with corresponding
global base unit. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories.
This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report will get an
identification number in the interval from 0-999.
Disturbance report
Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+200
General dist.
Trip Event Disturbance Event list
Information & Setting Indications
values recordings recording
infotrmation
Figure 205: Disturbance report structure

Up to 200 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when the
maximum recording limit is reached, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one.

Technical manual
Monitoring
The IED flash disk should not be used to store any user files. This causes lack of
space for new disturbance recordings.
Disturbance information M12155-175 v4

Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip values are
available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the user must use a PC and -
either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be
connected to the IED front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).
Indications (IND) M12155-87 v5

Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the disturbance
(not time-tagged).
Event recorder (ER) M12155-89 v6

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have occurred during
the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or PCM600.
Event list (EL) M12155-177 v8

The event list may contain a list of totally 5000 time-tagged events. The list information is
continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The oldest data is overwritten. The
logged signals may be presented via the local HMI or PCM600.
Trip value recorder (TVR) M12155-91 v5

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and during the
fault.
Disturbance recorder (DR) M12155-97 v5

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the fault.
Settings information GUID-892F72ED-CC6C-469B-90CA-73E9E1181187 v2

For each disturbance recording, the setting values of the configured components are read twice;
once during the trigger of disturbance record and again during post processing of the disturbance
record.
During post processing of the disturbance record, the header file is updated with a section called
Settings . Settings has complete setting values of the configured components that are read during
the trigger time. The setting values, runtime status and the behavior of each component are
compared between the trigger and the post processing time. If there are any differences, then it will
be added in the header file under section Changed_settings.
In the HDR file, section tag Settings has an attribute tag called function which includes parameters
that are grouped based on the function instance. The function tag has content called name which is
the function name provided together with the user-defined name in brackets similar to the HMI.
Status content will indicate the runtime status of the function and beh content will indicate the
IEC61850 behavior of the components, if supported. Non runtime components will not have status
and beh tag contents.
Parameters of the function are listed as a child tag Set with contents name, value and unit:
• name — parameter name same as HMI

• value — actual parameter value
• unit — parameter unit
The changed_settings attribute tag is similar to the settings section. It contains functions which have
changes in parameter value or runtime status or IEC61850 behavior when compared with trigger and
post-processing settings values.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Time tagging M12155-194 v1

The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time tagging within
the disturbance report
Recording times M12155-99 v5

Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a settable time frame.
The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. Disturbance recorder (DR), event
recorder (ER) and indication function register disturbance data and events during tRecording, the
total recording time.
The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on

which criterion stops the current disturbance recording
Trig point
TimeLimit
PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT
1 2 3
en05000487.vsd
Figure 206: The recording times definition
PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate time of the
trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid trigger
condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated triggers
are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was triggered.
The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not reset within a
reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording and prevents
subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.
Analog signals M12155-160 v9

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and triggering of
the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for external analog signals from
analog input modules (TRM) and line data communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing
function blocks (SMAI) and summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to
internally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input signals,
phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).

Technical manual
Monitoring
SMAI A1RADR
Block AI3P A2RADR
^GRP2L1 AI1 INPUT1 A3RADR
External
analogue ^GRP2L2 AI2 INPUT2
signals ^GRP2L3 AI3 INPUT3
^GRP2N AI4 INPUT4
Type AIN INPUT5
INPUT6
...
A4RADR
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
Internal analogue signals INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
...
INPUT40
Figure 207: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after configuration) available as
an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the SMAI function block. The information is saved
at the Disturbance report base sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are
updated according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed
than the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new
updated sample is available.
If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the Disturbance report is
the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration). In case of modification of a preconfigured
IED or general internal configuration the Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.
The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases where only the
three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the information available as a group
signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-
input is used as an input signal the corresponding information is available on the non-calculated
output (AI4) on the SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.
For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the disturbance recorder.
The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers even if operation is set to Off.
Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the
current signals.
If Operation = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph. However, Trip
value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The input channel can still be used to
trig the disturbance recorder.
If Operation = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the entire
disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Binary signals M12155-162 v10

Up to 352 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The signals can be
selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected to be recorded
when:
• the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

• the signal is connected to the input of the function block
Each of the 352 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation = On). A
binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the local HMI (SetLED = On ).
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance recording.
But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers. The indications are also
selected from these 352 signals with local HMI IndicationMask = Show/Hide.
Trigger signals M12155-164 v3

The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which runs
continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete disturbance report is
recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no
indications, and so on. This implies the importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.
A trigger can be of type:
• Manual trigger
• Binary-signal trigger
• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)
Manual trigger M12155-167 v5

A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via station bus (IEC
61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is generated. This feature is
especially useful for testing. Refer to the operator's manual for procedure.
Binary-signal trigger M12155-169 v4

Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger ( Triglevel =
Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger from a logic zero, the
selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the disturbance report.
Analog-signal trigger M12155-171 v6

All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the disturbance
recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp, OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the absolute
average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above the threshold
level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with
the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent trigger, this
trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is separately performed for
each channel.
This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is insensitive to DC offset
in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz
network.
All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.

Technical manual
Monitoring

M12760-1 v13
Table 333: DRPRDRE technical data

Pre-fault time (0.05–9.90) s -
Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–10.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 200, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table 494
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 352 -
Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value 30 -
recorder per recording
Maximum number of indications in a disturbance 352 -
report
Maximum number of events in the Event recording 1056 -
per recording
Maximum number of events in the Event list 5000, first in - first out -
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -
12.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP GUID-E7A2DB38-DD96-4296-B3D5-EB7FBE77CE07 v2
12.7.1 Identification GUID-E0247779-27A2-4E6C-A6DD-D4C31516CA5C v3

Logical signal status report BINSTATREP - -
12.7.2 Functionality GUID-A72E490D-01F7-4874-B010-8BDE38391D88 v3
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a SPA master to poll
signals from various other functions.

Technical manual
Monitoring
12.7.3 Function block GUID-BA0A5BC3-493B-4FE3-B4A9-14F60A88A22F v2
BINSTATREP
BLOCK OUTPUT1
ÎNPUT1 OUTPUT2
ÎNPUT2 OUTPUT3
ÎNPUT3 OUTPUT4
ÎNPUT4 OUTPUT5
ÎNPUT5 OUTPUT6
ÎNPUT6 OUTPUT7
ÎNPUT7 OUTPUT8
ÎNPUT8 OUTPUT9
ÎNPUT9 OUTPUT10
ÎNPUT10 OUTPUT11
ÎNPUT11 OUTPUT12
ÎNPUT12 OUTPUT13
ÎNPUT13 OUTPUT14
ÎNPUT14 OUTPUT15
ÎNPUT15 OUTPUT16
ÎNPUT16
Figure 208: BINSTATREP function block
12.7.4 Signals
Table 334: BINSTATREP Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 1

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 335: BINSTATREP Output signals

OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 1
12.7.5 Settings
Table 336: BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)

t 0.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 10.0 Time delay of function
12.7.6 Operation principle GUID-537921CA-82B9-4A02-BAD1-67E3AC61AE96 v3
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function has 16 inputs and 16 outputs. The output
status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or via SPA communication.
When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the input signal remains
set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the input signal resets.
INPUTn
OUTPUTn
t t
Figure 209: BINSTATREP logical diagram
12.8 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP SEMOD52451-1 v2

Technical manual
Monitoring
SEMOD113212-2 v3

Measured value expander block RANGE_XP - -
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU),
current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic
communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All
measured values can be supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and
high-high limit. The measure value expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced to enable
translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals: below low-low
limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or above high-high limit. The output signals can be
used as conditions in the configurable logic or for alarming purpose.
RANGE_XP
RANGE* HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW
Figure 210: RANGE_XP function block
Table 337: RANGE_XP Input signals

RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range
Table 338: RANGE_XP Output signals

HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit
The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block (CVMMXN,
CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGAPC). The function block converts the input
integer value to five binary output signals according to table 339.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 339: Input integer value converted to binary output signals
Measured supervised below low- between low‐ between low between above high-high limit
value is: low limit low and low and high limit high-high and
Output: limit high limit
LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High
12.9 Limit counter L4UFCNT GUID-22E141DB-38B3-462C-B031-73F7466DD135 v1
GUID-F3FB7B33-B189-4819-A1F0-8AC7762E9B7E v3

Limit counter L4UFCNT -
12.9.2 Functionality GUID-13157EAB-1686-4D2E-85DF-EC89768F3572 v6
The Limit counter (L4UFCNT) provides a settable counter with four independent limits where the
number of positive and/or negative flanks on the input signal are counted against the setting values
for limits. The output for each limit is activated when the counted value reaches that limit.
Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.

GUID-4D58423F-329C-4553-9FAF-E55A368849A5 v2
Limit counter (L4UFCNT) counts the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the binary input
signal depending on the function settings. L4UFCNT also checks if the accumulated value is equal or
greater than any of its four settable limits. The four limit outputs will be activated relatively on reach of
each limit and remain activated until the reset of the function. Moreover, the content of L4UFCNT is
stored in flash memory and will not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.
12.9.3.1 Design GUID-B643C994-D0BA-4BE9-BACB-ADEA0197CAE4 v1
Figure 211 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function.

Technical manual
Monitoring
BLOCK
INPUT
Operation
Counter
RESET
VALUE
Overflow
CountType Detection OVERFLOW
OnMaxValue
Limit LIMIT1 … 4
MaxValue Check
CounterLimit1...4
Error ERROR
Detection
InitialValue
Figure 211: Logic diagram

The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of the function. The
function has also a maximum counted value check. The three possibilities after reaching the
maximum counted value are:
• Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
• Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count
The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as illustrated in figure
212.
Overflow indication
Actual value ... Max value -1® Max value ® Max value +1 ® Max value +2 ® Max value +3 ...
Counted value ... Max value -1 ® Max value ® 0 ® 1 ® 2 ...
Figure 212: Overflow indication when OnMaxValue is set to rollover pulsed

The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or initial value setting(s)
greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting the input and all the outputs except the
error output remains at zero state. The error condition remains until the correct settings for counter
limits and/or initial value setting(s) are applied.
The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is not counted and
outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can be initialized after reset of the
function. In this case the outputs remain in their initial states until the release of the block input.
12.9.3.2 Reporting GUID-7DF874A7-F7DA-48DD-8760-5E4CF05FD870 v2
The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI.

Technical manual
Monitoring
Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.
Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely, for example from a
IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a measurement on the local HMI graphical
display.
12.9.4 Function block GUID-C90E7375-F3CC-414A-93FC-9AC4A9156FFC v1
L4UFCNT
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT OVERFLOW
RESET LIMIT1
LIMIT2
LIMIT3
LIMIT4
VALUE
Figure 213: L4UFCNT function block
12.9.5 Signals
Table 340: L4UFCNT Input signals

INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function
Table 341: L4UFCNT Output signals

ERROR BOOLEAN Error indication on counter limit and/or initial value settings
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Overflow indication on count of greater than MaxValue
LIMIT1 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit1
VALUE INTEGER Counted value
12.9.6 Settings
Table 342: L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)

On
CountType Positive edge - - Positive edge Select counting on positive and/or
Negative edge negative flanks
Both edges
CounterLimit1 1 - 65535 - 1 100 Value of the first limit

Technical manual
Monitoring

CounterLimit2 1 - 65535 - 1 200 Value of the second limit
CounterLimit3 1 - 65535 - 1 300 Value of the third limit
CounterLimit4 1 - 65535 - 1 400 Value of the fourth limit
MaxValue 1 - 65535 - 1 500 Maximum count value
OnMaxValue Stop - - Stop Select if counter stops or rolls over after
Rollover Steady reaching maxValue with steady or pulsed
Rollover Pulsed overflow flag
InitialValue 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Initial count value after reset of the
function

Table 343: L4UFCNT Monitored data

VALUE INTEGER - - Counted value

GUID-C43B8654-60FE-4E20-8328-754C238F4AD0 v4
Table 344: L4UFCNT technical data

Counter value 0-65535 -
Max. count up speed 30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -
12.10 Running hour-meter TEILGAPC
12.10.1 Identification GUID-3F9EF4FA-74FA-4D1D-88A0-E948B722B64F v1
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

Running hour-meter TEILGAPC - -
12.10.2 Functionality GUID-464FB24F-B367-446C-963A-A14841943B87 v2
The Running hour-meter (TEILGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the elapsed time when
a given binary signal has been high, see also figure 214.

Technical manual
Monitoring
BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Accumulation ACC_HOUR
ADDTIME with Retain
ACC_DAY
tAddToTime
q-1
OVERFLOW
a
&
a>b
99 999.9 h b
WARNING
a
&
a>b
tWarning b
ALARM
a
&
a>b
tAlarm b
Figure 214: TEILGAPC logics

The main features of TEILGAPC are:
• Applicable to very long time accumulation (≤ 99999.9 hours)

• Supervision of limit transgression conditions and rollover/overflow
• Possibility to define a warning and alarm with the resolution of 0.1 hours
• Retain any saved accumulation value at a restart
• Possibilities for blocking and reset
• Possibility for manual addition of accumulated time
• Reporting of the accumulated time
12.10.3 Function block GUID-D0E9688B-C9D9-44B7-BD95-81132CCA5E4F v1
TEILGAPC
BLOCK ALARM
IN WARNING
ADDTIME OVERFLOW
RESET ACC_HOUR
ACC_DAY
IEC15000323.vsdx
Figure 215: TEILGAPC function block
12.10.4 Signals
Table 345: TEILGAPC Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the accumulation and block the outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the elapsed time, when
its value is high
ADDTIME BOOLEAN 0 Add time to the accumulation
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset accumulated time

Technical manual
Monitoring
Table 346: TEILGAPC Output signals

ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached alarm limit
WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached warning limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator that accumulated time has reached overflow limit
ACC_HOUR REAL Accumulated time in hours
ACC_DAY REAL Accumulated time in days
12.10.5 Settings
Table 347: TEILGAPC Group settings (basic)

On
tAlarm 1.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 90000.0 Time limit for alarm supervision
tWarning 1.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 50000.0 Time limit for warning supervision
tAddToTime 0.0 - 99999.9 Hour 0.1 0.0 Time to add to the accumulation
12.10.6 Operation principle GUID-C7F91D4E-5942-4006-B7C8-4F499E7DC49D v3
Figure 216 describes the simplified logic of the function.
Loop Delay
tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM
BLOCK
RESET ACC_HOUR
Time Accumulation
IN
ADDTIME ACC_DAY
tAddToTime
Loop Delay
IEC15000322.vsd
Figure 216: TEILGAPC Simplified logic

TEILGAPC main functionalities
• IN: Accumulation of the elapsed time when input IN is high

Technical manual
Monitoring
• applicable to very long time accumulation (≤99999.9 hours)

• output ACC_HOUR presents accumulated value in hours and ACC_DAY presents
accumulated value in days
• accumulated value is retained in a non-volatile memory
• any retained value is used as initiation value for the integration following by a restart
• RESET: Reset of the accumulated value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset
• independent of the input IN value
• reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero.
Note that the nonvolatile memory will not reset to zero if the input IN is high during the
reset.
• reset can be made by activation of input RESET or from LHMI or with IEC 61850
command
• ADDTIME: Manually add time to the currently accumulated time
• the amount of time to be added is defined by a setting tAddToTime
• time is added through activation of input ADDTIME or from LHMI or with IEC 61850
command
• BLOCK: Freeze the accumulation and block/reset the other outputs
• independent of the input IN value
• BLOCK request overrides RESETrequest
• Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
• overflow if output ACC_HOUR > 99 999.9 hours
• alarm if output ACC_HOUR > tAlarm
• warning if output ACC_HOUR > tWarning
The ACC_HOURoutput represents the accumulated time in hours and the ACC_DAY output
represents the accumulated time in days.
tAlarm and tWarning are user settable time limit parameters in hours. They are also independent of
each other, that is, there is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.
tAddToTime is a user settable time parameter in hours.
tAlarm, tWarning and tAddToTime are possible to be defined with a resolution of 0.1 hours (6
minutes).
The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 99999.9 hours. The outputs will reset and the
accumulated time will reset and start from zero if an overflow occurs.
12.10.6.1 Operation accuracy GUID-B6FBEFD7-17C8-41C6-B5D5-32E1205E6752 v1
The accuracy of TEILGAPC depends on essentially two factors
• the pulse length

• the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs
In principle, more pulses may lead to reduced accuracy.
12.10.6.2 Memory storage GUID-B49698FF-0AB2-4792-A7CB-5534313B6CA0 v2
The value of the accumulated time is retained in a non-volatile memory,
• at every falling edge of the input IN

• at every even 6 minutes, after a rising edge of the input IN
• after a manual addition of time

Technical manual
Monitoring
Consequently in case of a power failure, there is a risk of losing the difference in time between actual
time and last time stored in the non-volatile memory.

GUID-F5E124E3-0B85-41AC-9830-A2362FD289F2 v1
Table 348: TEILGAPC Technical data

Time limit for alarm supervision, (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
tAlarm
Time limit for warning supervision, (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
tWarning
Time limit for overflow supervision Fixed to 99999.9 hours ±0.1%

Technical manual
Metering
Section 13 Metering
13.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT IP14600-1 v3
M14879-1 v4

Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT -
S00947 V1 EN-US
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for instance
pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption values. The
pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by the PCFCNT function. A scaled
service value is available over the station bus. The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse
counting capabilities must be ordered to achieve this functionality.
PCFCNT
BLOCK INVALID
READ_VAL RESTART
BI_PULSE* BLOCKED
RS_CNT NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL
Figure 217: PCFCNT function block
13.1.4 Signals
Table 349: PCFCNT Input signals

BI_PULSE BOOLEAN 0 Connect binary input channel for metering
READ_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value

Technical manual
Metering
Table 350: PCFCNT Output signals

INVALID BOOLEAN The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART BOOLEAN The reported value does not comprise a complete integration
cycle
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL BOOLEAN A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information
13.1.5 Settings
Table 351: PCFCNT Non group settings (basic)

On
EventMask NoEvents - - NoEvents Report mask for analog events from
ReportEvents pulse counter
CountCriteria Off - - RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - 90000.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to
unit per counted value
Quantity Count - - Count Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 0 - 3600 s 1 60 Cycle time for reporting of counter value

Table 352: PCFCNT Monitored data

SCAL_VAL REAL - - Scaled value with time and status
information
M13397-3 v5
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary input
channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are sent to the station HMI
with predefined cyclicity without reset.
The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is synchronized
with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values can be done with a
command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active counters can also be read by the
LON General Interrogation command (GI) or IEC 61850.

Technical manual
Metering
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function in the IED supports unidirectional incremental counters. That
means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format, that is, the reported value
is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the
IED.
The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value (pulse count x
scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality consists of:
• Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

• Wrapped around
• Blocked
• Adjusted
The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is, the value
frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database. PCFCNT updates
the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in
the function block. This signal can be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and
transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the
function.
The pulse-counter logic function requires a binary input card, BIMp, that is specially
adapted to the pulse-counter logic function.
M13399-3 v9
Figure 218 shows the pulse-counter logic function block with connections of the inputs and outputs.
SingleCmdFunc PulseCounter EVENT

OUTx BLOCK
INVALID INPUT1
SingleCmdFunc Pulse RESTART INPUT2
OUTx INPUT OUT READ_VAL
Pulse length >1s BLOCKED INPUT3
I/O-module NEW_VAL INPUT4
BI_PULSE
”Reset counter” RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL IEC EVENT
SMS settings Database

1.Operation = Off/On Pulse counter value:
2.tReporting = 0s...60min 0...2147483647
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000
en05000744.vsd
Figure 218: Overview of the pulse-counter logic function

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command logics, which are intended
to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set,
the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected to READ_VAL performs one additional reading
per positive flank. The signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second.
The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary Input Module
(BIM).
The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.
Each pulse-counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be connected to an
Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The
SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event function block.

Technical manual
Metering
The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where the pulse counter
input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.
The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not comprise a
complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-up, in the first message after
deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during last integration cycle.
The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There are two
reasons why the counter is blocked:
• The BLOCK input is set, or

• The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.
The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was updated since last
report.
Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.
The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time and status
information.
M13404-2 v5
Table 353: PCFCNT technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy

Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) -
Cycle time for report of (1–3600) s -
counter value
13.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling

ETPMMTR SEMOD153638-1 v2
SEMOD175537-2 v4

Function for energy calculation and ETPMMTR W_Varh -
demand handling
13.2.2 Functionality GUID-6898E29B-DA70-421C-837C-1BBED8C63A7A v3
Power system measurement (CVMMXN) can be used to measure active as well as reactive power
values. Function for energy calculation and demand handling (ETPMMTR) uses measured active
and reactive power as input and calculates the accumulated active and reactive energy pulses, in
forward and reverse direction. Energy values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand
power values are also calculated by the function. This function includes zero point clamping to
remove noise from the input signal. As output of this function: periodic energy calculations,
integration of energy values, calculation of energy pulses, alarm signals for limit violation of energy
values and maximum power demand, can be found.

Technical manual
Metering
The values of active and reactive energies are calculated from the input power values by integrating
them over a selected time tEnergy. The integration of active and reactive energy values will happen
in both forward and reverse directions. These energy values are available as output signals and also
as pulse outputs. Integration of energy values can be controlled by inputs (STARTACC and
STOPACC) and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset to initial values with RSTACC input.
The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are calculated for the set time interval tEnergy
and these values are updated every minute through output channels. The active and reactive
maximum power demand values are calculated for both forward and reverse direction and these
values can be reset with RSTDMD input.
ETPMMTR
P* ACCINPRG
Q* EAFPULSE
STARTACC EARPULSE
STOPACC ERFPULSE
RSTACC ERRPULSE
RSTDMD EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD
Figure 219: ETPMMTR function block
13.2.4 Signals
Table 354: ETPMMTR Input signals

P REAL 0 Measured active power
Q REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STARTACC BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
STOPACC BOOLEAN 0 Stop to accumulate energy values.
RSTACC BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading
Table 355: ETPMMTR Output signals

ACCINPRG BOOLEAN Accumulation of energy values in progress
EAFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse

Technical manual
Metering

EAFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set interval
EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set interval
ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value
EARACC REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value
ERFACC REAL Accumulated forward reactive energy value
ERRACC REAL Accumulated reverse reactive energy value
MAXPAFD REAL Maximum forward active power demand value for set interval
MAXPARD REAL Maximum reverse active power demand value for set interval
MAXPRFD REAL Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL Maximum reverse reactive power demand value for set interval
13.2.5 Settings
Table 356: ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)

On
EnaAcc Off - - Off Activate the accumulation of energy
On values
tEnergy 1 Minute - - 1 Minute Time interval for energy calculation
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
tEnergyOnPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Energy accumulated pulse ON time in
secs
tEnergyOffPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in
secs
EAFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active forward
accumulated energy value
EARAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active reverse
ERFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive forward
ERRAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse

Technical manual
Metering
Table 357: ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

EALim 0.001 - MWh 0.001 1000000.000 Active energy limit
10000000000.000
ERLim 0.001 - MVArh 0.001 1000.000 Reactive energy limit
10000000000.000
EnZeroClamp Off - - On Enable of zero point clamping detection
On function
LevZeroClampP 0.001 - 10000.000 MW 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at active
Power
LevZeroClampQ 0.001 - 10000.000 MVAr 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at reactive
Power
DirEnergyAct Forward - - Forward Direction of active energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
DirEnergyReac Forward - - Forward Direction of reactive energy flow
Reverse Forward/Reverse
EAFPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward active
100000000.000 energy
EARPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse active
100000000.000 energy
ERFPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward reactive
100000000.000 energy
ERRPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive
100000000.000 energy

Table 358: ETPMMTR Monitored data

EAFACC REAL - MWh Accumulated forward active energy
value
EARACC REAL - MWh Accumulated reverse active energy
value
ERFACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated forward reactive energy
value
ERRACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated reverse reactive energy
value
MAXPAFD REAL - MW Maximum forward active power demand
value for set interval
MAXPARD REAL - MW Maximum reverse active power demand
value for set interval
MAXPRFD REAL - MVAr Maximum forward reactive power
demand value for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL - MVAr Maximum reverse reactive power
demand value for set interval
13.2.7 Operation principle GUID-4A46757C-EC5D-4BCE-9D09-C8152B062CE1 v3
The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements function
CVMMXN are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to measure the integrated energy.
Figure 220 shows the overall functionality of the energy calculation and demand handling function
ETPMMTR.

Technical manual
Metering
MAXPAFD
RSTDMD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
P
MAXPRRD
Zero Clamping Maximum Power
EAFALM
Detection Demand Calculation
Q EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
ACCINPRG
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
Energy Accumulation ERRPULSE
STARTACC
Calculation EAFACC
EARACC
STOPACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
RSTACC
Figure 220: ETPMMTR Functional overview logical diagram

The integration of energy values is enabled by the setting EnaAcc and controlled by the STARTACC
and STOPACC inputs. If the integration is in progress, the output ACCINPRG is high. Otherwise, it is
low. Figure 221 shows the logic of the ACCINPRG output. ACCINPRG is active when the
STARTACC input is active and the EnaAcc setting is enabled. When the RSTACC input is in the
active state, the output ACCINPRG is low even if the integration of energy is enabled. ACCINPRG is
deactivated by activating the STOPACC input.
STOPACC
FALSE
STARTACC T
³1
& F ACCINPRG
EnaAcc &
q-1
RSTACC

Figure 221: ACCINPRG Logic diagram

The accumulated energy values (in MWh and MVArh) are available as service values and also as
pulsed output depending on the ExxAccPlsQty setting, which can be connected to a pulse counter.
Accumulated energy outputs are available for forward as well as reverse direction. The accumulated
energy values can be reset to initial accumulated energy values (ExxPrestVal) from the local HMI
reset menu or with the input signal RSTACC. Figure 222 shows the logic for integration of energy in
active forward direction. Similarly, the integration of energy in active reverse, reactive forward and
reactive reverse is done.

Technical manual
Metering
RSTACC
EAFPrestVal
ACCINPRG
P* (ACTIVE FORWARD)
X
 T
T EAFACC
60.0
F
F
&
q-1
1000 GWh T
-1 F
q 0.0
a
a>b
b
-1
q = unit delay
Figure 222: Logic for integration of active forward energy

The energy pulses generated by using internally calculated accumulated energy values and energy
per pulse (ExxAccPlsQty) setting. The accumulated energy values are divided by the energy-per-
pulse value to get the number of pulses. The number of pulses can be reset to zero by activating
RSTACC input or by using the local HMI reset menu. The pulse on and off time duration is set by the
settings tEnergyOnPls and tEnergyOffPls. Figure 223 shows the logic for pulse output generation for
the integrated energy in the active forward direction. Similarly, the pulse generation for integrated
energy in the active reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.
tEnergyOffPls
EAFACC
a Counter q-1
a>b CU
1000 GWh b CV
Rst
tOff
t
R I q-1
0
÷ X
 R I T
EAFPULSE
a TP
a>b F
b
EAFAccPlsQty ÷ 0
Counter
CU
CV
RSTACC
Rst
q-1
tEnergyOnPls
q-1 = unit delay

Figure 223: Logic for pulse generation of integrated active forward energy
The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set time interval
tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and stored in a register available over
communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXPRFD and MAXPRRD for the active

Technical manual
Metering
and reactive power forward and reverse direction. When the RSTDMD input is active from the local
HMI reset menu, these outputs are reset to zero. The energy alarm is activated once the periodic
energy value crosses the energy limit ExLim. Figure 224 shows the logic of alarm for active forward
energy exceeds limit and Maximum forward active power demand value. Similarly, the maximum
power calculation and energy alarm outputs in the active reverse, reactive forward and reactive
reverse is implemented.
P (ACTIVE FORWARD)
Average Power
X a EAFALM
tEnergy Calculation a>b
b
EALim
RSTMAXD
0.0 T MAXPAFD
MAX F
q-1
q-1 = unit delay
Figure 224: Logic for maximum power demand calculation and energy alarm

SEMOD153707-2 v6
Table 359: ETPMMTR technical data

Energy metering kWh Export/Import, kvarh Export/Import Input from CVMMXN. No extra
error at steady load

Technical manual
Ethernet
Section 14 Ethernet
14.1 Access point
14.1.1 Introduction GUID-6E5D2696-A8EE-43E7-A94B-69C3D0612127 v3
An access point is an Ethernet communication interface for single or redundant station

communication. Each access point is allocated with one physical Ethernet port, two physical Ethernet
ports (marked A and B) are allocated if redundant communication is activated for the access point.
Device 1 Device 1
AP1 AP2 AP3 AP1 AP2 AP3

SFP_301 SFP_302
SFP_301 SFP_302 SFP_303 A B SFP_303
Figure 225: Access points, non redundant (left) and redundant communication (right)
14.1.2 Settings
Table 360: AP_1 Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation on/off of the access point
On
Redundancy None - - None Ethernet redundancy mode
PRP-0
PRP-1
HSR
RSTP
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 192.168.1.10 IP address of the access point
Address
SubnetMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask of the access point
Address
Description 1 - 18 - 1 Station bus User editable access point description
[1-18 char]
PTP Off - - Off Precision time protocol
On
Slave only
PCM600Access Off - - On PCM600 access
On
FTP Off - - On FTP and FTPS access
On
MMS Off - - On IEC61850-8-1 MMS
On
GOOSE Off - - On IEC61850-8-1 GOOSE
On

Technical manual
Ethernet

DNP3 Off - - On DNP3 slave
On
SNTPServer Off - - On SNTP server
On
FSTAccess Off - - On Field Service Tool access
On
C37.118TCP Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 TCP server
On
C37.118UDP1 Off - - On IEEE 1344 and C37.118 UDP stream
On and the TCP control server
DefaultGateway 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Default gateway IP address
Address
MANUALPID-17002 v1
Table 361: AP_FRONT Non group settings (basic)

IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 10.1.150.3 IP address of the access point
Address
SubnetMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 Subnet mask of the access point
Address
Description 1 - 18 - 1 FrontPort User editable access point description
[1-18 char]
PCM600Access Off - - On PCM600 access
On
FTP Off - - On FTP and FTPS access
On
MMS Off - - On IEC61850-8-1 MMS
On
GOOSE Off - - On IEC61850-8-1 GOOSE
On
SNTPServer Off - - On SNTP Server
On
FSTAccess Off - - On Field Service Tool access
On
DefaultGateway 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Default gateway IP address
Address

Technical manual
Ethernet
14.2 Access point diagnostics
14.2.1 Functionality GUID-20F64A6D-AA8C-47D7-AA7D-4810996B2FF2 v3
The access point diagnostics function blocks (RCHLCCH, SCHLCCH and FRONTSTATUS)
supervise communication. SCHLCCH is used for communication over the rear Ethernet ports,
RCHLCCH is used for redundant communications over the rear Ethernet ports and FRONTSTATUS
is used for communication over the front port. All access point function blocks include output signal
for denial of service. To get this denial of service, that is reported on the communication, the
DOSALARM output from these blocks must be connected to a communication function.
For RSTP, the frame error rate on an individual link cannot be extrapolated
accurately to that of which is received by the IED. Hence, the frame error rate on link
A (LCCH.FerCh) and the frame error rate on link B (LCCH.RedFerCh) cannot be
calculated and are 0 always.
14.2.2 Function block GUID-727BF536-1D60-4060-A674-5D73F252CCB7 v2
SCHLCCH
LINKUP
DOSALARM
Figure 226: SCHLCCH Function block
RCHLCCH
REDLINKA
REDLINKB
DOSALARM
Figure 227: RCHLCCH Function block
14.2.3 Signals
Table 362: SCHLCCH Output signals

LINKUP BOOLEAN Access point link status
DOSALARM BOOLEAN Denial of service alarm
Table 363: RCHLCCH Output signals

REDLINKA BOOLEAN Channel A redundancy status
REDLINKB BOOLEAN Channel B redundancy status
DOSALARM BOOLEAN Denial of service alarm (A + B)

Technical manual
Ethernet

Table 364: SCHLCCH Monitored data

GatewayConfig INTEGER 0=Ok - Gateway configuration status
1=Error
-1=Off
2=Invalid
Table 365: RCHLCCH Monitored data

GatewayConfig INTEGER 0=Ok - Gateway configuration status
1=Error
-1=Off
2=Invalid
14.3 Redundant communication
GUID-B7AE0374-0336-42B8-90AF-3AE1C79A4116 v1

IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy PRP - -
protocol
IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless HSR - -
redundancy
Access point diagnostic for redundant RCHLCCH - -
Ethernet ports
14.3.2 Functionality GUID-494FACF7-4BE0-4B9F-A18F-47CD1E92C0F9 v3
PRP IEC 62439-3 redundant communication

Redundant communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 1, PRP-0, and IEC 62439-3 Edition 3,
PRP-1, parallel redundancy protocol (PRP) is available as an option when ordering IEDs. PRP
according to IEC 62439-3 uses two optical/Galvanic(RJ45) Ethernet ports.
IEC 62439-3 High-availabillity Seamless Redundancy (HSR)

Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 3, High-availability
seamless redundancy (HSR) is available as an option when ordering IEDs. Redundant station bus
communication according to 62439-3 uses two optical Ethernet ports.
14.3.3 Operation principle GUID-73DB23CD-A924-4B89-8AAB-1E79D44DE429 v1
PRP IEC 62439-3 redundant communication

The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is transmitted on both
channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one channel is compared with data
package identity from the other channel, if they are the same, the last package is discarded.

Technical manual
Ethernet
The RCHLCCH function block supervise the redundant communication on the two channels. If no
data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the last 10 s, the output LinkAUp
and/or LinkBUp is set to 0 which indicates an error.
Device 1 Device 2
AP1 AP1
PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB
Switch A Switch B

AP1 AP1
Device 3 Device 4
Figure 228: Redundant station bus
IEC 62439-3 High-availabillity Seamless Redundancy (HSR)

HSR applies the principle of parallel operation to a single ring.
For each message sent, the node sends two frames, one through each port. Both the frames
circulate in opposite directions over the ring. Every node forwards the frames it receives from one
port to another to reach the next node. When the originating sender node receives the frame it sent,
the sender node discards the frame to avoid loops
The RCHLCCH function block supervise the redundant communication on the two channels. If no
data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the last 10 s, the output LinkAUp
and/or LinkBUp is set to 0 which indicates an error.
If IEEE1588 (PTP) is used an accuracy of 1 µs can be guaranteed for up to 15 devices in one HSR-
ring.

Technical manual
Ethernet
Device 1 Device 2
AP1 AP1
PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA

AP1 AP1
Device 3 Device 4
Figure 229: HSR ring
14.4 Merging unit
14.4.1 Introduction GUID-E630C16F-EDB8-40AE-A8A2-94189982D15F v1
The IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to communicate
with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly known as Merging Units (MU).
The rear access points are used for the communication.
The merging units (MU) are called so because they can gather analog values from one or more
measuring transformers, sample the data and send the data over process bus to other clients (or
subscribers) in the system. Some merging units are able to get data from classical measuring
transformers, others from non-conventional measuring transducers and yet others can pick up data
from both types.
14.4.2 Settings
Table 366: MU1 Non group settings (basic)

SampleValueID 0 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0101 Sample Value ID (SVID) for the merging
unit [0-34 char]
APConnection None - - None Access point connection for the merging
AP1 unit
AP2
AP3
AP4
SvCBRef 0 - 16 - 1 Reference to the subscribed SV control
block [1-16 char]

Technical manual
Ethernet
Table 367: MU1_HW Non group settings (basic)


Table 368: MU1_HW Monitored data

MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data loss
1=Error
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized to same clock as
1=Error IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 0=No - Sample lost
1=Yes
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in MU
1=Error
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 0=No - MU in test mode
1=Yes
SIMMODE BOOLEAN 0=No - Simulation mode
1=Yes
BadReference BOOLEAN 0=No - BadReference indication output for I1
1=Yes
Derived BOOLEAN 0=No - Derived indication output for I1
1=Yes
Failure BOOLEAN 0=No - Failure indication output for I1
1=Yes
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 0=No - Inaccurate indication output for I1
1=Yes
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 0=No - Inconsistent indication output for I1
1=Yes
OldData BOOLEAN 0=No - OldData indication output for I1
1=Yes
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 0=No - OperatorBlocked indication output for I1
1=Yes
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 0=No - Oscillatory indication output for I1
1=Yes
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 0=No - OutOfRange indication output for I1
1=Yes
Overflow BOOLEAN 0=No - Overflow indication output for I1
1=Yes
Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output for I1
1=Substituted

Technical manual
Ethernet

Test BOOLEAN 0=No - Test indication output for I1
1=Yes
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output I1
1=Invalid
2=Reserved
3=Questionable
4=Not Used
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Substituted
1=Yes
1=Invalid
2=Reserved
3=Questionable
4=Not Used
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes

Technical manual
Ethernet

1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Substituted
1=Yes
1=Invalid
2=Reserved
3=Questionable
4=Not Used
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Substituted
1=Yes
1=Invalid
2=Reserved
3=Questionable
4=Not Used
BadReference BOOLEAN 0=No - BadReference indication output for U1
1=Yes
Derived BOOLEAN 0=No - Derived indication output for U1
1=Yes
Failure BOOLEAN 0=No - Failure indication output for U1
1=Yes
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 0=No - Inaccurate indication output for U1
1=Yes
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 0=No - Inconsistent indication output for U1
1=Yes

Technical manual
Ethernet

OldData BOOLEAN 0=No - OldData indication output for U1
1=Yes
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 0=No - OperatorBlocked indication output for U1
1=Yes
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 0=No - Oscillatory indication output for U1
1=Yes
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 0=No - OutOfRange indication output for U1
1=Yes
Overflow BOOLEAN 0=No - Overflow indication output for U1
1=Yes
Source BOOLEAN 0=Process - Source indication output for U1
1=Substituted
Test BOOLEAN 0=No - Test indication output for U1
1=Yes
Validity INTEGER 0=Good - Validity indication output U1
1=Invalid
2=Reserved
3=Questionable
4=Not Used
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Substituted
1=Yes
1=Invalid
2=Reserved
3=Questionable
4=Not Used
1=Yes
1=Yes

Technical manual
Ethernet

1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Substituted
1=Yes
1=Invalid
2=Reserved
3=Questionable
4=Not Used
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Yes
1=Substituted
1=Yes
1=Invalid
2=Reserved
3=Questionable
4=Not Used

Technical manual
Ethernet
14.5 Routes
14.5.1 Introduction GUID-95F9C7BA-92F8-489F-AD0A-047410B5E66F v1
A route is a specified path for data to travel between the source device in a subnetwork to the
destination device in a different subnetwork. A route consists of a destination address and the
address of the gateway to be used when sending data to the destination device, see Figure 230.
Default gateway
Gateway
Source Destination
Figure 230: Route from source to destination through gateway
14.5.2 Settings
Table 369: ROUTE_1 Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation on/off of the route
On
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 IP address of the gateway
Address
DestIPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Destination IP address
Address
DestSubnetMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Destination IP subnet mask
Address
Name 1 - 18 - 1 Route1 User configurable name of the route
[1-18 char]

Table 370: ROUTE_1 Monitored data

RouteConfig INTEGER 0=Ok - Route configuration status
1=Error
-1=Off

Technical manual
Section 15 Station communication

15.1 Communication protocols M14815-3 v15
Each IED is provided with several communication interfaces enabling it to connect to one or many
substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA) bus or Substation
Monitoring (SM) bus.
Available communication protocols are:
• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

• IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
• LON communication protocol
• SPA communication protocol
• IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
The LPHD.PhyHealth reflects the physical health of the IED. The status is set to
Alarm when there is an internal failure in the IED or Warning if any active
communication link fails.
15.2 Communication protocol diagnostics GUID-6BC4671F-6D06-4BBD-B1FF-2F03FF16A856 v1
Status of the protocols can be viewed in the LHMI under Main menu /Diagnostics /IED status /
Protocol diagnostics. The diagnostic values are:
Diagnostic value Description

Off Protocol is turned off
Error An error has occured, refer to event list for more
information
Warning Configuration inconsistency. Unable to locate data point.
Ready Protocol is ready

Technical manual
Figure 231: Protocol diagnostic screen in LHMI
15.3 DNP3 protocol GUID-54A54716-23BD-4E7C-8245-DE2B4C75E8DC v1
DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to communicate data
between components in process automation systems. For a detailed description of the DNP3
protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.
15.4 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol IP14616-1 v2
IEC 61850 Ed.1 or Ed.2 can be chosen by a setting in PCM600. The IED is equipped with four
optical Ethernet rear ports for IEC 61850-8-1 station bus communication. The IEC 61850-8-1
communication is also possible from the electrical Ethernet front port. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows
intelligent electrical devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information and simplifies
system engineering. IED-to-IED communication using GOOSE and client-server communication over
MMS are supported. Disturbance recording file (COMTRADE) uploading can be done over MMS or
FTP.
The front port is only intended for PCM600 communication, maintenance, training
and test purposes due to risk of interference during normal operation.

Technical manual
15.4.2 Communication interfaces and protocols GUID-35C845D3-574A-40D1-AEF1-9E0D330E31DE v9
Table 371: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols
Protocol Ethernet Serial

100BASE-FX (ST connector) Glass fiber (ST connector) EIA-485
IEC 61850–8–1 ● - -
DNP3 ● ● ●
IEC 60870-5-103 - ● ●
● = Supported
15.4.3 Settings
Table 372: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)

On
GOOSEPortEd1 AP_FRONT - - AP_1 Selection of GOOSE port (only for
AP_1 IEC61850 Ed1)
AP_2
AP_3
AP_4
AP_5
AP_6
ProtocolEdition Ed 1 - - Ed 1 Protocol Edition
Ed 2
RemModControl Off - - Off Remote Mode Control
Maintenance
All levels
RemSetControlEd2 Disabled - - Disabled Changing settings over 61850 enabled
Enabled (only for IEC61850 Ed2)
ResvTmsEd2 1 - 3600 s 1 60 Reservation time (only for IEC61850
Ed2)
M15031-1 v9
Table 373: Communication protocols
Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol IEC 60870–5–103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–115200 Bd
Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s
Protocol LON

Technical manual
Function Value
Communication speed for the IEDs 1.25 Mbit/s
Protocol SPA
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–38400 Bd
15.4.5 Generic communication function for Single Point indication

SPGAPC, SP16GAPC SEMOD55999-1 v4
15.4.5.1 Functionality SEMOD55713-5 v8
Generic communication function for Single Point indication (SPGAPC) is used to send one single
logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.
15.4.5.2 Function block SEMOD54714-4 v4
SPGAPC
BLOCK
ÎN
Figure 232: SPGAPC function block
SP16GAPC
BLOCK
ÎN1
ÎN2
ÎN3
ÎN4
ÎN5
ÎN6
ÎN7
ÎN8
ÎN9
ÎN10
ÎN11
ÎN12
ÎN13
ÎN14
ÎN15
ÎN16
Figure 233: SP16GAPC function block
15.4.5.3 Signals SEMOD55830-1 v2
Table 374: SPGAPC Input signals

IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status

Technical manual
Table 375: SP16GAPC Input signals

IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status
15.4.5.4 Settings ABBD8E283673 v4
15.4.5.5 Monitored data

Table 376: SPGAPC Monitored data

OUT GROUP - - Output status
SIGNAL
Table 377: SP16GAPC Monitored data

OUT1 GROUP - - Output 1 status
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

Technical manual

SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
OUTOR GROUP - - Output status logic OR gate for input 1 to
SIGNAL 16
15.4.5.6 Operation principle SEMOD55725-5 v8
Upon receiving a signal at its input, Generic communication function for Single Point indication
(SPGAPC) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests
this signal. Additional configuration is needed with PCM600 or IET600 to get the IEC 61850-8-1
communication established. For more information, refer to the Engineering manual.
15.4.6 Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC SEMOD55402-1 v3
15.4.6.1 Functionality SEMOD55872-5 v10
Generic communication function for measured values (MVGAPC) function is used to send the
instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also
be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit
measurement supervision on that value.
MVGAPC
BLOCK ^VALUE
ÎN RANGE
Figure 234: MVGAPC function block

Technical manual
15.4.6.3 Signals SEMOD55948-1 v2
Table 378: MVGAPC Input signals

IN REAL 0 Analog input value
Table 379: MVGAPC Output signals

VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER Range
15.4.6.4 Settings SEMOD55954-1 v2
Table 380: MVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

BasePrefix micro - - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
MV db 1 - 100000 Type 1 10000 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 0,001%
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 500 1000 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
MV hhLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV hLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV lLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -800.00 Low limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV llLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -900.00 Low Low limit multiplied with the base
MV min -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -1000.00 Minimum value multiplied with the base
MV max -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 1000.00 Maximum value multiplied with the base
MV dbType Cyclic - - Deadband Reporting type
Deadband
Int deadband
Db & Cyclic 5s
Db & Cyclic 30s
Db & Cyclic 1min
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)

Technical manual

Table 381: MVGAPC Monitored data

VALUE REAL - - Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER 0=Normal - Range
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
15.4.6.6 Operation principle SEMOD55936-5 v8
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, Generic communication function for Measured Value
(MVGAPC) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. Additional
configuration is needed with PCM600 or IET600 to get the IEC 61850-8-1 communication
established. For more information, see Engineering manual.
The principles of zero-point clamping, range supervision, and value reporting are explained in section
12.1.9.1. For MVGAPC, the measurement range is defined by the MV min and MV max settings.
15.4.7 GOOSE function block to receive a double point value

GOOSEDPRCV
GUID-8C11DB9A-7844-4E1F-A6BB-D97ECE350FC1 v1

GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEDPRCV - -
double point value
15.4.7.2 Functionality GUID-1D2DBC22-4F04-4809-B34E-8939D442C185 v4
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.
The DPOUT output is timestamped.
If the time information is received along with Goose message at input(source of output) from the
Goose sender, the same time information is available at the output signal.
If non signal goose message is received from the sender, the goose output will have the time
information of the receiver IED at which goose message is received.
15.4.7.3 Function block GUID-ED277880-FB5D-4630-872F-9F343D449FFE v1
GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK ^DPOUT
^SRCDPOUT DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 235: GOOSEDPRCV function block

Technical manual
15.4.7.4 Signals
GUID-2DC54788-86AF-4B4B-8E57-A89E30F0C433 v1
Except for the BLOCK input, the rest of the inputs of this GOOSE function block are
used for GOOSE connections. These connections are visible and possible to make
only if Easy GOOSE engineering is enabled. For instructions on how to enable Easy
GOOSE engineering in PCM600, refer to the Engineering Manual.
Table 382: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals

SRCDPOUT INTEGER 0 Source to double point output
Table 383: GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

DPOUT INTEGER Double point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for double point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output
15.4.7.5 Settings
Table 384: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
15.4.7.6 Operation principle GUID-82A1C8A2-827A-40EF-8E58-F573E29E468E v4
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure condition and
the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
Data Value Data Valid Comm Valid Test

Incoming data with q=Normal Updated 1 1 0
Incoming data with q=oldData 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid 0 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test 0 0 1 1
Incoming data with q=test+oldData 0 0 1 1
Receiver in block 0 0 1 0
Receiver in block and communication 0 0 0 0
error

Technical manual

Receiver in test mode and incoming data Updated 1 1 0
with q= Normal
with q= Test
Communication Error 0 0 0 0
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked either in SMT by means of a cross or
in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection (if easy GOOSE engineering is enabled)
to receive the double point values.
The implementation for IEC 61850 quality data handling is restricted to a simple
level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If
quality data validity is INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.
15.4.8 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV
GUID-93A1E81B-1DE8-483A-BB3B-DB771EE66DC1 v1

GOOSE function block to receive an GOOSEINTRCV - -
integer value
15.4.8.2 Functionality GUID-27B1ED7A-C8E8-499E-89C1-C656FB0337F8 v4
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.
The INTOUT output is timestamped.
15.4.8.3 Function block GUID-56F0C9F7-98F3-4091-B071-53CA5074DC8F v1
GOOSEINTRCV
BLOCK ÎNTOUT
^SRCINTOUT DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 236: GOOSEINTRCV function block

Technical manual
15.4.8.4 Signals
Table 385: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals

SRCINTOUT INTEGER 0 Source to integer output
Table 386: GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

INTOUT INTEGER Integer output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output
15.4.8.5 Settings
Table 387: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
15.4.8.6 Operation principle GUID-5BBDF772-3B3E-4F7C-ABE9-18CE3C1A2E2D v4

Incoming data with q=oldData Freeze 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid Freeze 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test Freeze 0 1 1
Incoming data with q=test+oldData Freeze 0 1 1
Receiver in block Freeze 0 1 0

Receiver in block and communication error Freeze 0 0 0

Technical manual

Receiver in test mode and incoming data with Updated 1 1 0
q= Normal
q= Test
Communication Error Freeze 0 0 0
to receive the integer values.
15.4.9 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value

GOOSEMVRCV
GUID-B1FFBE08-C823-4A58-9FE0-A9A20DA6BB44 v1

GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEMVRCV - -
measurand value
15.4.9.2 Functionality GUID-759CB016-2B4D-4D98-82E1-592044983D53 v4
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.
The MVOUT output is timestamped.
15.4.9.3 Function block GUID-A0B333CC-AEF4-40EA-B152-364648AB78D3 v1
GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK ^MVOUT
^SRCMVOUT DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 237: GOOSEMVRCV function block

Technical manual
15.4.9.4 Signals
Table 388: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals

SRCMVOUT REAL 0 Source to measurand value output
Table 389: GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

MVOUT REAL Measurand value output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output
15.4.9.5 Settings
Table 390: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
15.4.9.6 Operation principle GUID-7B24A6D3-2E5F-4961-A0A6-86436373809E v5

Incoming data with q=oldData Freeze 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=Invalid Freeze 0 1 0
Incoming data with q=test Freeze 0 1 1
Incoming data with q=test+oldData Freeze 0 1 1
Receiver in block Freeze 0 1 0

Receiver in block and communication error Freeze 0 0 0

Technical manual

q= Normal
q= Test
Communication Error Freeze 0 0 0
in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection (in case easy GOOSE engineering is
enabled) to receive the measured value.
15.4.10 GOOSE function block to receive a single point value

GOOSESPRCV
GUID-F2B30A70-842E-435E-8FAB-B1E58B9C0164 v1

GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSESPRCV - -
single point value
15.4.10.2 Functionality GUID-0C99A106-C131-45D3-9B81-6B188E35EB34 v4
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC 61850 protocol via GOOSE.
The SPOUT output is timestamped.
15.4.10.3 Function block GUID-A414F31A-323F-4684-BADA-46F9C5E2B0E8 v1
GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK ^SPOUT
^SRCSPOUT DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 238: GOOSESPRCV function block

Technical manual
15.4.10.4 Signals
Table 391: GOOSESPRCV Input signals

SRCSPOUT BOOLEAN 0 Source to single point output
Table 392: GOOSESPRCV Output signals

SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output
15.4.10.5 Settings
Table 393: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
15.4.10.6 Operation principle GUID-0E25A3FB-41BD-4EFE-9CA0-1262B9CD14CD v4

error

Technical manual

with q= Normal
with q= Test
to receive the binary single point values.
15.4.11 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

GOOSEINTLKRCV SEMOD173197-1 v2
15.4.11.1 Functionality GUID-92ECE152-892C-4214-95DE-B92718689434 v3
GOOSE communication can be used for exchanging information between IEDs via the IEC
61850-8-1 station communication bus. This is typically used for sending apparatus position
indications for interlocking or reservation signals for 1-of-n control. GOOSE can also be used to
exchange any boolean, integer, double point and analog measured values between IEDs.
Outputs APPx_OP and APPx_CL are timestamped.

Technical manual
GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK ^RESREQ
^SRCRESREQ ^RESGRANT
^SRCRESGR ÂPP1_OP
^SRCAPP1 ÂPP1_CL
^SRCAPP2 APP1VAL
^SRCAPP3 ÂPP2_OP
^SRCAPP4 ÂPP2_CL
^SRCAPP5 APP2VAL
^SRCAPP6 ÂPP3_OP
^SRCAPP7 ÂPP3_CL
^SRCAPP8 APP3VAL
^SRCAPP9 ÂPP4_OP
^SRCAPP10 ÂPP4_CL
^SRCAPP11 APP4VAL
^SRCAPP12 ÂPP5_OP
^SRCAPP13 ÂPP5_CL
^SRCAPP14 APP5VAL
^SRCAPP15 ÂPP6_OP
ÂPP6_CL
APP6VAL
ÂPP7_OP
ÂPP7_CL
APP7VAL
ÂPP8_OP
ÂPP8_CL
APP8VAL
ÂPP9_OP
ÂPP9_CL
APP9VAL
ÂPP10_OP
ÂPP10_CL
APP10VAL
ÂPP11_OP
ÂPP11_CL
APP11VAL
ÂPP12_OP
ÂPP12_CL
APP12VAL
ÂPP13_OP
ÂPP13_CL
APP13VAL
ÂPP14_OP
ÂPP14_CL
APP14VAL
ÂPP15_OP
ÂPP15_CL
APP15VAL
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 239: GOOSEINTLKRCV function block
15.4.11.3 Signals SEMOD173205-1 v2

Technical manual
Table 394: GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals
SRCRESREQ BOOLEAN 0 Source to reservation request
SRCRESGR BOOLEAN 0 Source to reservation granted
SRCAPP1 INTEGER 0 Source to apparatus 1 position
Table 395: GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

RESREQ BOOLEAN Reservation request
RESGRANT BOOLEAN Reservation granted
APP1_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is valid

Technical manual

COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output
Table 396: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
15.4.11.5 Operation principle GUID-7275CFBA-F1FE-496A-A9A1-724139DB2081 v2
The APPxVAL output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when at least one of the subscribed GOOSE datasets is
not received at the Function Block.

Technical manual

error
with q= Normal
with q= Test
At least one of the inputs of this GOOSE block must be linked either in SMT by
means of a cross or in ACT by means of a GOOSE connection (if easy GOOSE
engineering is enabled) to receive any data. Only those outputs whose source input
is linked/connected will be updated.
level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the APPxVAL output will be HIGH. If
DATA then the APPxVAL output will be LOW.

Technical manual
15.4.12 GOOSE binary receive GOOSEBINRCV SEMOD173158-1 v3
GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK ÔUT1
^SRCOUT1 DVALID1
^SRCOUT2 ÔUT2
^SRCOUT3 DVALID2
^SRCOUT4 ÔUT3
^SRCOUT5 DVALID3
^SRCOUT6 ÔUT4
^SRCOUT7 DVALID4
^SRCOUT8 ÔUT5
^SRCOUT9 DVALID5
^SRCOUT10 ÔUT6
^SRCOUT11 DVALID6
^SRCOUT12 ÔUT7
^SRCOUT13 DVALID7
^SRCOUT14 ÔUT8
^SRCOUT15 DVALID8
^SRCOUT16 ÔUT9
DVALID9
ÔUT10
DVALID10
ÔUT11
DVALID11
ÔUT12
DVALID12
ÔUT13
DVALID13
ÔUT14
DVALID14
ÔUT15
DVALID15
ÔUT16
DVALID16
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 240: GOOSEBINRCV function block
15.4.12.2 Signals SEMOD173166-1 v2
Table 397: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals

SRCOUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Source to binary output 1

Technical manual

Table 398: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1
DVALID1 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1

Technical manual

COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output
Table 399: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
15.4.12.4 Operation principle GUID-950F2501-9183-43C0-A193-7D15124F6CCE v2
The DVALIDx output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

error
with q= Normal
with q= Test
level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DVALIDx output will be HIGH. If
DATA then the DVALIDx output will be LOW.

Technical manual
15.4.13 GOOSE function block to receive a switching device

GOOSEXLNRCV
GUID-4B23D0CF-F298-4BBC-B833-1B8CC98D1604 v1

GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEXLNRCV - -
switching device
15.4.13.2 Functionality GUID-5AC7DE11-CB95-4565-A8AE-FB23D59FD717 v1
The GOOSE XLN Receive component is used to collect information from another device’s XCBR/
XSWI logical node sent over process bus via GOOSE. The GOOSE XLN Receive component
includes 12 different outputs (and their respective channel valid bits) with defined names to ease the
61850 mapping of the GOOSE signals in the configuration process.
15.4.13.3 Function block GUID-690FD935-5344-4D6F-AB94-F9FD5FD35B23 v1
GOOSEXLNRCV
BLOCK ^BEH
^SRCBEH BEH_VALID
^SRCLOC ^LOC
^SRCBLKOPN LOC_VALID
^SRCBLKCLS ^BLKOPN
^SRCPOS BLKOPN_VALID
^SRCOPCNT ^BLKCLS
^SRCBLK BLKCLS_VALID
^SRCSTSELD ^POSVAL
^SRCOPRCVD POSVAL_VALID
^SRCOPOK ÔPCNT
^SRCEEHLT OPCNT_VALID
^SRCOPCAP ^BLK
BLK_VALID
^STSELD
STSELD_VALID
ÔPRCVD
OPRCVD_VALID
ÔPOK
OPOK_VALID
ÊEHEALTH
EEHEALTH_VALID
ÔPCAP
OPCAP_VALID
COMMVALID
TEST
Figure 241: GOOSEXLNRCV function block
15.4.13.4 Signals

Technical manual
Table 400: GOOSEXLNRCV Input signals

SRCBEH INTEGER 0 Source to behaviour output
SRCLOC BOOLEAN 0 Source to local control behaviour output
SRCBLKOPN BOOLEAN 0 Source to block opening
SRCBLKCLS BOOLEAN 0 Source to block closing
SRCPOS INTEGER 0 Source to switch position
SRCOPCNT INTEGER 0 Source to operation counter
SRCBLK BOOLEAN 0 Source to dynamic blocking of function described by the LN
SRCSTSELD BOOLEAN 0 Source to the controllable data is in the status "selected”
SRCOPRCVD BOOLEAN 0 Source to operate command for a controllable data object
received
SRCOPOK BOOLEAN 0 Source to operate command for a controllable data object
accepted
SRCEEHLT INTEGER 0 Source to external equipment health
SRCOPCAP INTEGER 0 Source to operating capability
Table 401: GOOSEXLNRCV Output signals

BEH INTEGER Behaviour
BEH_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on Beh output
LOC BOOLEAN Local control behaviour
LOC_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on Loc output
BLKOPN BOOLEAN Block opening
BLKOPN_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on BlkOpn output
BLKCLS BOOLEAN Block closing
BLKCLS_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on BlkCls output
POSVAL INTEGER Switch position
POSVAL_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on PosVal output
OPCNT INTEGER Operation counter
OPCNT_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on OpCnt output
BLK BOOLEAN Dynamic blocking of function described by the LN
BLK_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on Blk output
STSELD BOOLEAN The controllable data is in the status "selected”
STSELD_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on stSeld output
OPRCVD BOOLEAN Operate command for a controllable data object received
OPRCVD_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on opRcvd output
OPOK BOOLEAN Operate command for a controllable data object accepted
OPOK_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on opOk output
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health
EEHEALTH_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on EEHealth output

Technical manual

OPCAP INTEGER Operating capability
OPCAP_VLD BOOLEAN Valid data on OpCap output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid
15.4.13.5 Settings
Table 402: GOOSEXLNRCV Non group settings (basic)

On
15.4.13.6 Operation principle GUID-903B5E3F-DC92-4D0A-B4D5-59DD01F36458 v1
The xxx_VALID outputs will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the xxx_VALID output will be HIGH. If
DATA then the xxx_VALID output will be LOW.
15.5 IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol GUID-6814F62B-8D99-4679-A11E-68048D1AC424 v2
15.5.1 Introduction GUID-FE2AC08A-2E04-4E73-8CA4-905522B1026A v2
The IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to communicate
with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly known as Merging Units (MU).
The rear access points are used for the communication.
15.5.2 Function block GUID-2581F3AD-7487-4C80-BDF3-9C6EC9F2E43C v3
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. The signals appear
only in the SMT tool when merging units (MU) are included in the configuration with
the Ethernet configuration tool. In the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired
virtual input (SMAI) of the IED and used internally in the configuration.

Technical manual
15.5.3 Signals
15.5.3.1 Output signals SEMOD166622-1 v1
GUID-942C81AD-22D9-438F-95FA-1972BA2BE2E5 v1
The output signals are the same for all MUs so only the table for MU1_HW is included in this manual.
Table 403: MU1_HW Output signals

I1 STRING Analogue input I1
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, data not received, transmission errors, time-sync
issues or inconsistent sample rate
SYNCH BOOLEAN High when IED clock is not within configured accuracy or time
domain
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Fatal error or recovery state after fatal error. High if any
subscribed channel has bad quality or TEST while IED not in test
mode.
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN MU not synced or MU clock not synced to same clock as IED
TESTMODE BOOLEAN Quality of one or more subscribed analogue channels is TEST
SIMMODE BOOLEAN MU delivers simulated data accepted by IED
I1QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for I1
U1QUALITY INTEGER Binary coded quality information for U1

Technical manual
Table 404: MU1_HW Non group settings (basic)


Table 405: MU1_HW Monitored data

MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, data not received,
1=Error transmission errors, time-sync issues or
inconsistent sample rate
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - High when IED clock is not within
1=Error configured accuracy or time domain
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Fatal error or recovery state after fatal
0=No error. High if any subscribed channel has
bad quality or TEST while IED not in test
mode.
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU not synced or MU clock not synced
1=Error to same clock as IED
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Quality of one or more subscribed
0=No analogue channels is TEST
SIMMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU delivers simulated data accepted by
0=No IED
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication output for I1
0=No
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output for I1
0=No
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output for I1
0=No
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication output for I1
0=No
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication output for I1
0=No
OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication output for I1
0=No
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked indication output for I1
0=No
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication output for I1
0=No
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication output for I1
0=No

Technical manual

Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication output for I1
0=No
1=Substituted
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for I1
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No

Technical manual

0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
BadReference BOOLEAN 1=Yes - BadReference indication output for U1
0=No
Derived BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Derived indication output for U1
0=No
Failure BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Failure indication output for U1
0=No
Inaccurate BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inaccurate indication output for U1
0=No
Inconsistent BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Inconsistent indication output for U1
0=No

Technical manual

OldData BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OldData indication output for U1
0=No
OperatorBlocked BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OperatorBlocked indication output for U1
0=No
Oscillatory BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Oscillatory indication output for U1
0=No
OutOfRange BOOLEAN 1=Yes - OutOfRange indication output for U1
0=No
Overflow BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Overflow indication output for U1
0=No
1=Substituted
Test BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Test indication output for U1
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No

Technical manual

0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
0=No
1=Substituted
0=No
2=Reserved
1=Invalid
3=Questionable

Technical manual
15.5.6 Operation principle GUID-A1D31CDA-1FE2-4BC0-A472-1B35E73CA1F2 v6
The merging units (MUs) are situated close to the primary equipment, like circuit breakers, isolators,
etc. The MUs have the capability to gather measured values from measuring transformers, non-
conventional transducers or both. The gathered data are then transmitted to subscribers over the
process bus, utilizing the IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE protocol.
The IED communicates with the MUs over the process bus via the rear access points. For the user,
the MU appears in the IED as a normal analogue input module and is engineered in the very same
way.
IED
Application
Station Wide
Preprocessing blocks Preprocessing blocks GPS Clock
SMAI SMAI
MU1 MU2
Splitter
Electrical-to-
Optical Converter
1PPS
TRM module
Access Point
110 V 1A 1A
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
Ethernet Switch
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
Merging 1PPS Merging 1PPS

Unit Unit
Combi Combi
CT CT
Sensor Sensor
Conventional VT
IEC080000723enOriginal.vsd
Figure 242: Example of signal path for sampled analogue values from MU and conventional
CT/VT
The function has the following alarm signals:
• MUDATA:

Technical manual
• Ok[0] indicates that the merging unit samples are received from the merging unit and are
accepted.
• ERROR[1] indicates that the merging unit samples are generated by internal substitution.
• SYNCH:
• OK[0] indicates
• when SyncLostMode = Block, and the time quality of the hardware is within the set
value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified]
• when SyncLostMode = BlockOnLostUTC, the time quality of the hardware is within
the set value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified] [AND] IED receives global
common time[UTC] from any of the FineSyncSource like IRIG-B, PTP or GPS.
• when SyncLostMode = NoBlock
• ERROR[1] indicates
• when SyncLostMode = Block, and the time quality of the hardware is not within the
set value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified]
• when SyncLostMode = BlockonLostUTC, the time quality of the hardware is not
within the set value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified] [OR] IED doesn't
receive global common time[UTC] from any of the FineSyncSource like IRIG-B,
PTP or GPS.
• SMPLLOST:
• NO[0] indicates that the merging unit samples are received from the merging unit and are
accepted
• YES[1] indicates
• when merging unit data are generated by internal substitution
• when one/more channel's Quality is not good
• when merging unit is in Testmode/detailed quality=Test, IED is not in test mode
• MUSYNCH:
• OK[0] indicates
• when SyncLostMode = Block/BlockOnLostUTC, the time quality of the hardware is
within the set value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified] [AND] merging unit is
time synchronized [smpSynch flag in datastream is not equal to 0] [AND] the
hardware time matches the time in the datastream within 10 ms.
• when SyncLostMode = NoBlock, the merging unit samples are received
• ERROR[1] indicates
• when SyncLostMode = Block/BlockOnLostUTC, the time quality of the hardware is
not within the set value [SyncAccLevel=1us, 4us or Unspecified] [OR] merging unit
is not time synchronized [smpSynch flag in datastream is equal to 0] [OR] the
hardware time is out of 10 ms from the time in the datastream.
• when SyncLostMode = NoBlock, the merging unit samples are not received
• TESTMODE:
• NO[0] indicates that No merging unit analog channels are in testmode
• YES[1] indicates that one/more subscribed channels are in testmode
• SIMMODE:
• NO[0] indicates that normal data is received and are accepted
• YES[1] indicates that the received datastream is tagged as simulated and are accepted
Internal substitution can happen during the following conditions:
1. Transient block after receive error (sample loss)

2. Transient block after Simulated/Real Sample value stream transition
3. Transient block after recovery from substitution
4. No data from merging unit

Technical manual
5. Bad data from merging unit

6. Merging unit report lost sync[smpSynch=0] and SyncLostMode = Block/BlockOnLostUTC
7. IED time quality of hardware is not good [not within set value SyncAccLevel] and SyncLostMode
= Block/BlockOnLostUTC
8. Merging unit channel reported with quality other than good
9. Merging unit channel/channels is/are in testmode and the IED is not in testmode
During Internal substitution, the functions connected to that particular merging unit will be blocked
and the merging unit channel's analog values will be forced to 0 with quality as Invalid, Substituted,
Failure.
Timeout
TSYNCERR Indicates that there is some timeout on any configured time source or the time quality is
worse than specified in SynchAccLevel. The timeout is individually specified per time source (PPS,
IRIG-B, SNTP etc.) See section "Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN"
15.5.6.1 Conditional blocking GUID-D129543D-82BE-4F8A-9333-4C3470693F98 v1
Introduction GUID-9D9A73FA-505E-4936-BB55-E7D86AB8023B v1
Conditional blocking is a concept in the 670 series which improves resilience against errors in
network communication, time synchronization, and hardware. This is important for digital substations
where analogue data (some or even all) is sourced from the IEC61850 9-2 MUs (merging units).
Conditional blocking functionality GUID-C12A5162-7F49-4FF0-98AA-BA362BC48070 v1

The overall idea with conditional blocking is to avoid blocking of the parts of an IED which can safely
continue the operation in presence of certain error conditions (listed below).
To make conditional blocking work as intended, there are configuration rules that need to be
followed. If an incorrect configuration is deployed, the IED functionality may be blocked inadvertently,
thereby reducing the availability of protection functions. An incorrect configuration also increases the
sensitivity to single point failures.
With a proper configuration, on the other hand, only functions directly affected by an error will be
blocked, while other functions will continue to operate.
Implementation GUID-D9880430-E6D6-42EE-B315-7E9279BEC913 v1
In Figure 243, two functions are shown, F1 and F2, where F1 takes data only from MU1, while F2
takes data from both MU1 and MU2.
3Ph Group
MU1 SMAI F1
3Ph Group
MU2 SMAI F2
Figure 243: Implementation schematic

When F1 and F2 start-up, each function analyzes the analogue data which is driving it. This
information is used to determine how the function should be blocked during error conditions
separately.

Technical manual
Function F1 is independent of MU2, if MU2 is lost, this will not affect F1. It will execute its algorithms
as long as data from MU1 is available. Note that F1 will operate even with poor time synchronization.
This is possible because F1 only depends on data from a single MU.
Function F2 on the other hand, depends on the correct information and time synchronized data being
available from both MU1 and MU2. If any of the MUs fail, or if any of them indicates the loss of time
synchronization, F2 will be blocked.
Examples of error conditions GUID-AFB2C078-59A8-4DFD-AD6C-B458695E4FA5 v1

This section contains examples of error conditions that can trigger function blocking.
• Time synchronization is not available/correctly configured in the IED
• Time synchronization quality is poor
• Analogue MU data indicates bad time quality in the MU
• Analogue MU data indicates data error in the MU
• Analogue MU data is unavailable (for example, if a connection to an IEC 9-2 MU is lost)
• Hardware errors (for example, network switches and fibers, station clock failures etc.)
Depending on how the IED is configured, these kinds of errors will have a bigger or smaller impact
on how much of the IED functionality that is blocked.
Incorrect configuration GUID-7857CC4E-A7DF-4B85-BF4E-9470A02903E5 v1

As an example, consider an instance of OC4PTOC, which has four steps of functionality. In Figure
244, it is configured with two 3-phase groups, one for current and one for voltage. The analogue data
comes from two different MUs.
Figure 244: Incorrect configuration

Assume, that the user has configured one step in the OC4PTOC as non-directional, and another step
as directional. Because the analogue data comes from two different MUs, the user should
understand that the data from both MUs must be available and both must indicate that they are time
synchronized, for the directional step to operate.

Technical manual
Due to the way conditional blocking works, if one or both of the MUs indicate poor time
synchronization, then the entire function will be blocked. Unfortunately, in this example, this will also
block the non-directional over-current step, although it would be perfectly capable of operating
without time synchronization.
This shows the incorrect configuration from a conditional blocking perspective.
Correct configuration GUID-AA803422-5774-4BDE-B84E-2FCF465EE4D0 v1

In Figure 245, the configuration is changed so the user have two instances of the function, where the
non-directional over-current instance uses only currents from one MU, while the directional over-
current instance uses current and voltage from both the MUs.
Figure 245: Correct configuration

If the time synchronization is lost, or if there is an error in the voltage modules of the MU, or if the
voltage MU is lost altogether, the non-directional instance will still be operative.
This is an example of how the user needs to configure the IED to ensure conditional blocking works
as intended.
Another way to avoid conditional blocking is to take currents as well as voltages from the same MU.
Thus, the usage of multiple SMAIs in itself is not a trigger of conditional blocking, but the usage of
multiple MUs can be. This also implies that hardware-wise, one should try to not divide a 3-phase
group of currents and voltages over multiple MUs, when this is possible (this is really a consideration
for the substation hardware setup).
Functions with multiple internal steps GUID-D067CD74-43CD-480E-9A50-4F978A8DF5D8 v2

The following functions have internal steps/functions, which also can be configured incorrectly similar
to the above description.
NS4PTOC, OC4PTOC, EF4PTOC
• Each step can be set differently with respect to directionality
Time synchronization GUID-5DD58144-76EA-4019-A8EA-354E263810FB v2

A correct configuration also has to consider how the time synchronization is set up.
To begin with, a suitable station clock must be available. Hitachi Power grids recommends that PTP
is used as a time synchronization protocol.

Technical manual
Further, it is recommended that at least two station clocks are connected to the substation network.
This is to avoid the single point of failure. If one clock encounters an error, or loses its connection to
the network, the other clock will seamlessly take over the time synchronization task, and thus avoid
blocking due to lost time synchronization.
It is also required that PTP is active on all ports that send or receive sampled data on all devices, to
secure that the system time is common for all devices.
Synchronization via PTP GUID-F7D9C58F-CB87-4D2A-BC64-2B34D41557A4 v1

While synchronizing a station via PTP (IEC61850-9-3), the time propagates from the clock through
the system to each IED.
This means that during a transition, for example, when a clock regains time from the GPS system
after drifting for some time, there can be different times in different parts of a substation.
Refer the following figure for a simple system:
GMC
MU2
REX 670
MU1 MU3
SAM600 - TS CT VT
Figure 246: Synchronization via PTP
If the station clock is out of order for some time and then regains good synch from, for example, the
satellite system, the correct time will reach MU2 and the 670 first. Then, it will propagate to MU1 and
MU3 through the boundary clock in the 670. This means, that for a short duration, MU1 and MU2 will
both appear to be synchronized, but they will in practice have different times. If the protection is not
blocked during this condition, user will get a false trip.
To fix this problem, the synch-lost signal from the merging units is prolonged for 16 seconds in the
670. The synch-lost signal is used for conditional blocking of protections which use data from the
TRM of the IED in combination with a merging unit. The maximum time frame specified by
IEC61850-9-3 to propagate the time and resynchronize is 16 seconds.

Technical manual
The same time frame applies for the internal synchronization of the 670. In the scenario where PTP
is used in combination with 9-2, the synch-lost signal is also prolonged with 16 seconds. Again, this
delay is needed to ensure that the correct time has propagated to all units before blocked functions
are released for operation.
15.5.6.2 IEC 61850 quality expander QUALEXP GUID-9C5DC78E-041B-422B-9668-320E62B847A2 v1
The quality expander component is used to display the detailed quality of an IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
analog channel. The component expands the channel quality output of a Merging Unit analog
channel received in the IED as per the IEC 61850-7-3 standard. This component can be used during
the ACT monitoring to get the particular channel quality of the Merging Unit.
The expanded quality bits are visible on the outputs as per IEC 61850-7-3 standard. When written to
IED, the configuration will show the expanded form of the respective MU channel quality information
during the online monitoring in the ACT.
The validity status of the quality as described in IEC 61850-7-3 is expanded to Good, Invalid,
Reserved and Questionable (QUEST) outputs.
The detailed quality as described in IEC 61850-7-3 is expanded to Overflow, Out of Range
(OUTRANGE), Bad reference (BADREF), Oscillatory (OSC), Failure, old data, inconsistent
(INCONS) and inaccurate (INACC) outputs.
The source status of the quality as described in IEC 61850-7-3 is expanded to Process and
Substituted (SUBST) outputs.
The other quality statuses (Test, Operator Blocked (OPBLKD) and Derived) are shown as they are.
The derived quality is the extension to IEC 61850-7-3. If the derived bit is set to 1, it indicates that
there is no physical sensor within the system to determine the value, but the value is derived from a
combination of values from other physical sensors. Typically, I4 or U4 are derived if they are
calculated as the sum of the three phase quantities.
The configured MU channel quality as described in IEC 61850-7-3 is available on LHMI. This can be
viewed under Main Menu /Diagnostics /Merging units /MUX:XXXX/XX Quality .
Figure 247: Configured MU channel quality in LHMI

Technical manual
15.5.7 Technical data SEMOD172233-1 v1
SEMOD172236-2 v3
Table 406: IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
Functions Value
Protocol IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
15.6 LON communication protocol IP14420-1 v1
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables
communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operator’s workplace, from the control
center and also from other terminals.
LON communication protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from Echelon

Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks. These networks are
characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few bytes), peer-to-peer
communication, multiple communication media, low maintenance, multivendor equipment, and low
support costs. LonTalk supports the needs of applications that cover a range of requirements. The
protocol follows the reference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the
International Standardization Organization (ISO).
In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For other
addresses, refer to section Related documents.
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general.
15.6.2 Settings IP14441-1 v2
Table 407: HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - Off Operation
On
Table 408: ADE Non group settings (basic)

On
TimerClass Slow - - Slow Timer class
Normal
Fast
TimeDomain Local without DST - - Local with DST Time domain
Local with DST
M15083-3 v3
The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With protection and
control devices, fiber optic media is used, which enables the use of the maximum speed of 1.25
Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can

Technical manual
communicate with each other. The own subnet and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255
subnets, 127 nodes per one subnet).
The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The measured values,
status information, and event information are spontaneously sent to the higher-level devices. The
higher-level devices can read and write memorized values, setting values, and other parameter data
when required. The LON bus also enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to
deliver, for example, interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus master.
The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network variables and explicit
messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages, such as measuring values, status
information, and interlocking/blocking signals. Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of
information, such as events and explicit read and write messages to access device data.
The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems include direct
communication among all terminals in the system and support for multi-master implementations. The
LON bus also has an open concept, so that the terminals can communicate with external devices
using the same standard of network variables.
Introduction of LON protocol M15083-8 v2

For more information, refer to LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and Control, User’s manual
and Technical description.
LON protocol M15083-11 v1
Configuration of LON M15083-13 v4

LON network tool (LNT) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network configuration. All the functions
required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks network, is easily accessible on a single tool
program.
Activate LON Communication M15083-16 v3

Activate LON communication in the Parameter Setting tool under Main Menu /Configuration /
Communication /Station communication / LON /HORZCOMM:1 , where Operation must be set to
ON.
Add LON Device Types LNT M15083-19 v4

A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing the device from
the Hitachi Power grids LON Device Types package for LNT 505 using SLDT package version 1p2
r04.
LON net address M15083-22 v3

To establish a LON connection, the IED has to be given a unique net address. The net address
consists of a subnet and node number. This is accomplished with the LON Network Tool by creating
one device for each IED.
Vertical communication M15083-25 v1

Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices and protection and
control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed process data to monitoring devices
as events and transfer of commands, parameter data and disturbance recorder files. This
communication is implemented using explicit messages.
Events and indications M15083-28 v3

Events are sent to the monitoring devices using explicit messages (message code 44H) with
unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal is changed in the IED, one
message with the value, quality and time is transmitted from terminal.
Binary events M15083-31 v6

Binary events are generated in Event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:20 in the IEDs. The EVENT
function blocks have predefined LON addresses. Table 409 shows the LON addresses to the first
input on the EVENT function blocks. Addresses to the other inputs on the EVENT function block are

Technical manual
consecutive after the first input. For example, input 15 on EVENT:17 function block has the address
1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.
For double indications, only the first eight inputs 1–8 must be used. Inputs 9–16 can be used for
other types of events at the same EVENT block.
Three EVENT function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:3 running with a fast loop time (3 ms) are available
as basic in the IEDs.. The remaining EVENT function blocks EVENT:4 to EVENT:9 run with a loop
time of 8 ms and EVENT:10 to EVENT:20 run with a loop time of 100 ms. The EVENT blocks are
used to send binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data from measuring functions
and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals.
16 pulse counter value function blocks PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 are available in the IEDs.
The first LON address in every EVENT function block is found in table 409. The formula for
calculating the LON address is:
LON Address = (EVBlkNr-1)×16 + signalNr +1023
For instance, the first pin at Event block number 2 has the address: (2-1)×16 +1 +1023 = 1040
Table 409: LON adresses for EVENT functions
Function block First LON address in

function block
EVENT:1 1024
EVENT:2 1040
EVENT:3 1056
EVENT:4 1072
EVENT:5 1088
EVENT:6 1104
EVENT:7 1120
EVENT:8 1136
EVENT:9 1152
EVENT:10 1168
EVENT:11 1184
EVENT:12 1200
EVENT:13 1216
EVENT:14 1232
EVENT:15 1248
EVENT:16 1264
EVENT:17 1280
EVENT:18 1296
EVENT:19 1312
EVENT:20 1328
Event masks M15083-78 v4

Event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under:
Settings /IED settings / Monitoring / Event Function or via parameter setting tool (PST) as
follows:

Technical manual
• No events
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, the EVENT function makes the reporting decision (reporting criteria for integers has
no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
Single indication M15083-123 v3

Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always reported on
change, no changed detection is done in the EVENT function block. Other Boolean signals, for
example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event masked in the EVENT function
block.
Double indications M15083-126 v3

Double indications can only be reported for the first 8 inputs on an EVENT function block.
• 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0

• 01 generates an open event with the read status 1
• 10 generates a close event with the read status 2
• 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3
Analog value M15083-135 v4

All analog values are reported cyclic. The reporting interval is taken from the connected function if
there is a limit supervised signal. Otherwise it is taken from the EVENT function block.
Command handling M15083-80 v4

Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent SPA-bus
message is an explicit LON message which contains an ASCII character message following the
coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent using explicit messages with message
code 41H and using acknowledged transport service.
Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N) are sent using
the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only one SPA-bus message at a
time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the next message.
For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, that is the function
blocks type SCSWI 1 to 30, SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 24, the SPA addresses are according to
table 410.
SEMOD116913-2 v2
Table 410: SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control
Name Function SPA Description

block address
BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block
command
command
command
command
command
command
command

Technical manual

block address
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command

Technical manual

block address
CANCEL SCSWI01 1 I 5107 SPA parameters for cancel
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command

Technical manual

block address
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5105 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, Close) command
SELOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command
SELClose+ILO=11, before operate command
SELOpen+SCO=20,
SELClose+SCO=21,
SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
SELClose+ILO+SCO=31
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command

Technical manual

block address
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5106 SPA parameters for operate
ExcClose=01, (Open/Close) command
ExcOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command
ExcClose+ILO=11, before operate command
ExcOpen+SCO=20,
ExcClose+SCO=21,
ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31
ExcClose=01, so on. (Open/Close) command

Technical manual

block address

Technical manual

block address
Sub Value SXCBR01 2 I 7854 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Note: Send the value before
Enable
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR09 3I7 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI01 3 I 196 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted

Technical manual

block address
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
substituted
Sub Enable SXCBR01 2 I 7855 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Note: Send the Value before
Enable
enable command

Technical manual

block address
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR09 3I8 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI01 3 I 197 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command

Technical manual

block address
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI11 3I 379 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
enable command
Update Block SXCBR01 2 I 7853 SPA parameter for update block
command
command
command
command
command
command

Technical manual

block address
command
command
Update Block SXCBR09 3I6 SPA parameter for update block
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
Update Block SXSWI01 3 I 198 SPA parameter for update block
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command

Technical manual

block address
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
command
Horizontal communication M15083-86 v4

Network variables are used for communication between 500 and 650 series IEDs The supported
network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is used to communicate the state of
a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.
Multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) is used to pack the information to one
value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for the application by a multiple
command receive function block (MULTICMDRCV). With horizontal communication, the input
BOUND on MULTICMDSND must be set to 1. There are 10 MULTICMDSND and 60
MULTICMDRCV function blocks available. These function blocks are connected using the LON
network tool (LNT). The tool also defines the service and addressing on LON.
This is an overview for configuring the network variables for the IEDs.
Configuration of LON network variables M15083-92 v3

Configure the Network variables according to the specific application using the LON network tool
(LNT). The following is an example of how to configure network variables concerning, for example,
interlocking between two IEDs.

Technical manual
LON
BAY E1 BAY E3 BAY E4

MULTICMDSND: 7 MULTICMDSND: 9 MULTICMDSND: 9
en05000718.vsd
Figure 248: Examples connections between MULTICMDSND and MULTICMDRCV function

blocks in three IEDs
The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From LNT window
select Connections / NVConnections / New .
en05000719.vsd
Figure 249: The network variables window in LNT

There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either the users can use the drag-and-drop
method where they can select all nodes in the device window, drag them to the Download area in the
bottom of the program window and drop them there; or, they can perform it by selecting the
traditional menu, Configuration / Download .

Technical manual
en05000720.vsd
Figure 250: The download configuration window in LNT
Communication ports M15083-97 v6

The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the first analog digital
conversion module (ADM), and it is used for LON, SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP communication.
In the following figure, X311 ports A/B are for SPA, IEC103 or DNP3 and X311 ports C/D are for LON
protocol.
Figure 251: Rear view of 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot

Technical manual
There are two types of IO connectors: snap-in connectors for plastic fiber cables and ST/bayonet
connectors for glass fiber cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type of connector or a
combination of both connectors. This is identified by a tag.
Connect the incoming optical fiber to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX
transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling and connection of
fiber cables.
M11927-1 v2
Table 411: LON communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol LON
Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s
15.7 SPA communication protocol IP14614-1 v1
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For other
addresses, refer to section Related documents.
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in general.
15.7.2 Design M11877-3 v7
Using the rear SPA port for either local or remote communication with a PC requires the following
equipment:
• Optical fibers
• Opto/electrical converter for the PC
• PC
SPA cannot be accessed via PCM600.
When communicating between the local HMI and a PC, the only hardware required is a front-
connection cable.
SPA can be accessed via LHMI front only when using the Field Service Tool Access
(FSTACCS).

Technical manual
15.7.3 Settings IP14403-1 v2
Table 412: SPA Non group settings (basic)

SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address
BaudRate 300 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
Table 413: LONSPA Non group settings (basic)

On
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address
M11880-3 v2
The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data bits + even
parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. For more information on recommended
baud rate for each type of IED, refer to Technical reference manual. Messages on the bus consist of
ASCII characters.
Introduction of SPA protocol M11880-7 v2

The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated need to talk to the
master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves and, consequently, can request
required data. In addition, the master can send data to the slave. Requesting by the master can be
performed either by sequenced polling (for example, for event information) or only on demand.
The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information to the slave in
write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common a broadcast message
containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit and receive lines is a logical "1".
SPA protocol M11880-10 v5

The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data to an IED with
the SPA communication protocol implemented.
The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 are found in table 414.
Table 414: SPA addresses for the PCFCNT function
Function block SPA address CNT_VAL SPA address NEW_VAL

PCFCNT:1 6-O-2788 6-O-2787
PCFCNT:2 6-O-2794 6-O-2793
PCFCNT:3 6-O-2800 6-O-2799
PCFCNT:4 6-O-2806 6-O-2805
PCFCNT:5 6-O-2812 6-O-2811
PCFCNT:6 6-O-2818 6-O-2817
PCFCNT:7 6-O-2824 6-O-2823

Technical manual
Function block SPA address CNT_VAL SPA address NEW_VAL

PCFCNT:8 6-O-2830 6-O-2829
PCFCNT:9 6-O-2836 6-O-2835
PCFCNT:10 6-O-2842 6-O-2841
PCFCNT:11 6-O-2848 6-O-2847
PCFCNT:12 6-O-2854 6-O-2853
PCFCNT:13 6-O-2860 6-O-2859
PCFCNT:14 6-O-2866 6-O-2865
PCFCNT:15 6-O-2872 6-O-2871
PCFCNT:16 6-O-2878 6-O-2877
I/O modules M11880-16 v4

To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function block are used,
that is, the addresses for BI1 – BI16. For SPA addresses, refer to section Related documents in
Product Guide.
M11880-35 v1
Single command, 16 signals M11880-51 v5

The IEDs can be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation automation
system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block has 16 outputs that can be used, for
example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local
HMI can also be used.
The single command, 16 signals function consists of four function blocks: SINGLECMD:1 to
SINGLECMD:4 for 16 binary output signals each.
The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control gateway, or from
the local HMI on the IED. For Single command, 3 signals function block, SINGLECMD:1 to
SINGLECMD:3, the address is for the first output. The other outputs follow consecutively after the
first one. For example, output 7 on the SINGLECMD:2 function block has the 5O533 address.
The SPA addresses for Single command, 16 signals functions SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:4 are
found in table 415.
Table 415: SPA addresses for SINGLECMD function
Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD1-Cmd1 4-S-4639 5-O-511
SINGLECMD1-Cmdt13 4-S-4651 5-O-523

Technical manual
SINGLECMD2-Cmdt3 4-S-4674 5-O-529

Technical manual
Figure 252 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way, connect the
command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection IED for control of a circuit breaker.
A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command control. The SPA
addresses to control the outputs OUT1 – OUT16 in SINGLECMD:1 are shown in table 415.
SINGLECMD PULSETIMER
BLOCK ÔUT1 INPUT OUT To output board, CLOSE
#CD01-CMDOUT1 ÔUT2
#CD01-CMDOUT2 ÔUT3
#CD01-CMDOUT3 ÔUT4
#CD01-CMDOUT4 ÔUT5 AND PULSETIMER
ÔUT6 INPUT1 OUT INPUT OUT To output board, OPEN
#CD01-CMDOUT5
ÔUT7 INPUT2 NOUT
#CD01-CMDOUT6
#CD01-CMDOUT7 ÔUT8 INPUT3
#CD01-CMDOUT8 ÔUT9 INPUT4
#CD01-CMDOUT9 ÔUT10
#CD01-CMDOUT16
SYNCH OK
Figure 252: Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of a circuit
breaker
The MODE input defines if the output signals from SINGLECMD:1 is off, steady or setable pulse
length signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Main Menu /Settings / IED
Settings / Control / Commands / Single Command or via Parameter Setting Tool (PST).
Event function EVENT M11880-82 v6

The Event function (EVENT) sends time-tagged events to the station level (for example, operator
workplace) over the station bus. On the station level, events are presented in an event list. Events
can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. All the internal signals
are time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels are time tagged
directly on each I/O module. Events are produced according to a set of event masks. These masks
are treated commonly for both LON and SPA channels.
Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED: Terminal Restarted
(0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).
The status and event codes for the EVENT function are found in Table 416.

Technical manual
Table 416: Status and event codes
Single indication1) Double indication

Event block Status Set event Reset Intermedi Closed Open Undefined
event ate 00 10 01 11
EVENT:1
Input 1 22O1 22E33 22E32 22E0 22E1 22E2 22E3
Input 2 22O2 22E35 22E34 22E4 22E5 22E6 22E7
Input 3 22O3 22E37 22E36 22E8 22E9 22E10 22E11
Input 4 22O4 22E39 22E38 22E12 22E13 22E14 22E15
Input 5 22O5 22E41 22E40 22E16 22E17 22E18 22E19
Input 6 22O6 22E43 22E42 22E20 22E21 22E22 22E23
Input 7 22O7 22E45 22E44 22E24 22E25 22E26 22E27
Input 8 22O8 22E47 22E46 22E28 22E29 22E30 22E31
Input 9 22O9 22E49 22E48 - - - -
Input 10 22O10 22E51 22E50 - - - -
Input 11 22O11 22E53 22E52 - - - -
Input 12 22O12 22E55 22E54 - - - -
Input 13 22O13 22E57 22E56 - - - -
Input 14 22O14 22E59 22E58 - - - -
Input 15 22O15 22E61 22E60 - - - -
Input 16 22O16 22E63 22E62 - - - -
EVENT:2 230.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E..

EVENT:3 240.. 24E.. 24E.. 24E.. 23E.. 24E.. 24E..
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
EVENT:20 410.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E..
These values are only applicable if the event mask is masked ≠ OFF.
Connection of signals as events M11880-311 v5

Signals coming from different protection and control functions and sent as events to the station level
over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus), are connected to the EVENT function block as specified in Figure
253.
EVENT
Block BLOCK
ILRANG ÎNPUT1
PSTO ÎNPUT2
UL12RANG ÎNPUT3
UL23RANG ÎNPUT4
UL31RANG ÎNPUT5
3I0RANG ÎNPUT6
3U0RANG ÎNPUT7
FALSE ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
Figure 253: Connection of protection signals for event handling

Technical manual
15.7.4.1 Communication ports M11880-315 v7
The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the first analog digital
conversion module (ADM). It is used for LON, SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP communication.
In the following figure, X311 ports A/B are for SPA, IEC103 or DNP3 and X311 ports C/D are for LON
protocol.
Figure 254: Rear view of 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot
There are two types of IO connectors: snap-in connector for plastic fiber cables and ST/bayonet
connector for glass fiber cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or connector or with a
combination of both types of connectors. This is identified with a tag.
Connect the incoming optical fiber to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX
transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling and connection of
fiber cables.
For setting the transfer rate (baud rate) and slave number, please refer to the Application manual and
Commissioning manual respectively.
M11901-1 v2
Table 417: SPA communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol SPA
Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd
Slave number 1 to 899

Technical manual
15.8 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol IP14615-1 v2
15.8.1 Introduction M11910-3 v3
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED communicates with
a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have software that can interpret the IEC
60870-5-103 communication messages.
15.8.2 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS
15.8.2.1 Functionality GUID-557FB587-9127-4D99-B2C6-16445E06F220 v3
103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.
The set of connected input will control which ASDUs (Application Service Data Units) are generated.
• 9 Will be generated if at least IL1 is connected. IL2, IL3, UL1, UL2, UL3, P, Q, F are optional but
there can be no holes.
• 3.4 Will be generated if IN and UN are present.
• 3.3 Will be generated if IL2, Ul1L2, P and Q present.
• 3.2 Will be generated if IL2, UL1L2 and P or Q missing.
• 3.1 Will be generated if IL2 present and IL1 missing (otherwise IL2 in 9).
Description for I103MEAS function block:

9 = IL1
3.4 = IN AND UN
3.3 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND P AND Q
3.2 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND NOT 3.3
3.1 = IL2 AND NOT (3.2 OR 3.3 OR 9)
GUID-3E1AB624-1B68-4018-B1BA-BC2C811F8F74 v1
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

name identification device number
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS - -
15.8.2.3 Function block GUID-EC5F1C83-0F47-4548-86E3-FFE056571241 v2
I103MEAS
BLOCK
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UN
P
Q
F
Figure 255: I103MEAS function block

Technical manual
15.8.2.4 Signals
Table 418: I103MEAS Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
IL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L1
IN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual current IN
UL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L1
UL1L2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2
UN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual voltage UN
P REAL 0.0 Service value for active power
Q REAL 0.0 Service value for reactive power
F REAL 0.0 Service value for system frequency
15.8.2.5 Settings
Table 419: I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)

FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
MaxIL1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L1
MaxIN 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum residual current IN
MaxUL1 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L1
MaxUL1-UL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Maximum voltage for phase-phase L1-L2
MaxUN 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum residual voltage UN
MaxP 0.00 - 2000.00 MW 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for active power
MaxQ 0.00 - 2000.00 MVAr 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for reactive power
MaxF 15.0 - 66.0 Hz 1.0 51.0 Maximum system frequency
15.8.3 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103MEASUSR
15.8.3.1 Functionality GUID-FC9ED4BD-F11C-4BDA-8CDB-3ACF00931D3A v1
I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor direction. These
function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private range, and the
Information number parameter for each block.

Technical manual
GUID-A9E21066-354B-453D-8D9B-E86EE31CF5F9 v1

Measurands user defined signals for I103MEASUSR - -
IEC 60870-5-103
15.8.3.3 Function block GUID-C234101E-F9B9-4DB0-874C-C51BB50588CB v1
I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
Figure 256: I103MEASUSR function block
15.8.3.4 Signals
Table 420: I103MEASUSR Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 1
15.8.3.5 Settings
Table 421: I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)

InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for measurands
(1-255)
MaxMeasur1 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 1
10000000000.00 input 2

Technical manual

10000000000.00 input 3
10000000000.00 input 4
10000000000.00 input 5
10000000000.00 input 6
10000000000.00 input 7
10000000000.00 input 8
10000000000.00 input 9
15.8.4 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR
15.8.4.1 Functionality GUID-7A132276-35A2-402C-9722-6259D65998F5 v1
I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in monitor direction.
This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number parameter is defined
for each output signal.
GUID-7B066282-79D7-480B-BEDE-3C04F0FCBF05 v1

Function status auto-recloser for IEC I103AR - -
60870-5-103
15.8.4.3 Function block GUID-FAC5A3DF-73CB-4A39-A213-5C21ACA05756 v1
I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_BLKD
Figure 257: I103AR function block
15.8.4.4 Signals
Table 422: I103AR Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-recloser
130_BLKD BOOLEAN 0 Information number 130, auto-recloser blocked

Technical manual
15.8.4.5 Settings
Table 423: I103AR Non group settings (basic)

15.8.5 Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF GUID-F23B392E-B55D-4BC3-A0A6-B7992D551092 v1
15.8.5.1 Functionality GUID-13F90E95-7C8C-4DCB-A9D8-2489B66DB81A v2
I103EF is a function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in monitor direction. This
block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number parameter is defined for
each output signal.
GUID-033731B7-1B71-4CCC-8356-1C03CBCB23FA v1

Function status earth-fault for IEC I103EF - -
60870-5-103
15.8.5.3 Function block GUID-25B47484-2976-4063-BD81-AE02D03B08B0 v1
I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV
Figure 258: I103EF function block
15.8.5.4 Signals
Table 424: I103EF Input signals

51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 51, earth-fault forward
52_EFREV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 52, earth-fault reverse
15.8.5.5 Settings
Table 425: I103EF Non group settings (basic)


Technical manual
15.8.6 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT
15.8.6.1 Functionality GUID-6D52F442-1592-4BA7-919C-0CD79046CAE5 v1
I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the function block is
specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a correspondent signal present in
the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN represents the General Trip of the device, and therefore
must be connected to the general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.
The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is triggering the
Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC 60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.
GUID-55593EC4-7AED-47A0-8311-DB22D013A193 v1

Function status fault protection for IEC I103FLTPROT - -
60870-5-103
15.8.6.3 Function block GUID-F0ED13B8-6B82-4CA7-8F22-C200C33EBB7E v2
I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
83_ZONE6
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTRL1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC
Figure 259: I103FLTPROT function block

Technical manual
15.8.6.4 Signals
Table 426: I103FLTPROT Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting.
64_STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, start phase L1
67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67, start residual current IN
68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68, trip general
69_TRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69, trip phase L1
72_TRBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 72, back up trip I>>
73_SCL REAL 0 Information number 73, fault location in ohm
74_FW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 75, reverse/busbar
76_TRANS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 77, signal received
78_ZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 78, zone 1
84_STGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 84, start general
85_BFP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 86, trip measuring system phase L1
89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N
90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
FLTLOC BOOLEAN 0 Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-CALCMADE)
15.8.6.5 Settings
Table 427: I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)


Technical manual
15.8.7 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED
15.8.7.1 Functionality GUID-52AC7D0F-33C5-46FC-983E-5CB4B3517D88 v1
I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This block uses parameter
as FunctionType, and information number parameter is defined for each input signal.
GUID-5EEBE11C-C8E3-4A8A-814F-840E137DB5B5 v1

IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED - -
15.8.7.3 Function block GUID-421D5C37-27A5-476A-A7D9-40E70AFDFDC8 v1
I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
22_SETCH
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4
Figure 260: I103IED function block
15.8.7.4 Signals
Table 428: I103IED Input signals

19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19, reset LEDs
21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21, test mode is active
22_SETCH BOOLEAN 0 Information number 22, setting changed
23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
15.8.7.5 Settings
Table 429: I103IED Non group settings (basic)


Technical manual
15.8.8 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV
15.8.8.1 Functionality GUID-E7A28D8D-398E-437C-9B58-AE125BC38058 v1
I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number parameter is
defined for each output signal.
GUID-C8113B08-3586-412C-A750-606159B1E97E v1

Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV - -
15.8.8.3 Function block GUID-69C2C974-2D64-4174-9F9A-15383C09050D v1
I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL
Figure 261: I103SUPERV function block
15.8.8.4 Signals
Table 430: I103SUPERV Input signals

32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33, measurand supervision of U
37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection
38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL BOOLEAN 0 Information number 47, group alarm
15.8.8.5 Settings
Table 431: I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)


Technical manual
15.8.9 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRDEF
15.8.9.1 Functionality GUID-DADC9CE4-2E80-426C-A3B6-A8E8C7AC3CD4 v3
I103USRDEF is a function block with user defined input signals in monitor direction. Each instance is
associated with a Function Type (FUN) and each input signal with an Information Number (INF).
Additionally, all input signals may be defined to use relative time and how to respond to a GI request.
The user is responsible for assigning a proper FUN value and proper INF values to all connected
inputs. See Settings for details.
GUID-474FDF39-CEFC-4370-9393-13BE62159969 v2

Status for user defined signals for IEC I103USRDEF - -
60870-5-103
15.8.9.3 Function block GUID-B8312E77-514D-4117-BB31-B9907755580C v1
I103USRDEF
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
RT_START
Figure 262: I103USRDEF function block
15.8.9.4 Signals
Table 432: I103USRDEF Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 2

Technical manual

RT_START BOOLEAN 0 Trig to set base of relative time
GUID-9E29DE39-EA74-4D62-A2BA-F8E31A3D8757 v2
RT_START registers the positive transition (0->1) of a pulse and sets the time from which relative
time is derived. Relative time is assigned only to inputs where the corresponding TypNo parameter is
set to Relative. The maximum relative time and unit conform to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
15.8.9.5 Settings
Table 433: I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)

InfNo1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for binary input 1
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
(1-255)
TypNo1 Absolute - - Absolute Type identification (TYP)
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
Relative
GiNo1 Excluded - - Included Response and status change (GI)
Included
Included

Technical manual

Included
Included
Included
Included
Included
Included
GUID-86DE9DBA-BE2F-4CC9-B447-1D2D86849EFF v2
The FunctionType parameter associates a particular instance of the function block with a FUN.
Refer to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.
The InfNon parameters are used to associate each individual input signal with a userdefined INF.
Refer to the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.
The TypNon parameters determine if messages use absolute or relative time. This adheres to the
TYPE IDENTIFICATION (TYP) message types 1 (time-tagged message) and 2 (time-tagged
message with relative time) of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
The GiNon parameters determine whether a message is sent as a part of a GI reply or not. Refer to
the IEC 60870-5-103 standard for details.
15.8.10 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD
15.8.10.1 Functionality GUID-973929FE-292B-42A5-ACF9-BC95E2B16AE1 v2
I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined output signals. The
signals are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in case of restart.
GUID-CFD43980-0791-40D1-9136-CF4CCC35549A v1

Function commands for IEC I103CMD - -
60870-5-103
15.8.10.3 Function block GUID-C0680812-C488-4546-AA65-F590955DBF0C v1
I103CMD
BLOCK 16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT
Figure 263: I103CMD function block

Technical manual
15.8.10.4 Signals
Table 434: I103CMD Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands
Table 435: I103CMD Output signals

16-AR BOOLEAN Information number 16, off/on of autorecloser
17-DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17, block of differential protection
18-PROT BOOLEAN Information number 18, block of protection
15.8.10.5 Settings
Table 436: I103CMD Non group settings (basic)

15.8.11 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD
15.8.11.1 Functionality GUID-19AD44B2-21D6-4DB0-AD74-1578DA30C100 v5
I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions. All outputs are
pulsed and they are NOT stored. Pulse length is fixed to 400ms.
GUID-0D0B2477-1B0C-48F3-B047-CCF9C7A71856 v1

IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD - -
15.8.11.3 Function block GUID-52D27CDA-8805-48FA-99BE-2E05A438B0C7 v1
I103IEDCMD
BLOCK 19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4
Figure 264: I103IEDCMD function block

Technical manual
15.8.11.4 Signals
Table 437: I103IEDCMD Input signals

Table 438: I103IEDCMD Output signals

19-LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 BOOLEAN Information number 23, activate setting group 1
15.8.11.5 Settings
Table 439: I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)

15.8.12 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRCMD
15.8.12.1 Functionality GUID-2989EAC8-20BE-46EE-93FE-C70188D0BC89 v1
I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output signals. These
function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private range, and the
Information number parameter for each output signal.
GUID-9D6D1636-36C6-4C4E-B157-2D827820DDC7 v1

Function commands user defined for I103USRCMD - -
IEC 60870-5-103
15.8.12.3 Function block GUID-5EBEAED5-ABD9-4257-B879-DF7FD9F7805A v1
I103USRCMD
BLOCK ÔUTPUT1
ÔUTPUT2
ÔUTPUT3
ÔUTPUT4
ÔUTPUT5
ÔUTPUT6
ÔUTPUT7
ÔUTPUT8
Figure 265: I103USRCMD function block

Technical manual
15.8.12.4 Signals
Table 440: I103USRCMD Input signals

Table 441: I103USRCMD Output signals

OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
15.8.12.5 Settings
Table 442: I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)

PulseMode Steady - - Pulsed Pulse mode
Pulsed
PulseLength 0.200 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for output 1 (1-255)
15.8.13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD
15.8.13.1 Functionality GUID-729E9AFD-0468-4BBD-B54A-A6CDCC68A9B2 v3
I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103. The function has
two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to implement double-point command
schemes.
The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON/OFF or 2 steady ON/OFF
outputs. The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2, while the OFF output is pulsed with a
command value 1. If in steady mode is ON asserted and OFF deasserted with command 2 and vice

Technical manual
versa with command 1. Steady mode is selected by setting PulseLength=0. The I103GENCMD is
retained, and a command in steady mode will be reissued on restart.
GUID-1933A30C-5214-4116-8CD3-91BD975FACED v1

Function commands generic for IEC I103GENCMD - -
60870-5-103
15.8.13.3 Function block GUID-6EC8453E-0D00-4720-95A6-156C41CA46BB v1
I103GENCMD
BLOCK ^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON
Figure 266: I103GENCMD function block
15.8.13.4 Signals
Table 443: I103GENCMD Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
Table 444: I103GENCMD Output signals

CMD_OFF BOOLEAN Command output OFF
CMD_ON BOOLEAN Command output ON
15.8.13.5 Settings
Table 445: I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)

PulseLength 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for command output
(1-255)
15.8.14 IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD
15.8.14.1 Functionality GUID-1E40B94D-B6A6-42F0-8757-A47B8A3FA3CD v8
I103POSCMD is a transceiver function that monitors activity on its input signals and interprets any
state transition into commands then sent over an established IEC 60870-5-103 link. Additionally, it
listens for general interrogation (GI) requests and replies to those with a GI response message with
the current state of each connected input.

Technical manual
Input POSITION is a double-indication signal, and it is GI enabled. This means that any state
transition, that is to ON, OFF, intermediate and faulty, is reported spontaneously. However, the
intermediate and faulty states may be suppressed by setting the Report Intermediate Position = Off.
See the settings for RS485 and optical serial communication for more information.
Input SELECT is a single-indication signal, and it is also GI enabled. State transitions to ON and OFF
are reported spontaneously.
When input BLOCK is ON, the function will ignore GI requests and cease all monitoring activity.
Consequently, no transitions will be detected.
The I103POSCMD function is also equipped with three additional commands: Select, Operate and
Cancel. These are hidden in ACT and respond only to the base INF+1, INF+2 and INF+3
respectively. The base INF (Information Number) parameter is an IEC 60870-5-103 identifier that
associates a function in a 103 Master (such as Scada) with its equivalent in the IED.
GUID-ABF81C27-4605-4A15-9CF5-77FF82DE8747 v1

IED commands with position and select I103POSCMD - -
for IEC 60870-5-103
15.8.14.3 Function block GUID-3A31C1F2-1FB5-4DB0-A698-AD3F55738DB1 v1
I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT
Figure 267: I103POSCMD function block
15.8.14.4 Signals
Table 446: I103POSCMD Input signals

POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
SELECT BOOLEAN 0 Select of controllable object
15.8.14.5 Settings
Table 447: I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)

FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type

Technical manual
15.8.15 IED commands with position for IEC 60870-5-103

I103POSCMDV
15.8.15.1 Functionality GUID-CF04D9AC-40BE-46A3-A418-77204D2B0F27 v3
I103POSCMDV is a transceiver function that monitors activity on its input signals and interprets any
state transition into commands sent over an established IEC 60870-5-103 link. Additionally, it listens
for general interrogation (GI) requests, and replies to those with a GI response message with the
current state of each connected input.
Input POSITION is a double-indication signal, and it is GI enabled. This means that any state
transition, that is to ON, OFF, intermediate and faulty, is reported spontaneously. However, the
intermediate and faulty states may be suppressed by setting the Report Intermediate Position = Off.
See the settings for RS485 and optical serial communication for more information.
When input BLOCK is ON, the function ignores GI requests and ceases all monitoring activity.
Consequently, no transitions will be detected.
GUID-2249B679-03E4-43CC-B690-916246FE6A31 v1

IED direct commands with position for I103POSCMDV - -
IEC 60870-5-103
15.8.15.3 Function block GUID-031C0F49-BEBD-40FE-A33F-18F1D94BB4B0 v1
I103POSCMDV
BLOCK
POSITION
Figure 268: I103POSCMDV function block
15.8.15.4 Signals
Table 448: I103POSCMDV Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
15.8.15.5 Settings
Table 449: I103POSCMDV Non group settings (basic)

FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type

Technical manual
15.8.16.1 General M11874-3 v5
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication

exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC
terminology, a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is
based on a point-to-point principle. The master must have software that can interpret IEC
60870-5-103 communication messages.
Introduction to IEC 60870–5–103 protocol M11874-6 v3

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol functionality consists of the following functions:
• Event handling
• Report of analog service values (measurements)
• Fault location
• Command handling
• Autorecloser ON/OFF
• Teleprotection ON/OFF
• Protection ON/OFF
• LED reset
• Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
• File transfer (disturbance files)
• Time synchronization
For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC 60870 standard part 5:
Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative interface of
protection equipment.
IEC 60870-5-103 vendor specific implementation M11874-23 v4

The signal and setting tables specify the information types supported by the IEDs with the
communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.
The information types are supported when corresponding functions are included in the protection and
control IED.
Be aware of that different cycle times for function blocks must be considered to
ensure correct time stamping.
Commands in control direction M11874-27 v1

Commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD M11874-29 v6
Command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signals.

Technical manual
Table 450: I103IEDCMD supported indications
INF Description
19 LED Reset
23 Activate setting group 1
Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD M11874-53 v6

Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Information number is defined for each output signals.
Table 451: Pre-defined I103CMD supported indications
INF Description
16 Auto-recloser on/off
17 Teleprotection on/off
18 Protection on/off
Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103USRCMD M11874-72 v6

Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.
Function type for each function block instance in private range is selected with parameter
FunctionType.
Information number must be selected for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.
Table 452: I103USRCMD supported indications
INF 1) Description
1 Output signal 01
2 Output signal 02
3 Output signal 03
4 Output signal 04
5 Output signal 05
6 Output signal 06
7 Output signal 07
8 Output signal 08
1) User defined information number
Status M11874-107 v1
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED M11874-109 v7
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined IED functions.

Technical manual
Information number is defined for each input signals.
Table 453: I103IED supported functions
INF Description
19 LED reset
21 TestMode
22 Local Parameter setting
23 Setting group 1 active
Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103USRDEF M11874-137 v7

Function indication block in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.
Information number is required for each input signal.
Table 454: I103USRDEF Information number default values
INF Description GI TYP COT

11) Input signal 01 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
2* Input signal 02 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)

3* Input signal 03 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
4* Input signal 04 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
5* Input signal 05 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
6* Input signal 06 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
7* Input signal 07 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
8* Input signal 08 x/- 1/2 1,7,(9)
1) * User defined information number
Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103SUPERV M11874-171 v7

Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for output signals.
Table 455: I103SUPERV supported functions
INF Description TYP GI COT

32 Measurand supervision I 1 Y 1,7,9
33 Measurand supervision U 1 Y 1,7,9
37 I>>back-up operation 1 Y 1,7,9

Technical manual

38 VT fuse failure 1 Y 1,7,9
46 Group warning 1 Y 1,7,9
47 Group alarm 1 Y 1,7,9
Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF M11874-199 v8

Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for each output signal.
Table 456: I103EF supported indications
INF Description
51 Earth fault forward
52 Earth fault reverse
Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR M11874-363 v6

Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for each output signal.
Table 457: I103AR supported indications
INF Description
16 Autorecloser active
128 CB on by Autorecloser
130 Autorecloser blocked
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103, I103FLTPROT GUID-E9DF9410-F570-4F85-9063-C76D1D4A0668 v6

Information number is defined for each input signal.
Table 458: I103FLTPROT supported functions

64 Start phase L1 2 Y 1,7,9
67 Start residual current IN 2 Y 1,7,9
68 Trip general 2 N 1,7
69 Trip phase L1 2 N 1,7

Technical manual

72 Back up trip I>> 2 N 1,7
73 Fault location in ohm 4 N 1,7
74 Forward/line 2 N 1,7
75 Reverse/busbar 2 N 1,7
76 Signal transmitted 2 N 1,7
77 Signal received 2 N 1,7
78 Zone 1 2 N 1,7
79 Zone 2 2 N 1,7
80 Zone 3 2 N 1,7
81 Zone 4 2 N 1,7
82 Zone 5 2 N 1,7
83 Zone 6 2 N 1,7
84 Start general 2 Y 1,7,9
85 Breaker failure 2 N 1,7
86 Trip measuring system phase L1 2 N 1,7
89 Trip measuring system neutral N 2 N 1,7
90 Over current trip, stage low 2 N 1,7
91 Over current trip, stage high 2 N 1,7
92 Earth-fault trip, stage low 2 N 1,7
93 Earth-fault trip, stage high 2 N 1,7
Measurands M11874-382 v2
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to monitoring function,
for example to power measurement CVMMXN.
Measurands in public range, I103MEAS M11874-385 v8

The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.
Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.
Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
The upper limit is the maximum value that can be encoded into the ASDU (Application Service Data
Unit). Any value higher than this value will be tagged as OVERFLOW. The factors 1.2 and 2.4 are
taken from the 103 standard and require that a rated value to use as base exists, and then use 1.2 or
2.4 times <rated> as maxVal. You can use 2.4 times rated as maxVal, but as there is no way to
propagate value to client, the use of a scale factor on <rated> does not make much difference.
You can configure client:client-scaled-max ::= 1.2 * <rated> or client-scaled-max ::= 1.0 * <maxVal>
If the client has a hard-coded gain of 1.2 * <rated> then client-scaled-max ::= 1.2 times <maxVal>/1.2
Resolution is <maxVal> / 4095 and hence the lowest possible maxVal yields the best accuracy.

Technical manual
Table 459: I103MEAS supported indications
INF Description
148 IL1
144, 145, IL2
146, 148
148 IL3
147 IN, Neutral current
148 UL1
148 UL2
148 UL3
145, 146 UL1-UL2
147 UN, Neutral voltage
146, 148 P, active power
146, 148 Q, reactive power
148 f, frequency
Measurands in private range, I103MEASUSR M11874-431 v5

Function type parameter for each block in private range.
Information number must be selected for measurands.
Table 460: I103MEASUSR supported indications
INF FUN GI TYP COT Description

*1) *2) No, polled *3) 2,7 Meas1
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
with CL2
1) * User defined information value (PARAM.3)

2) * User defined information value (PARAM.2)
3) 9 = Measurands II, Format = Measurand II (7.3.1.8 in IEC 60870-5-103:1997), semantics per IE is defined by
semantics of connected source.
<Number of information elements> is defined by index of first input not connected.
Example: Input1, Input2, and Input4 are connected, Input3 is not connected.

Technical manual
<Number of information elements> will be 3 (Input3 NOT connected) -1 = 2, that is, only Input1 and
Input2 will be transmitted.
Disturbance recordings M11874-467 v7

The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units) defined in the
standard.
Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified. Channels
used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:
• IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block A1RADR

• IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block A1RADR
• UL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block A1RADR
• UEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block A1RADR
Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private range 64 to 95.
Binary signals, 128-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION TYPE and an
INFORMATION NUMBER.
M11874-629 v7
Disturbance upload
All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder can be reported to the
master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the master. A
successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the master) will not be reported to the master
again.
When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded disturbances will be sent
to the master, an updated list of available disturbances can be sent whenever something has
happened to disturbances in this list. For example, when a disturbance is deleted (by other client, for
example, SPA) or when a new disturbance has been recorded or when the master has uploaded a
disturbance.
Deviations from the standard
Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however, some of the
information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in the IED series.
This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.
ASDU23
In ‘list of recorded disturbances’ (ASDU23) an information element named SOF (status of fault)
exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates whether:
• Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
• Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
• Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or test mode.
• Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event than start
The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information is always set
(hard coded) to:

Technical manual
TP Recorded fault with trip. [1]

TM Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]
OTEV Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]
Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to the standard this is
a number that is incremented when a protection function takes action. FAN is equal to disturbance
number, which is incremented for each disturbance.
ASDU26 / ASDU31
When a disturbance has been selected by the master by sending ASDU24, the protection equipment
answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information element named NOF (number of grid
faults). This number must indicate fault number in the power system,that is, a fault in the power
system with several trip and auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN must be incremented).
NOF is just as FAN, equal to disturbance number.
Interoperability, physical layer M11874-482 v4
Supported
Electrical Interface
EIA RS-485 Yes
number of loads 32
Optical interface
glass fiber Yes
plastic fiber
Transmission speed
9600 bit/s Yes
19200 bit/s Yes
Link Layer
DFC-bit used Yes
Connectors
connector F-SMA No
connector BFOC/2.5 Yes
Interoperability, application layer M11874-524 v3
Supported
Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU Yes
1 Time-tagged message Yes
2 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
3 Measurands I Yes
4 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
5 Identification Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
8 End of general interrogation Yes
9 Measurands II Yes
10 Generic data No

Technical manual
Supported
11 Generic identification No
23 List of recorded disturbances Yes
26 Ready for transm. of disturbance data Yes
27 Ready for transm. of a channel Yes
28 Ready for transm of tags Yes
29 Transmission of tags Yes
30 Transmission fo disturbance data Yes
31 End of transmission Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction
ASDU Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
7 General interrogation Yes
10 Generic data No
20 General command Yes
21 Generic command Yes
24 Order for disturbance data transmission Yes
25 Acknowledgement for distance data transmission Yes
Selection of basic application functions
Test mode No
Blocking of monitoring direction Yes
Disturbance data Yes
Private data Yes
Generic services No
15.8.16.2 Communication ports M11874-626 v4
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP and LON
communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and is placed assembled on the Numerical
module (NUM). The serial communication module can have connectors for two plastic fiber cables
(snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three
different types are available depending on type of fiber.
The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the
TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out, pay special attention to the
instructions concerning the handling and connection of the optical fibers. The module is identified
with a number on the label on the module.
M11921-1 v4
Table 461: IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd

Technical manual
15.9 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND SEMOD119881-1 v3
GUID-1A6E066C-6399-4D37-8CA5-3074537E48B2 v3

Multiple command and receive MULTICMDRCV - -
Multiple command and send MULTICMDSND - -
The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive signals via the
interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes 16 binary inputs. LON enables
these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving function block, MULTICMDRCV, which has 16
binary outputs.
15.9.2 Design SEMOD119958-1 v1
15.9.2.1 General M14792-3 v3
The common behavior for all 16 outputs of the MULTICMDRCV is set to either of two modes: Steady
or Pulse.
• 1 = Steady: This mode simply forwards the received signals to the binary outputs.
• 2 = Pulse: When a received signal transitions from 0 (zero) to 1 (one), a pulse with a duration of
exactly one execution cycle is triggered on the corresponding binary output. This means that no
connected function block may have a cycle time that is higher than the execution cycle time of
the particular MULTICMDRCV instance.
SEMOD119976-5 v2
MULTICMDRCV
BLOCK ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID
Figure 269: MULTICMDRCV function block

Technical manual
SEMOD120009-4 v2
MULTICMDSND
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
Figure 270: MULTICMDSND function block
Table 462: MULTICMDRCV Input signals

Table 463: MULTICMDSND Input signals

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1

Technical manual
Table 464: MULTICMDRCV Output signals

ERROR BOOLEAN MultiReceive error
NEWDATA BOOLEAN New data is received
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
VALID BOOLEAN Output data is valid
Table 465: MULTICMDSND Output signals

ERROR BOOLEAN MultiSend error
Table 466: MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)

tMaxCycleTime 0.050 - 200.000 s 0.001 11.000 Maximum cycle time between receptions
of input data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum cycle time between receptions
of input data
Mode Steady - - Steady Mode for output signals
Pulsed
tPulseTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse length for multi command outputs
Table 467: MULTICMDSND Non group settings (basic)

tMaxCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 5.000 Maximum time interval between
transmission of output data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum time interval between
transmission of output data

Technical manual
There are 10 instances of the MULTICMDSND function block. The first two are fast (8 ms cycle time)
while the others are slow (100 ms cycle time). Each instance has 16 binary inputs, to which 16
independent signals can be connected. Connected signals are sent through MULTICMDSND to the
receiving equivalent, MULTICMDRCV, located on a different IED.
The MULTICMDRCV function block has 16 binary outputs, all controlled through the command block
of one or many MULTICMDSND function blocks. There are 60 instances of the MULTICMDRCV
where the first 12 are fast (8 ms), and the others are slow (100 ms). Additionally, the MULTICMDRCV
has a supervision function, which sets the output connector "VALID" to 0 (zero) if its block does not
receive any data within the time defined by tMaxCycleTime.
LON connections are established using LON network tool (LNT).
15.10 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG
15.10.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG GUID-BED7C3D6-6BE3-4DAC-84B3-92239E819CC0 v2
ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging.
There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to. Each server can be configured with IP
address; IP port number and protocol format. The format can be either syslog (RFC 3164) or
Common Event Format (CEF) from ArcSight.
15.10.2 Settings
Table 468: ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)

ExtLogSrv1Type Off - - Off External log server 1 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv1Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 1 port number
ExtLogSrv1IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 1 IP-address
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address

Technical manual

SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Address
15.11 IEC61850SIM
15.11.1 IEC61850 simulation mode GUID-D31B9ECA-4C84-4CC7-BFE2-63FAFEA230EF v1
GUID-3B85BB88-0C56-45D4-B99F-62C7F2F208D2 v1
Table 469:

IEC61850 simulation mode IEC61850SIM - -
15.11.1.1 Functionality GUID-472D29F9-3C0C-43D5-8C3E-8F97BD8B1F52 v1
This function is indicates simulation mode status to external world. LPHD has simulation status
output but it is not available in ACT, so IEC61850SIM component is added and it is just a placeholder
for simulation status which is configurable in ACT. This simulation status is displayed in LHMI in this
navigation mode Main menu -> Test -> IEC61850 simulation -> IEC61850SIM:1 .
15.11.1.2 Function block GUID-14742551-70C1-4A80-805D-79195A51B4CE v1
IEC61850 SIM
SIM
IE C20000107-1-en.vsdx

Technical manual
15.11.1.3 Signals
Table 470: IEC61850SIM Output signals

SIM BOOLEAN Simulation mode indication
15.11.1.4 Settings
Table 471: IEC61850SIM Non group settings (basic)

AllowSimulation No - - No Allow simulated GOOSE values or
Yes simulated sampled measurand values
15.11.1.5 Monitored Data

Table 472: IEC61850SIM Monitored data

ALLOWSIM BOOLEAN 0=No - Status of AllowSimulation setting
1=Yes
SIM BOOLEAN 0=Inactive - Simulation mode indication
1=Active

Technical manual
Security
Section 16 Security
16.1 Authority check ATHCHCK
GUID-FBEF319B-94E6-41FB-BB9F-D870E0425128 v2

Authority check ATHCHCK - -
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are accessing the IED
are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization handling of the IED and the
PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:
• local, through the local HMI

• remote, through the communication ports
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited with PCM600 IED user management tool.
Figure 271: PCM600 user management tool
16.1.3 Operation principle GUID-B555EDD0-BAF1-4F0E-9162-BDB3A3468CF2 v9
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas of the IED
and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 473.

Technical manual
Security
Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required when writing
particular data to the IED from PCM600.
The meaning of the legends used in the table:
• R= Read
• W= Write
• - = No access rights
Table 473: Pre-defined user types
Access rights System Protection Design User

Guest Super User SPA Guest Operator Engineer Engineer Administrato
r
Basic setting possibilities (change R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
setting group, control settings,
limit supervision)
Advanced setting possibilities (for R R/W R R R/W R/W R
example protection settings)
Basic control possibilities (process R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
control, no bypass)
Advanced control possibilities R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
(process control including interlock
trigg)
Basic command handling (for R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
example clear LEDs, manual trigg)
Advanced command handling (for R R/W R R R/W R/W R/W
example clear disturbance record)
Basic configuration possibilities R R/W R R R R/W R/W
(I/O-configuration in SMT)
Advanced configuration R R/W R R R R/W R/W
possibilities (application
configuration including SMT, GDE
and CMT)
File loading (database loading - R/W - - - R/W R/W
from XML-file)
File dumping (database dumping - R/W - - - R/W R/W
to XML-file)
File transfer (FTP file transfer) - R/W - R/W R/W R/W R/W
File transfer (limited) (FTP file R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
transfer)
File Transfer (SPA File Transfer) - R/W - - - R/W -
Database access for normal user R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
User administration (user R R/W R R R R R/W
management – FTP File Transfer)
User administration (user - R/W - - - - -
management – SPA File Transfer)
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management within
PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED, there are no users,
groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.
If the IED is Central Account Management enabled, users can only be created,
deleted or edited in the Central Account Management server. In that case, only the
user rights can be edited using the PCM600 tool. See Cyber Security Deployment
Guidelines manual.

Technical manual
Security
Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names and passwords.

The maximum of characters in a password is 18.
At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to be able to write
users, created in PCM600, to IED.
SEMOD176296-5 v10
At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED until a user
has been created with the IED User Management..
Once a user is created and downloaded to the IED, that user can perform a Log on, introducing the
password assigned in the tool.
If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: “No user defined!”
If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main menu/Settings /
General Settings/HMI /Screen/Display Timeout ) elapses, the IED returns to Guest state, when
only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 10 minutes at delivery.
If there are one or more users created with the IED User Management and downloaded into the IED,
then, when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or when the user attempts to perform an operation
that is password protected, the Log on window will appear.
The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the key, the user can change
the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the “up” and “down” arrows. After choosing the right
user name, the user must press the “E” key again. When it comes to password, upon pressing the
key, the following character will show up: “$”. After all the letters are introduced (passwords are
case sensitive) choose OK and press the key again.
If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the Authorization screen. If the
Log on is OK, when required to change for example a password protected setting, the local HMI
returns to the actual setting folder. If the Log on has failed, then the Log on window opens again, until
either the user makes it right or presses “Cancel”.
16.1.3.1 Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED GUID-1A836989-5D89-4F3D-B3A2-3BABCDFFB440 v3
The user rights can be edited in the IED by using the PCM600 user tool.
One user can have one or several user roles. By default, the users in Table 474 are created in the
IED, and when creating new users in the CAM server, the predefined roles from Table 475 can be
used.
At delivery, the IED user has full access as SuperUser when using the LHMI and as
Administrator when using FTP or PCM600 until Central Account Management is
activated.
Table 474: Default users
User name User rights

SuperUser Full rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default until other users are defined
Guest Only read rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default when other users are
defined (same as VIEWER)
Administrator Full rights. Password: Administrator. This user has to be used when reading out disturbances
with third party FTP-client.

Technical manual
Security
Table 475: Predefined user roles according to IEC 62351-8
User roles Role explanation User rights

VIEWER Viewer Can read parameters and browse the menus from LHMI
OPERATOR Operator Can read parameters and browse the menus as well as perform control
actions
ENGINEER Engineer Can create and load configurations and change settings for the IED and
also run commands and manage disturbances
INSTALLER Installer Can load configurations and change settings for the IED
SECADM Security Can change role assignments and security settings. Can deploy
administrator certificates.
SECAUD Security auditor Can view audit logs
RBACMNT RBAC Can change role assignment
management
ADMINISTRATOR Administrator Sum of all rights for SECADM, SECAUD and RBACMNT
rights
This User role is vendor specific and not defined in

IEC 62351–8
Changes in user management settings do not cause an IED reboot.
The successful activation of Central Account Management will disable built-in users or remove all
local created users from PCM600.
Management of user credentials and roles is handled on the Central Account Management server
e.g. SDM600. The IED employs two strategies to ensure availability of the authentication system
even if there is a problem with the network or authentication server:
• A substation can be equipped with two redundant authentication servers operating in a hot
standby mode.
• If configured by the security administrator, the IED itself maintains a local replica in the database
with selected users. This database is periodically updated with data from the server and used as
fallback if none of the servers are reachable.
• If there is no replication support in the CAM server, then there is a possibility to configure the
emergency account in the IED, which gets activated when CAM server is offline.
Note that not all users in the SDM600 server are part of the replica. There might be users that are not
assigned to any replication group. IED only replicates those users which are part of replication group
configured in the IED.
All communication between the central management and the IEDs is protected using secure
communication. Customers are required to generate and distribute certificates during the engineering
process of the substation. These certificates ensure mutual trust between IED and CAM server for
example SDM600.

Technical manual
Security
Table 476: Authority-related IED functions
Function Description
Authority status This function is an indication function block for user logon activity.
ATHSTAT User denied attempt to logon and user successful logon are reported.
Authority check To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are accessing
ATHCHCK the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization handling of the
IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:
• local, through the local HMI

• remote, through the communication ports
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only in the CAM server.
Authority This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the maintenance
management menu logon time out.
AUTHMAN
For more information on the functions Authority Management (AUTHMAN), Authority Status
(ATHSTAT), and Authority Check (ATHCHCK) functions, refer to chapter “Basic IED functions” in the
Technical Manual.
16.2 Authority management AUTHMAN
GUID-7925E6A3-301D-44A5-982F-167805EEA473 v1

Authority management AUTHMAN - -
16.2.2 AUTHMAN GUID-AF7EDB44-42AA-4D49-BFA0-DA6A9B43973E v1
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the maintenance menu log on
time out.
16.2.3 Settings
Table 477: AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)

MaintMenuEnable Disable - - Enable Maintenance menu enable
Enable
AuthTimeout 600 - 3600 s 600 600 Authority blocking timeout
TLSMinVersion 0 - 255 - 1 0 Minimum version of TLS
TLSMaxVersion 0 - 255 - 1 0 Maximum version of TLS

Technical manual
Security
16.3 FTP access with password FTPACCS
GUID-C037D0B0-1AA0-4592-9293-92C7EDED3261 v1

FTP access with SSL FTPACCS - -
16.3.2 FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS GUID-9E64EA68-6FA9-4576-B5E9-92E3CC6AA7FD v5
The FTP client defaults to the best possible security mode when trying to negotiate with TLS. The
automatic negotiation mode is used by the client to negotiate with explicit TLS via AUTH TLS.
It is only possible to access disturbance records from the IED if FTP without TLS encryption is used.
If clear text FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings, create a specific
account for this purpose with rights only to do File transfer. The password of this
user will be exposed in clear text on the wire.
Setting FTP to OFF on an access point does not switch off FTP as the service will still be used by
PCM600 and FST. So to completely switch off the port number 21 access the following parameters
must be set to OFF.
• FTP = OFF
• PCMAccess = OFF
• FSTAccess = OFF
16.3.3 Settings
Table 478: FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)

SSLMode FTP+FTPS - - FTPS Support for AUTH TLS/SSL
FTPS
TCPPortFTP 1 - 65535 - 1 21 TCP port for FTP and FTP with Explicit
SSL
PasvPortStart 0 - 65515 - 1 49200 First TCP data port for PASV
PasvPortEnd 0 - 65535 - 1 49232 Last TCP data port for PASV
16.4 Authority status ATHSTAT
GUID-79C63688-4D7D-4954-AC3C-B9484D084F6F v1

Authority status ATHSTAT - -
Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on activity.

Technical manual
Security
User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.
ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON
Figure 272: ATHSTAT function block
16.4.4 Signals
Table 479: ATHSTAT Output signals

USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on
GUID-87CF079A-64C8-46AE-B7E4-A0B2EEAC92E9 v1
The output signal USRBLKED is not valid if the IED is Centralized Account
Management enabled.
16.4.5 Settings GUID-ECE18AA9-15CC-4522-AA31-78C4F0F052E4 v4
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or in Protection and Control IED
Manager (PCM600)
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and the user
authorization:
• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked (the
output USRBLKED)
• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or LOGGEDON) is
activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event (EVENT) function block for LON/
SPA.The signals are also available on IEC 61850 station bus.
16.5 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG IP1721-1 v2
Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal system events,
generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events are saved in an
internal event list presented on the LHMI and in PCM600 event viewer tool.

Technical manual
Security
INTERRSIG
FAIL
WARNING
TSYN CERR
RTCERR
STUPBLK
Figure 273: INTERRSIG function block
16.5.3 Signals IP9674-1 v2
Table 480: INTERRSIG Output signals

FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail
WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
STUPBLK BOOLEAN Application startup block
M11401-3 v13
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:
• Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

• Checking of digitized measuring signals.
• Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.
The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI or from the Event Viewer in
PCM600.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI, the actual information from the self-supervision
function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main menu/Diagnostics /Internal
events or Main menu/Diagnostics /IED status/General . The information from the self-supervision
function is also available in the Event Viewer in PCM600.

Technical manual
Security
Figure 274: IED general status in local HM

The self supervision records internal signal changes in an internal event list. A maximum of 40
internal events are stored in a first-in, first-out manner.
GUID-B481701F-05B4-4B29-83D4-18F13886FEBE V1 EN-US
Figure 275: Self-supervision event list in local HMI

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of an output relay with potential free alarm
contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. This contact is closed when the IED
either does not have auxiliary power, or when one or more error conditions are present in the IED (for
example harware error).
Some output signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from this function
block are sent as events via IEC 61850 to the station level of the control system. These signals can
also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as
conditions for other functions if required/desired.
Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in the Signal
Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the INTERRSIG function
block via two outputs TSYNCERR and RTCERR .
16.5.5.1 Internal signals M11401-173 v11
Self supervision provides several status signals that give information about the internal status of the
IED. For this reason they are also called internal signals. These internal signals , available on local
HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General, can be divided into two groups.

Technical manual
Security
• Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see table 481.
• Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware configuration,
see table 482.
Table 481: Self-supervision's standard internal signals
Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation

local HMI as
FAIL Internal Fail Internal fail This signal will be active if one or more of the following
status internal signals are active; LMDERROR, WATCHDOG,
APPERROR, RTEERROR, or any of the HW dependent
signals
WARNING Internal Internal This signal will be active if one or more of the following
Warning warning internal signals are active; RTCERROR,
status IEC61850ERROR
RTCERROR Real Time Real time This signal will be active when there is a hardware error
Clock status clock with the real time clock.
TIMESYNCHERROR Time Time synch This signal will be active when the source of the time
Synchronizat synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to
ion status make a time reset.
RTEERROR Runtime Runtime This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do
Execution execution some actions with the application threads. The actions can
Error status be loading of settings or parameters for components,
changing of setting groups, loading or unloading of
application threads.
IEC61850ERROR IEC 61850 IEC61850 This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not
Error status succeed in some actions like reading IEC 61850
configuration, startup, for example
DNP3 DNP3 error DNP3 This signal will be active when DNP3 detects any
status configuration error during startup.
LMDERROR LON/Mip SLM301 LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable
Device Error error state.
status
APPERROR Runtime Runtime App This signal will be active if one or more of the application
Application Error threads are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects.
Error status The states can be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING,
for example
SETCHGD Settings Settings This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal
changed changed Event list if any settings are changed.
SETGRPCHGD Setting Settings This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal
groups changed Event list if any setting groups are changed.
changed
Table 482: Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals
Card Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation

local HMI as
PSM PSM-Error Power PSM1 Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Supply
Module Error
status
BIM BIM-Error Binary In BIMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Module Error n = slot number
status
BOM BOM-Error Binary Out BOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
status

Technical manual
Security
Card Name of signal Description Displayed on Reasons for activation

local HMI as
IOM IOM-Error In/Out IOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
status
SOM SOM-Error Static Out SOMn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
status
NUM NUM-Error Numerical/C NUM30 Activated if the module has a hardware or
PU Module software error.
Error status
ADM ADM-Error A/D Module ADM32 Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Error status
LDCM LDCM-Error Line LDCM3nn Activated if the module has a hardware error.
Differential n = slot number
Communicati
on Module
Error status
TRM TRM-Error Transformer TRM40
Module Error
status
TRM TRM-Error Transformer TRM41
Module Error
status
When settings are changed in the IED, the protection and control applications restart in order to take
effect of the changes. During restart, internal events get generated and Runtime App error will be
displayed. These events are only indications and will be for short duration during the restart.
IED will not be operational during applications restart.
16.5.5.2 Supervision of analog inputs M11401-136 v7
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different converters, one with
low amplification and one with high amplification.
When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the two A/D
converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed and an alarm
will be given for A/D converter failure.
M11963-1 v5
Table 483: Self supervision with internal event list
Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out
16.6 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK GUID-E8A1C33A-DD65-42B5-BA13-CFAE40C2C9AD v2

Technical manual
Security
16.6.1 Functionality GUID-00784FC0-B39D-462D-854B-AAF62626DD0A v3
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED configuration and
settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to block inadvertent IED configuration
changes beyond a certain point in time.
The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.
16.6.2 Function block GUID-15AA1D42-912E-4085-8166-33FDC327CEB5 v2
CHNGLCK
LOCK* ACTIVE
OVERRIDE
IEC09000946.vsd
Figure 276: CHNGLCK function block
16.6.3 Signals GUID-1B253577-C81B-40E3-B406-1F6586DCE545 v2
Table 484: CHNGLCK Input signals

LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Activate change lock
Table 485: CHNGLCK Output signals

ACTIVE BOOLEAN Change lock active
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN Change lock override
16.6.4 Operation principle GUID-74581AA2-6EB4-4CFA-92DA-90FB89F9A62C v5
The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.
The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state that does not
involve reconfiguring of the IED:
• Monitoring
• Reading events
• Resetting events
• Reading disturbance data
• Clear disturbances
• Reset LEDs
• Reset counters and other runtime component states
• Control operations
• Set system time
• Enter and exit from test mode
• Change of active setting group
The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:

Technical manual
Security
Binary input Function

1 Activated
0 Deactivated
Change lock functionality can be temporarily disabled/overridden using Maintenance menu.

Maintenance menu/Recovery Menu (Password Protected)/Turn off Change-lock (Temporary).
Turning off the change-lock will override the change lock function until the next reboot of the IED. In
this case, the change lock function cannot be activated, and the Override output will indicate that the
change-lock is overridden.
16.7 Denial of service DOS
16.7.1 Functionality GUID-407250CA-0076-41E1-AD2D-434077AC3F1D v5
The Denial of service functionality limits overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network
traffic. The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of
the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy network loads can be
controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment
connected to the network.
16.7.2 Operation principle GUID-94340D4F-4D32-409B-BA1A-BA49A0C3F297 v6
The denial of service protection is designed to protect the IED from overload when exposed to high
amount of Ethernet network traffic. The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise
the primary functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic is quota controlled, so that a too
heavy network load can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of
malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.
The denial of service functionality in SCHLCCH and RCHLCCH measures the IED load from
communication and, if necessary, limits it from jeopardizing the IED's control and protection
functionality. The function has the following outputs:
• RCHLCCH
• LinkAUp and LinkBUp indicates the Ethernet link status for the rear ports channel A and
B
• DOSLINKA and DOSLINKB indicates that DOS functionality is active on channel A and
channel B
• DOSALARM indicates that DOS functionality is active on the access point
• SCHLCCH
• LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status
• DOSALARM indicates that DOS functionality is active on the access point
The DOS functionality activates when the inbound traffic rate exceeds 3000 packets
per second.

Technical manual
520
Basic IED functions
Section 17 Basic IED functions

17.1 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN IP1750-1 v2
The time synchronization function is used to select a common source of absolute time for the
synchronization of the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it possible to compare
events and disturbance data between all IEDs within a station automation system and in between
sub-stations. A common source shall be used for IED and merging unit when IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
process bus communication is used.
MicroSCADA OPC server should not be used as a time synchronization source.
The IED supports SNTPv4 (RFC2030).
SEMOD55141-5 v7
There are two groups of parameter settings related to time:
• System time
• Synchronization
The System time group relates to setting the on/off and start/end of the Daylight Saving Time (DST)
for the local time zone in relation to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The Synchronization group
relates to selecting the coarse and fine synchronization sources.
All the settings and parameters related to time are available via Local HMI under Main menu/
Configuration/Time/System time and via PCM600 under IED Configuration/Time .

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
MANUALPID-6638-SETTINGS v1
Table 486: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)

CoarseSyncSrc Off - - Off Coarse time synchronization source
SPA
LON
DNP
IEC103
FineSyncSource Off - - Off Fine time synchronization source
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS
SyncMaster Off - - Off Activate IEDas synchronization master
SNTP-Server
TimeAdjustRate Slow - - Fast Adjust rate for time synchronization
Fast
HWSyncSrc Off - - Off Hardware time synchronization source
GPS
IRIG-B
PPS
SyncLostMode NoBlock - - NoBlock Behavior of dependent protection
Block functions when time synchronization
BlockOnLostUTC quality is inadequate
SyncAccLevel Class T5 (1us) - - Unspecified Wanted time synchronization accuracy
Class T4 (4us)
Unspecified
CurrentSyncSource 0 - 16 - 1 - Current synchronization source
SNTPSource 0 - 16 - 1 - The source of the SNTP time
SNTPMaster 0 - 16 - 1 - The IP-adress of the SNTP master
GPSNumberOfSats -1 - 12 - 1 0 GPS satellites used in calculation of time
PTPOwnId 0 - 16 - 1 - PTP own clock identity
GUID-CD154442-0F80-4B69-8C43-22445FD7F865 v1
GPS settings are not supported by 650 due to hardware restrictions.
Table 487: BININPUT Non group settings (basic)

ModulePosition 3 - 16 - 1 3 Hardware position of IO module for time
synchronization
BinaryInput 1 - 16 - 1 1 Binary input number for time
synchronization
BinDetection PositiveEdge - - PositiveEdge Positive or negative edge detection
NegativeEdge

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 488: SNTP Non group settings (basic)

ServerIP-Add 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Server IP-address
Address
RedServIP-Add 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Redundant server IP-address
Address
LocalPort 0 - 65535 - 1 49152 Port number in the IED to communicate
with the SNTP server
Table 489: DSTENABLE Non group settings (basic)

DST Enable Off - - On Enables or disables the use of Daylight
On Saving Time
Table 490: DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)

MonthInYear January - - March Month in year when daylight time starts
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time starts
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
-23:30 time starts
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 491: DSTEND Non group settings (basic)

MonthInYear January - - October Month in year when daylight time ends
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time ends
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
-23:30 time ends
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 492: TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)

TimeZone -12:00 - - 1:00 Local time from UTC
-11:00
-10:00
-9:30
-9:00
-8:00
-7:00
-6:00
-5:00
-4:30
-4:00
-3:30
-3:00
-2:00
-1:00
0:00
1:00
2:00
3:00
3:30
4:00
4:30
5:00
5:30
5:45
6:00
6:30
7:00
8:00
8:45
9:00
9:30
10:00
10:30
11:00
11:30
12:00
12:45
13:00
14:00
Table 493: PTP Non group settings (advanced)

Domain 0 - 255 - 1 0 0 = Default domain, 1-3 = Alternative
domain, 4-127 = User-defined domains,
128-255 = Reserved
Priority1 0 - 255 - 1 128 The clock with the lowest priority 1
becomes the reference clock (Grand
Master)
Priority2 0 - 255 - 1 128 If all the relevant values for selecting the
reference clock are the same for multiple
devices, the clock with the lowest priority
2 is selected as the reference clock
(Grand Master)
17.1.3 Description of SyncLostMode GUID-9BD77B8E-37F2-480F-89D6-9CE251403761 v1
If the time synchronization between the different sources of sampled values are lost, then the
protection function blocking behavior is different based on the parameter SyncLostMode.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
The parameter can have three different values:
• NoBlock
• Block
• BlockOnLostUTC
NoBlock
The protection functions are not blocked due to the lost time synchronization. This is mainly used
when all sample values are produced in one source.
Block
The block can be used if there are several data sources that can be synchronized to each other.
However, the relation to UTC time is not required.
As soon as the protection detects a change or uncertainty in time from a data source, the protections
are blocked. This is detected by the jump in sample count or when the data remains unsynchronized.
When a block occurs, the block stays for an extra blocking time after all the sources are
synchronized again, to secure that the time has propagated to the other sources.
Data stream 1
Time shift
Extra blocking time
on-going
Data stream 2
Time shift
Extra blocking time
on-going
Data stream 3
Time shift
Extra blocking time
on-going
Total protection blocking time
Figure 277: Principle blocking when SyncLostMode is set to block

For more information, refer to section Time synchronization
BlockOnLostUTC
When BlockOnLostUTC is selected, all the data must be synchronized to UTC, to avoid blocking of
the protection functions.
This cannot be used by the process bus sampled values, since IEC 61859-9-2 LE only contains the
information regarding the synchronized or unsynchronized data.
For example, the BlockOnLostUTC can be used for a phasor measurement unit where the data is
compared between different stations.
17.1.4.1 General concepts M11346-77 v1

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Time definitions M11346-80 v3

The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time the clock is
intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the time gained or lost by the
clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to compensate for them.
Design of the time system (clock synchronization) GUID-E2B9E81C-5733-4521-B27F-BF33E05CCFB0 v10

The time system is based on software and hardware clocks that run independently from each other
(see Figure 278).
PTP(IEEE 1588)
External
synchronization Off
sources On
Time tagging and general synchronization
Slave only
Off
Commu- Protection
LON Events
Time nication and control
SPA regulator functions
Min. pulse
(Setting:
SNTP SW time
see
DNP Technical
manual)
IRIG-B
PPS
Synchronization for differential protection

(Echo mode)
Off Time
IRIG-B regulator HW time
(fast or slow)
PPS
A/D Diff. Merging

converter commu- units*
nication
*IEC 61850-9-2
Figure 278: Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When, for example, a status signal is changed in
the protection system of a function based on the free running hardware clock, the event is time
tagged by the software clock when it reaches the event recorder. The hardware clock can thus run
independently.
The echo mode of the line differential protection function is based on the hardware clock. Thus, there
is no need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock.
Synchronization of the hardware clock to the software clock is necessary only when IRIG B 00X with
optical fiber, IEEE 1344 is used for differential protection. The two clock systems are synchronized by
a special clock synchronization unit with two modes, fast and slow. A special feature, an automatic
fast clock time regulator is used. The automatic fast mode makes the synchronization time as short
as possible during start-up. The Fast and Slow settings are also available on the local HMI.
SyncLostMode is not required to set as Block/BlockonLostUTC when differential protection is based

on ECHO mode.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Fast clock synchronization mode

At start-up and after interruptions in the IRIG B time signals, the deviation between the external time
system and the internal differential time system can be substantial. A new start-up is also required,
for example, after maintenance of the auxiliary voltage system.
When the time difference is > 16 μs, the line differential protection function is blocked and the time
regulator for the hardware clock automatically uses a fast mode to synchronize the clock systems.
Time adjustment is made with an exponential function, that is, with big time adjustment steps in the
beginning, and then smaller steps until a time deviation of < 16 μs between the external time system
and the internal differential time system has been reached. The protection function is then enabled
and the synchronization remains in fast mode or switches to slow mode depending on the setting.
Slow clock synchronization mode

During normal service, a setting with slow synchronization mode is used. This prevents the hardware
clock to make too big a time steps (> 16 µs) emanating from the requirement of correct timing in the
line differential protection function.
Synchronization principle M11346-83 v4

From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A function is
synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.
Synchronization from
a higher level
Function
Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level
Figure 279: Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization messages from a
higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization decreases as well. A
function can have several potential sources of synchronization, with different maximum errors. This
gives the function the possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal
clock based on this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:
• The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

• The time since the last used synchronization message
• The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.
17.1.4.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation M11346-57 v5
The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one millisecond. The clock has a
built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2100.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Real-time clock at power off M11346-60 v3

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time clock that will
provide 5 ppm accuracy for at least two days. This means that if the power is off, the time in the IED
may drift with maximum 0.5 second per day for two days, and after this the time will be lost.
Real-time clock at startup M11346-63 v4
Time synchronization startup procedure M11346-66 v10

The first message that contains the full time (as for instance LON and SNTP) gives an accurate time
to the IED. After the initial setting of the clock, one of the three following conditions happens with
each of the coming synchronization messages configured as FineSynchSource:
• If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, has an offset compared
to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for synchronization, which means,
for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at the next coming time message.
• If the synchronization message has a large offset compared to the other messages, a spike-filter
in the IED removes this time-message.
• If the synchronization message has a large offset and the following message also has a large
offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in the synchronization message is compared to
a threshold that defaults to 500 milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the clock
jumps a whole number of seconds so the remaining offset is less than 500ms. The remaining
offset is then slowly adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset is removed. With an adjustment of
1000ppm it takes 500 seconds to remove an offset of 500 milliseconds.
Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of the time. After this
has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and only an offset of more than
10 seconds resets the time.
Rate accuracy M11346-93 v7

The rate accuracy is the accuracy of the internal clock while the external time signal is lost. In the
IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 2 ppm but if the IED is synchronized for a while, the rate
accuracy is approximately 0.2 ppm if the surrounding temperature is constant.
Time-out on synchronization sources M11346-96 v3

All synchronization interfaces have a time-out, and a configured interface must receive time
synchronization messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR) that is reported
from the INTERRSIG function block. The time-out is such that one message can be lost without
getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.
17.1.4.3 Synchronization alternatives M11346-3 v7
Three main alternatives of external synchronization sources are available. The synchronization
message is applied:
• via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including date and time
• as a minute pulse connected to a binary input
• via IRIG-B or PPS
Synchronization via SNTP M11346-33 v9

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an IED to an SNTP
server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a reception time and a transmission
time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850
network. For SNTP to operate properly, there must be an SNTP server present, preferably in the
same station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms accuracy for
binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.
SNTP provides complete time-information and shall normally be used as fine time synch source only.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
SNTP server requirements GUID-588FCD12-C494-445E-8488-8287B34EFD9A v5

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5 switches or
routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at least equipped with a
real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server software. The SNTP server should be
stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or local without synchronization.
Using a local SNTP server without synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant
configuration is not recommended.
The IED supports SNTPv4 (RFC2030).
Synchronization via serial communication module (SLM) M11346-50 v7

On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are sent.
• Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, that is, year,
month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
• Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.
The SLM module is located on the first analog digital conversion module (ADM)
Synchronization via binary input M11346-42 v6

The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be generated from, for
example station master clock. If the station master clock is not synchronized from a world wide
source, time will be a relative time valid for the substation. Both positive and negative edge on the
signal can be accepted. This signal is also considered as a fine time synchronization signal.
The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED. The electrical
characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.
If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation and if no station
master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute pulse generator can be designed
and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute pulse generator can be created using the
logical elements and timers available in the IED.
The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As only the flanks are
detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after the last flank.
Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.
Pulse data:
• Period time (a) should be 60 seconds.

• Pulse length (b):
• Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms.
• Maximum pulse length is optional.
• Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".
Deviations in the period time (a) larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
en05000251.vsd
Figure 280: Binary minute pulses

The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute pulse is received
within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.
If contact bounce occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The next minute
pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.
If the minute pulses are perfect, for example, it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses, contact
bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effecting the system. If contact
bounce occurs more than 50 ms, for example, it is less than 59950 ms between the two most
adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse will not be accepted.
Binary synchronization example M11346-74 v5

An IED is configured to use only binary input for time synchronization, and a valid binary input is
applied to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time, and the minute
pulse is then used to synchronize the IED. Minute pulse means that each pulse occurs one minute
after the previous pulse, so the first pulse is not used at all. The second pulse will probably be
rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time, and will reset the time so
that the fourth pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, the time in the IED
will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or if the RTC backup still keeps the time
since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed, for example, for an hour, the internal time will drift
by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse is
automatically rejected. The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third
pulse will set the time if the time offset is more than 500 ms or adjust the time if the time offset is
small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set. If
the time is adjusted, the time will reach its destination within one minute.
Synchronization via IRIG-B module M11346-146 v8

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local time of the year in
this format. The “B” in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are transmitted and the message is
sent every second. After IRIG-B there are numbers stating if and how the signal is modulated and the
information transmitted.
To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG-B module, one galvanic BNC connector and
one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via the galvanic interface, and
IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the galvanic interface or the optical interface, where
x (in 00x or 12x) means a number in the range of 0-7.
“00” means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-B module via the
BNC contact or an optical fiber. “12” means that a 1 kHz modulation is used. In this case the
information must go into the module via the BNC connector.
If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information of the year. If
the x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time within the year, and year information has to
be set via PCM600 or local HMI.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
The IRIG-B module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B clocks, as IRIG-
B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is compatible with IRIG-B and contains
year information and information of the time-zone.
17.1.4.4 Process bus IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE synchronization GUID-6E384BDB-5598-4108-99B4-0B4A4E1828B2 v5
When process bus communication (IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE protocol) is used, it is essential that the
merging units are synchronized with the hardware time of the IED (see Technical manual, section
Design of the time system (clock synchronization) ). To achieve this, PTP, PPS or IRIG-B can be
used depending of the facilities of the merging unit.
If the merging unit supports PTP, use PTP. If PTP is used in the IED and the merging unit cannot be
synchronized from the IED, then use GPS-based clocks to provide PTP synch as well as sync to the
merging unit.
If synchronization of the IED and the merging unit is based on GPS, set the parameter
SyncLostMode to BlockOnLostUTC in order to provide a block of protection functions whenever the
global common time is lost.
If PTP is not used, use the same synchronization method for the HwSyncSrc as the merging unit
provides. For instance, if the merging unit provides PPS as synchronization, use PPS as HwSyncSrc.
If LDCM in GPS-mode is used, that is, the hardware and software clocks are connected to each
other, HwSyncSrc is not used and other means to synchronize the merging unit to the IED is
required. For instance, FineSyncSource is set to the same source that the merging unit uses.
If the IED is used together with a merging unit and no time synchronization is
available, for example, in the laboratory test, the IED will synchronize to the SV data
stream. During the re-synchronization, the protection functions will be blocked once
a second for about 45 ms, and this will continue for up to 10 minutes. To avoid this,
configure PTP (IEEE 1588) to On for the access point where the merging unit is
configured.
17.1.4.5 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) GUID-4F2B68B8-CCC8-4173-A644-D1674D3146F8 v4
PTP according to IEEE 1588-2008 and specifically its profile IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3 for power utility
automation is a synchronization method that differs from SNTP, for instance, by providing much
better accuracy and by being not predefined. By not predefined is meant that it is not mandatory to
have a predefined synchronization tree, as the master (Grand Master) may shift.
Consider instead PTP as a synchronization grouping, i.e. all devices connected to the PTP group will
be synchronized to the same source or, if there is no external source the group will at least maintain
a common time. The group is synchronized by connecting one or more “Grand Master” clocks to it.
The clocks can be part of the devices in the group or be specialized synchronization devices, as for
instance a GPS clock or similar. If several synchronization devices are connected to the group, the
“Best Master Algorithm” in the PTP protocol will assure that only one is the “Grand Master”. The IED
can act as a synchronization device and supply any synchronization source (like SNTP, SPA) as
clock input, that will synchronize the whole PTP group if there is no better source available in the
group. The IED can be connected to several groups and thereby connect them to each other, by
acting as a “Boundary Clock”. If PTP is “On” on several Access Points, the IED connects the Access
Points via a boundary clock. If PTP is “On” on redundant Access Points, the IED acts as a
“Transparent Clock”.
In a network there may be variety of possible masters that are connected together where the masters
by selection, using the priority of PTP (also called the Best Master Algorithm, or BMC) to determine
which of them that is the best master.
Priority order according to PTP

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
1. Priority 1
setting for each device, default 128, set to a lower number if this device shall be the Grand
Master.
2. GM class
given from the type of device, for instance “6” for a GPS clock, “7” for a GPS clock that has lost
synch during a hold-over time, “187” for a clock that can also be a slave.
3. GM Accuracy
how accurate the time is as a enumerated value
4. Offset Scaled Variance
calculated value that shows the oscillator quality
5. Priority 2
setting for each device, default 128, set to a lower number if this device is preferred to be the
Grand Master, if Priority 1, GM class, GM accuracy and OffsetScaledVariance are the same for
all devices.
6. Identity, that is the MAC-adress of the port.
MAC address of the access points can be seen in LHMI under the settings of
each access point.
To setup a PTP network with no obvious Grand Master, you simply connect the IEDs to one network
and configure PTP to be “on” on all IEDs. On one IED, the one from which you want to set the time in
the station, you set the Priority2 to 127, instead of default 128. Now, this IED has higher priority than
the rest of the IEDs and will thereby act as “Grand Master”.
PTP is not set from TIMESYNCGEN:1 General, as SNTP is. Instead PTP is set via a parameter of
each Access Point. For more information, refer to section Time synchronization.
It shall be noted that an IED synchronized to local time in a PTP network is seen as
local synchronized, if the grand master is not synchronized. If an IED is the grand
master without any synchronization from somewhere else, then this grand master
IED is seen as not synchronized. This is reflected in the time quality of the events in
IEC 61850 in the field ClockNotSynchronized.
M12331-1 v9
Table 494: Time synchronization, time tagging
Function Value
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse synchronization), ± 1.0 ms typically
events and sampled measurement values
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement values ± 1.0 ms typically
GUID-8AEB81D0-1731-46DF-A206-D2E758823575 v2
Table 495: Time synchronization PTP: IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3
Supported types of clock Boundary Clock (BC), Ordinary Clock (OC), Transparent Clock
(TC)
Accuracy According to standard IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3
Number of nodes According to standard IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3
Ports supported All rear Ethernet ports

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
17.2 Parameter setting groups IP1745-1 v1
Use the four different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different power system
conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets, either from the local HMI or
configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can be applied to a variety of power
system scenarios.
17.2.2 Function block IP9661-1 v1
M12010-3 v3
ACTVGRP
ACTGRP1 GRP1
ACTGRP2 GRP2
ACTGRP3 GRP3
ACTGRP4 GRP4
ACTGRP5 GRP5
ACTGRP6 GRP6
SETCHGD
REMSETEN
Figure 281: ActiveGroup function block
17.2.3 Signals IP14073-1 v2
Table 496: ACTVGRP Input signals

ACTGRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 1 as active
Table 497: ACTVGRP Output signals

GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active
SETCHGD BOOLEAN Pulse when setting changed
REMSETEN BOOLEAN Settings over IEC 61850 enabled

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
17.2.4 Settings IP11026-1 v2
Table 498: SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)

ActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1 - - SettingGroup1 Active setting group
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6
MaxNoSetGrp 1-6 - 1 1 Max number of setting groups 1-6
M12008-8 v11
Parameter setting groups ActiveGroup function has six functional inputs, each corresponding to one
of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the active setting
group. Eight functional output signals are available for configuration purposes, so that information on
the active setting group is always available.
A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal computer,
remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating the corresponding
input to the ActiveGroup function block.
Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary inputs in the IED.
To do this PCM600 must be used.
The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive
functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either permanent
or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.
More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order setting group
has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two are set to be activated,
group two will be the one activated.
Every time a setting is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a pulse. Activating or
deactivating test mode is made by changing a parameter, consequently this will also cause a pulse
on the SETCHGD output.
The parameter MaxNoSetGrp defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to switch
between.
The output REMSETEN indicates whether setting changes over IEC 61850 are enabled or not. Per
default, this is not enabled, which results in REMSETEN being at a logical low level. If setting
changes via IEC 61850 are enabled, then REMSETEN will be a logical high. The setting changes
over IEC 61850 is enabled with the setting EnableSettings in the IEC 61850-8-1 configuration under
Main menu /Configuration /Communication /Station communication /IEC 61850-8-1 /IEC
61850-8-1 . Please refer to documentation for IEC 61850 for further details.
Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of setting groups selected to
be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will be shown on the Parameter Setting Tool.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
ACTIVATE GROUP 6
ACTIVATE GROUP 5
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
+RL2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1
ACTVGRP
IOx-Bly1
Æ ACTGRP1 GRP1
IOx-Bly2
Æ ACTGRP2 GRP2
IOx-Bly3 ACTGRP3 GRP3

Æ
IOx-Bly4
Æ ACTGRP4 GRP4
IOx-Bly5
Æ ACTGRP5 GRP5
IOx-Bly6
Æ ACTGRP6 GRP6
SETCHGD
REMSETEN
Figure 282: Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which group that is active.
17.3 Test mode functionality TESTMODE IP1647-1 v3
When entering IED test mode there is an option to block all functions. Active test mode is indicated
by a flashing yellow Start LED on the LHMI. After that, it is possible to block/unblock arbitrarily
selected functions from the LHMI to perform required tests.
When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed (except for functions that have their block input
active), and the IED resumes normal operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is
removed and later restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection functions
blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will be done with actually set and
configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus mistakes are avoided.
Forcing of binary input and output signals is only possible when the IED is in IED test mode.
TESTMODE
IED_TEST TEST
IED_TEST
BLOCK
NOEVENT
INPUT
SETTING
IEC61850
Figure 283: TESTMODE function block

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
17.3.3 Signals IP9680-1 v2
Table 499: TESTMODE Input signals

IED_TEST BOOLEAN 0 Activate IED test mode
Table 500: TESTMODE Output signals

TEST BOOLEAN In test via IED TEST or via LD0 Mode
IED_TEST BOOLEAN IED test mode is active
BLOCK BOOLEAN Active when LD0 is blocked or test blocked
NOEVENT BOOLEAN Event disabled during test mode
INPUT BOOLEAN IED TEST input is active
SETTING BOOLEAN IED test mode setting is On
IEC61850 BOOLEAN Active when LD0 Mode is in Blocked, Test or Test blocked
17.3.4 Settings IP11343-1 v2
Table 501: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)

IEDTestMode Off - - Off Activate IED Test mode
On
EventDisable Off - - Off Event disable during test mode
On
BlockAllFunc Off - - On Block all functions when entering IED
On test mode
CmdTestEd1 Off - - Off Require test bit in command at test
On mode (only for IEC61850 Ed1)
M12015-4 v11
Set the IED in test mode by
• configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.

• setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under Main menu/TEST/IED test mode.
While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is activated. The
outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the “Test mode: being in On” state. If
the input from the configuration (OUTPUT signal is activated) or setting from local HMI (SETTING
signal is activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow Start LED will flash and all functions can be blocked
depending on the configuration of the testmode component. Any function can be unblocked
individually regarding functionality and event signalling.
M11828-3 v9
The deblocking operation will reset when exiting the test mode.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no outputs will be
activated.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
If the IED is restarted while set to IED TESTMODE by a binary input all functions will
be temporarily unblocked during startup, which might cause unwanted operations.
The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test handle is
inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30) can supply a binary
input which in turn is configured to the TESTMODE function block.
Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.
The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to prevent filling
station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a commissioning or maintenance
test.
17.4 IED identifiers TERMINALID IP15060-1 v2
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED in the system, not
only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.
17.4.2 Settings GUID-3C49A222-FFE4-492B-A96C-9E9965FA2CB4 v2
Table 502: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)

StationName 0 - 18 - 1 Station name Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 - 1 Object name Object name
ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Object number
UnitName 0 - 18 - 1 Unit name Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Unit number
IEDMainFunType 0 - 255 - 1 0 IED main function type for
IEC60870-5-103
TechnicalKey 0 - 16 - 1 AA0B0Q0A0 Technical key (part 1)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 2)
17.5 Product information PRODINF GUID-F67243CA-2429-4118-BBFF-3D62BF55E080 v2
17.5.1 Functionality GUID-D78786E6-C34A-4E63-9D1E-0582C8F1F7E1 v10
Product information contains unchangeable data that uniquely identifies the IED.
Product information data is visible on the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics /IED status/
Product identifiers and under Main menu /Diagnostics/IED Status /Identifiers:

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Product information data is visible on the local HMI under Main menu /Diagnostics/IED status /
Product identifiers and under Main menu/Diagnostics /IED Status/Identifiers .
• ProductVer
• ProductDef
• FirmwareVer
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate
• IEDProdType
Figure 284: IED summary

This information is very helpful when interacting with Hitachi Power grids product support (for
example during repair and maintenance).
17.5.2 Settings GUID-168CD792-8811-43B5-8760-74ED82DE17F7 v5
17.5.3 Factory defined settings M11789-39 v11
The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very helpful in the
case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different Substation Automation Systems
and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be changed by the customer. They can only be
viewed. The settings are found in the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics /IED status/Product
identifiers
The following identifiers are available:
• IEDProdType
• Describes the type of the IED. Example: REL650
• ProductDef
• Describes the release number from the production. Example: 2.1.0
• FirmwareVer
• Describes the firmware version.
• The firmware version can be checked from Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product
identifiers
• Firmware version numbers run independently from the release production numbers. For
every release number there can be one or more firmware versions depending on the small
issues corrected in between releases.
• ProductVer
• Describes the product version. Example: 2.1.0
1 is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the product
2 is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new hardware added
to the product
3 is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware is either changed
or enhanced in the product
• IEDMainFunType
• Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128 (meaning line
protection).

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate
17.6 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI SEMOD55793-1 v2
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application Configuration Tool
(ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the application manual to get
information about how binary inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.
SMBI
^VIN1 ^BI1
^VIN2 ^BI2
^VIN3 ^BI3
^VIN4 ^BI4
^VIN5 ^BI5
^VIN6 ^BI6
^VIN7 ^BI7
^VIN8 ^BI8
^VIN9 ^BI9
^VIN10 ^BI10
Figure 285: SMBI function block
Table 503: SMBI Input signals

BI1 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 504: SMBI Output signals

BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function , see figure 285, receives its inputs from the real
(hardware) binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT) or ACT, and makes them available to the
rest of the configuration via its outputs, BI1 to BI10. The inputs and outputs, as well as the whole
block, can be given a user defined name. These names will be represented in SMT as information
which signals shall be connected between physical IO and SMBI function. The input/output user
defined name will also appear on the respective output/input signal.
17.7 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO SEMOD55215-1 v2
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the Application Configuration
Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the application manual to get
information about how binary inputs are sent from one IED configuration.
SMBO
BO1 ^BO1
BO2 ^BO2
BO3 ^BO3
BO4 ^BO4
BO5 ^BO5
BO6 ^BO6
BO7 ^BO7
BO8 ^BO8
BO9 ^BO9
BO10 ^BO10
Figure 286: SMBO function block

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 505: SMBO Input signals

BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function , see figure 286, receives logical signal from
the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via the Signal Matrix Tool
(SMT) or ACT. The inputs in SMBO are BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole function block,
can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT as information which signals shall be
connected between physical IO and the SMBO.
17.8 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI SEMOD55751-1 v2
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function block, analyses the
connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and calculates all relevant information from
them like the phasor magnitude, phase angle, frequency, true RMS value, harmonics, sequence
components and so on. This information is then used by the respective functions connected to this
SMAI block in ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring functions).
SEMOD54868-4 v12
SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC G1AI3P
REVROT G1AI1
^GRP1L1 G1AI2
^GRP1L2 G1AI3
^GRP1L3 G1AI4
^GRP1N G1N
Figure 287: SMAI1 function block

Figure 287 is an example of SMAI1:n in each of the four task time groups 1, 2, 3 or 4 where:

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
• n=1 in task group 1

The number of available task time groups depend on product and configuration. Up to four task time
groups are available in a product. The task time defines the execution repetition rate for the task time
groups. The task times valid for a product are found in PCM600, Application configuration tool.
SEMOD54997-4 v11
SMAI2
BLOCK G2AI3P
REVROT G2AI1
^GRP2L1 G2AI2
^GRP2L2 G2AI3
^GRP2L3 G2AI4
^GRP2N G2N
Figure 288: SMAI2 function block

Figure 288 is an example of SMAI2:n to SMAI12:m in each of the four task time groups 1, 2, 3 or 4
where:
• n=2 and m=12 in task group 1

The number of available task time groups depend on product and configuration. Up to four task time
groups are available in a product. The task time defines the execution repetition rate for the task time
groups. The task times valid for a product are found in PCM600, Application configuration tool.
Table 506: SMAI1 Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 20.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT
calculation
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity
GRP1L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3 quantity
GRP1L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1 quantity
GRP1N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity
Table 507: SMAI1 Output signals

SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT
reference function
G1AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
G1AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 1

Technical manual
Basic IED functions

G1N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample
Table 508: SMAI2 Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 2
GRP2L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2 quantity
GRP2L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3 quantity
GRP2L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1 quantity
GRP2N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity
Table 509: SMAI2 Output signals

G2AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
G2N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample
SEMOD130357-4 v3
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal frequency DFT
reference is then the reference.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 510: SMAI1 Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current
Table 511: SMAI1 Non group settings (advanced)

Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 512: SMAI2 Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current
Table 513: SMAI2 Non group settings (advanced)

Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase
Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog signals (three phases
and one neutral or residual value), either voltage or current, see figure 287 and figure 288. SMAI
outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS
value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. – 244 values in total). The BLOCK input will force all
outputs to value zero if BLOCK is TRUE (1). However, when the disturbance recorder is connected to
the single-phase outputs of SMAI, the sample data to the disturbance recorder will not be blocked.
The disturbance recorder bypasses SMAI to the sample data channels.
System phase rotation and frequency are defined using the PhaseRotation and Frequency settings in
the primary system values PRIMVAL function. Logic 1 in the REVROT input to the SMAI function
means that the phase rotation is changed relative to the set PhaseRotation in PRIMVAL.
The output signal AI1 to AI4 are single phase outputs which directly represent the four inputs
GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN, x=1-12. GxN (x = 1-12) is always calculated residual sum
from the first three inputs. A3P is grouped, three-phase information containing all relevant information
about four connected inputs. Note that all other functions, with a few exceptions, use this output in
configuration. Note that the SMAI function will always calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if
the input GRPxN is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few exceptions shall always be
connected to AI3P.
17.8.5.1 Frequency values GUID-B494B93C-B5AA-4FD6-8080-8611C34C2AD8 v5
The SMAI function includes a functionality based on the level of positive sequence voltage,
MinValFreqMeas, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If the positive sequence

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
voltage is lower than MinValFreqMeas, the function freezes the frequency output value for 500 ms
and after that the frequency output is set to the nominal value. A signal is available for the SMAI
function to prevent operation due to non-valid frequency values. MinValFreqMeas is set as % of
UBase/√3
If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, at least two of the inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3,
where 1≤x≤12, must be connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage. Note that
phase to phase inputs shall always be connected as follows: L1-L2 to GRPxL1, L2-L3 to GRPxL2,
L3-L1 to GRPxL3. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and
GRPxL3 must be connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage.
If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, the user is
advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 to the same voltage
input as shown in figure 289 to make SMAI calculate a positive sequence voltage.
SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT SAPTOF
DFTSPFC G1AI3P U3P* TRIP SAPTOF(1)_TRIP
UL1L2 BLOCK START
REVROT G1AI1
PHASEL1 G1AI2 BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
^GRP1L1 G1AI4 FREQ
TRM_40.CH7(U) PHASEL2
G1N
^GRP1L2
PHASEL3
^GRP1L3
NEUTRAL
^GRP1N
EC10000060-3-en.vsdx
Figure 289: Connection example
The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-
N. If only one phase-earth voltage is available, the same type of connection can be
used but the SMAI ConnectionType setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be
accounted for when setting MinValFreqMeas. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-
N and the same voltage is connected to all three SMAI inputs, the positive sequence
voltage will be zero and the frequency functions will not work properly.
The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used for
Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF), Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF) and
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) due to that all other information
except frequency and positive sequence voltage might be wrongly calculated.
17.8.6 SMAI incorrect calculated phase-earth GUID-7AE6FC17-74AA-403B-8559-3B9D6DA1E433 v1
In some configurations SMAI may produce incorrectly calculated phase-earth values, when this is the
case, a hint will be available in LHMI with text as below.
Calculated phase-earth values are used from one or more SMAIs configured for phase-phase inputs,
without connection to N input.
However, this configuration, combined with unbalanced three-phase input, results in incorrect
calculated phase-earth values.
This in turn may result in maloperation of functions connected to SMAIs configured in this way, if the
function uses phase-earth based values.
Further, if SUM3PH is connected to such a SMAI, then its output values will be incorrect, and the
connected functions may maloperate.
To rectify this situation, revise the configuration from this perspective.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
17.9 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM SEMOD55968-1 v2
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of three-phase
analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.
3PHSUM
BLOCK SPFCOUT
BLKGR1 AI3P
BLKGR2 AI1
REVROT AI2
^G1AI3P* AI3
^G2AI3P* AI4
Figure 290: 3PHSUM function block
Table 514: 3PHSUM Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block
BLKGR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block input for group 1
BLKGR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block input for group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation
G1AI3P GROUP - Group 1 three phase analog input from first SMAI
SIGNAL
G2AI3P GROUP - Group 2 three phase analog input from second SMAI
SIGNAL
Table 515: 3PHSUM Output signals

SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT
reference function
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of two connected three phase inputs
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 1 signals from both SMAI blocks
SEMOD130361-4 v2
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

Technical manual
Basic IED functions
Table 516: 3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)

Value groups
SummationType Group1+Group2 - - Group1+Group2 Summation type
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
Table 517: 3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

FreqMeasMinVal 5 - 200 % 1 10 Amplitude limit for frequency calculation
in % of UBase
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal matrix for analog
inputs function (SMAI). The BLOCK input will reset all the outputs of the function to 0.
17.10 Primary system values PRIMVAL
GUID-B8B3535D-227B-4151-9E98-BEB85F4D54DE v1

Primary system values PRIMVAL - -
The rated system frequency and phase rotation direction are set under Main menu /Configuration /
Power system / Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600 parameter setting tree.
17.10.3 Settings
Table 518: PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)

Frequency 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation Normal=L1L2L3 - - Normal=L1L2L3 System phase rotation
Inverse=L3L2L1

Technical manual
550
IED hardware
Section 18 IED hardware

18.1 Overview IP14270-1 v1
18.1.1 Variants of case size with local HMI display M15024-3 v6
IEC04000458-2-en.psd
Figure 291: 1/2 19” case with local HMI display.

Technical manual
IED hardware
18.1.2 Case from the front and rear sides IP16286-1 v2
M16105-3 v10
Table 519: Designations for 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot
1/2x19"
Front view Rear position Module
p40 p31 p30 p5 p4 p3 p1
P30:1
X11 PSM
P30:2
X31 and X32 etc. to X51 and X52 BIM, BOM or IOM
P30:3
X301, X302, X303, X304 SFP

P30:4
X305 LDCM
P31:1
6U
X306 LDCM
X311: A, B, C, D SLM
P31:2
P30:5
X312 LDCM or IRIG-B

P31:3
P30:6
X313 LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485

X401 TRM
Rear view
X11 X31 X41 X51 X401
X301
X302
X303
X311
A
X304
B
X32 X42 X52 D
X305 X312
X306 X313
18.2 Hardware modules IP14529-1 v1
18.2.1 Overview M11562-3 v11
Table 520: Basic modules
Module Description
Power supply module (PSM) Including a regulated DC/DC converter that supplies auxiliary
voltage to all static circuits.
• An internal fail alarm output is available.
Numerical module (NUM) Module for overall application control. All information is processed
or passed through this module, such as configuration, settings
and communication. The module provides four SFPs for Ethernet
traffic.
Local Human machine interface (LHMI) The module consists of LEDs, an LCD, a push button keyboard
and an ethernet connector used to connect a PC to the IED.
Transformer input module (TRM) Transformer module that galvanically separates the internal
circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has 12 analog inputs.

Technical manual
IED hardware
Module Description
Analog digital conversion module (ADM) The module converts the VT and CT analog signals from the TRM
to digital signals processed by the NUM. Carrier for
communication boards.
Note: TRM module is not included in SAM600-IO, so ADM
module is only used for internal communication carrier for IO
modules.
Combined backplane module (CBM) The module has two main purposes: to distribute supply voltages
from the PSM to the other modules and to act as a
communication carrier via its two buses, CompactPCI for fast I/O
and communication and CAN for slow I/O.
Universal backplane module (UBM) The module is used to interconnect the TRM and the ADM. It also
connects the NUM with the LHMI
Table 521: Application specific modules
Module Description
Binary input module (BIM) Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs
Binary output module (BOM) Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole command
outputs including supervision function
Binary I/O module (IOM) Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10 outputs and 2
fast signalling outputs.
Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103 Used for SPA/LON/IEC 60870–5–103 communication
communication modules (SLM)
Optical Ethernet SFP Small form factor pluggable for Ethernet communication
Galvanic RJ45 Ethernet SFP Small form factor pluggable for Ethernet communication
Galvanic RS485 communication module Module used for DNP3 and IEC 60870-5-103 communication
(RS485)
IRIG-B Time synchronization module (IRIG-B) Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling both pulse-width
modulated signals and amplitude modulated signals and one is
used for optical input type ST for PPS time synchronization.
18.2.2 Numeric module (NUM) IP14288-1 v2
18.2.2.1 Introduction M12643-3 v5
The numeric processing module (NUM) is a CPU module that handles all protection functions and
logic.
For communication with high speed modules, for example analog input modules and high speed
serial interfaces, NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. NUM is a compact PCI system card,
that is, it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and receives interrupts.
NUM provides up to 4 optical (type LC) or galvanic (type RJ45) Ethernet ports (one basic and three
optional).
Ethernet ports can be configured as four separate or in redundant mode PRP, HSR, or RSTP. The
combination supports two PRP, two HSR networks, or one RSTP network.
The numeric module (NUM) is a high-performance CPU module based on a dual-core processor. It is
6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is achieved via a compact PCI connector
and an euro connector.

Technical manual
IED hardware
The NUM has two PC-MIP expansion slots where mezzanine cards, such as the LDCM, can be
mounted. It also has four SFP cages for Ethernet communication. Up to four SFP transceivers for
optical 100BASE-FX or galvanic RJ45 100BASE-TX communication can be mounted in the SFP
cages.
Only SFP transceivers approved by Hitachi Power grids (1MRK005500) are

compatible with the SFP cages.
Application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory, and non-volatile RAM is used to
store log data.
The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor to keep track of the time when the
IED is not energized.
The NUM is passively cooled, which is possible due to its low power dissipation.
18.2.2.3 Technical data SEMOD55319-1 v1
SEMOD55310-2 v15
Table 522: SFP - Optical ethernet port
Quantity Rated value

Number of channels 4 single or 2 redundant can be used for single or redundant
communication using any protocol
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber 62.5/125 mm, 50/125 mm multimode
OM1, OM2, OM3, OM4
Length 2km
Wave length 1310 nm, Class 1 laser safety
Optical connector Type LC
Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s
Table 523: SFP - Galvanic RJ45

Number of channels Up to 6 single or 3 redundant or a combination of single and
redundant links for communication using any protocol
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX
Type of cable Cat5e FTP
Connector Type RJ45
Communication Speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s
GUID-96676D5D-0835-44DA-BC22-058FD18BDF34 v3
Table 524: NUM: Communication ports
NUM 4 Ethernet ports

1 Basic, 3 Optional
Ethernet connection type SFP Optical LC or Galvanic RJ45

Technical manual
IED hardware
18.2.3 Power supply module (PSM) IP15594-1 v1
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full isolation between
the IED and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is available.
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.
18.2.3.2 Design IP14278-1 v1
M6377-3 v2
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC input voltage
ranges see table 525. The power supply module contains a built-in, self-regulated DC/DC converter
that provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery system.
The DC input is protected against inverse polarity within the rated DC voltage range.
Connection diagram M6377-8 v3
Figure 292: PSM Connection diagram.
M12286-1 v9
Table 525: PSM - Power supply module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Auxiliary DC voltage, EL (input) EL = (24-60) V EL ±20%
EL = (90-250) V EL ±20%
Power consumption 32 W typically -
Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 10 A during 0.1 s -
Supply interruption bridging time < 50 ms -
GUID-61AA4AEF-D09C-4BA6-9142-B5CA857C0574 v1
Table 526: IRF - Internal Fail relay output

Max. system voltage 250 V DC
Min. load voltage 24 V DC
Number of outputs 1

Technical manual
IED hardware

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 4A
1.0 s 8A
Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum
capacitance of 0.2 μF: 20 A
0.2 s 8A
1.0 s
Making capacity for DC with L/R > 10 ms:
0.2 s 20 A
1.0 s 8A
Making capacity at resistive load
0.2 s 20 A
1.0 s 8A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 40 ms 48 V/1 A
(According to IEC 61810-1) 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R=100 ms 110 V/0.3 A
Breaking capacity for DC with resistive load 48 V/2 A
110 V/0.5 A
125 V/0.45 A
220 V/0.35 A
250 V/0.3 A
Max. operations with inductive load L/R ≤ 40 ms 1000
Max. operations with resistive load 2000
Max. operations with no load 10000
18.2.4 Local human-machine interface (Local HMI) SEMOD56218-5 v4
Refer to section Local HMI for information.
18.2.5 Transformer input module (TRM) IP15581-1 v1
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the secondary currents and
voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The module has twelve inputs in different
combinations of currents and voltage inputs.
Ring lug or compression type connectors can be ordered.
18.2.5.2 Design M14858-3 v8
The transformer module has 9 voltage and 3 current input transformers.
TRM variants are available depending on the product. The rated values and channel type of the
current inputs are selected at order.
Transformer input module for measuring should not be used with current
transformers intended for protection purposes, due to limitations in overload
characteristics.

Technical manual
IED hardware
The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for analog inputs
SMAI".
1MRK006501-AF-TRM-IEC-6502P1 V1 EN-US
Figure 293: TRM connection diagram
M16988-1 v11
Table 527: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz
Operating range fr ± 10%
Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1 or 5 A
Operating range (0-100) x Ir
Thermal withstand 100 × Ir for 1 s *)

30 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min
4 × Ir continuously
Dynamic withstand 250 × Ir one half wave
Burden < 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

< 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A

Technical manual
IED hardware
Description Value
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.
Voltage inputs **)
Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V
Operating range 0 - 340 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s
420 V continuously
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
< 80 mVA at 220 V
**) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency
18.2.6 Binary input module (BIM) IP14535-1 v1
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two versions, one
standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs to be used with the pulse
counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable and can be used for the input of logical
signals to any of the functions. They can also be included in the disturbance recording and event-
recording functions. This enables extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for
all associated electrical circuits.
18.2.6.2 Design M11586-3 v6
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level of the binary
input is selected at order.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI".
A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a hysteresis function
may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it possible to use the input for pulse
counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operation at battery supply earth faults,
see figure 294 The figure shows the typical operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the four
voltage levels.
The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand disturbances and
should generally be used when pulse counting is not required. Inputs are debounced by software.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and stored by the
event recorder if present.

Technical manual
IED hardware
[V]
300
176
144
88
72
38
32
19
17
24/30V 48/60V 110/125V 220/250V
xx06000391-2-en.vsd
Figure 294: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs
Operation
Operation uncertain
No operation
IEC99000517-ABC V1 EN-US
This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM).
The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact connected to the
input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is shown in figure 295 and 296.
[mA]
50
55 [ms]
en07000104-3.vsd
Figure 295: Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of BIM.

Technical manual
IED hardware
[mA]
50
5.5 [ms]
en07000105-1.vsd
Figure 296: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with enhanced pulse
counting capabilities.
Figure 297: Connection diagram

Technical manual
IED hardware
18.2.6.3 Signals
Table 528: BIM Output signals

STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input module status
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1 value
OSCWRN BOOLEAN Oscillation warning
18.2.6.4 Settings
Table 529: BIM Non group settings (basic)

On

Table 530: BIM Monitored data

STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary input module status
1=Error

Technical manual
IED hardware
M12576-1 v13
Table 531: BIM - Binary input module

Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%
48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz
Release settable 1–30 Hz
*Debounce filter Settable 1–20 ms
Binary input operate time 3 ms -
(Debounce filter set to 0 ms)
* Note: For compliance with surge immunity a debounce filter time setting of 5 ms is required.
M50609-2 v10
Table 532: BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities

Binary inputs 16 -
48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz
Release settable 1–30 Hz
*Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms

Technical manual
IED hardware
Table 533: IOM - Binary input/output module

Binary inputs 8 -
48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption -
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1-40 Hz
Release settable 1-30 Hz
18.2.7 Binary output modules (BOM) IP14536-1 v1
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output or any
signaling purpose.
18.2.7.2 Design M1819-3 v4
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each pair of relays have
a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 298. This should be considered when
connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the back of the IED.
The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker trip and closing
coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker auxiliary contacts normally
breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is required.
For configuration of the output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO".

Technical manual
IED hardware
Output module
xx00000299.vsd
Figure 298: Relay pair example
1 Output connection from relay 1

2 Output signal power source connection
3 Output connection from relay 2
Figure 299: Connection diagram
18.2.7.3 Signals
Table 534: BOM Input signals

BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1

Technical manual
IED hardware

Table 535: BOM Output signals

STATUS BOOLEAN Binary output part of IOM module status
18.2.7.4 Settings
Table 536: BOM Non group settings (basic)

On

Table 537: BOM Monitored data

STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary output part of IOM module status
1=Error
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced

Technical manual
IED hardware

BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0

Technical manual
IED hardware

1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - nary output 11 value
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Technical manual
IED hardware

0=0
B017FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 17 force
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
BO19FORCE BOOLEAN 1=Forced - Binary output 19 force
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Technical manual
IED hardware

0=0
BO24FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - nary output 24 force
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
M12441-1 v12
Table 538: BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-1)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays

Binary outputs 24
Max system voltage 250 V AC/DC
Min load voltage 24 V DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A
Max operations with inductive load L/R ≤ 40 ms 1000
Max operations with resistive load 2000
Max operations with load 1000
Max operations with no load 10000
0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A
0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R=100ms 110 V / 0.3 A
Breaking capacity for DC with resistive load 48 V / 2 A
110 V / 0.5 A
125 V / 0.45 A
220 V / 0.35 A
250 V / 0.3 A
Operating time < 6 ms
Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing factors within

nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation
time for the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated during
1 s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current consumption but after 5
minutes the temperature rise will adversely affect the hardware life. Maximum two
relays per BOM/IOM should be activated continuously due to power dissipation.

Technical manual
IED hardware
The stated operate time for functions include the operating time for the binary inputs
and outputs.
18.2.8 Binary input/output module (IOM) IP15582-1 v1
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels are needed. The
ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signaling purpose. The two high speed
signal output channels are used for applications where short operating time is essential. Eight
optically isolated binary inputs cater for required binary input information.
18.2.8.2 Design IP10635-1 v2
M1718-3 v4
The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with unprotected contacts and
one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.
Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase the disturbance
immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved with a high peak inrush current
while having a low steady-state current, see figure 295. Inputs are debounced by software.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery supply earth
faults, see figure 294.
The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering. Alternative connectors of Ring lug or
Compression type can be ordered.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and stored by the
event recorder if present.
M1898-3 v3
The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays. One of the
outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are connected in two groups.
One group has five contacts with a common and the other group has four contacts with a common, to
be used as single-output channels, see figure 300.
The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay is connected in
parallel to the standard output relay.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to sections "Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBI" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO".

Technical manual
IED hardware
IEC1MRK002801-AA11-UTAN-RAM V2 EN-US
Figure 300: Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds to rear position
X31, X41, and so on, and output contacts named XB to rear position X32, X42, and
so on
SEMOD175370-4 v1
The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for example be used in
applications where breaking high inductive load would cause excessive wear of the contacts.
The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the binary input/
output module.
xx04000069.vsd
Figure 301: IOM with MOV protection, relay example

Technical manual
IED hardware
18.2.8.3 Signals
Table 539: IOMIN Output signals

STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input part of IOM module status
OSCWRN BOOLEAN Oscillation warning
Table 540: IOMOUT Input signals

BLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
18.2.8.4 Settings
Table 541: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)

Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in operation
On (On) or not (Off)

Technical manual
IED hardware

Table 542: IOMIN Monitored data

STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary input part of IOM module status
1=Error
Table 543: IOMOUT Monitored data

0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Technical manual
IED hardware

0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked
0=0
1=Forced
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Technical manual
IED hardware
18.2.8.6 Technical data IP10636-1 v1
M12573-1 v11
Table 544: IOM - Binary input/output module

Binary inputs 8 -
48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption -
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1-40 Hz
Release settable 1-30 Hz
The stated operate time for functions include the operating time for the binary inputs
and outputs.
M12318-1 v12
Table 545: IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-1)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Binary outputs 10 21)
Max system voltage 250 V AC/DC 250 V DC
Min load voltage 24 V DC —
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms 800 V DC
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A 12 A
0.2 s
1.0 s 30 A 0.4 A
10 A 0.4 A
220–250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
24–30 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos φ > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A

Technical manual
IED hardware
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
(According to IEC 61810-1) 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R=100ms 110 V / 0.3 A 110 V / 0.3 A
Breaking capacity for DC with resistive load 48 V / 2 A 48 V / 2 A
110 V / 0.5 A 110 V / 0.5 A
125 V / 0.45 A 125 V / 0.45 A
220 V / 0.35 A 220 V / 0.35 A
250 V / 0.3 A 250 V / 0.3 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF
Max operations with inductive load L/R ≤ 40 ms 1000
Max operations with no load 10000
Operating time < 6 ms <= 1 ms
1) These reed relays have been excluded from UL evaluation.

M12584-1 v12
Table 546: IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA - contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-1)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC/ DC 250 V DC
Min load voltage 24 V DC -
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 250 V rms 250 V rms
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A 12 A
0.2 s
1.0 s 30 A 0.4 A
10 A 0.4 A
220–250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
24–30 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
(According to IEC 61810-1) 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R=100ms 110 V / 0.3 A 110 V / 0.3 A
Breaking capacity for DC with resistive load 48 V / 2 A 48 V / 2 A
110 V / 0.5 A 110 V / 0.5 A
125 V / 0.45 A 125 V / 0.45 A
220 V / 0.35 A 220 V / 0.35 A
250 V / 0.3 A 250 V / 0.3 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

Technical manual
IED hardware
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Max operations with inductive load L/R ≤ 40 ms 1000 -
Max operations with no load 10000 -
Operating time < 6 ms <= 1 ms
18.2.9 Serial and LON communication module (SLM) IP15583-1 v2
The Serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for SPA, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 and
LON communication. SLM has two optical communication ports for plastic/plastic, plastic/glass or
glass/glass fiber cables. One port is used for serial communication (SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3
port) and the other port is used for LON communication.
18.2.9.2 Design M17126-3 v7
SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the first Analog digital
conversion module (ADM). Three variants of SLM are available with different combinations of optical
fiber connectors, see figure 302. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-in type and the glass fiber
connectors are of ST type.
I
EC0500760=1=en=Or
igi
nal
.psd
Figure 302: SLM variants, component side view
1 Receiver, LON
2 Transmitter, LON
3 Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
4 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
A Snap-in connector for plastic fiber
B ST connector for glass fiber
In the following figure, X311 ports A/B are for SPA, IEC103 or DNP3 and X311 ports
C/D are for LON protocol.

Technical manual
IED hardware
Figure 303: X311 ports
M12589-1 v6
Table 547: SLM – LON port
Quantity Range or value

Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST
Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000 ft typically *)
Plastic fiber: 7 dB (10m/35 ft typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation
SEMOD117441-2 v7
Table 548: SLM – SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port

Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST
Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000 ft typically *)
Plastic fiber: 7 dB (25m/80 ft typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation

Technical manual
IED hardware
18.2.10 Galvanic RS485 communication module SEMOD174899-1 v1
18.2.10.1 Introduction SEMOD158664-5 v3
The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0 and IEC 60870-5-103
communication. The module has one RS485 communication port. The RS485 is a balanced serial
communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire connections. A 2-wire connection uses the
same signal for RX and TX and is a multidrop communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This
variant requires however a control of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for RX
and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the rest are slaves. No special control
signal is needed in this case.
18.2.10.2 Design SEMOD158668-1 v1
SEMOD158670-4 v3
RS485 is a PC-MIP card, and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the Analog digital
conversion module (ADM).
RS485 connector pinouts SEMOD158670-10 v1

The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 304) are presented in table 549:
Table 549: The arrangement for the pins
Pin Name 2-wire Name 4-wire Description

1 RS485+ TX+ Receive/transmit high or transmit high
2 RS485– TX– Receive/transmit
3 Term T-Term Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver in 2–wir case)
(connect to TX+)
4 N.A. R-Term Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX+)
5 N.A. RX– Receive low
6 N.A. RX+ Receive high
Angle
bracket
Screw
1
terminal
X3 2
1
2 RS485
3 PWB
Screw
4
terminal
5
X1
6
Backplane
Figure 304: RS485 connector
• 2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5
• Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3
• Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6

Technical manual
IED hardware
Soft ground connector pinouts SEMOD158670-45 v1

A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be used in two
combinations like:
• Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part · .
• Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a MOV
18.2.10.3 Serial optical and RS485 communication channel settings GUID-E86643AC-2771-47CE-89D7-7FC9F47ED9E1 v4
RS485 specific communication channel settings, RS485GEN

Wiremode determines the wire mode if the device is configured for RS485. RS485 is a balanced
serial communication that can be used in two ways:
• Two-wire
• Four-wire
A two-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX, and is a multidrop communication with
no dedicated master or slave. This variant requires however a control of the output. The four-wire
connection has separate signals for RX and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated master
and the rest are slaves. No special control signal is needed in this case.
Operation selection for RS485 and optical serial communication,

OPTICALPROT and RS485PROT
ProtocolSel selects if the communication in RS485 and optical serial modes happens via DNP or IEC
103 communication protocol. It can be Off via Parameter Setting tool or local HMI.
DNP3.0 for optical RS-232 and EIA-485 communication protocol,

OPTICALDNP and RS485DNP
BaudRate specifies the baud rate on the serial.
DLinkConfirm determines when the stack should ask for link layer confirmations. Since DNP3
supports breaking an application layer message into multiple link layer frames, set to the following
based on the desired operation for a specific communication session:
• Never - not for any frame

• Sometimes - only for multiframe message fragments
• Always - for all frames
tDLinkTimeout specifies the maximum amount of time to wait for a link level confirm if requested (that
is, if DLinkConfirm is On). Even if DLinkConfirm is set to Never, this will be used for linktest frame
and request link status if they are sent.
DLinkRetries is the maximum number of link layer retries if data-link layer confirms time up.
tRxToTxMinDel is the minimum time (in seconds) after receiving a character, before another attempt
to transmit a character on this channel. This is generally useful when using a modem or some other
communication device that requires a minimum time between receive and transmit.
ApLayMaxRxSize specifies the maximum application fragment size received in octets.
ApLayMaxTxSize specifies the maximum application fragment size transmitted in octets.
Stopbit defines the number of stop bits for the serial port.
Parity defines the parity to use for the serial port it can be set to:

Technical manual
IED hardware
• None - no parity used

• Even - even parity used
• Odd - odd parity used
tRTSWarmUp configures transmitter warm-up and warm-down delay times (in milliseconds). If warm-
up is configured to non-zero then at start of the send, the transmitter is On. This means that the line
is driven but the data send of the start is delayed by the warm-up delay time.
tRTSWarmDown specifies that if warm-down is configured to non zero then at end of the send, the
transmitter deactivation is delayed by the warm-down time.
tBackOffDelay specifies that if the data send is started, a check is made if data is being received at
that time. If yes, a back-off timer is started and when it times out, a check is made again to see if line
is idle. If no, a new back-off timer is started. This is repeated until the line is idle and send can start.
Line idle is determined when nothing is received for more than a character time. The back-off time
consists of a configurable fixed time and a random time where the maximum random time is also
configurable. The back-off feature is always on.
tMaxRndDelBkOf specifies the configurable RS485 maximum back-off random time delay in
seconds.
HWCollisionDetect, a new collision detect feature in hardware is implemented to improve the

sensitivity for collision detection. The performance of this feature depends on parameters of the
RS485 network as well as the protocol behaviour. It can even have negative impact on performance
in some circumstances, therefore usage of the feature should be tested and adapted for each
specific installation.
HWCollisionDetect is only used for RS485 networks, thus is only available in

RS485DNP function.
Master session settings for RS485 communication channel, MSTSERIAL

ChToAssociate defines the channel, to which this master session should be associated to.
The MSTSERIAL function includes the same settings as the MS1TCP to MS4TCP
functions, except the ChToAssociate setting which is used to select either the serial
optical or RS485 communication interface on hardware modules.
18.2.10.4 Parameter list for optical and RS485 communication channel

Table 550: RS485GEN Non group settings (basic)

WireMode Four-wire - - Four-wire Two or four wire mode
Two-wire
SEMOD158710-2 v3
Table 551: Galvanic RS485 communication module

Communication speed 2400–19200 bauds
External connectors RS-485 6-pole connector
Soft ground 2-pole connector

Technical manual
IED hardware
18.2.11 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B SEMOD141102-1 v1
18.2.11.1 Introduction SEMOD141113-4 v9
The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of the IED from a
station clock.
The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input is supported.
Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X IRIG-B support.
18.2.11.2 Design SEMOD141098-4 v5
The IRIG-B module has two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle both a pulse-width
modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude modulated signal (also called sine
wave modulated). The other is an optical input type ST for optical pulse-width modulated signal
(IRIG-B 00X). The IRIG-B module is mounted as a mezzanine card on the Analog digital conversion
module (ADM).
ST
Y2
A1
IEC06000304=1=en=Original.ai
Figure 305: IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for optical IRIG-B 00X 820 nm
multimode fiber optic signal input and lower left BNC connector for IRIG-B signal
input
18.2.11.3 Encoding GUID-9F0D795F-80D6-46D2-A5CC-F34F701C8E85 v1
This type of encoding consists of the following options:
• IRIG-B. This encoding is based on the legacy of (pre-2004) IRIG-B standard which is without
any time zone information. IRIG-B uses the timecoding available in IRIG-B 00x and IRIG-B 12x,
where x = 0-7. When x is set in the range from 4-7, the year information is provided along with
year and time data.
• 1344. This encoding is based on the current (2004) IRIG-B standard. IED uses the time zone
information from TIMEZONE:1. The setting 1344 refers to the Annex F in IEEE1344, which adds
information regarding quality of the time using the control bits in the IRIG-B message. This
annex also contains the year information with the variable x that ranges from 4-7 in the 2004
version of IRIG-B.
• 1344TZ. This encoding is based on the current (2004) IRIG-B standard. This time zone
information from IRIG-B overrides the TIMEZONE:1 settings. This setting” uses the information
as 1344, overriding the TIMEZONE setting.

Technical manual
IED hardware
18.2.11.4 TimeZoneAs1344 GUID-39AACFEA-2E3E-4B39-9D7A-E49DA5DE3506 v1
This type of encoding consists of the following options:
• MinusTZ. Encoded IRIG time minus time zone offset equals UTC at all times.
• PlusTZ. Encoded IRIG time plus time zone offset equals UTC at all times.
18.2.11.5 Settings
Table 552: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)

SynchType BNC - - Opto Type of synchronization
Opto
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ
SEMOD141136-2 v10
Table 553: IRIG-B

Number of channels IRIG-B 1
Number of optical channels 1
Electrical connector:
Electrical connector IRIG-B BNC
Pulse-width modulated 5 Vpp
Amplitude modulated
– low level 1-3 Vpp
– high level 3 x low level, max 9 Vpp
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x
Accuracy +/-10μs for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100μs for IRIG-B 12x
Input impedance 100 k ohm
Optical connector:
Optical connector IRIG-B Type ST
Type of fiber 62.5/125 μm multimode fiber
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x
Accuracy +/- 1μs

Technical manual
IED hardware
18.3 Dimensions IP11490-1 v3
18.3.1 Case with protective cover SEMOD53199-1 v2
M11985-110 v7
Figure 306: Case with protective cover

Technical manual
IED hardware
Figure 307: Case with protective cover and 19” rack mounting kit

Technical manual
IED hardware
Figure 308: Protective cover case with details

M11985-120 v6
Case size A B C D E F G H I
(mm)
6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9 223.7 247.5 255.0 205.8 190.5 466.5 232.5 482.6
The G and I dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit.

Technical manual
IED hardware
18.3.2 Case without protective cover SEMOD53195-1 v2
M2152-3 v8
Figure 309: Case without protective cover

Technical manual
IED hardware
Figure 310: Case without protective cover with 19” rack mounting kit
M2152-11 v5
Case size
A B C D E F G H I
(mm)
6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9 223.7 204.1 249.9 205.8 190.5 466.5 189.1 482.6
The G and I dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit

Technical manual
IED hardware
18.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions M11571-3 v6
A C
E
D
Figure 311: Flush mounting
Cut-out dimensions (mm)

Case size
Tolerance A B C D
+/-1 +/-1
6U, 1/2 x 19" 210.1 254.3 4.0-10.0 13.5
E = 191.1 mm without rear protection cover, 231.8 mm with rear protection cover
18.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions M11984-3 v6
Figure 312: A 1/2 x 19” size IED side-by-side with RHGS6

Technical manual
IED hardware
D
B
E
F
C
xx05000505.vsd
Figure 313: Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting
Case size A B C D E F G
(mm) ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1
Tolerance
6U, 1/2 x 19” 214.0 259.3 240.4 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam
18.3.5 Wall mounting dimensions M11569-3 v5
Figure 314: Wall mounting
Case size (mm) A B C D E

6U, 1/2 x 19” 292.0 267.1 272.8 390.0 243.0

Technical manual
IED hardware
18.3.6 External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection SEMOD154026-4 v3
WARNING! - USE EXTREME CAUTION!Dangerously high voltages might be

present on this equipment, especially on the plate with resistors. Do any
maintenance ONLY if the primary object protected with this equipment is de-
energized. If required by national law/standard enclose the plate with resistors with a
protective cover or in a separate box!
[1.48]
[6.97]
[4.02]
[0.33] [18.31] [0.79] [7.68]

[18.98]
Dimension
mm [inches] xx06000232.eps
Figure 315: Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit

[1.50]
[10.47]
[7.50]
[0.33] [18.31] [0.79] [7.68]

[18.98]
en06000234.eps
[inches]
Figure 316: Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit

Technical manual
IED hardware
18.4 Mounting alternatives IP11721-1 v1
18.4.1 Flush mounting IP10303-1 v1
18.4.1.1 Overview M11967-3 v5
The flush mounting kit can be used for the 1/2 x 19” case size.
Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class IP54 protection.
The screws from the IED shall be used to fasten the fasteners to the IED.
Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when IP54 class
must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when mounting two cases side-by-
side in one (1) cut-out.
To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealing must be

ordered when ordering the IED.
18.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting M11942-2 v5
6
3
IEC16000080=1=en.vsd
Figure 317: Flush mounting details.
PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54 - -
class. The sealing strip is factory
mounted between the case and front
plate.
2 Fastener 2 -
3 Groove - -

Technical manual
IED hardware
4 Screw 4 M3x8 mm
5 Joining point of sealing strip - -
6 Panel - -
18.4.2 Wall mounting IP10316-1 v1
18.4.2.1 Overview M11973-3 v7
The IED can be mounted on a wall, a panel or in a cubicle.
Use only the screws included in the mounting kit when mounting the plates and the
angles on the IED. Screws with wrong dimension may damage the PCBs inside the
IED.
If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall mounting is
therefore not recommended for any communication modules with fiber connection.
18.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting M11949-2 v4
2
3
1 4
IEC130 00266-1-en.vsd
Figure 318: Wall mounting details.

Technical manual
IED hardware

1 Bushing 4 -
2 Screw 8 M4x10
3 Screw 4 M6x12 or
corresponding
4 Mounting bar 2 -
5 Screw 6 M5x8
6 Side plate 2 -
18.4.2.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED M11941-2 v5
The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover recommended to be used with this type of
mounting. See figure 319.
To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mm is required on the unhinged side.
3
1
80 mm 2
Figure 319: How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.
PosNo Description Type

1 Screw M4x10
2 Screw M5x8
3 Rear protection cover (Ordered separately)
18.4.3 19” panel rack mounting IP10313-1 v1
18.4.3.1 Overview SEMOD127656-5 v4
The IED can be mounted in a standard 19” cubicle rack by using a mounting kit consisting of two
mounting angles and their fastening screws.
The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of the IED either to the left or the right
side of the cubicle.

Technical manual
IED hardware
A separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by-side mounted IEDs or IEDs
together with RHGS cases should be selected so that the total size equals 19”.
IED.
18.4.3.2 Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting M11948-2 v7
1a
1b
Figure 320: 19” panel rack mounting details
The required torque for the screws is 3.5 Nm.

1a, 1b Mounting angles, can be mounted either 2 -
to the left or the right side of the case
2 Screw 8 M4x6
3 Washer 8 M4x6
18.4.4 Side-by-side 19” rack mounting IP10323-1 v1
18.4.4.1 Overview M11974-3 v3
IED case size 1/2 x 19” and RHGS cases can be mounted side-by-side up to a maximum size of 19”.
For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side mounting kit together with the 19” rack panel
mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered separately.

Technical manual
IED hardware
IED.
18.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting M11955-2 v4
3 1
2
4
IEC040004563enOriginal.vsdx
Figure 321: Side-by-side rack mounting details.

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -
5 Washer 16 M4x6
18.4.4.3 IED mounted with a RHGS6 case M11953-3 v4
A 1/2 x 19” size IED can be mounted with a RHGS case (6 or 12). The RHGS case can be used for
mounting a test switch of type RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type
for mounting of, for example, a DC-switch or two auxiliary relays.

Technical manual
IED hardware
1 2 1 2
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
Figure 322: IED (1/2 x 19”) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a test switch module
equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminal base
18.4.5 Side-by-side flush mounting IP10329-1 v1
18.4.5.1 Overview M11975-3 v3
If IP54 is required it is not allowed to flush mount side by side mounted cases. If your application
demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting details kit and the 19” panel rack
mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered separately. The maximum size of the
panel cut out is 19”.
With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is obtained. To reach

IP class 54, it is required to mount the IEDs separately. For cut out dimensions of
separately mounted IEDs, see section "Flush mounting".
IED.
Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT switches on the
side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.

Technical manual
IED hardware
18.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting M12730-6 v4
1 2
Figure 323: Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x 19” IED).

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw, washer 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -
18.5 Technical data IP16276-1 v1
18.5.1 Enclosure IP16278-1 v1
M11778-1 v8
Table 554: Case
Material Steel sheet

Front plate Stainless steel with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel
Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)
M12327-1 v6
Table 555: Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529
Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)

Sides, top and bottom IP40
Rear side IP20 with screw compression type
IP10 with ring lug terminals

Technical manual
IED hardware
M11777-1 v8
Table 556: Weight
Case size Weight

6U, 1/2 x 19” £ 7.5 kg/16 lb
6U, 1/1 x 19” £ 15 kg/33 lb
18.5.2 Electrical safety GUID-2825B541-DD31-4DAF-B5B3-97555F81A1C2 v1
GUID-1CF5B10A-CF8B-407D-8D87-F4B48B43C2B2 v3
Table 557: Electrical safety according to IEC 60255-27
Equipment class I (protective earthed)

Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 2 (normally only non-conductive pollution occurs except that
occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by condensation
is to be expected)
18.5.3 Connection system SEMOD53371-1 v1
SEMOD53376-2 v6
Table 558: CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area

Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm 2 (AWG12)
M12583-1 v8
Table 559: Auxiliary power supply connectors
Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area

Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)
2 × 1 mm 2 (2 x AWG18)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 300 V AC 3 mm2 (AWG14)
Table 560: Binary I/O connectors
Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area

Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)
2 × 1 mm 2 (2 x AWG18)
18.5.4 Influencing factors SEMOD52785-1 v1
M16705-1 v18
Table 561: Temperature and humidity influence
Parameter Reference value Nominal range Influence

Ambient temperature, +20±5°C -25°C to +55°C 0.02%/°C
operate value
Relative humidity 45-75% 10-90% -
Operative range 0-95%

Technical manual
IED hardware
Table 562: Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation
Dependence on Reference value Within nominal Influence

range
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage max. 2% 15% of EL 0.01%/%
Operative range Full wave rectified
Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate ±20% of EL 0.01%/%
value
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage 24-60 V DC ± 20%
90-250 V DC ± 20%
Interruption
interval
0–50 ms No restart
0–∞ s Correct behaviour at power
down
Restart time < 300 s
Table 563: Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–1)
Dependence on Within nominal range Influence

Frequency dependence, operate value fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±1.0%/Hz
fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
Harmonic frequency dependence (20% 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±1.0%
content)
Harmonic frequency dependence for 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±10.0%
high impedance differential protection
(10% content)
overcurrent protection
Table 564: Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–1)
Dependence on Within nominal range Influence

Frequency dependence, operate value fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±1.0%/Hz
fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
Harmonic frequency dependence (20% 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±1.0%
content)
high impedance differential protection
(10% content)
18.5.5 Type tests according to standard IP16288-1 v1
M16706-1 v15
Table 565: Electromagnetic compatibility
Test Type test values Reference standards

1 MHz burst disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 60255-26
100 kHz slow damped oscillatory wave 2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-18, Level 3
immunity test
Ring wave immunity test, 100 kHz 2-4 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Level 4

Technical manual
IED hardware

Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEC 60255-26
Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge IEC 61000-4-2, Level 4
Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEEE/ANSI C37.90.3
Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge
Fast transient disturbance 4 kV IEC 60255-26, Zone A
2 kV, SFP galvanic RJ45
2 kV, MIM mA-inputs IEC 60255-26, Zone B
Surge immunity test 2-4 kV, 1.2/50ms high energy IEC 60255-26, Zone A
1-2 kV, BOM and IRF outputs IEC 60255-26, Zone B
Power frequency immunity test 150-300 V, 50 Hz IEC 60255-26, Zone A
Conducted common mode immunity 30-3 V, 15-150 Hz IEC 61000-4-16, Level 4
test
Power frequency magnetic field test 1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8, Level 5
100 A/m, cont.
Pulse magnetic field immunity test 1000 A/m IEC 61000–4–9, Level 5
Damped oscillatory magnetic field test 100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Level 5
Radiated electromagnetic field 20 V/m IEC 60255-26
disturbance 80-1000 MHz IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
1.4-2.7 GHz EN 50121-5
10 V/m, 2.7-6.0 GHz
Radiated emission 30-6000 MHz IEC 60255-26
30-8500 MHz IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC
Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-26
Table 566: Insulation
Test Type test values Reference standard

Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-27
1.0 kV AC, 1 min.: ANSI C37.90
-SFP galvanic RJ45 IEEE 802.3-2015, Environment A
- X.21-LDCM
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50ms, 0.5 J
1 kV, 1.2/50 ms 0.5 J:
-SFP galvanic RJ45
- X.21-LDCM
Insulation resistance > 100 MW at 500 VDC
Table 567: Environmental conditions
Description Value
Operating temperature range -25°C to +55°C (continuous)
Short-time service temperature range -40°C to +70°C (<16h)
Note: Degradation in MTBF and HMI performance
outside the temperature range of -25°C to +55°C
Relative humidity <93%, non-condensing
Atmospheric pressure 86 kPa to 106 kPa
Altitude up to 2000 m
Transport and storage temperature range -40°C to +85°C

Technical manual
IED hardware
Table 568: Environmental tests
Test Type test value Reference standard

Cold operation test Test Ad for 16 h at -25°C IEC 60068-2-1
Cold storage test Test Ab for 16 h at -40°C IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat operation test Test Bd for 16 h at +70°C IEC 60068-2-2
Dry heat storage test Test Bb for 16 h at +85°C IEC 60068-2-2
Change of temperature test Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25°C to +70°C IEC 60068-2-14
Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 56 days at +40°C and humidity IEC 60068-2-78
93%
Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55°C and IEC 60068-2-30
humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle = 24 hours)
Table 569: CE compliance
Test According to
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) EN 60255–26
Low voltage (LVD) EN 60255–27
Table 570: Mechanical tests

Vibration response test Class II: Rack mount IEC 60255-21-1
Class I: Flush and wall mount
Vibration endurance test Class I: Rack, flush and wall mount IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test Class I: Rack, flush and wall mount IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test Class I: Rack, flush and wall mount IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test Class I: Rack, flush and wall mount IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test Class II: Rack mount IEC 60255-21-3
Class I: Flush and wall mount

Technical manual
Labels
Section 19 Labels
19.1 Labels on IED SEMOD168249-4 v5
Front view of IED
6
2
10
3
IEC16000081=1=en.vsdx
Figure 324: Example of IED label
1 QR-code containing the complete ordering code

2 Power supply module (PSM)
3 Ordering and serial number
4 Manufacturer
5 Transformer designations
6 Transformer input module, rated currents and voltages
7 Optional, customer specific information
8 Order number, dc supply voltage and rated frequency
9 Product type, description and serial number
10 Product type

Technical manual
Labels
Rear view of IED
IEC15000573=2=en=Original.wsdx
1 Warning label
2 Caution label
3 Class 1 laser product label It is used when an optical SFP or an MR LDCM is configured in
the product.

Technical manual
Connection diagrams
Section 20 Connection diagrams GUID-CF4EFFA5-3081-4FC7-9A14-ED127C3C0FDE v9
The connection diagrams are delivered in the IED Connectivity package as part of the product
delivery.
The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from

http://www.hitachiabb-powergrids.com/protection-control.
Connection diagrams for Configured products
Connection diagram, REB650 2.2, A03X00 1MRK006507-BA
Connection diagrams for Customized products
Connection diagram, 650 series 2.2 IEC 1MRK006501-AG
Connection diagram, 650 series 2.2 ANSI 1MRK006502-AG

Technical manual
606
Inverse time characteristics
Section 21 Inverse time characteristics

21.1 Application M16686-3 v5
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections at different points in the
network different time delays for the different protections are normally used. The simplest way to do
this is to use definite time-lag. In more sophisticated applications current dependent time
characteristics are used. Both alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent
protections operating in series.
I> I> I>

xx05000129.vsd
Figure 325: Three overcurrent protections operating in series
Stage 3
Time
Stage 2 Stage 2
Stage 1 Stage 1 Stage 1
Fault point
position
en05000130.vsd
Figure 326: Definite time overcurrent characteristics
Time
Fault point
position
en05000131.vsd
Figure 327: Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time and still assure
the selectivity between protections.

Technical manual
To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the operation time of
the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following factors, in a simple case with two
protections in series:
• Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co-ordinated

• Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
• Reset times of the protections
• Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections
Assume we have the following network case.
A1 B1
Feeder
I> I>
Time axis
t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3
en05000132.vsd
Figure 328: Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1
where:
t=0 is The fault occurs
t=t1 is Protection B1 trips
t=t2 is Breaker at B1 opens
t=t3 is Protection A1 resets
In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous). When the fault
occurs the protections start to detect the fault current. After the time t1 the protection B1 send a trip
signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its delay timer at the same time, with some
deviation in time due to differences between the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will
start before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker. At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened
its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ
between different faults. The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols.
Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, that is the timer is
stopped.
In most applications it is required that the times shall reset as fast as possible when the current fed to
the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time shall be minimized. In some
applications it is however beneficial to have some type of delayed reset time of the overcurrent
function. This can be the case in the following applications:
• If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current IED, close to the faults, starts and resets
there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.
• Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic reclosing to a
permanent fault.
• Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other protection
functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the release function.

Technical manual
21.2 Principle of operation IP15777-1 v2
21.2.1 Mode of operation M16687-3 v8
The function can operate in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse time mode. For
the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard curves are available. Also
programmable curve types are supported via the component inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr.
Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.
If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal startValue), a timer,
according to the selected operating mode, is started. The component always uses the maximum of
the three phase current values as the current level used in timing calculations.
In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached or until the
current drops below the reset value (start value minus the hysteresis) and the reset time has
elapsed.
For definite time delay curve ANSI/IEEE Definite time or IEC Definite time are chosen.
The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 64.
æ ö
ç A
÷
t[ s ] = ç + B÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.
For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set start level.
From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:
ææ i öp ö
(top - B × k ) × ç ç ÷ - C ÷ = A×k
è è in > ø ø
where:
top is the operating time of the protection
The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to equation 66,
in addition to the constant time delay:

Technical manual
t
ææ i öp ö
ò ç çè in > ÷ø - C ÷ × dt ³ A × k
0 è ø
For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.
æ æ i( j ) ö p
n ö
Dt × å ç ç ÷ - C ÷ ³ A× k
j =1 è è in > ø ø
where:
j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected, that
is, when
i
>1
in >
Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the protection

algorithm,
n is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time equation
is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j) is the fault current at time j
For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC and ANSI/IEEE
standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see figure 329.
Operate
time
tMin
Current
IMin
Figure 329: Minimum time-lag operation for the IEC curves

Technical manual
In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set to the value
which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse time curve for measured current of
twenty times the set current start value. Note that the operating time value is dependent on the
selected setting value for time multiplier k.
In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two additional inverse
curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.
The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA relay RI. The
curve is described by equation 68:
æ ö
ç k ÷
t[ s ] = ç
in > ÷
ç 0.339 - 0.235 × ÷
è i ø
where:
in> is the set start current for step n
k is set time multiplier for step n
i is the measured current
The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection RXIDG. The
curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual earth-fault current
protection, with ability to detect high-resistive earth faults. The curve is described by equation 69:
æ i ö
t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 × ln ç ÷
è k × in > ø
where:
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current
If the curve type programmable is chosen, the user can make a tailor made inverse time curve
according to the general equation 70.
æ ö
ç A
÷
t[ s ] = ç + B÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. There is the possibility to choose
between three different reset time-lags.
• Instantaneous Reset
• IEC Reset
• ANSI Reset.

Technical manual
If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set
start current level minus the hysteresis.
If IEC reset is chosen the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the current drops below
the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault clearance
(when the current drops below the start current level minus the hysteresis). The timer will reset
according to equation 71.
æ ö
ç tr ÷
t [s] = ç ÷×k
çæ i ö ÷
2
çç ÷ -1 ÷
è è in > ø ø
where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.
The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the choice of time
delay characteristic.
For the definite time delay characteristics the possible reset time settings are instantaneous and IEC
constant time reset.
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are available;
instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current dependent reset time.
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are instantaneous and IEC
set constant time reset).
For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics
are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current dependent reset time. If the
current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given, see equation 72:
æ ö
ç tr ÷
t [s] = ç ÷×k
çæ i ö ÷
pr
çç ÷ - cr ÷
è è in > ø ø
For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are instantaneous
and IEC constant time reset.
GUID-F7AA2194-4D1C-4475-8853-C7D064912614 v4
When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate time of the
stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time delay. Thus,
if only the inverse time delay is required, it is important to set the definite time delay
for that stage to zero.

Technical manual
21.3 Inverse characteristics IP15797-1 v2
M12388-1 v24
Table 571: ANSI Inverse time characteristics

Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±2.0% or ±40 ms
whichever is greater
 A 
t = P + B⋅k
 (
 I −1 
 )
EQUATION1249-SMALL V3 EN-US
Reset characteristic:
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1)
I = Imeasured/Iset
ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85
Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

Technical manual
Table 572: IEC Inverse time characteristics

Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±40 ms whichever is
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B÷ × k P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷ TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
è ø CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
I = Imeasured/Iset
The parameter setting Characteristn = Reserved (where, n = 1 - 4) shall not be used,

since this parameter setting is for future use and not implemented yet.
Table 573: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics

RI type inverse characteristic 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±40 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse

characteristic
æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
I = Imeasured/Iset

Technical manual
GUID-19F8E187-4ED0-48C3-92F6-0D9EAA2B39BB v5
Table 574: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection

Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±5.0% or ±160 ms
 A 
t = P + B⋅k
 (
 I −1 
 )
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1)
I = Imeasured/Iset


Technical manual
Table 575: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection

1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±160 ms whichever
æ A ö is greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset

Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B÷ × k P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷ TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
è ø CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
I = Imeasured/Iset
The parameter setting TimeChar = Reserved shall not be used, since this parameter
setting is for future use and not implemented yet.
Table 576: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power
protection

RI type inverse characteristic 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%
1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±160 ms whichever
1 is greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse

characteristic
æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
I = Imeasured/Iset

Technical manual
GUID-2AE8C92E-5DA8-487F-927D-8E553EE29240 v3
Table 577: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection

Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 , ±
5.0% or ±40 ms
 A 
t = P + B⋅k
 (
 I −1 
 )
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1)
I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 578: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection

or ±40 ms whichever is
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset


Technical manual
SEMOD116978-2 v11
Table 579: Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection

Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 U n  
IECEQUATION2423 V2 EN-US
Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U> ø
IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN-US
Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
k×A B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01
t = +D C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
P
æB × U - U > ö D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001
ç -C÷
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
è U > ø

Technical manual
Table 580: Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection

k
t =
æ U < -U ö
ç ÷
è U< ø
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
k × 480
t = + 0.055
2.0
æ 32 × U < -U - 0.5 ö
ç ÷
è U < ø
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
é ù B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01
ê k×A
ú C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
t =ê ú+D D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001
ê æ U < -U ö
P
ú P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
êçB × -C÷ ú
ëè U < ø û
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

Technical manual
Table 581: Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection

k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U > ø
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
2.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
3.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 

A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
k×A B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01
t = +D C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
P
æB × U - U > ö D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001
ç -C÷
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
è U > ø

Technical manual
SEMOD118114-4 v5
A070750 V2 EN-US
Figure 330: ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070751 V2 EN-US
Figure 331: ANSI Very inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070752 V2 EN-US
Figure 332: ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070753 V2 EN-US
Figure 333: ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070817 V2 EN-US
Figure 334: Long time extremely inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070818 V2 EN-US
Figure 335: Long time very inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070819 V2 EN-US
Figure 336: Long time inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070820 V2 EN-US
Figure 337: IEC Normal inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070821 V2 EN-US
Figure 338: IEC Very inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070822 V2 EN-US
Figure 339: IEC Inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070823 V2 EN-US
Figure 340: IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070824 V2 EN-US
Figure 341: IEC Short time inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070825 V2 EN-US
Figure 342: IEC Long time inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070826 V2 EN-US
Figure 343: RI-type inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
A070827 V2 EN-US
Figure 344: RD-type inverse time characteristics

Technical manual
GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN-US
Figure 345: Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection

Technical manual
GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN-US
Figure 346: Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection

Technical manual
GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN-US
Figure 347: Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection

Technical manual
GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN-US
Figure 348: Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection

Technical manual
GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN-US
Figure 349: Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection

Technical manual
Glossary
Section 22 Glossary M14893-1 v20
AC Alternating current
ACC Actual channel
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AP Access Point
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
ASDU Application service data unit
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5 Bayonet fiber optic connector
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals between IEDs
CAM Central Account Management
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial
communication
CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A United
Nations-sponsored standards body within the International
Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI

Technical manual
Glossary
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second

CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle Close-open cycle
Codirectional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two twisted pairs
making it possible to transmit information in both directions
COM Command
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange format for
Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI C37.111, 1999 / IEC
60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four twisted pairs,
two of which are used for transmitting data in both directions and two for
transmitting clock signals
COT Cause of transmission
CPU Central processing unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CU Communication unit
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer of the
TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
DFC Data flow control
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
ECT Ethernet configuration tool
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association

Technical manual
Glossary
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility

EMF Electromotive force
EMI Electromagnetic interference
EnFP End fault protection
EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
F-SMA Type of optical fiber connector
FAN Fault number
FIPS Federal Information Processing Standards
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and
protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven
duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
FPN Flexible product naming
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FUN Function type
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local telephone
companies. Can be transported over balanced and unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module
GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GSE Generic substation event
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard
HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector
HLV circuit Hazardous Live Voltage according to IEC60255-27
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HSR High-availability Seamless Redundancy
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6: Requirements for
protective current transformers for transient performance
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protection equipment. A serial master/slave
protocol for point-to-point communication

Technical manual
Glossary
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard

IEC 61850–8–1 Communication protocol standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-pair or
optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References the
CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common Mezzanine Card) standard for
the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG (Special
Interest Group) for the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) Cyber Security
Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
IET600 Integrated engineering tool
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available in the IED,
they are referred to as instances of that function. One instance of a function
is identical to another of the same kind but has a different number in the
IED user interfaces. The word "instance" is sometimes defined as an item of
information that is representative of a type. In the same way an instance of
a function in the IED is representative of a type of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite widely
used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless, best-effort packet-
switching protocol. It provides packet routing, fragmentation and
reassembly through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 20
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LIB 520 High-voltage software module
LCD Liquid crystal display
LDAPS Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
LDCM Line data communication module
LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode
LNT LON network tool
LON Local operating network
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MPM Main processing module
MVAL Value of measurement

Technical manual
Glossary
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed for
use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre
NOF Number of grid faults
NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection
OLTC On-load tap changer
OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than start/pick-up
OV Overvoltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For
example, a distance relay is overreaching when the impedance presented
to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the
balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay “sees” the fault but perhaps it
should not have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
PELV circuit Protected Extra-Low Voltage circuit type according to IEC60255-27
PMC PCI Mezzanine card
POR Permissive overreach
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the
measured and/or controlled components
PRP Parallel redundancy protocol
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PTP Precision time protocol
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
RCA Relay characteristic angle
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-to-
point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
SC Switch or push button to close

Technical manual
Glossary
SCL Short circuit location

SCS Station control system
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit
SELV circuit Safety Extra-Low Voltage circuit type according to IEC60255-27
SFP Small form-factor pluggable (abbreviation)
Optical Ethernet port (explanation)
SLM Serial communication module.

SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronize computer clocks on
local area networks. This reduces the requirement to have accurate
hardware clocks in every embedded system in a network. Each embedded
node can instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the required
accuracy.
SOF Status of fault
SPA Strömberg Protection Acquisition (SPA), a serial master/slave protocol for
point-to-point and ring communication.
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer protocol
used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de facto standard
Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP was developed
by DARPA for Internet working and encompasses both network layer and
transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific
protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US Department of
Defense protocol suite based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and
RDP.
TEF Time delayed earth-fault protection function
TLS Transport Layer Security
TM Transmit (disturbance data)
TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance version of a
BNC connector
TP Trip (recorded fault)
TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC
TRM Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and voltages taken
from the process into levels suitable for further signal processing.
TYP Type identification

Technical manual
Glossary
UMT User management tool

Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition. For
example, a distance relay is underreaching when the impedance presented
to it is greater than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the
balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay does not “see” the fault but
perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by the
Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of
a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC
is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole
number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal Time 1 (UT1),
thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth's orbit, the rotational axis tilt
(23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth's irregular rotation, on which UT1
is based. The Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour
clock, and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship
navigation, where it is also sometimes known by the military name, "Zulu
time." "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet stands for "Z", which stands for
longitude zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
3IO Three times zero-sequence current.Often referred to as the residual or the
earth-fault current
3UO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the residual
voltage or the neutral point voltage

Technical manual
648
649
ABB Power Grids Sweden AB
Grid Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås, Sweden
Phone +46 (0) 10 738 00 00
Scan this QR code to visit our website
https://hitachiabb-powergrids.com/protection-control
1MRK 505 389-UEN
© 2017 - 2021 Hitachi Power Grids.

All rights reserved

Technical Manual, Busbar Protection REB650 Version 2.2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Manual, Busbar Protection REB650 Version 2.2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Relion® 650 SERIES

Busbar protection REB650

© 2017 - 2021 Hitachi Power Grids. All rights reserved

Section 2 Available functions...................................................................................... 35

Section 3 Analog inputs...............................................................................................43

Section 4 Binary input and output modules.............................................................. 51

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI ......................................................53

Busbar protection REB650 1

Section 6 Differential protection................................................................................. 73

Section 7 Current protection....................................................................................... 77

2 Busbar protection REB650

7.1.7 Monitored data.................................................................................................................. 85

Busbar protection REB650 3

7.4.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 126

Section 8 Voltage protection..................................................................................... 143

4 Busbar protection REB650

8.2.7 Operation principle ......................................................................................................... 159

Section 9 Secondary system supervision................................................................179

Section 10 Control........................................................................................................ 191

Busbar protection REB650 5

10.2.3 Error handling..................................................................................................................194

6 Busbar protection REB650

10.4.5 Settings........................................................................................................................... 224

Section 11 Logic........................................................................................................... 235

Busbar protection REB650 7

8 Busbar protection REB650

11.7.3.1 Function block............................................................................................................ 263

Busbar protection REB650 9

10 Busbar protection REB650

11.15.6 Monitored data................................................................................................................ 286

Busbar protection REB650 11

Section 12 Monitoring.................................................................................................. 303

12 Busbar protection REB650

12.1.9.1 Measurement supervision.......................................................................................... 321

Busbar protection REB650 13

12.5.3 Function block................................................................................................................. 352

14 Busbar protection REB650

12.10.7 Technical data................................................................................................................. 388

Section 14 Ethernet...................................................................................................... 399

Section 15 Station communication............................................................................. 411

Busbar protection REB650 15

15.3 DNP3 protocol................................................................................................................... 412

16 Busbar protection REB650

15.4.10.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 425

Busbar protection REB650 17

15.8.2.1 Functionality............................................................................................................... 474

18 Busbar protection REB650

15.8.9.5 Settings...................................................................................................................... 484

Busbar protection REB650 19

20 Busbar protection REB650

16.6.2 Function block................................................................................................................. 518

Section 17 Basic IED functions................................................................................... 521

Busbar protection REB650 21

Section 18 IED hardware..............................................................................................551

22 Busbar protection REB650

18.2.6.6 Technical data............................................................................................................ 562

Busbar protection REB650 23

18.4.2.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED........................................................................ 594

Section 19 Labels......................................................................................................... 603

Section 20 Connection diagrams ............................................................................... 605

Section 21 Inverse time characteristics..................................................................... 607

Section 22 Glossary..................................................................................................... 641

24 Busbar protection REB650

1.1.1 Presumptions for Technical Data GUID-1E949E38-E04D-4374-A086-912C25E9F93C v3